Instruction Manual High-Impedance Differential Protection IED GR200 Series (GRH200)

6F2S1958 (Rev. 0.
03)
Instruction manual
High-impedance differential protection IED
GR200 series (GRH200)

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read
and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided,
may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property damage.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
ii
6F2S1958 (0.03)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire (Short-bar)
Do not remove the short-wire/short-bar(s) connected to the frame earth (FG) at the terminal
block on the rear of cases.
•Electric wire between #35 - #37 on the power-supply terminal block
Make sure the wire is connected.
(Exception: This wire needs to be detached for performing the dielectric voltage test.)
iii
6F2S1958 (0.03)
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When
disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be punished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems &
Solutions Corporation (Toshiba ESS, Japan).
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
Equipment installation and operation

•Equipment installation
Never remove cables at frame ground terminals (FGs) while the AC/DC power supplies.
•Equipment operation
The user shall have responsibilities to use and install the equipment where the
specifications are designated by the manufacture. Never operate the equipment on the
condition where the manufacture cannot intend. Otherwise, the safety function furnished
into the equipment may not be operated properly.
•Symbols
Symbol Description
Protective conductor terminal
Caution, risk of electric shock
iv
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Liability, copyright and others

•Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the description of this manual against the hardware and software
described, but we cannot guarantee that all deviations have been eliminated from the
description completely; hence, no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions
contained in the information given. We review the information in this manual regularly
and there will be some corrections in subsequent editions. We reserve the right to make
technical improvements without notice.
•Copyright
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2021.
All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
v
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1
Configuration of high impedance relay ....................................................................................... 2
Control and monitoring application ............................................................................................. 3
Monitoring and recording functions ............................................................................................ 4
Hardware overview....................................................................................................................... 5
Symbols used in logical diagrams ................................................................................................ 6
Abbreviation................................................................................................................................ 10
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) .................................................. 12
2 Relay application ............................................................................................................................... 14
High-impedance differential protection (DIFHZ)...................................................................... 15
2.1.1 Principle of high-impedance differential protection .......................................................... 15
2.1.2 Current transformer requirements .................................................................................... 17
2.1.3 Setting guide ........................................................................................................................ 17
2.1.4 Three phases high-impedance differential protection (DIF) ............................................. 19
2.1.5 Single phase restricted earth fault protection (REF) ........................................................ 22
2.1.6 Cold load Protection (CL) .................................................................................................... 24
2.1.7 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 27
2.1.8 Signals.................................................................................................................................. 28
Three-phase trip circuit (TRC) ................................................................................................... 31
2.2.1 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................ 33
2.2.2 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 35
2.2.3 Signals.................................................................................................................................. 36
3 General control function .................................................................................................................... 38
Control scheme ........................................................................................................................... 39
Control mode ............................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.1 Select-before-operation mode (SBO) ................................................................................... 42
3.2.2 Direct-operation mode (DIR) ............................................................................................... 43
Control hierarchy........................................................................................................................ 45
3.3.1 Control level and control point ........................................................................................... 46
3.3.2 Selector switches and bay operations ................................................................................. 46
3.3.3 Programming of control-right distributions ....................................................................... 46
Common controls (CMNCTRL) .................................................................................................. 48
3.4.1 Double command blocking (DCB) ....................................................................................... 49
3.4.2 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal ............................................................................................. 51
3.4.3 Provision of selected status ................................................................................................. 51
3.4.4 Miscellaneous settings ........................................................................................................ 51
3.4.5 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 53
3.4.6 Signal ................................................................................................................................... 55
vi
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Local, remote and PLC control................................................................................................... 59

3.5.1 Local control......................................................................................................................... 60
3.5.2 Remote control ..................................................................................................................... 60
3.5.3 Programmable logic control (PLC) ...................................................................................... 60
3.5.4 Signal for Local/Remote control .......................................................................................... 61
3.5.5 Signal ................................................................................................................................... 62
LED reset function (LEDR) ........................................................................................................ 63
3.6.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs ............................................................................................ 64
3.6.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode ................................................................................................... 67
3.6.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode ........................................................................................ 68
3.6.4 Settings in LED logics ......................................................................................................... 70
3.6.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication .............................................................................. 71
3.6.6 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 75
3.6.7 Signal ................................................................................................................................... 76
Counter function for the general (GCNT).................................................................................. 77
3.7.1 Counter setting for a signal ................................................................................................ 78
3.7.1 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes ........................................................................................ 80
3.7.2 Cancel logic for SBO mode .................................................................................................. 85
3.7.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes....................................................................................... 87
3.7.5 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 94
3.7.6 Signal ................................................................................................................................... 95
Mode control function (MDCTRL) ............................................................................................. 97
3.8.1 Function ............................................................................................................................... 98
3.8.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 103
3.8.4 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 104
4 Control and monitoring application ................................................................................................ 106
Single position device function (SPOS).................................................................................... 107
4.1.1 Selection logic for SBO/DIR modes ................................................................................... 108
4.1.2 Cancel logic for SBO mode ................................................................................................ 123
4.1.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes..................................................................................... 127
4.1.4 Setup for BIO module ........................................................................................................ 142
4.1.5 Mapping for IEC 61850 communication ........................................................................... 150
4.1.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 154
4.1.7 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 155
Software switch controller function (SOFTSW) ...................................................................... 158
4.2.1 SOFTSW controlling ......................................................................................................... 159
4.2.2 Control logics for SBO/DIR modes .................................................................................... 161
vii
6F2S1958 (0.03)

4.2.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 182
4.2.7 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 183
Total time measurement function (TOTALTIM) ..................................................................... 191
4.3.1 Operation feature .............................................................................................................. 192
4.3.2 Preparation for operation .................................................................................................. 194
4.3.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 199
4.3.5 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 200
Software interlock function (ILK) ............................................................................................ 204
4.4.1 ILK specification ................................................................................................................ 205
4.4.2 Interlock-check formula .................................................................................................... 206
4.4.3 Interlock-check method ..................................................................................................... 208
4.4.4 Configuration of Interlock formulae ................................................................................. 214
4.4.5 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 215
Double position device function (DPOS) .................................................................................. 221
4.5.1 Select logic for SBO/DIR modes ........................................................................................ 222
4.5.4 Operation counter .............................................................................................................. 261
4.5.5 Measurement of operation intervals................................................................................. 265
4.5.7 Mapping for IEC61850 communication ............................................................................ 278
4.5.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 282
4.5.9 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 284
Three position device function (TPOS) .................................................................................... 287
4.6.4 Operation counter .............................................................................................................. 337
4.6.5 Measurement of operation Intervals ................................................................................ 341
4.6.7 Mapping for IEC61850 commination................................................................................ 355
4.6.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 359
4.6.9 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 361
Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ) ......................................................................... 366
4.7.1 Function setup ................................................................................................................... 367
viii
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.7.2 Preparation of the operation ............................................................................................. 368

4.7.3 Example of automatic sequence operation ....................................................................... 369
4.7.4 Control hierarchy conditions............................................................................................. 371
4.7.5 Input for emergency stop .................................................................................................. 371
4.7.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 377
4.7.8 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 378
Operation time reset controller (OPTR) .................................................................................. 380
4.8.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode ................................................................................................. 385
4.8.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 392
4.8.6 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 393
Event detection function for general BIs (GENBI) ................................................................. 394
4.9.1 Operation features............................................................................................................. 395
4.9.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 400
4.9.4 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 401
5 Technical Description ...................................................................................................................... 403
IED case and module slot ......................................................................................................... 406
5.1.1 Type using compression terminals ................................................................................... 407
5.1.2 Type using ring terminals ................................................................................................. 409
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT) ......................................................................411
5.2.1 VCT39B .............................................................................................................................. 412
5.2.2 Constitution of VCT........................................................................................................... 413
Signal processing and communication module (CPU) ............................................................ 414
5.3.1 Signal processing ............................................................................................................... 414
5.3.2 Communication modules ................................................................................................... 415
5.3.3 Location of communication modules................................................................................. 419
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO) ...................................................................................... 421
5.4.1 Binary input feature.......................................................................................................... 422
5.4.2 Binary input circuit ........................................................................................................... 423
5.4.3 Binary output feature........................................................................................................ 434
5.4.4 Binary output circuit ......................................................................................................... 436
5.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module.......................................................................................... 441
5.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits ....................................................................................... 447
5.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits ........................................................................ 449
5.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits ..................................................................................... 452
ix
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.9 Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits ...................................................................... 454

Power supply module (PWS) .................................................................................................... 456
5.5.1 PWS structure ................................................................................................................... 456
5.5.2 Input and output items of PWS ........................................................................................ 458
5.5.3 DC voltage monitoring ...................................................................................................... 459
Human Machine Interface (HMI) ............................................................................................ 461
5.6.1 Outlook ............................................................................................................................... 461
5.6.2 LED Indicators .................................................................................................................. 462
5.6.3 Function keys with LEDs .................................................................................................. 467
5.6.4 Monitoring jacks ................................................................................................................ 472
5.6.5 Operation keys ................................................................................................................... 474
Clock function ........................................................................................................................... 475
5.7.1 Clock setting ...................................................................................................................... 475
5.7.2 Selection of date and time formats ................................................................................... 475
5.7.3 Time Synchronization ....................................................................................................... 476
5.7.4 Setting time zone ............................................................................................................... 480
5.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting).................................................................................. 481
5.7.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 483
Group setting for protection functions ..................................................................................... 484
6 Engineering tool............................................................................................................................... 487
Overview of GR-TIEMS ............................................................................................................ 488
Connection ................................................................................................................................ 489
Common tools............................................................................................................................ 490
Monitoring tools ........................................................................................................................ 490
Record tools ............................................................................................................................... 491
Generic configuration tools ...................................................................................................... 491
IEC 61850 configuration tool ................................................................................................... 492
IEC 60870-5-103 configuration tool ......................................................................................... 492
MIMIC configuration tool ......................................................................................................... 492
7 PLC function .................................................................................................................................... 494
Overview of PLC function ........................................................................................................ 495
PLC data error .......................................................................................................................... 495
PLC driver................................................................................................................................. 496
7.3.1 Monitoring point for PLC driver ....................................................................................... 496
Timer variable settings using PLC drivers ............................................................................. 500
8 Recording function ........................................................................................................................... 505
Fault recorder ........................................................................................................................... 506
8.1.1 Types of recording information ......................................................................................... 506
8.1.2 Screen information ............................................................................................................ 507
x
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder ............................................................................................... 508

8.1.4 Setting .................................................................................................................................511
8.1.5 Signal ..................................................................................................................................511
Event recorder .......................................................................................................................... 512
8.2.1 Trigger signals ................................................................................................................... 512
8.2.2 Trigger modes .................................................................................................................... 517
8.2.4 Setup for the event recorder ............................................................................................. 518
8.2.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 519
8.2.6 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 519
Disturbance recorder ................................................................................................................ 520
8.3.1 Recording time and amount .............................................................................................. 520
8.3.2 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena .............................................. 521
8.3.3 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder .................... 521
8.3.4 Trigger settings for PLC programming ............................................................................ 523
8.3.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 525
8.3.7 Signal ................................................................................................................................. 526
Transferred information during fault ...................................................................................... 527
8.4.1 Transferred metering values ............................................................................................. 527
8.4.2 Transferred state information........................................................................................... 528
8.4.3 Transferring record value and information ...................................................................... 529
9 Monitoring function ......................................................................................................................... 540
Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 541
Metering data (Metering group) .............................................................................................. 542
9.2.1 Metering information on the screen ................................................................................. 542
9.2.2 Setting for the report (Dead band feature) ....................................................................... 542
Statistics data (Counter group)................................................................................................ 544
Statistics data (Accumulated time).......................................................................................... 545
Statistics data (Total time group) ............................................................................................ 546
9.5.1 Time information on the screen ........................................................................................ 546
9.5.2 Report setting for TOTALTIM (Dead band feature) ........................................................ 546
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions................................................................................... 547
Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 548
Signal and measurand (Data ID) ............................................................................................. 549
10 Automatic supervision ................................................................................................................. 550
Outline of automatic supervision ............................................................................................. 551
Generic supervision tasks ........................................................................................................ 554
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error) ........................................... 555
xi
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error) ................................................................... 556

10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) ..................................................................................... 557
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) .................................................................... 558
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) ........................................................................................ 559
10.2.6 Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error) ................................................................................... 560
10.2.7 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) ....................................................................... 561
10.2.8 Supervision of task operation (RUN error) ...................................................................... 562
10.2.9 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) ............................................................... 563
10.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) ................................................................ 564
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) ................................................................... 565
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) ................................................................... 566
10.2.13 Supervision of A/D accuracy on VCT#1 (AI#1 ACC error) ........................................... 567
10.2.14 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) ....................................................... 568
10.2.17 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) ................................................. 571
10.2.18 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)...................................................... 572
10.2.19 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)................................................. 573
10.2.20 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error) ........................................................................ 575
10.2.21 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) .......................................................... 576
10.2.22 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) ........................................................ 577
10.2.23 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error) .............................................. 578
10.2.24 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) ............................................. 580
10.2.25 Aux. contacts monitoring (DOPS/TOPS faulty or undefined) ...................................... 581
10.2.26 Error detection of differential current (Id error) .......................................................... 583
10.2.27 Setting ............................................................................................................................ 584
10.2.28 Signal .............................................................................................................................. 588
Trip circuit supervision task .................................................................................................... 594
10.3.1 Detecting erroneous operation .......................................................................................... 595
10.3.2 Trip circuit error (TC error) .............................................................................................. 598
10.3.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 599
10.3.4 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 600
11 Communication protocol .............................................................................................................. 602
Selection of slave protocol ........................................................................................................ 603
LAN operation .......................................................................................................................... 604
11.2.1 LAN address (IP address) ................................................................................................. 604
11.2.2 Redundant LAN (Hot-standby) ......................................................................................... 605
11.2.3 Redundant LAN (PRP/HSR operation) ............................................................................ 613
11.2.4 Redundant LAN (RSTP operation) ................................................................................... 617
xii
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 619

11.2.6 Signals (DataID) ................................................................................................................ 621
IEC 61850 communication ....................................................................................................... 623
11.3.1 About protocol .................................................................................................................... 625
11.3.2 Communication service ..................................................................................................... 628
11.3.3 How to manage engineering work .................................................................................... 631
11.3.4 Settings for 61850 communications .................................................................................. 650
11.3.5 Selection of a slave protocol .............................................................................................. 652
11.3.6 How to supervise in 61850 communication ...................................................................... 652
11.3.7 Quality signal of IEC 61850 communication.................................................................... 653
11.3.8 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication .......................................................... 655
11.3.9 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option ............................................................................... 656
11.3.10 Setting ............................................................................................................................ 657
11.3.11 Signal (Data ID) ............................................................................................................. 658
IEC 60870-5-103 communication ............................................................................................. 674
11.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 675
11.4.2 Requirements in the Master station ................................................................................. 677
11.4.3 Interoperability.................................................................................................................. 678
11.4.4 Communication interface in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard........................................... 679
11.4.5 Editing data of the configuration ...................................................................................... 680
11.4.6 Protocol selection ............................................................................................................... 699
11.4.7 Tips for settings ................................................................................................................. 700
11.4.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 701
11.4.9 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 702
USB communication ................................................................................................................. 703
RS485 communication .............................................................................................................. 704
12 User interface ............................................................................................................................... 705
Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 706
HMI operation .......................................................................................................................... 709
Record sub-menu ...................................................................................................................... 712
Monitoring sub-menu ............................................................................................................... 719
Setting sub-menu...................................................................................................................... 726
I/O setting sub-menu ................................................................................................................ 739
Time sub-menu ......................................................................................................................... 745
Test sub-menu ........................................................................................................................... 753
Information sub-menu .............................................................................................................. 759
Security setting sub-menu .................................................................................................... 760
Control sub-menu.................................................................................................................. 761
13 Installation and setting ............................................................................................................... 763
xiii
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Caution for storage ................................................................................................................... 764

Handling precautions ............................................................................................................... 764
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software .................................................................. 765
PWS alarm threshold setting ................................................................................................... 769
14 Commissioning and maintenance ............................................................................................... 770
Scope of required test ............................................................................................................... 771
Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 772
Preparations ............................................................................................................................. 772
Test operations .......................................................................................................................... 774
14.4.1 Test for communication ..................................................................................................... 774
14.4.2 Test for relay application................................................................................................... 775
14.4.3 Test for BI and BO circuits................................................................................................ 775
14.4.4 Test for mode change (MDCTRL) ..................................................................................... 775
14.4.5 Signal monitor ................................................................................................................... 775
14.4.6 LED light test .................................................................................................................... 775
Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 776
Signal ........................................................................................................................................ 777
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function .................................................................................... 778
Appendix 2 Case outline .................................................................................................................... 785
Appendix 3 Typical external connection ........................................................................................... 789
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS ..................................................................... 794
Appendix 5 Ordering ......................................................................................................................... 839
Appendix 7 Technical data ................................................................................................................ 850
Appendix 7 Manufacture setting ...................................................................................................... 860
Appendix 8 Varistor unit ................................................................................................................... 862
Appendix 9 Notes for the dielectric voltage test............................................................................... 865
xiv
6F2S1958 (0.03)
1 Introduction
Contents Page
Abbreviation 12 Hardware overview 5
Busbar application 2 Monitoring and metering functions 4
Control 3 Symbols used in logical diagrams 6
Function identifies and signals (FB) 12
GRH200 software: 031

- 1 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Configuration of high impedance relay

As shown in Figure 1.1-1(a) and (b), a GRH200 is combined with a varistor unit; accordingly,
a high impedance relay will be formed.
The differential protection relay in GRH200 is an over current relay. GRH200 takes differential
current Id flowing on the differential circuit via a varistor unit, which converts developed
differential voltage Vd to differential current Id.
For more information about the varistor unit, refer Appendix 8.

Line 1 Line 2 Line 3
Varistor unit
Resistor
GRH200
Ida
Vda Varisor Ida
Idb
Vdb Idb
Idc
Vdc Idc
Ide
Busbar
Phase-A
Phase-B High impedance relay
Phase-C
(a) Three phase protection for busbar protection
Transformer
GRH200
Ida
Idb
Varistor unit Idc

Resistor Ide
Vde Varisor Ide
High impedance relay
(b) Single phase protection for restricted earth fault protection
Figure 1.1-1 High impedance relay composed with GRH200 and varistor units

- 2 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Control and monitoring application

The control functions are provided for circuit breakers and isolators, other switchgear and
transformers. The user can operate the functions using the human machine interface; the
functions are able to operate together with such as automatic sequence control, interlocking
safeguard function and manual overridden function.
[L/R] Remote/Local control function

When control of the object device is required, this function allows the selection of the control
command for either local or remote, (dispatch site/control centre) operation.
[SPOS] Single position device function

The SPOS function is used to operate a device including a single-position switch. The SPOS
function consists of (1) status detection, (2) control, (3) event detection, and (4) response check.
[LRST] LED reset function

The LRST function can turn off a LED when the LED is lit by tripping.
[SOFTSW] Software switch function

The SOFTSW function can provide scheme switches created by the software.
[MDCTRL] Mode control function

This function enables an interface for test function block (TSET-FB). With this interface, a
mode change command is made within the IED for the TEST-FB.
[GCNT] General pulse counter function

This function can observe a signal, for example the output of a PLC function and counts the
number of pulses for the signal. The total number of pulses counted is recorded.
[ILK] Software interlock function

The ILK function is provided to latch the operation of control function that is connected to a
primary device.

- 3 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Monitoring and recording functions

Using the HMI, the monitoring and metering functions can display status, settings, data and
others. The user can also see information using “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and
Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” both at local and remote end.
Monitoring function:
This function supervises status of protection functions, and displays power system quantities.
It also shows failure information in the CT.
Fault record function:

Such function records the state of a fault when the trip command is issued. It also memorizes
the fault data. The user can see, with the IED screen, these data with additional information:
date & time, fault phase, tripping phase, tripping mode, fault location, operating mode and
power system quantities.
Event record function:

The function provides recording feature that memorizes any event occurred in the IED.
Disturbance record function:

Disturbance record is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by
this function using GR-TIEMS.

- 4 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Hardware overview
The IED has human machine interface (HMI), which is made of LCD screen, indication lights,
operation and function keys, monitoring jacks, and a USB connector. Voltage, current input
terminals, and binary input and output circuits are provided on the rear..
HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for settings or viewing of stored data.
- A standard LCD or a large LCD (MIMIC) screen, LEDs, function keys and operation keys
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
- 100BASE-TX(or FX) for SAS in the IEC 61850 protocol
- RS485 or the fiber optic I/F in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Module circuits and others:

- Binary input circuits and binary output circuits with configurable features
- AC inputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording and others
- Automatic supervision

- 5 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Symbols used in logical diagrams

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

Mapping point
1. Marked with : Relay elements
2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number
Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

A binary output (BO) circuit
A LED circuit
Like in the BO and LED circuits, it can also be connected or mapped to what follows:
A PLC connection point
The IEC 61850 logical node (LN) to send a signal for the SAS
An alternative point (discussed in Chapter PLC function) is provided in place of the

signal-monitoring point for starting the user-programmed logic.
3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Signal No.) Signal name corresponding to Element or Signal No.(Data ID)
Note that the symbol can be used for the reception point coming from the output of PLC
logics.
4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Signal No. (Data ID) and its name
Signal number (Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Signal No. (Data ID)
1Note that the symbol can be used as a signal reception-point coming from the SAS. The
reception point is mapped to the LN of the IEC61850.

- 6 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Timer symbol

 Delay timer
Delayed pick-up timer
t 0 Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
 One-shot timer
A Output A
XXX - YYY Output

XXX - YYY: Setting range

- 7 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Logic symbol

 AND gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
 OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0

- 8 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Flip-flop symbol

A B Output
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
(v) Scheme switch

A Switch Output
1 On 1
A Output
On 1 Off 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0

- 9 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
BCU Bay Control Unit
BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit
BI Binary Input module or circuit
BO Binary Output module or circuit
BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit
CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Signal processing and communication module
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation
GPS Global Positioning System
GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
LCP Local Panel for Controlling
LED Light Emitting Diode
MIMIC Touchscreen operation configured by user’s program to operate control application
NA Not Applicable
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance
N/C Normally Closed
N/O Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation in the substation
PC Personal Computer for maintenance
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RCC Remote Control Centre
SAS Substation Automation System
SC Station Computer
SCMS Substation Control and Monitoring System
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol

- 10 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Abbreviation Description
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
SyncSrc Synchronization Source
VT Voltage Transformer
VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs
43 Selector device or selector switch

- 11 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID)

(i) Signal symbols
Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for protections,
controls and communications. The function ID is unique ID described by six digits in
hexadecimal; each function ID represents each FB. Signal number (or Data ID) is the logical
address of the input and output data of the FB. The signal number (Data ID) consists of a
function ID and an element ID. The function ID is common within the FB; accordingly the
element ID will be shown to make description simple. The element ID is 10 hexadecimal and
it has the element ID name for easy to read. Figure 1.7-1 exemplifies the symbols, the function
ID, and the element ID. The table below shows the structure of the signal.
Function ID Element ID Note
Format (Hex) FFFFFF XXXXXXXXXX Content

Signal example 123456 80000xxxx0 XX relay in phase-A is operated.
Element ID
FB (Function ID=123456)
80000xxxx0 8000xxxxxx
A & ≥1 XX1_OPT
81000xxxx1
XX1 B &
82000xxxx2
C
&
Element ID Signal name
&
8000011xxx0 XX_BLOCK 1
3. PLC connection point† 1. Relay element 2. Signal monitoring point

Figure 1.7-1 Example of symbols and others
†Note that a PLC connection point can be shown with the function ID (123456) plus
element ID (8000011xxx0) expressed in 16 delights in hexadecimal, in some scheme
logics. The ‘PLC connection point’ could be found to search the letter ‘E’ of element ID
(i.e., ‘8000011Exx0’).
(ii) Data length (bit length of Data ID)

The user can read data length of a Data ID by seeing the seventh and eighth number of the
Data ID. Table 1.7-1 shows examples of 1~32-bits data.
Table 1.7-1 How to identify a Data length by seeing Element ID
Data Example Example
Identifier texts Note
length Function ID Element ID
1-bit 400001 8000001B6F 8 (the beginning # of Element ID)
8-bits 400001 2000001B6F 20 (First and second # of Element ID)

- 12 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Data Example Example

Identifier texts Note
length Function ID Element ID
32-bits 400001 4200001B6F 42 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 32
64-bits 400001 4300001B6F 43 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 64

- 13 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2 Relay application
Contents Pages
Three phases high-impedance differential
15
protection (DIF)
Single phase restricted earth fault
22
protection (REF)
Cold load protection (CL) 24
Trip circuit (TRC) 31

- 14 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
High-impedance differential protection (DIFHZ)

GRH200 has two types of high-impedance protection. One is three phases high-impedance
protection (DIF) and the other is single phase restricted earth fault protection (REF). The
principle of the high-impedance protection and the details of DIF and REF are described below.
2.1.1 Principle of high-impedance differential protection

In the following section, the operating principles of the high impedance relay for internal and
external fault conditions are discussed.
(i) Internal fault

The state of an internal fault and its equivalent circuit is shown in Figure 2.1-1. Consider the
occurrence of an internal fault on the busbar, for example. The summation of currents (i.e.,
i1+i2+i3) corresponding to the total primary fault current are entering to both the high
impedance relay and the exciting impedance ZE of each CTs.
The fault current develops a high differential voltage (Vd) across the relay unit. To suppress
the high differential voltage being developed, it is usual to install a varistor unit for the relay
unit.
Equivalent circuit
High
CT1 i1 CT2 i2 Vd R impedance
relay
Incoming Incoming
side ZE R ZE side
Busbar Fault
CT secondary currents flow through the

high impedance relay.
CT3 i3
Those currents flow through the
excitation impedance ZE of each CTs.
Figure 2.1-1 State of an internal fault case
(ii) External fault without CT saturation

The state of an external fault without CT saturation is shown in Figure 2.1-2.
In this case, the CT secondary current is circulating around the CT secondary circuit and is
not entering into the high impedance relay unit. In Figure 2.1-2, Vd is the differential voltage
and is developed due to the unbalanced circulating current in the CTs; and thus, the relay does

- 15 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
not operate.
Equivalent circuit
High
relay
Incoming Out going
side ZE R ZE side
Busbar
The circulation of CT secondary current.
CT3 i3
Fault
Figure 2.1-2 State of an external fault without CT saturation
(iii) External fault with CT saturation

The state of an external fault with CT saturation is shown in Figure 2.1-3. The ZE of the
saturated outgoing terminal CT is excitation impedance, and it would become very small while
an external fault is occurring.
In such condition, a differential voltage Vd will be generated due to the flowing current and
the impedance of incoming terminals and an outgoing terminal on the secondary circuit [RS +
RL].
where,
RS: Resistance of CT secondary winding
RL: Resistance of secondary wiring for CT connecting lead loop – worst case
The differential voltage will be generated in the event of an external fault. The DIF relay
settings must be considered in order to avoid the unwanted-operation because of that
differential voltage, accordingly.

- 16 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Equivalent circuit
High
relay
RS + RL
Incoming Out going

Busbar side ZE R ZE side
CT3 is
saturated
CT3 i3 ZE CT secondary current is flowing to the excitation

impedance ZE of saturated CT3.
Fault
Figure 2.1-3 State of an external fault with CT saturation
2.1.2 Current transformer requirements

The CT requirements are summarized below:
 Choose the CTs having the same turns’ ratio.
 Choose the low reactance type class X of CT, as specified in B.S.3938 in terms of the
turns ratio, knee point voltage, secondary winding resistance and secondary exciting
current.
 Choose bushing CTs or toroidal CTs with fully distributed windings and low leakage
flux.
 Take notice of that secondary winding resistance must be kept to a minimum.
 It is recommended to select the CTs having similar design.
 Do not connect other devices to the same CT core.
 Select CTs whose knee-point voltages Vk is at least twice greater than Setting value
for relay operation. "Vk≥2×Vset”
For an internal fault case, current transformer(s) have to produce sufficient output to operate
the relay. Therefore, take care for any current transformer ratio errors and ensure a high speed
of operation the current transformers.
2.1.3 Setting guide

To define the DIF relay setting values, the user should follow Step1 and Step2.
 Step1: Calculation of setting values so that the DIF relay does not operate
unnecessarily in an external fault with CT saturation condition.
 Step2: Check that the DIF relay can operate with the minimum current in an internal
fault.

- 17 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Step1: Calculation of setting values so that the DIF relay does not operate
unnecessarily in an external fault with CT saturation condition.
As described in section 2.1.1(iii), the DIF function of high impedance relay must be set in order
not to operate with the differential voltage during the external fault with CT saturation.
The differential voltage, Vd developed during the external fault with CT saturation, can be
calculated using the equation (2.1-1):
IFmax
Vd = (R S + R L ) × (2.1-1)
N
If the operation of the DIF relay is based on the voltage, a setting value Vset can be
calculated using the equation (2.1-2) shown below, wherein, K1 represents a safety factor.
Furthermore, the Vset should be set less than at least half of the CT knee point voltage Vk
shown in the equation (2.1-3).
Vset ≥ K1 × Vd (2.1-2)
Vk
Vset ≤ (2.1-3)
2
Meanwhile, the GRH200 is a current relay, actually; hence, the setting value of the DIF relay
should be determined by the Iset expressed by the equation (2.1-4).
I
(R S +R L )× Fmax
Iset =
Vset
→ Iset ≥ K1 × N (2.1-4)
RV RV
where,
Vd: High differential voltage developed due to the fault current
Vset: Voltage correspond to current setting value for relay operation
Vk: CT knee-point voltage
Iset: Current setting value for relay operation
IFmax: Maximum through fault current
RS: Resistance of CT secondary winding
RL: Resistance of secondary wiring for CT connecting lead loop – worst case
N: CT ratio
RV: Resistance of varistor unit
K1: Safety factor – for the GRH200, K1=1.2
Factor K1 is associated with the design of the GRH200 relay. The K1 relates to its inherent
capability to block the unidirectional transient component of the fault current.

- 18 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
There is another inherent safety factor in addition to the factor K1, because it is an extreme
case of unbalance that the basic assumption of complete saturation of one current transformer
with no ratio error of the complementary one.
In practice, it is unlikely to occur such as when one current transformer begins to saturate,
and its burden is transferred to the other current transformer(s). It is an obvious fact that they
are made of the same components, and they may carry the same secondary voltage.
Step2: Check that the DIF relay can operate with the minimum current in an
internal fault
When the setting value Iset is calculated on the Step1, the equation (2.1-5) gives the
minimum current value of the CT primary side at which the DIF relay can operate:
Imin = (n × Ie + Ir + Iset) × N (2.1-5)
If the below equation (2.1-6) is satisfied, the DIF relay is able to operate with the minimum
current for an internal fault.
Imin ≤ IFmin (2.1-6)
Imin: Minimum current value on the CT primary side when the relay can operate
n: Number of current transformers connected to GRH200
Ie: Value of current transformer secondary excitation current at calculated voltage
Vset in Step1
Ir: Varistor current at calculated voltage Vset, this is obtained from the varistor V-I
characteristic†
Iset: Calculated current setting value in step1
IFmin: Minimum internal fault current on the CT primary side
†Note:Details of varistor are discussed in Appendix 9.
2.1.4 Three phases high-impedance differential protection (DIF)

(i) Element threshold settings
The user can select the overcurrent threshold value by settings [DIF1] and [DIF2] ranging from
0.020-2.000A.
(ii) Scheme logic

Figure 2.1-4 shows the logic of the three phases high-impedance differential protection (DIF)
including two relay elements (DIF1 and DIF2). Both elements can operate when On is set for

- 19 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
the settings [DIF1-EN] and [DIF2-EN].
8000011B60
≥1
DIF1-OR
TDIF1 To TRC
8000011C20 8000011B67 8800011B20
t 0
DIF1 A DIF-OPT-A
8100011C21 & & 8100011B68 ≥1 8900011B21
t 0
B DIF-OPT-B
8200011C22 & & 8200011B69 ≥1 8A00011B22
t 0
C DIF-OPT-C
& & ≥1
0.00-300.00s 8000011B6D 8300011B64
DIF1-EN On
≥1 ≥1
DIF-OPT
8100011B61
TDIF-S2 8000011B27
DIF2-OR t 0
≥1 DIF-S2-OPT
&
TDIF2 0.00-300.00s
8400011C24 8400011B6A
t 0
DIF2 A
8500011C25 & & 8500011B6B
t 0 DIF-S2-EN On
B
8600011C26 & & 8600011B6C
C t 0
& &
0.00-300.00s 8400011B6E
DIF2-EN On
≥1
8000011BB0
800001EBB0 DIF1-TP_BLOCK 1
8000011BB1 ≥1
800001EBB1 DIF2-TP_BLOCK 1
800001EBB2 ≥1
800001EBB2 DIF-TP_BLOCK
DIF-SV-DET 800001EBB3
800001EBB3 DIF_BLOCK DIF_BLOCK
Figure 2.1-4 DIF logic
Operation delay timers

The DIF1 and DIF2 elements have delay timers of definite characteristics. The user can
determine delay times using settings [TDIF1] and [TDIF2]. Select a value from among
0.00—300.00 seconds. If wishing instant operations, the user should set 0.00 for those
settings.
Trip signal
In case of fault occurrences, the DIF1 and DIF2 operations are taken by single-phase
basis, but those outputs are integrated into a signal of three-phase basis—called “DIF-
TRIP” signal†. It is combined with other trip signals in the trip circuit (TRC). The TRC
is discussed later.
†Note:This protection scheme provides second operate signal DIF-S2-OPT through a

delayed timer TDIF-S2.
(iii) Supervision of differential current (DIF-SV)

Monitoring function of differential current (DIF-SV) is provided, so that detecting spuriousness
in the differential current is feasible during the CT circuit failure. The user can adjust the
removal period for issuing using setting [TDIF-SV]. To operate the DIF-SV function, the user
should set scheme switch [DIF-SV-EN] On; setting [CHK_ID] is also provided to set the
monitoring level.

- 20 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
The operation of DIF relay will be blocked when a supervisory signal (DIF-SV-DET) is
generated using PLC.
8000041B60
≥1
DIF-SV-OR
TDIF-SV
8000041C20 8000041B61
t 0
DIF-SV A
≥1
DIF-SV-DET
8100041C21 & &
t 0
B
8200041C22 & & 8000061B60
t 0
C
& & ≥1
DIF-REF-SV-DET
0.10-60.00s
DIF-SV-EN On
From REF
8000041BB0 REF-SV-DET
800004EBB0 DIF-SV_BLOCK 1
≥1
DIF_BLOCK
From Test
AMF_OFF 1
Figure 2.1-5 Supervision logic
If the monitoring function is not required, the user can terminate the operation using PLC
connection point “DIF-SV_BLOCK”. The monitoring function can also be stopped when the
AMF_OFF signal† is injected.
†Note:The user can switch off the monitoring function during the test. To generate the
AMF_OFF signal, set Off for setting [A.M.F]. For the operation, see chapter User
interface: Test sub-menu.

- 21 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2.1.5 Single phase restricted earth fault protection (REF)
(i) Element threshold settings

The user can select a threshold value of restricted earth fault protection using settings [REF1]
and [REF2] ranging from 0.020-2.000A.
(ii) Scheme logic

Figure 2.1-6 shows the logic of single phase restricted earth fault protection (REF) including
two relay elements (REF1 and REF2). Both elements can operate when On is set for the
settings [REF1-EN] and [REF2-EN].
TREF1 To TRC
8000021C23 8000021B65 8300021B62
t 0
REF1 REF-OPT
& & ≥1
0.00-300.00s
REF1-EN On TREF-S2 8000021B27
t 0
&
REF-S2-OPT
TREF2
8100021C27 8100021B66 0.00-300.00s
t 0
REF2
& &
0.00-300.00s REF-S2-EN On
REF2-EN On
8000021BB0
800002EBB0 REF1-TP_BLOCK 1
8000021BB1 ≥1
800002EBB1 REF2-TP_BLOCK 1
8000021BB2 ≥1
800002EBB2 REF-TP_BLOCK
8000021BB3
800002EBB3 REF_BLOCK REF_BLOCK
Figure 2.1-6 REF logic
Operation delay timers

The REF1 and REF2 elements have delay timers of definite characteristics. The user
can determine delay times using settings [TREF1] and [TREF2]. Select a value from
among 0.00—300.00 seconds. If wishing instant operations, the user should set 0.00
for those settings.
Trip signal
In case of fault occurrences, the REF1 and REF2 operations are taken by single-phase
basis, but those outputs are integrated into a signal of three-phase basis—called
“REF-TRIP” signal†. It is combined with other trip signals in the trip circuit (TRC).
The TRC is discussed later.
†Note:This protection scheme provides second operate signal REF-S2-OPT through a

delayed timer TREF-S2.
(iii) Supervision of differential current (REF-SV)

Monitoring function for differential current (REF-SV) is provided, so that detecting

- 22 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
spuriousness in the differential current is feasible during the CT circuit failure. The user can
introduce the time delay in the operation using the setting [TREF-SV]. To operate the REF-SV
function, the user should set scheme switch [REF-SV-EN] On; setting [CHK_ID] is also
provided to set the monitoring level.
The REF operation will be blocked when a supervisory signal (REF-SV-DET‡) is generated
using PLC.
TREF-SV To DIF
8000041C20 8000051B60
t 0
REF-SV
& &
REF-SV-DET
0.10-60.00s
REF-SV-EN On
8000051BB0
800005EBB0 REF-SV_BLOCK 1
≥1
REF_BLOCK
From Test
AMF_OFF 1
Figure 2.1-7 Supervision logic
If the monitoring function is not required, the user can terminate the operation using PLC
connection point “REF-SV_BLOCK”. The monitoring function can also be stopped when the
AMF_OFF signal† is injected.
†Note:The user can switch off the monitoring function during the test. To generate the
AMF_OFF signal, set Off for setting [A.M.F]. For the operation, see chapter User
interface: Test sub-menu.

- 23 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2.1.6 Cold load Protection (CL)

High impedance protection can apply to the cold load protection.
The cold load state is judged by “CB closing command” or “CB contact signal”. Additionally, the
user connects the cold load state signal to the high impedance protection logic, using PLC logic
to realize the cold load protection.
(i) Clod load state judgement

Figure 2.1-8 shows the cold load state judgment logic. The user has to connect either “CB
closing command” or “CB contact signal” to the PLC connection point [CB_FOR_CLP];
consequently, the cold load state is judged according to the settings.
Each of “Judging by a CB closing command” and “Judging by a CB contact signal” is shown as

follows.
8000031BB0 TCLP 8000031B60 8F00031B62

800003EBB0 CB_FOR_CLP
& CL STATE
& ≥1
0.00-100.00s
“CB closing command” TCLE TCLR
or 8000031B61
t 0 0 t
“CB contact signal” Off 1
&
F1 0.00-100.00s 0.00-100.00s
CL-EN F2
Off
CL
CL-Test Non-CL
1
8000031BB1
800003EBB1 CLP_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1-8 Cold load state judgement logic
Function 1 (Judging by a CB closing command)

Set [CL-EN] to “F1” when the “CB closing command” is used to judge, and determine
the period of the cold load state signal “CL STATE” generated continuously using the
setting [TCLP].
Figure 2.1-9 shows the timing chart.
CB main contact CB main contact

closing open
CB_FOR_CLP
(CB closing command)
CL STATE
(Cold load state) [TCLP]
Figure 2.1-9 Timing chart for Function 1

- 24 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Function 2 (Judging by a CB contact signal)

Set [CL-EN] to “F2” when the “CB contact signal” is used to judge, and determine two
kinds of the time. The first kind is the time to keep generating the cold load status
signal “CL STATE” after the CB is closed, which is defined by setting [TCLR]. The
latter one is the time to generate the signal “CL STATE” after the CB is open, which
is defined by setting [TCLP]
Figure 2.1-10 shows the timing chart.
CB main contact CB main contact

closing open
CB close
CB_FOR_CLP
CB open
(CB contact signal)
CL STATE
(Cold load state) [TCLR] [TCLE]
Figure 2.1-10 Timing chart for Function 2
The cold load state judgement has the forcible control function to generate or not generate “CL
STATE” signal compulsorily, and it can be controlled by using the [CL-Test] switch.

- 25 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) How to realize the cold load protection

The cold load protection can be realized by (a) and (b) technique.
(a) Connecting the cold load status “CL STATE” signal to the high impedance
protection logic, using PLC logic.
(b) Definition of the high impedance protection settings
Example
Following techniques show an example of how to change the operation value of high
impedance protection during cold load state. The cold load protection is realized by using
the DIF1 protection function for the normal state, whereas it is realized by using DIF2
protection function for the cold load state.
(a) Connecting the cold load status “CL STATE” signal

Figure 2.1-11 shows the example of PLC logic.
The “CL SATATE” signal is connected to PLC connection point “DIF1-TP_BLOCK”,
and its inverted signal is connected to PLC connection point “DIF2-TP_BLOCK”.
As a result, the DIF1 protection function will be blocked, but the DIF2 protection
function will be living in the cold load state.
≥1
DIF1-OR
TDIF1
t 0
DIF1 A
& &
t 0
B
& &
t 0
C
& &
0.00-300.00s
DIF1-EN On
DIF2-OR
≥1
TDIF2
t 0
DIF2 A
& &
t 0
B
& &
C t 0
& &
0.00-300.00s
DIF2-EN On
CL STATE 800001EBB0 DIF1-TP_BLOCK 1

≥1
1 800001EBB1 DIF2-TP_BLOCK 1
≥1
Figure 2.1-11 Example of PLC logic
(b) Definition the high impedance protection settings

The settings of DIF1 and DIF2 relay are defined as follows:
[DIF1] = 1.000(A)
[DIF2] = 1.500(A)
The operation value of high impedance protection in the cold load state can be
defined with a high setting value; consequently, the cold load protection is realized.

- 26 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2.1.7 Settings
DIFHZ (Function ID: 415001)
Setting items Range Unit Contents Defaultt Note
DIF DIF1-EN Off / On - Switch for DIF1 element Off

DIF2-EN Off / On - Switch for DIF2 element Off
DIF-S2-EN Off / On - Element signal of DIF1 or 2 operating Off
DIF-SV-EN Off / On - Switch for DIF-SV supervision element Off
DIF1 DIF1 0.020 - 2.000 A DIF1 element threshold 1.000
TDIF1 0.00 - 300.00 s Delay timer for the DIF1 operating (DT) 0.00
DIF2 DIF2 0.020 - 2.000 A DIF2 element threshold 1.200
TDIF2 0.00 - 300.00 s Delay timer for the DIF1 operating (DT) 0.00
DIF-S2 TDIF-S2 0.00 - 300.00 s Delay timer for the DIF-SV supervision 0.30
DIF-SV DIF-SV 0.010 - 1.000 A DIF-SV element threshold 0.600
TDIF-SV 0.100 - 60.000 s Delay timer for the DIF-SV operating 0.100
Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note
REF REF1-EN Off / On - Switch for REF1 element Off

REF2-EN Off / On - Switch for REF2 element Off
REF-S2-EN Off / On - Monitoring REF1&2 elements operated Off
REF-SV-EN Off / On - Switch for REF-SV supervision element Off
REF1 REF1 0.020 - 2.000 A REF1 element threshold 1.200
TREF1 0.00 - 300.00 s Delay timer for the REF1 operating (DT) 0.00
REF2 REF2 0.020 - 2.000 A REF2 element threshold 1.200
TREF2 0.00 - 300.00 s Delay timer for the REF2 operating (DT) 0.00
REF-S2 TREF-S2 0.00 - 300.00 s Delay timer for the REF-SV supervision 0.00
REFSV REF-SV 0.010 - 1.000 A REF-SV element threshold 0.600
TREF-SV 0.100 - 60.000 s Delay timer for the REF-SV operating 0.100
CL CL-EN Off / F1 / F2 - CL-EN function enable Off

TCLP 0.00 - 100.00 s One-shot pulse width time of CL 0.01
TCLE 0.00 - 100.00 s On-delay timer for CL operation 0.00
TCLR 0.00 - 100.00 s Off-delay timer for CL operation 0.00
Test setting for cold load judgement

CL-TEST Off / CL / Non-CL Forcibly establishing the cold load condition Off

- 27 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2.1.8 Signals
 DIFHZ (Function ID: 415001)
DIF connection points
Element ID Name Description
800004EBB0 DIF-SV_BLOCK DIF Supervision protection block command
800001EBB2 DIF-TP_BLOCK DIF protection block command
800001EBB0 DIF1-TP_BLOCK DIF1 protection block command
800001EBB1 DIF2-TP_BLOCK DIF2 protection block command
800001EBB3 DIF_BLOCK DIF SCHEAME block command
REF connection points

800005EBB0 REF-SV_BLOCK REFHZ Supervision protection block command
800002EBB2 REF-TP_BLOCK REFHZ protection block command
800002EBB0 REF1-TP_BLOCK REFHZ1 protection block command
800002EBB1 REF2-TP_BLOCK REFHZ2 protection block command
800002EBB3 REF_BLOCK REFHZ SCHEAME block command
CL connection points
800003EBB0 CB_FOR_CLP CB closed signal for CL judgement
800003EBB1 CLP_BLOCK Blocking CL operation

- 28 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

DIF signal monitoring points
8800011B20 DIF-OPT-A DIF A phase protection operation
8900011B21 DIF-OPT-B DIF B phase protection operation
8A00011B22 DIF-OPT-C DIF C phase protection operation
8000061B60 DIF-REF-SV-DET DIFSV or REFSV function operation
8000011B27 DIF-S2-OPT DIFS2 protection operation
8000041C20 DIF-SV-A DIFSV relay element operated (phase-A)
8100041C21 DIF-SV-B DIFSV relay element operated (phase-B)
8200041C22 DIF-SV-C DIFSV relay element operated (phase-C)
8000041B61 DIF-SV-DET DIFSV function operation
8000041B60 DIF-SV-OR DIFSV relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000041BB0 DIF-SV_BLOCK DIF Supervision protection block command
8300011B64 DIF-TRIP Trip signal by DIF protection operation
8000011C20 DIF1-A DIF1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 DIF1-B DIF1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 DIF1-C DIF1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000011B6D DIF1-OPT DIF1 protection operation operated (three-phases)
8000011B67 DIF1-OPT-A DIF1 protection operation operated (phase-A)
8100011B68 DIF1-OPT-B DIF1 protection operation operated (phase-B)
8200011B69 DIF1-OPT-C DIF1 protection operation operated (phase-C)
8000011B60 DIF1-OR DIF1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000011BB0 DIF1-TP_BLOCK DIF1 protection block command
8400011C24 DIF2-A DIF2 relay element operated (phase-A)
8500011C25 DIF2-B DIF2 relay element operated (phase-B)
8600011C26 DIF2-C DIF2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8400011B6E DIF2-OPT DIF2 protection operation operated (three-phases)
8400011B6A DIF2-OPT-A DIF2 protection operation operated (phase-A)
8500011B6B DIF2-OPT-B DIF2 protection operation operated (phase-B)
8600011B6C DIF2-OPT-C DIF2 protection operation operated (phase-C)
8100011B61 DIF2-OR DIF2 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
REF signal monitoring points

8000021B27 REF-S2-OPT REFHZS2 protection operation
8000041C23 REF-SV REFSV relay element operated
8000051B60 REF-SV-DET REFSV function operation
8000051BB0 REF-SV_BLOCK REFHZ Supervision protection block command
8300021B62 REF-TRIP Trip signal by REFHZ protection operation
8000021C23 REF1 REFHZ relay element operated
8000021B65 REF1-OPT
8000021BB0 REF1-TP_BLOCK REFHZ1 protection block command
8100021C27 REF2 REFHZ2 relay element operated
8100021B66 REF2-OPT
8000061B60 DIF-REF-SV-DET DIFSV or REFSV function operation

- 29 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

CL signal monitoring points
8000031BB0 CB_FOR_CLP CB closed signal for CL judgement
8F00031B62 CL STATE Could Load State
8000031BB1 CLP_BLOCK Blocking CL operation
8000031B60 CLP_F1_OP F1 scheme of CL judgement
8000031B61 CLP_F2_OP F2 scheme of CL judgement

- 30 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Three-phase trip circuit (TRC)

The trip circuit (TRC) scheme will issue a trip command to the circuit breaker (CB) when it
receives trip signals from the DIF and REF functions. If the TRC can receive an alternate trip
signal generated by an external relay, the IED can output the trip command by seeing tripping
conditions (i.e., reliability is increased by the fail-safe operation that is achieved by an
additional relay).
Protection functions TRC function
Binary IO module
CB
BO1
TRIP BO2 Lateral branch
DIF-TRIP -COMMAND
OPT-TRIP CB Trip
signal
DIF A
generation
Trip-command BOn
Lateral branch
collection OPT-TRIP-A
DIF-OPT-A
DIF-OPT-B OPT-TRIP-B Main feeder
DIF-OPT-C OPT-TRIP-C
REF-TRIP
REF
GEN.TRIP_ALARM
Alarm signal
OPT.PHASE-A Recording
generation
OPT.PHASE-B function
OPT.PHASE-C
OPT.PHASE-N
Figure 2.2-1 TRC block diagram

†Note:the alternate trip signal has to be acquired via a binary IO module (BIO) in the
IED, and the BIO has to be connected with the TRC function. For example, if the
signal is acquired on the first BIO module and that is presented by a signal
number ‘200B01 8001001111’, the user has to connect that signal to the ADD_FS
connection point ‘4A1001 810000EBB1’ of the TRC. Also, see chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module to find out the binary input output circuits.

- 31 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
The TRC function is made of following logics:

Collection: gathers signals of the DIF and REF functions in order that a trip-command
can be outputted. The user has to make the connection between the CB trip coil and
the BO in order that the drive signal (i.e., ‘TRIP COMMAND’) is outputted to the CB.
Due for that ‘TRIP COMMAND’ has to be outputted speedy, a fast operating type has
to be selected in the BO circuits.
Generation: can issue alarm-signals to provide a trigger signal for the recording
function (see Chapter Recording function).

- 32 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2.2.1 Scheme logic

(i) Trip-command collection
Trip-command grouping gathers trip signals provided by the DIF and REF functions. It
outputs a trip operation command, which is shown as “OPT-TRIP” in Figure 2.2-2.
The TRC logic has PLC connection points to collect alternate trip signals. For example, if the
user wishes to trip the CB by the output of an external relay, the user has to connect the
alternate trip signals to the TRC logic using the following PLC connection points: TRIP-A_ADD,
TRIP-B_ADD, TRIP-C_ADD and TRIP_ADD.
8300001B63
Protection
functions OPT-TRIP
OPT-TRIP ≥1
DIF 830000EBB6 TRIP_ADD

REF
8000001B60
800000EBB3 TRIP-A_ADD OPT-TRIP-A

8100001B61
810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD
OPT-TRIP-B
8200001B62
820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD OPT-TRIP-C
Figure 2.2-2 Scheme logic for Trip-command collection
(ii) General-trip-signal production

Figure 2.2-3 illustrates the trip-signal generation logic. In case a trip signal is not generated
in the IED, the user can program to generate a trip command using PLC connection point
“ADD_OPT_COM”.
830000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM
8000001B60
Trip-command collection scheme
OPT-TRIP-A
8100001B61
OPT-TRIP-B ≥1
8200001B62
8300001B78 To CB
OPT-TRIP-C
8300001B63 & ≥1 TRIP COMMAND
OPT-TRIP
810000EBB1 ADD-FS
≥1
820000EBB0 USE-FS 1
Figure 2.2-3 Logic for general trip and CB trip signal
Acquisition of fail-safe signal provided externally

If an external relay is available to provide a fail-safe check for the internal operation of the
IED, and the user wishes to use the output of the external relay in order to enhance the

- 33 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
reliability of tripping further, then the PLC connection points ‘ADD-FS’ and ‘USE-FS’ can be
used in the Trip-signal generation scheme. That is, the external check signal is connected at
the ‘ADD-FS’ point; the ‘On/Off ’ state of the external relay should also be connected using
‘USE-FS’.
Acquisition of external trip command

As the PLC connection point ‘ADD_OPT_COM’ is provided, the TRC function can accept a trip
command that is generated externally.
(iii) CB trip signal production

As illustrated in Figure 2.2-3, the ‘TRIP COMMMAND’ signal is transferred to trip coils of the
CB when the signals “OPT-TRIP-A, -B, and -C” or “OPT-TRIP” enter into the TRC function.
Table 2.2-1 Output signals for CB
Output signals Usage of signals
TRIP-COMMMAND CB trip in three-phase
(iv) Alarm signal generation

Figure 2.2-4 shows the alarm-signal grouping scheme in the TRC logic. The following signals
are generated for the recording functions outside the TRC logic: OPT.PHASE-A, OPT.PHASE-
B, OPT.PHASE-C, OPT.PHASE-N, and GEN.TRIP_ALARM.

- 34 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8000001B66 To Recording function

8000001B71
Protection OPT-AR ≥1 &
functions DIF-OPT-A OPT.PHASE-A
≥1
DIF
880000EBB8 OPT.P-A_ADD
8100001B67
DIF-OPT-B ≥1 8000001B72
OPT-BR &
≥1 OPT.PHASE-B
890000EBB9 OPT.P-B_ADD
8200001B68
8000001B73
DIF-OPT-C OPT-CR ≥1 &
OPT.PHASE-C
≥1
8A0000EBBA OPT.P-C_ADD
8000001B74
8400001B69 &
OPT.PHASE-N
OPT-ABR
≥1
8C0000EBBB OPT.P-AB_ADD 8000001B77

GEN.TRIP_ALARM
8500001B6A
OPT-BCR
≥1
8D0000EBBC OPT.P-BC_ADD
8600001B6B
OPT-CAR
≥1
8E0000EBBD OPT.P-CA_ADD
8400001B64
GEN.ALARM ≥1
≥1
840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD
Trip signal generation scheme GEN.TRIP
800000EBBE OPT.P-N_ADD
Figure 2.2-4 Scheme logic for Alarm-signal generation
When an additional relay, external to the IED is utilized, an alarm signal can be
provided, indicating for example a Line-to-Line (LL) fault and others. If the user
wishes to record the alarm, then PLC connection points ‘OPT.P-A_ADD’ and
others can be used. If the additional relay is designed to operate for a ground
fault, use the alternative PLC connection point ‘OPT.P-N_ADD’
2.2.2 Setting
(No setting items exist)

- 35 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2.2.3 Signals
 Signal monitoring points
TRC-D (Function ID: 4A1001)
8100001BB1 ADD_FS Additional fail-safe command
8300001BB2 ADD_OPT_COM Additional operation command
8400001B64 GEN.ALARM Alarm signals generated for recording
8300001B6F GEN.TRIP Trip signal generated for recording
8000001B77 GEN.TRIP_ALARM Alarm signal generated for recording
8800001BB8 OPT.P-A_ADD Additional operated phase-A command
8C00001BBB OPT.P-AB_ADD Additional operated phase-AB command
8900001BB9 OPT.P-B_ADD Additional operated phase-B command
8D00001BBC OPT.P-BC_ADD Additional operated phase-BC command
8A00001BBA OPT.P-C_ADD Additional operated phase-C command
8E00001BBD OPT.P-CA_ADD Additional operated phase-CA command
8000001B71 OPT.PHASE-A Alarm signal for recording ‘Phase-A operated in relay’
8100001B72 OPT.PHASE-B Alarm signal for recording ‘Phase-B operated in relay’
8200001B73 OPT.PHASE-C Alarm signal for recording ‘Phase-C operated in relay’
8300001B74 OPT.PHASE-N Alarm signal for recording ‘Phase-N operated in relay’
8000001BBE OPT.P-N_ADD Additional operated phase-N command
8400001B69 OPT-ABR Alarm signal phase-AB for recording
8400001BB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD Additional alarm output command
8000001B66 OPT-AR Alarm signal phase-A for recording
8500001B6A OPT-BCR Alarm signal phase-BC for recording
8100001B67 OPT-BR Alarm signal phase-B for recording
8600001B6B OPT-CAR Alarm signal phase-CA for recording
8200001B68 OPT-CR Alarm signal phase-C for recording
8300001B63 OPT-TRIP Trip operation three-phase
8000001B60 OPT-TRIP-A Trip operation phase-A
8100001B61 OPT-TRIP-B Trip operation phase-B
8200001B62 OPT-TRIP-C Trip operation phase-C
8300001B78 TRIP COMMAND TRIP COMMAND
8300001BB6 TRIP_ADD Additional trip command
8000001BB3 TRIP-A_ADD Additional A-phase trip command
8100001BB4 TRIP-B_ADD Additional B-phase trip command
8200001BB5 TRIP-C_ADD Additional C-phase trip command
8200001BB0 USE_FS Command to energize the circuit breaker trip-coil
 Connection points in PLC logic

820000EBB0 USE_FS Introduction of the result of the check relay (fail-safe) existing externally
810000EBB1 ADD_FS Reception of the result signal of the check relay (fail-safe)
830000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM Reception of manual tripping
800000EBB3 TRIP-A_ADD Reception for tripping in phase-A additionally
810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD Reception for tripping in phase-B additionally
820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD Reception for tripping in phase-C additionally

- 36 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

830000EBB6 TRIP_ADD Reception for three-poles tripping additionally
840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD Reception of alarm signal additionally
880000EBB8 OPT.P-A_ADD Reception of alarm signal in phase-A additionally
890000EBB9 OPT.P-B_ADD Reception of alarm signal in phase-B additionally
8A0000EBBA OPT.P-C_ADD Reception of alarm signal in phase-C additionally
8C0000EBBB OPT.P-AB_ADD Reception of alarm signal in phase-AB additionally
8D0000EBBC OPT.P-BC_ADD Reception of alarm signal in phase-BC additionally
8E0000EBBD OPT.P-CA_ADD Reception of alarm signal in phase-CA additionally
800000EBBE OPT.P-N_ADD Reception of alarm signal in neutral additionally

- 37 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3 General control function

Contents Pages Pages
Common controls (CMNCTRL) 48 Direct-operation mode (DIR) 43
Control hierarchy 45 Double command blocking (DCB) 49
Control level and control point 46 LED reset function (LEDR) 63
Control right 46 Local control 60
Control scheme 39 Mode control function (MDCTRL) 97
Counter function for the general (GCNT) 77 Select-before-operation mode (SBO) 42
PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signals 51
Programmable logic control (PLC) 60
Remote control 60

- 38 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Control scheme
Figure 3.1-1 shows the control overview for the control function; there are two control stages:
“Wait for a command” and “Receiving commands”. The function will wait for a command from
the server in the first stage. During the receiving stage, the function will respond to “Select”,
“Cancel”, and “Operate” commands. Specific logic is provided for each command for each
receiving stage. A decision is required from each logic block to move to the next step (i.e., ‘Failed’
or ‘Success’). When a ‘success’ decision is determined in the operate logic, the respective
command is issued to the relevant device; the device commences with its operation (for example,
a 43-switch is changed to “ON” from “OFF”). The waiting and receiving stages loop around at
the receipt of every command.
Wait for a command
Waiting stage
Selection stage Failed
Receiving “select command” Select logic Wait for next command

Success
Failed (Do nothing)
Receiving “cancel command” Cancel logic

Success Cancel of “Select command”
Failed
Receiving “operate command” Operate logic Operation completed

Success
Figure 3.1-1 Stages in control function
The type of control can be categorized in accordance with its origin, (Remote/Local/PLC)
and modes (SBO/DIR). That is, the respective control scheme should respond to the respective
origin and mode. The user should be aware of the context of the control action, “On (or Closing)
control” and “Off (or Open) control” in relationship to its origin and mode†.
†Note:The “On control” and “Off control” can be found in the SPOS and other functions.
For more information on these functions, see the explanations provided for each
respective function.

- 39 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Command reception in SBO mode

In the SBO receiving stage shown in Figure 3.1-1 we can find three processes: select, cancel,
and operate command flows.
Reception of “select command”

Figure 3.1-2 shows a schematic process flow diagram when receiving a “select command”
following the “Wait for a command”. The receipt “select command” is divided into “select
command ‘On’ (Closing)” and “select command ‘Off ’ (Open)”. The select command is carried out
based on its origin: “Remote”, “Local”, and “PLC”. If the “select command” is successful, the
process will wait for the receipt of the next command.
Wait for a command
Receiving “Select command”

Failed
When On is issued Select logic F/S Waiting for a next
Success
from the remote-end “Remote-On-control” “operate command”
or
“cancel command”
When Off is issued Select logic
from the remote-end “Remote-OFF-control”
When On is issued Select logic

from the local-end “Local-On-control”
When Off is issued Select logic

from the local-end “Local-OFF-control”
When On is issued by Select logic

the PLC function “PLC-On-control”
When Off is issued by Select logic

the PLC function “PLC-OFF-control”
Figure 3.1-2 Schemes for “Select command”
Reception of “cancel command”

If the “select command” proceeds successfully following the receiving stage, the function can
subsequently receive a “cancel command”. Figure 3.1-3 shows the reception of a “cancel
command”. If the “cancel command” is successful, the “select command” is discarded and the
function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage (i.e., the initial stage). In other words, the
function waits for a new “select command” so that the other control functions can receive a
command.

- 40 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Wait for a command
Receiving “Cancel command”

Success Discarding of Return to “Wait
Cancel logic F/S
When Cancel is issued “select command” for a command”
from the remote-end “Remote-cancel”
Failed
When Cancel is issued Cancel logic Do nothing
from the local-end “Local-cancel”
Figure 3.1-3 Scheme “Cancel command”
Reception of “operate command”

Following successful completion of the “select command”, the control function is ready to
receive an “operate command” in order to control a device. The receipt of “operate command”
is divided into “Operate command ‘On’ (Closing)” and “Control command ‘Off ’ (Open)”; each of
the two commands is carried out based upon its origin i.e. “Remote”, “Local”, and “PLC”. If the
“operate command” is completed, the “select command” can be released; then a new “Wait for
a command” stage can commence for receipt of a new “select command”.
Wait for a command Failed
Receiving “Select command” Receiving “Operate command”

Failed
Return to “Wait
Release of
F/S for a command”
Select logic Operate logic Success “select command”
“Remote-On-control” “Remote-On-control”
Select logic Operate logic

“Remote-OFF-control “Remote-OFF-control
” ”
“Local-On-control” “Local-On-control”

“Local-OFF-control” “Local-OFF-control”

“PLC-On-control” “PLC-On-control”

“PLC-OFF-control” “PLC-OFF-control”
Figure 3.1-4 Scheme “Operate command”
(ii) Command reception in DIR mode

In DIR mode, issuing an “operate command” is possible without the reception of the “select
command”. Thus, the reception of an “operation command” only features in the control scheme†.
We shall see the DIR mode later.
†Note:We can encompass the operation of the “select command” being performed
internally in the control scheme. Thus, the user is not required to take account of
the reception of the “select command”.

- 41 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Control mode
Either Select-Before-operation (SBO) or Direct-Operate-control (DIR) is provided as a control
mode for the device. The user can select the preferred control mode.
3.2.1 Select-before-operation mode (SBO)

The user should be aware that in the SBO mode a signal is returned from the target device in
the form of a response signal, (answer). When the target device sends a response to the IED
after receiving a command, the server (and the IED) can send another command to the target
device if the criterion of the response (answer) is satisfied. A safe SBO operation (SBOns) is
normally utilized; however, the user can opt to select an enhanced-security SBO operation
(SBOes), if additional safety is deemed necessary.
(i) SBO with enhanced security (SBOes)

In the SBOes, an operation process (Oper) commences after the completion of a selection
process (SBOw). Figure 3.2-1 exemplifies the exchange of commands and responses; the server
receives a response (answer#1) from the IED with regard to a SBOw command. Then, provided
that the response, (answer#1) received from the IED is satisfied, the server can send an Oper
request to the IED to control the device. If the target device completes the operation
successfully, the server will receive an operation result. Figure 3.2-1 shows the communication
flow between the server (remote-end) and the IED, note that the user will also see the same
process flow when using the IED-front-panel key-operations. That is, the IED-front-panel
(local-end) takes the place of the server (remote-end).
Server IE D
Process (SAS) (Control function) Target device
SBOw
Selection Command
Answer#1 R esponse
Oper. Command
Operation
Answer#2 R esponse
Device status changed

Operation result Command
R esult termination
Figure 3.2-1 SBO with enhanced security
(ii) SBO with normal security (SBOns)

Figure 3.2-2 shows normal SBOns control. The difference between the SBOes and the SBOns
is that the IED does not send an operation result in response to the request Oper.

- 42 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Process Server IE D
(SAS) (Control function) Target device
Selection SBOw
Command
Answer Response
Oper.
Operation
Command
Answer
Response
Figure 3.2-2 SBO with normal security
3.2.2 Direct-operation mode (DIR)

In the DIR mode, a target device is controlled without the reception of the select command. An
enhanced security mode (DOes) is also provided when the user wishes to control a device with
additional security rather than the normal level of security experienced with mode (DOns) .
(i) DIR with enhanced security (DOes)

Figure 3.2-3 illustrates the server sending the Oper request to the IED; the server receives a
response, (answer#1) from the IED. The result is notified when the operation of the target
device is complete. The result includes status information; it informs whether the target device
has operated normally or not. Note that the control start of the target device is initiated
regardless of the state of the target device.
Process SAS IE D
(Server) (Control function) Target device
Oper.
Operation Command
Answer#1 R esponse
Device status changed
Answer#2 Command
termination
R esult
Figure 3.2-3 Direct control with enhanced security
(ii) DIR with normal security (DOns)

A response (answer#2) from the target device is not sent to the SAS in DOns, as shown in
Figure 3.2-4.

- 43 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
SAS IE D
Process
(Server) Control function Target device
Operation
Control
Command
Answer#1
Response
Figure 3.2-4 Direct control with normal security

- 44 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Control hierarchy
It is important that the user understand the meaning of the terms ‘control-right’ and ‘control-
hierarchy’ in connection with the functioning of the control and monitoring applications in the
sub-station automation system (SAS) and the sub-station control and monitoring system
(SCMS). For instance, when we wish to operate a device (such as a piece of switchgear or
others), the system has the device forbidden to operate if the system is unable to give a ‘control-
right’ for the device using the ‘control-hierarchy’. Figure 3.3-1 depicts the control-hierarchy;
the control-hierarchy is made of three control-levels, two selector-switches, and three control-
points. Either control command of three control-points is permitted so that the other
commands will be forbidden in the system. On this account, no collision of control-points exists
within the system.
Control-point in RCC
Network level
Control-point in OWS/EWS
Communication
EWS OWS
Selector switch
(43R) RCC EWS/OWS
Station level
Control-point in LCP
ON/OFF operation on LCD(MIMIC)
Selector switch (43BCU‡ ) Remote (R) Local (L)

L Operation
R KEY
Bay level
Control-right
Switchgear and others
Control levels Selector switches Control points and positions of selector switches
Figure 3.3-1 Control hierarchy and selector switches

‡Note: The L|R key on the IED is used for the 43BCU switch. The L|R key
can be programmed during manufacture using the PLC function before shipment,
but it can also be programmed by the user.
§Note: The user can implement a hierarchy by programming the PLC. For more
details, see Chapter PLC function.

- 45 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.3.1 Control level and control point

As shown in Figure 3.3-1, the control hierarchy is distributed across three levels; the network
level having a remote-control center (RCC); the station level having operator and engineering
work stations (OWS/EWS); and the bay level† having an IED equipped with an LCD screen.
One of the three control-points (RCC, OWS/EWS, and LCD) is available to issue a control-
command.
†Note:We, hereafter, discuss only the operations at the bay level; that is, we focus only
on operations made from the bay level. The scope of this discussion does not
include operations from either the remote control center or the network levels.
3.3.2 Selector switches and bay operations

At the bay level, the 43BCU switch opens a path to permit the flow of the control-right.
(i) LCD operation

When the user sets the 43BCU switch to “Local (L)”, the issuing of a control-command from
the LCD is possible for the device.
(ii) RCC, EWS, or OWS operation

Alternatively, suppose that the position “Remote (R)” is selected at the 43BCU switch. In this
case, the issuing of the control-command from the LCD is not possible.
3.3.3 Programming of control-right distributions

Figure 3.3-2 illustrates that the PLC function provides the means to distribute the control-
right for the control functions.
The part ○
1 and ○
2 logics are programmed so that, the control-right signal can be
distributed to the respective control applications. With regard to the SPOS01 function, PLC
connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28” has been programmed using DOUT_BOOL feature (for
example). Therefore, the control-right signal is transferred to the select and operate-condition
logic‡ when the user connects the control-hierarchy with the SPOS01 function using
“SPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
‡Note:The select-condition and operate-condition logic are used to decide upon the
execution of a select command or an operate command in the SPOS01 function.
For more detail, see chapter Control and monitoring application: SPOS function:
Operate condition and Select condition. DPOS and TOPS have similar logics; the
user is required to do the connection.

- 46 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
○
1 Checking the bay level ○
3 Distribution of the control-right
SPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT for Control & Monitor
RemoteLocalKey_43BCU
From LOCMT DOUT_BOOL
DIN_UNIT UNIT_TO_BOOL FID ST
LRSW01_LR_ST FID DO
DTYPE
(530001 3109001001) DTYPE ST
DID
DID
DI
To SPOS01
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
SPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL
Operate
FID ST
condition logic
DTYPE
○
2 Distribution of the control-right DID
DI
for General controls To SPOS02
LEDR_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL 510001 820102ED50 SPOS02IN_TMP_28 Select
FID ST
condition logic
DTYPE
DID Operate
condition logic
DI
To LEDR
DPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT Select DOUT_BOOL
condition logic FID ST
DTYPE
Operate
condition logic DID
GCNT_CTRL_RIGHT
DI
DOUT_BOOL To DPOS01
FID ST
DTYPE 512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28 Select
DID condition logic
DI DPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT Operate
To GCNT DOUT_BOOL condition logic
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT01IN_TMP_51 FID ST
Select
DTYPE
condition logic
DID
Operate
DI
condition logic To DPOS02
512001 820302ED50 DPOS02IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
Operate
condition logic
TPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL
FID ST
DTYPE
DID
DI
To TPOS02
513001 810401ED50 TPOS02IN_TMP_21 Select
condition logic
TPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT Operate
DOUT_BOOL condition logic
FID ST
DTYPE
DID
DI
To TPOS02
513001 810402ED50 TPOS02IN_TMP_21 Select
condition logic
Operate
condition logic
To other control functions
Figure 3.3-2 Control-right programmed

- 47 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Common controls (CMNCTRL)

The CMNCTRL function consists of two parts. The former part (CMNCTRL1) is used to
prevent double-commands, which are forbidden, by the use of select-states for the respective
control functions. The latter part (CMNCTRL2) is served as a mediator to provide a bridge
between functions.

- 48 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.4.1 Double command blocking (DCB)

For control functions, the operating principle is that priority is given to the first command
received and shall be executed first. In other words, successive commands received do not have
the right to run until the first command received has failed to complete its operation (that is,
the principle of double command blocking (DCB) is established). The principle is significant for
protection and control devices in the sub-station†. Figure 3.4-1 illustrates how each control
function generates a SLD_RPT signal; the aggregation of SLD_RPT signals is performed in the
CMNCTRL1 function. The resultant signal is output at PLC connection point “DCB SND OR”.
The resultant signal is returned to the respective control function as feedback.
“From 61850 CMNCTRL1 function
communication 510001 0001011001 DCB RCV OR
“stVal” message 2
SPOS function
SPOS01 function
To 61850
Reception of “DCB”
communication
Output of “StSeld” SPOS01_STD_RPT DCB SND OR “stVal” message 1
SPOS02 function SPOS02_STD_RPT To control functions

(510001 0008001F42) in its own
SPOS03 function SPOS03_STD_RPT
SPOS20 function
SPOS20_STD_RPT
DPOS function
≥1
Reception of “DCB”
Output of “StSeld” DPOS01_STD_RPT
DPOS01 function
DPOS72 function
DPOS72_STD_RPT
TPOS function
SOFTSW function
Figure 3.4-1 DCB operation in CMNCTRL1 function

†Note:Let us assume that the control function in IED-1 controls CB1, as shown in Figure
3.4-2. IEDs -2 to -10 are forbidden to operate their CBs throughout the period that
IED-1 is in operation. Control functions are also forbidden to operate CB1 when
the automatic sequence controlling function (ASEQ) is in operation. We discuss
the ASEQ function later. (See Chapter Control and monitoring application:

- 49 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Automatic sequence controlling function)
In Figure 3.4-1, the CMNCTRL1 function generates a message denoted with the number
1; Figure 3.4-2 exemplifies that the IED-1 generates the “stVal” message 1. In addition, IEDs-
2 to -10 are also required to receive message 1, this is denoted with the number 2. For
IEC61850 communication, the “stVal” messages 1 and 2 are carried by GOOSE publish and
GOOSE subscribe. Thus, for all IEDs (i.e., IED-1 to IED-10 of Figure 3.4-2), it is required to
set the GOOSE publish destination corresponding to the message.
Ring LAN network constructed for the SAS

stVal message
1 2 2 2
IED-1 IED-2 IED-3 IED-10
CB1 CB2 CB3 CB10
Figure 3.4-2 Sending and reception of stVal message
Figure 3.4-3 demonstrates how the GOOSE publish destination is set with regard to the
DCB message. The user is required to set the destination for each respective IED by selecting
the signal “DCB SND OR”, corresponding to the GOOSE publish, this must be performed at
the respective screens in GR-TIEMS†. That is, the user should select the “stVal” item for each
IED. After setting, the user should write the setting date for each respective IED.
○
1 Selected IED
○2 Required settings in
the respective IEDs.
Figure 3.4-3 Example of DCB setting for IED-1 using GR-TIEMS

†Note:For more operation information on GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.

- 50 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.4.2 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal

The control and monitoring functions are mutually interconnected within the IED; hence,
cascading features are provided to transfer information between them so that the user does
not need to check the interconnections. Approximately 1500 signals are included to facilitate
the internal connection of the control and monitoring functions; their signals are distributed
into BIT, UNIT, BOOLEAN types, which are listed later. Figure 3.4-4 exemplifies the
“PLC_BIT_0201” signal, which may be used for recording events and other purposes.
CMNCTRL2
function
PLC_O_BIT_0201 For
・Event record function
5A0101 800200EF40 PLC_BIT_0201 (5A0101 8002001F40)
・Communication (required mapping)
Information ・LEDs
cascaded§ ・IED screen display
・Binary output module
etc…
Figure 3.4-4 Cascading information using signal “PLC_BIT_0201”
3.4.3 Provision of selected status

Let us assume that a select-command is sent for an IED to control a target-device by the
substation automation system (SAS†), but the target-device is not ready to be controlled. The
unready condition might be due to the target-device already being in operation (e.g., CB
tripping) or a failure of the device may have occurred; thus, the IED has to drop the select-
command. If this occurs, the IED is required to send a message stating the reason to the SAS†.
Table 3.4-1 lists the messages generated in the CMNCTRL1 function describing the failure.
Table 3.4-1 Reason messages due to the release of the select-command
Signal Number Signal Name Description
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
5A0001 2008001008 SCS_ORCAT
5A0001 2208001001 SCS_ADDCAUSE Reason codes for the SAS†
5A0001 6A08001009 SCS_ORIDENT
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
†Note:The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for
operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba.
3.4.4 Miscellaneous settings

The CMNCTRL1 function has the following five common settings:
1. Control direction: The [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of the SPOS,
DPOS and TPOS functions. If required these functions can be in the
same control direction, set On for the scheme switch [SDCEN].
2. Return value: When the number of the counter reaches its maximum value (in case
of the default setting, 999,999), it can return and begin

- 51 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set with

[CNTRV].
3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made, but the control operation
of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined time
limit, the selection is canceled. The time limit can be set using
[TSC]; the range is between 30 and 300sec. having a 1sec. step.
4. Time out: When the selection of the target device and its control execution is
made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting
time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from
the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300sec. in 1
sec. steps.
5. Counter limit: The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and
2,147,483,647 using [CNTVALMAX]. The default setting is 999,999.
6. Quality signal: If “q” or “Quality” information shall not be taken for controlling, set
On for setting [QBLK]. The QBLK clears the content of quality
information, so that control operation can be achieved with the
absence of quality information.

- 52 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.4.5 Setting

- 53 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
CMNCTRL (FunctionID:5A0001)
SDCEN Off / On - Setting of the control to the same direction Off

CNTRV 0-1 - Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX] level 0
TSC 30 - 300 - Selection cancel time-out timer 30
EXEWAIT 30 - 300 - Waiting execute operation time-out timer 30
CNTVALMAX 9 - 2147483647 - Upper limit level of the counter 999999
QBLK Off / On - Behavior of quality for DCB Off
TRV-BLK Off / On - To block non-selectable behavior on TRAVELLING Off

- 54 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.4.6 Signal
 PLC connection points
CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001)
800800EDE1 ADD_DCB_SND Additional condition for double command blocking
800800EFB7 LAN_CONN_FAIL_IN
800800EF40 PLC_I_001 PLC event information 1
… …. …
800800EFA2 PLC_I_099 PLC event information 99
800800EFA3 PLC_I_100 PLC event information 100
800800EFB8 TIME_SYN_FAIL_IN
800800EDE0 TRAVELLING_PLC travelling signal for PLC
 PLC monitoring point

0008001F45 AUTO SEL LOCK OR SEL Lock OR for AUTOSEQ
0008001F43 CNT CTRL OR CNT CTRL OR for Event Message
0008001F41 DCB RCV OR DCB RCV OR for SEL Lock
0008001F42 DCB SND OR DCB SND OR for GOOSE
8008001FB7 LAN_CONN_FAIL
0008001F44 OPE_TIME RST OR Operation Time RST OR for Event Message
0008001F46 RELAYTRIP EXTENSION Relay Trip signal
2208001001 SCS_ADDCAUSE Self-cancellation signal(AddCause)
8008001FB8 TIME_SYN_FAIL
0008001F40 TRAVELING OR Traveling OR for SEL Lock
0008001F50 PLC_O_001 PLC event output 1
… …. …
0008001FB2 PLC_O_099 PLC event output 99

- 55 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

0008001FB3 PLC_O_100 PLC event output 100

CMNCTRL 2(Function ID: 5A0101)
320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal1
320001EF43 CHK_ROMRAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal2
320002EF43 CHK_SUM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal3
320003EF43 CHK_PROGRAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal4
320004EF43 CHK_RAM_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal5
320005EF43 CHK_ECC_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal6
320006EF43 CHK_SAMPLING_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal7
320007EF43 CHK_ACC1_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal8
320010EF43 CHK_GOOSERCV_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal11
320011EF43 CHK_PING1_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal12
320012EF43 CHK_PING2_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal13
320013EF43 CHK_CMLV_DAT_M MainCPU Monitoring Siganal14
800000EF40 PLC_BIT_0001 PLC event bit information 1
…. …. ….
000000EF42 PLC_BOOL_1 PLC event bool information 1

- 56 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

320014EF43 PLC_UINT32_15 PLC event uint32 information 15
310000EF41 PLC_UINT_1 PLC event unit information 1
310015EF41 PLC_UINT_16 PLC event uint32 information 16

0000001F42 PLC_O_BOOL_1 PLC event bool output 1

- 57 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

8000001F40 PLC_O_BIT_001 PLC event bit output 1
…. …. ….

- 58 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Local, remote and PLC control

The user can select either local or remote control by pressing the L│R key on the front
panel of the IED. Selection is executed within the LOCRMT function. Control logic is provided
by default, but the user can customize each application using the PLC function and PLC
connection points. Generally, the LOCRMT function is applied within all IEDs. Figure 3.5-1
shows the LOCRMT logic. Note that the LOCRMT function changes for the remote control
unconditionally if the operation/function keys on the front panel are not touched within 35
minutes in the local control.
From KEYINPUT function
LOCRMT function (Function ID: 530001) LRSW01_LR_ST
L/R CHG (530001 3109001001)
Remote to local S
(240001 31000A1735)
LRSW01_CH_LR_LCD & 1≥
R
Local to remote
&
1≥
If the user does not touch the
operation/function keys on the front panel &
within 35 min. in the local control, the IED
will be changed for the remote control
unconditionally.
530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01

Disable default logic
530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02
Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
Figure 3.5-1 LOCRMT logic

- 59 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.5.1 Local control

Local control refers to control operation from the front panel of the IED. Either the DIR or the
SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user.
3.5.2 Remote control

Remote control refers to control operation from a remote control center or the SAS server.
Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the
user. Note that the parameters used in the control commands are defined in international
standards†. The parameter details are provided in the communication profiles. See Chapter
Communication protocol or Appendices.
†Note:As a rule, the control commands have parameters. For example, the “Off to On”
and “On to Off” control directions that are used in commands are pre-configured
as parameters in the communication protocol. Note that the parameters vary
depending upon the respective protocol used, such as IEC61850 and others. For
IEC61850, Table 3.5-1 shows the parameters defined: the rule for control direction
can be found in “ctlVal”, the command publisher is recognized using the parameter
“origin”. For more information about the parameters, see Appendix IEC61850
MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS.
Table 3.5-1 Defined command parameters in IEC61850-7-2

Parameter Types Descriptions
ctlVal Control direction (On or Off)
origin Indicates the command publisher
ctlNum Sequential Number
T Time that the command is sent
Test Test information (Test/On)
Check Interlock synchronizing
3.5.3 Programmable logic control (PLC)

PLC function should be used in order that user can have preferred control schemes. The user
can find several connection points to control applications in the functions. Automatic sequence
control (ASEQ) function is required in order that the user-preferred control scheme will start,
as shown in Figure 3.5-2.

- 60 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
ASEQ User’s PLC SPOS User’s PLC DPOS

logic logic
PLC monitoring point PLC connection point
Figure 3.5-2 Example of user-preferred control scheme using PLC user logic
Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in
the DIR mode.
3.5.4 Signal for Local/Remote control

Note: The following references are used in the column “M/O” in Table 3.5-2 and Table
3.5-3:
“O” means the signal is optional.
“M” means the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user
may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” means that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 3.5-2 PLC connection point (Input point for LOCRMT)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
240001 31000A1735 L/R CHG [L/R] key “push” N/A

530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 Disable condition by PLC O
530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 User configurable condition by PLC O
Table 3.5-3 Mapping points for LOCRMT

530001 3009011008 LRSW01_LR_ORCAT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A

530001 6A09011009 LRSW01_LR_ORIDENT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A
Table 3.5-4 PLC monitoring point (LOCRMT)

530001 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST Local(T) / Remote(F) status (single bit expression)

530001 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT Local(0x40) / Remote(0x80) status (double bit expression)

- 61 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.5.5 Signal
LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST S43BCU state
3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT S43BCU state for SAS

LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 PLC signal 1(PLC use)
800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 PLC signal 2(change mode LOCAL or REMOTE)

- 62 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
LED reset function (LEDR)

A number of LEDs are lined on the IED front panel. For example, “TRIP” LED is lit when a
tripping command is issued for the CB. “TRIP” LED is being illuminated until the user can
confirm the tripped CB; hence, the user can reliably determine that tripping CB has been
initiated by inspection. The following operations are possible to resetting the LED by the LED
reset (LEDR) function, which is furnished in the IED:
1 Pushing “CLEAR” key1
2 Operation by GR-TIEMS2
3 Operation by the SAS
1Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Outline. Note that pressing the
“CLEAR” key causes the Reset of the LEDs.
2Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool.

- 63 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.6.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs

The user should set scheme switch [LEDDR1] to On prior to the LEDR operation. Figure 3.6-1
shows selection logic in the LEDR function.
Wait for a command
Wait for a next command

Select logic
Cancel logic
Resetting LED by remote-SAS Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Signal reception Select
Selection logic Signal output
IEC61850 decision Success
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.6-1 Outline of selection command for resetting LEDs
(i) Input signal required mapping

Figure 3.6-2 shows the select logic when a “Select command (reset)” signal is applied to the
LEDR function. The logic has an input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception;
the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850 communication. The function will fail to operate
if mapping is not performed correctly. We will discuss how to map the input points for the
IEC61850 communication in section 3.6.5.
Input Selection logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001)

LEDR01_FSE_RCV
Command “Reset”
For SBO operation (528001 8007011F42)
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Selection
command & 1≥
&
For DIR operation
Operation
command &
LEDR01_NSD_CSF
To “Wait for a next command”
(528001 8307011F41)
0 t
528001 0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
0.2s
0 t
Failed
0.3s
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operation

(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*)
In DIR operate
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function
(AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 3.6-2 Selection logic for resetting LEDs

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 3.6-8.
§Note: An Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals
for automatic control. The LEDR function is blocked for the ASEQ function when
it is in operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control

- 64 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.

*Note:The LEDR function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a
“ctlmodel” signal when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The LEDR function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“LEDR01_NSD_CSF”, when the LEDR function determines that the input signal “Select
command (reset)” is true. If the LEDR function determines that the “LEDR01_NSD_CSF” is
not true, the LEDR function returns to the “Wait for a next command” stage.
(iii) Select condition

Figure 3.6-3 shows the select condition logic in the LEDR function.
Command blocking*1 (S4301 defines ”Blocked”)
S4301_STATE To selection logic
1≥ & Select condition
Double Command Blocking detected*2
DCB RCV OR
Other devices traveling detected*3

Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *4
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Users must setup this condition correctly

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point) *5
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 3.6-3 Select condition logic in LEDR*6

*1Note: “command blocking” disables any operation except its own: the “command
blocking” is initiated by the status of “S4301” in a software controller (SOFTSW).
The IEC 61850 standard defines “command blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more
information on S4301, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Software
switch control function. See the signal “S4301_STATE” of Table 3.6-1.
*2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy in the
common control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation.
The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted
as “DCB RCV_OR in Table 3.6-1. For more information, see Chapter Control and
monitoring application: Common controls.
*3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is

- 65 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.6-1.

*4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
*5Note: The user needs to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic
using the connection point “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”. For more information, see
chapter Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy.
“LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT” is provided in Table 3.6-2.
*6Note: To identify the input point of the LEDR function, see Table 3.6-1.
Table 3.6-1 Input signals for condition logic

522001 000A011001 S4301_STATE Command Blocking status ( Off / Blocked) N/A

5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking(DCB) is in progress. N/A
5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
523001 000D001F40 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Automatic sequence control is in progress. N/A
Table 3.6-2 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic)
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LED Reset control hierarchy M
Table 3.6-3 Setting of LEDR

Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
LEDDR1_EN Activate LED reset control On Off / On

- 66 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.6.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode

In the SBO mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are
satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation
returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 3.6-4 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
Cancel by the remote-end

Success
Command Reset from the Signal reception in Cancel

Cancel logic Do nothing
remote-end IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.6-4 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
(ii) Input signal required mapping

Figure 3.6-6 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same the
same as that for the signal as shown in Figure 3.6-2.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in LEDR Output

Command “Cancel”
Cancel command
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
&
Unmatched condition To “Wait for a command”

detected† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 3.6-5 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end

†Note:The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.

- 67 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.6.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode

Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic is applied to reset LEDs.
Resetting LEDs is executed when the operate conditions are satisfied.
Wait for a command
LED resetting by the remote-end

LED resetting from the Success
Operation
remote-end Signal reception in Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
LED resetting by the local-end

Success
Operation
Pushing “CLEAR” key Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 3.6-6 Outline of operation command for resetting LEDs

†Note: For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline.
(i) Mapping required Input signal

Figure 3.6-7 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operation command (reset)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the “Operation command (reset)” signal. Pressing “CLEAR” key or the operation
on GR-TIEMS will reset LEDs.
Input Select logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001) To LED3–LED26†

Command “Operating reset”
Operation
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ 528001 3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
command & ≥
Operate condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§”
in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
From KEYINPUT
240001 31000E1730
LEDR_KEY_CLEAR
CLEAR
From TOOL_COM (GR-TIMES) 1≥

201501 3101001001
LEDR_TOOL_CLEAR
LED_RESET_TOOL
Figure 3.6-7 Operation logic for resetting LEDs
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The operation logic issues a “LED_RST_COM” signal to clear the LEDs†. The signal
“LED_RST_COM” is also transferred to the remote-end, when signal mapping is executed in
IEC61850 communication. (See section 3.6.5)

- 68 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
†Note:Although the “LED_RST_COM” signal is connected previously with several LEDs,

by the manufacturer, user can also connect the signal with the LEDs. See section
3.6.4 for how to connect.
(iii) Operate condition

Figure 3.6-8 shows the operate condition logic of the LEDR function, which is used to determine
a reset-condition for the operation.
Command blocking*1 (S4301 defines ”Blocked”)
S4301_STATE To operate logic
1≥ & Operate condition
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 3.6-8 Operate condition logic in LEDR*6

*1Note: “Command blocking” disables all operation except for its own: the “command
blocking” function is initiated by the status of “S4301” in a software controller
(SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “command blocking” function as
“CmdBlk”. For more information on S4301, see Chapter Control and monitoring
application: Software switch control function. See the signal “S4301_STATE” of
Table 3.6-1.
*2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy in the
common control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation.
The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted
as “DCB RCV_OR in Table 3.6-1. For more information, see Chapter Control and
*3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.6-1.
*4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
*5Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user must connect that to the select condition logic using the connection point
“LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”. For more information, see chapter Control and

- 69 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
monitoring application: Control hierarchy. “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT” is provided

in Table 3.6-2.
3.6.4 Settings in LED logics

The user can program the status and the signal of the LED, so that the LEDs are possible to
switch off upon occurrence of the reset. As shown in the logic relating to the LED†, each logic
has a timer and a setting; accordingly, setting Latch should be set for the operation of the
LEDR function. Additionally, the user should connect the signal LED_RST_CMD with the LED
logic.
†Note:For more information on LED logics, see Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface: LED indicators.
(i) Settings using GR-TIEMS

Figure 3.6-9 shows how to connect the reset signal LED_RST_CMD for the LED-03 logic. The
user can assign a reset signal for the respective LED logics by the drag and drop operation.
The user should also select Latch for the behavior from the pull-down menu.
Set [Behavior] to Latch

Choose the signal
LED_RST_CMD for the
LED-03 logic
Figure 3.6-9 Settings for LED-03 circuit provided by “Setting I/O menu” of GR-TIEMS
(ii) Settings using IED screen

The operation from the IED screen can also be set. See Chapter User interface: I/O setting sub-
menu.

- 70 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.6.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication

The user can operate the LEDR function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the LEDR function is designed for “LEDRs” in the IEC 61850
standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed
below:
Step1: Editing Logical Node
Step2: Mapping output data
Step3: Mapping input data
(i) Editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the LEDR function. Figure 3.6-10
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “logical node zero (LLN0)” is chosen for the LERD
function. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode should be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 3.6-10 Defining “LEDRs” object in LLN0 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.6-11 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as “LLN0”. In the SBO mode, the user
should select the following items in the “LLN0$LEDRs” using GR-TIEMS:

- 71 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Figure 3.6-11 LN editing for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 3.6-12 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as LLN0. In the DIR mode, the following
three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 3.6-12 LN editing for DIR mode (for example)
(ii) Mapping output data

The user should group the LEDR signals with regard to GOOSE and Report; the user should
map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 3.6-13 illustrates how to
map a signal for IEC61850 communication; it indicates that the signals for the LEDR function

- 72 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
are required to be mapped for IEC 61850 communication

Table 3.6-4 Mapping signals for SPC object
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orCat orCategory ST 5280013107011008 LEDR01_ORCAT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5280016A07011009 LEDR01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stVal BOOLEAN ST 5280013107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5280010007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Figure 3.6-13 orCat attribute mapped for LEDRs object of LLN0
(iii) Mapping input data

The LEDR function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
3.6-5 shows the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs”; the user should map the input-point to the Object references having
attributes CO and CF†. Figure 3.6-14 shows how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).

- 73 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 3.6-5 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check CO 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Figure 3.6-14 Input-point mapped for LLN0

- 74 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.6.6 Setting
Reset Control (Function ID: 528001)
LEDDR1-EN Off / On - LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off

- 75 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.6.7 Signal
TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001)
8007011D53 LEDR01_SC Select command
0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD The controllable data is in the status selected (StSeld)
3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD LEDR reset command output
8007011D57 LEDR01_EC Execute command
8007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS Execute command by OWS(HMI)
8007011D56 LEDR01_EC_RCC Execute command by RCC
8007011D51 LEDR01_SC_OWS Select command by OWS(HMI)
8007011D52 LEDR01_SC_RCC Select command by RCC
8E07011F47 LEDR01_SLD_TM0 Signal after MCTLEDR_SC001
8607011F46 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC001
8307011F41 LEDR01_NSD_CSF Signal after KC_LEDR_SA001
8607011F45 LEDR01_TMP3 Signal after KC_LEDR_SC001
8007011F42 LEDR01_FSE_RCV Signal before LC_LEDR_SA002
8B07011F44 LEDR01_CTR_SGU Signal before KC_LEDR_SC001
8207011F40 LEDR01_TMP1 Signal before KC_LEDR_SA001
8707011F48 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC002
8F07011F49 LEDR01_EX_CMP_TM0 Signal after MCTLEDR_SC002
8607011F43 LEDR01_TMP2 Signal after KC_LEDR_SA002
 Connection point in PLC logic

820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LEDR01 control right from PLC
 Mapping point
7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Dev01 control request

- 76 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Counter function for the general (GCNT)

When a signal is generated externally and the signal is received by generic counter function
(GCNT), the GCNT function can count their signal transitions. Figure 3.7-1 shows signals are
generated repeatedly. For example, if the number of generated signals should be reported, the
GCNT function counts the number of the signal transitions; the function can report them. A
binary input-circuit (BI) is used to receive the signal, when a device (external object) reports
its state.
Closed/Open signals
GCNT01_ CNT_ VAL
Inputs 320E 011D20
Changes in device status
(e.g., operations of 43S) BI 540001 800E 01E DE 0 GCNT01_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT01
Operations at the local or Control commands GCNT06_ CNT_ VAL

remote-end 320E 061D20
540001 800E 06E DE 0 GCNT06_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT06
(e.g., issuing commands)
Changes in a function Status signals GCNT32_ CNT_ VAL

status 320E 201D20
(e.g., function operations)
540001 800E 20E DE 0 GCNT32_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT32
Count objects Signals generated GCNT functions
Figure 3.7-1 Reception of signals at GCNT functions

- 77 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the
acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are
provided in the GCNT functions. Thirty-two independent GCNT counters† are available. That
is, counters GCNT01 to GCNT32† can operate simultaneously. The values counted are stored
in the non-volatile memory so that they are not erased if the power supply to the IED is
interrupted.
For simplicity, only the GCNT01 function is discussed; the features in the remaining GCNT02–
GCNT32 functions are identical to the GCNT01 function.
3.7.1 Counter setting for a signal

(i) Setting for count timing
In the GCNT01 function count timing is grouped into three, as shown in Figure 3.7-2 (a, b, and
c). When the user wishes to count the On(Closed), set On for the scheme switch [GCNT01-
CNTS]; conversely, set Off for the scheme switch when the Off(Open) is to be counted.
Additionally, OnOff is provided for counting the number of pulses. If the GCNT01 function is
not required, set NA for the scheme switch.
a. On (Closed) signals
“On” is counted on the rising edge of the pulse
Counter 1 2 … n …
b. Off (Open) signals
“Off” is counted on the falling edge of the pulse
c. OnOff (Closed-Open) signals
“OnOff” is counted in response to pulses.
Figure 3.7-2 Count types
(ii) Setting the maximum value

The GCNT01 function is able to count to 2147483647 (=231−1). When the count-value reaches
the value “2147483647”, the count-value returns to an initial-value. If the user wishes to set a
different maximum number in place of “2147483647”, the user can use the setting [GCNT01-

- 78 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum number
from 9 to 2147483647.
(iii) Setting the initial-value

The counter returns to an initial-value when the counter reaches the maximum value;
generally, the initial-value is set to either zero or one (0 or 1); hence, the number is re-counted
from either “0 (or 1)” following the maximum value. If the user wishes to set an alternative
initial number, setting [GCNT01-CNTRV] can be used. Note that the user can select the initial-
value from zero (0) to 999999.
Counter
Max set by [GCNT01-CNTMAX]
Initial-value set by [GCNT01-CNTRV]

0
Time
Figure 3.7-3 Maximum-value and initial-value
(iv) Setting for the report (Dead band)

The counter-value can be reported to the remote-end; the user can set the report-timing using
the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. For example, if the counter-value is to be reported for every change,
the user should set 0 for the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. When five(5) is set for the [GCNT01-SDB],
reporting is performed when the counter has incremented by six(6) following the previously
reported counter-value.
Counter Counter Counter
10 10 10
5 5 5
0 Time 0 Time 0 Time
Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting Reporting
a. 0 set for [GCNT01-SDB] b. 1 set for [GCNT01-SDB] c. 5 set for [GCNT01-SDB]
Figure 3.7-4 Counter value and report timing

- 79 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.7.1 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes

The user should set scheme switch [GCNT01-EN] to On prior to counting.
(i) Receiving “Select command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 3.7-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage Wait for a next command
Select command Reset from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Signal Cancel command

Select
reception Select logic Signal output
decision Success
IEC61850
Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 3.7-5 Outline of Select command ‘Reset’
Input point required mapping

Figure 3.7-6 shows the select logic when a “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”
signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The logic has an input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”
for the reception of the select command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850
communication. The function will fail to operate if mapping is not performed correctly. We will
discuss how to map the input-points for IEC61850 communication in section 3.7.4.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Complete” signal at the output point
“GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”, when the GCNT01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Reset-Control” is true. If the GCNT01 function determines that the “Remote-Reset-
Control” is not true, the GCNTS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 80 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Select logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 54001)

Command “Remote-Reset-Control”
For SBO operation
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation command”
To BO connection
Operate command
& “GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”
(540001 8A0E011E76)
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” 0 t

In SBO operate Complete
0.2s
In DIR operate
To “Wait for a command”
“GCNT01_SLF_CSCN”
Select condition‡ (540001 8B0E011E7B)
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress 0 t
Select “Failed”
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
0.3s
Figure 3.7-6 Select ‘Reset’ in GCNT01††

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition logic. For more
§Note:An automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for
automatic control. The GCNT01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when
it is in operation. For more information on the ASEQ function, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
*Note:The GNCT01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode” using
a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using IEC61850.
To use this signal, the user should map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other GCNT02–GCNT32 logics, see
Table 3.7-1 for the inputs and Table 3.7-4 for the outputs.

- 81 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Select condition

Figure 3.7-8 shows the select condition logic in the GCNT01 function. The GCNT01 function
checks the condition for the select command using the signal “S4301_STATE” and other signals.
When resetting the counter is performed from the “Statics sub-menu” in the HMI operation†,
the user should set On for scheme switch [GCNT01-HMI].
†Note: The HMI operation is discussed in Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
From SOTFSW*1 GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001)

Command blocking*1(S4301 defines ”Blocked”)
S4301_STATE To select logic
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
From Control hierarchy *5
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51

&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 3.7-7 Select condition logic for Reset in GCNT01

1Note: “Command blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “command
blocking” is initiated by the status of “S4301” in a software switch controller
function (SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as
“CmdBlk”. For more information on “S4301”, see Chapter Control and monitoring
application: Software switch control function. (Table 3.7-2)
2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used to
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB
operating signal is denoted as “DCB RCB OR” in Table 3.7-2.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any
device for the duration that the event is detected. The detected signal is denoted
as “Traveling OR” in Table 3.7-2.
4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
5Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
using the connection pint “GCNT00IN_TMP_51” (see Table 3.7-3). For more
information, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy.

- 82 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for
each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for optional use.
“M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are
used.
“N/A” indicates that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 3.7-1 Mapping points for the reception of control command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data) M

… … …
Table 3.7-2 Input signals to condition logic

522001 000A011001 S4301_STATE Command Blocking status ( Off / Blocked) N/A

Table 3.7-3 PLC Connection point (Input signals from the control hierarchy logic)
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 Control hierarchy for GCNT01–32 M
Table 3.7-4 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “select complete/ failed” for BIO)
540001 8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 Selection completed (Mapping)

… … …
5400018B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select failed
…. … …
Table 3.7-5 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “stSeld” for BIO)

540001 000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS

- 83 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… … …
(iv) Setting names
Table 3.7-6 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT32

GCNTxx-EN Activation of the GCNTxx function On Off / On

GCNTxx- Counter is used for the HMI operation in the GCNTxx function Off Off / On
HMI

- 84 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.7.2 Cancel logic for SBO mode

In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied; accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the
operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)

remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logics Wait for a next command
Cancel from the remote-end

Select command Success
Reset from the
Signal reception Cancel
remote-end Cancel logic Do nothing
in IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is the same as that
for the signal “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”, when the GCNT01 function has determined that the signal “Remote-
cancel” is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued if the function is able to determine
that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.
Input Cancel logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) To “Wait for a command”

Command “Remote-cancel”
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”
Cancel command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ (540001 840E011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Unmatched condition detected *1 &
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 3.7-9 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in GCNT01

1Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in

- 85 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
(ii) Signal name and number

Table 3.7-7 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ logic)
540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal

… … …

- 86 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.7.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes

After the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to clear the counters.
(i) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 3.7-10 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
Signal reception Operate logic Signal output
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 3.7-10 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
Mapping required for Input point

Figure 3.7-11 illustrates the operation logic when an “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-
Control)” signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function, in Figure 3.7-11, can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”,
when the GCNT01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Reset-Control” is true.
Input Operate logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) “GCNT01_EC_OK_CSC”

Command “Remote-Reset-Control” (540001 820E011E84)
Operate Cmd.
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
& 1≥
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Statics-counter
Figure 3.7-11 Operate ‘On’ from the remote-end ††

§Note:The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the GCNT02–32 logics, see Table
3.7-1 for the mapping points, Table 3.7-8 for the outputs.
(ii) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the local-end

Figure 3.7-12 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the local-end.

- 87 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 3.7-12 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
New counter value

Figure 3.7-13 shows that the user can set a new value for the counter using the statics sub-
menu†. The new value is applied into “Statics counter” point in Figure 3.7-11.
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
0
0
Figure 3.7-13 Counter menu in the statics sub-menu

†Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”, when the new
value applied from the sub-menu is appropriate.

- 88 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Similar to the select condition (see sec.3.7.1(ii)), the GCNT01 function has an operate-condition
logic. Figure 3.7-14 shows the operate-condition logic.
From SOTFSW*1 GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001)
Command blocking*1(S4301 defines ”Blocked”)
S4301_STATE To operate logic
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51

&
From CMNCTRL
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 3.7-14 Operate condition logic for GCNT01

1–5Note: The signals and settings in Figure 3.7-14 are same as the signals shown in
Figure 3.7-7.
(iv) Signal names and number

Table 3.7-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for BIO)
540001 820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal

…. …. ….

- 89 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user can operate the GCNT function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the GCNT function is designed for the class of “Integer Status
Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
steps, each of which is discussed below:

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the GCNT01 function. Figure 3.7-15
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Integer Status controller (ISCSO)” is chosen for the
GCNT01 function. After the user has defined an object “ISCSO”, the GCNT01 logical node can
be saved with the name “GIGO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object “ISCSO”
in the GGIO logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing
for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 3.7-15 Defining “ISCSO” object in GIGO3302 logic node

- 90 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.7-16 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as “GIGO3302”; in the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GIGO3302$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Figure 3.7-16 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 3.7-17 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as save as “GIGO3302”; in the DIR
mode, the following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS.
 Oper
 Origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 3.7-17 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)

- 91 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user should group the GCNT01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS (Figure 3.7-18 illustrates
how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the GCNT01 function are required to
map the IEC 61850 communications.
Table 3.7-9 Mapping signals required for GIGO3302 object in GCNT01 function
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 540001300e011D23 GCNT01_CNT_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5400016A0e011FA7 GCNT01_CNT_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 540001320e011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 540001000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Drag and drop
Figure 3.7-18 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO object of GIGO3302

The GCNT01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”. Table 3.7-10 shows the input-point
“GCNT01_CMM_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GIGO3302$ISCSO1”; the user should map
the input-point to the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC†. Figure 3.7-19 shows
how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” in the
functional constraint (FC).

- 92 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 3.7-10 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 3.7-19 Input-point mapped for GIGO3302

- 93 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.7.5 Setting
Counter (Function ID: 540001)
GCNT01-EN Off / On - Switch for counter01 On

…. …. …. …..
GCNT31-EN Off / On - Switch for counter31 Off
GCNT32-EN Off / On - Switch for counter32 Off
Counter 01 NA / On / Off /
GCNT01-CNTS - Condition to count at GCNT01 NA
OnOff
GCNT01-SDB 0 - 999 - Value about Sending Dead Band at Counter01 0
GCNT01-CNTRV 0/1 - Set number when the counter is rolled up 0
GCNT01-CNTMAX 9 - 2147483647 - Largest number for counting 999999
ARC CLOSE
GCNT01-DEVNAME [Preferred name] - Name of Counter01 !
COMMAND
GCNT01-HMI Off / On - Display switch of Counter01 Off
OnOff
Count2 (Not
Assigned)
OnOff
Count3 (Not
Assigned)
…. …. …. ….
OnOff
Count31 (Not
Assigned)
OnOff
Count32 (Not
Assigned)
!Note: The user can enter a preferred setting name using GR-TIEMS.
Note: The number of counters in the GCNT depends on IED model. We omit the setting
tables of GCNT04 etc. because the setting items are the same except the device
number.

- 94 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.7.6 Signal
 Signal monitoring points in GCNT01
GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
000E001F41 GCNT00_CCTRL_COUNTER GCNT00 cmnctrl counter correction summarize
800E001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD
800E001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC
800E001D60 GCNT00_CH_EC_RMT GCNT00 count change execute command by Remote
800E001D54 GCNT00_CH_SC_LCD GCNT00 count change select command by LCD
800E001D5B GCNT00_CH_SC_OWS GCNT00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5C GCNT00_CH_SC_RCC GCNT00 count change select command by RCC
800E001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RMT GCNT00 count change select command by Remote
840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
310E011D21 GCNT01_CNT_QLT GCNT01 count quality
320E011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL GCNT01 count value
000E011F42 GCNT01_CORR_INS GCNT01 correction instruction
890E011EA2 GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN GCNT01 control logic stage(under selection)
830E011E8B GCNT01_EC_F_CSCN GCNT01 execute command fail condition signal
820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 selected condition signal
8B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select fail condition signal
000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
 Connection points in PLC logics in GCNT01

800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 GCNT00IN_TMP_51
800E01EDE0 GCNT01_PLC_SGNL GCNT01 plc signal
 Mapping point in GCNT01

700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data)
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the GCNT function. We
have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” point
for the 2nd device, use the description of “GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN” in place
of “GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN”. The user can obtain the ID value of

- 95 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
“GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” by using the following steps:

Step 1 Find the element ID for GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN (i.e.,
“890E011EA2”)
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “890E021EA2” of
“GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN”) The ID is expressed in
hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must change the
device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal
notation.

- 96 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Mode control function (MDCTRL)

For the user, mode control (MDCTRL) function can provide test function (TEST-FB) interface,
which is a command to change the mode in the function. MDCTRL function consists of two
parts: (1) On-mode or Test-mode sensing in IED and (2) interface between IED and SAS.

- 97 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.8.1 Function
(i) Mode sensor
The MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED.
To use this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to
operation. During the operation, a select signal and an operate signal are provided for the
TEST-FB when the SAS provides a test command for the IED; hence, the MDCTRL function
comes with two time-out timers. Setting [MDCTRL-SELRST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling a select command; setting [MDCTRL-EXERST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling an operate command.
(ii) Interface for IEC61850

The MDCTRL function can fulfil the two operation modes (On and Test) specified in the IEC
61850 communication, as shown in Table 3.8-1; the MDCTRL function can carry a signal for
changing for the TEST-FB; the signal is generated in the select and control logics in the
MDCTRL function. The change signal is initiated by the mode change command that is
received at the communication interface. Note that control operations from a SAS is only taken
account.
Table 3.8-1 Values of mode and behavior in IEC 61850

Value Mode Definition in IEC 61850
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
1 On
services work and get updated values.
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
services work and get updated values. Data objects will be transmitted
with quality “test”. Control commands with quality test will be
3 Test
accepted only by LNs in “test” or “test-blocked” mode. “Processed as
valid” means that the application should react in the manner what is
foreseen for “test”.
(iii) Input signal from control hierarchy

Note PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition” is required to operate the MDCTRL function; the
user should notice that the connection with the Control hierarchy is made using the connection
point “MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28” (see Table 3.8-2). For more information, see chapter Control
and monitoring application: Control hierarchy.
Table 3.8-2 PLC connection point (Input signal for select condition logic)
550001 821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL control hierarchy condition M

- 98 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user can operate the MDCTRL function over the IEC61850 communication after the
mapping using GR-TIEMS. The user should follow steps,

The user should make a logical node (LN) for the MDCTRL function. Figure 3.8-1exemplifies
LN editing; the LN “LLNO” is chosen for the MDCTRL01 for IEC61850 communication. After
the user defining an object “MOD”, the MDCTRL01 logical node can be saved with the name
“LLNO”. Make a definition of the object “MOD” in MDCTRL01 logical node. Either the SBO
mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing.
Figure 3.8-1 Defining “MOD” object in LLNO logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 3.8-2 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the SBO mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“LLNO$MOD” using the GR-TIEMS;

- 99 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )

Defining DIR mode
Figure 3.8-3 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the DIR mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using the
GR-TIEMS:
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )

The user should group the MDCTRL01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for the IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 3.8-3 shows the required mapping signals in MDCTRL01 function to the IEC 61850
communications. Figure below shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.

- 100 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 3.8-3 Mapping signals for MOD object.

System/LLN0$Mod$origin orCat orCategory ST 5500013013011000 MDCTRL01_ORCAT
System/LLN0$Mod$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5500016A13011009 MDCTRL01_ORIDENT
System/LLN0$Mod stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5500010013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 3.8-4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO

The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 3.8-4 shows the input-
point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “System/LLN0$Mod$”; the user
should map the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC to the input-point. Note that
the user should map the input-point to all attributes having CO and CF. Figure below shows

- 101 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 3.8-4 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Check Check CO 5500017013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod ctlModel ctlModel CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboTimeout INT32U CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboClass sboClass CF
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control”
and “CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
Figure 3.8-5 Input-point mapped for LLNO

- 102 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.8.3 Setting
MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)

MDCTRL-EN Off/On Switch for Mode change operation Off !

MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30 !
MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out timer 30 !
!Note: The user can set an item on Test sub-menu (see Chapter Communication and
maintenance: Test operations or User interface: Test sub-menu).

- 103 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
3.8.4 Signal
 Signal monitoring point
MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC
8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote
2013011001 MDCTRL01_MODE MDCTRL01 mode
8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D52 MDCTRL01_SC_RCC MDCTRL01 select command by RCC
8013011D53 MDCTRL01_SC_RMT MDCTRL01 select command by Remote
0013011F75 MDCTRL01_SE_RCV MDCTRL01 select or execute command received
0013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT MDCTRL01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3113011D80 MDCTRL01_TMP_06 MDCTRL01 control event data (selected)
3113011D81 MDCTRL01_TMP_07 MDCTRL01 control event data (select fail)
3113011D82 MDCTRL01_TMP_08 MDCTRL01 control event data (select release)
3113011D83 MDCTRL01_TMP_09 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute output on)
3113011D84 MDCTRL01_TMP_10 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute command ng)
3113011D86 MDCTRL01_TMP_11 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute fail)
0013011F52 MDCTRL01_TRA MDCTRL01 travelling info
0013011F53 MDCTRL01_TRA_CTR MDCTRL01 travelling info for control
8713011E96 MODE01_CC_FS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail signal
8613011E95 MODE01_CC_SS MDCTRL01 cancel command success signal
8813011E9B MODE01_CC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 cancel command mode err
8313011E9C MODE01_CCF_FCT_CS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail factor condition signal
8313011E9D MODE01_CTR_SGN MDCTRL01 control logic stage(unselected)
8B13011EA2 MODE01_CTR_SGU MDCTRL01 control logic stage(under selection)
8113011E9A MODE01_ECF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 execute command fail factor signalcheck
8013011E93 MODE01_EX_CMP MDCTRL01 execute complete signal
8F13011F58 MODE01_EX_CMP_TMO MDCTRL01 timeout after execute completion
8913011F6C MODE01_EX_CS01 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 01
8A13011F6D MODE01_EX_CS02 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 02
8B13011F6E MODE01_EX_CS03 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 03
8613011E91 MODE01_EX_FFL MDCTRL01 execute fail signal
8213011F44 MODE01_EX_OUT MDCTRL01 execute output signal
8513011E8F MODE01_EX_SFL MDCTRL01 execute success signal
8213011E88 MODE01_FEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command fail condition signal
8013011E81 MODE01_FEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command OK condition signal
8D13011F42 MODE01_FSD_CSF MDCTRL01 On direction selected condition signal
8513011F60 MODE01_FSL_CS19 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 19
8A13011F61 MODE01_FSL_CS20 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 20
8113011F64 MODE01_FSL_CS21 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 21
8313011F41 MODE01_NSD_CSF MDCTRL01 no direction selected condition signal
8013011F56 MODE01_NSL_CS06 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 06
8613011F5E MODE01_NSL_CS07 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 07
8213011F5F MODE01_NSL_CS10 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 10
8313011E89 MODE01_OEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command fail condition signal

- 104 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal
8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal
8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40
8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41
8513011F5B MODE01_OSL_CS42 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 42
8013011F54 MODE01_SC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 select command mode err
8013011E76 MODE01_SLD_CS MDCTRL01 selected condition signal
8013011F66 MODE01_SLD_CS04 MDCTRL01 selected condition signal 04
8E13011F57 MODE01_SLD_TMO MDCTRL01 time out after selected
8113011E7B MODE01_SLF_CS MDCTRL01 select fail condition signal
8713011E98 MODE01_SLF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal
8613011F62 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8813011F6B MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 07
8013011E7D MODE01_SLR_CS MDCTRL01 select release condition signal

821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28
 Mapping point
7013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL01 correction request from cmm

- 105 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4 Control and monitoring application

Auto sequence controls(ASEQ) 366 Single position device ctrl.(SPOS) 107
Double positions device ctrl.(DPOS) 221 Software interlock(ILK) 204
Event detection with BIs (GENBI) 394 Software swtich control(SOFTSW) 158
Operation time reset(OPTR) 380 Total time measurement(TOTALTIM) 191
Three positions device ctrl.(TPOS) 287

- 106 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Single position device function (SPOS)

The single position device function (SPOS) is used when the user wishes to control a device
from On or Off state. When a select command is provided for the IED, the SPOS function can
issue a control command if the SPOS function obtains the response from the device. The SPOS
function also can accept a cancel command after issuing the selection command. In the SPOS
function, issuing and receiving a command and a response are performed via a binary IO
module †; hence, the user should connect the BI and BO circuits with the SPOS function. The
SPOS function includes three logic groups: 1. Select logic, 2. Cancel logic, and 3. Operate logic.
A number of devices can be controlled separately, i.e. the SPOS function has separate sets
of logic for control (i.e., SPOS01, SPOS02 etc. functions). For simplicity, only the SPOS01
function is discussed here; the features in the SPOS02 etc. functions are identical to the
SPOS01 function.
†Note:Binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits (BOs);
the user makes the connection between the SPOS01 function and the binary IO
module using a signal number (is made of a function ID and an “Element ID”).The
signal name and number of the SPOS01 function are listed later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the SPOS function quickly, go to sections 4.1.4 and
4.1.5, where setting of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signals for IEC
61850 communication is described.

- 107 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.1.1 Selection logic for SBO/DIR modes

The user should set scheme switch [SPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to SPOS01 operation. Table
4.1-9 shows all of the scheme switches in the SPOS function.
(i) Receiving “select command ON” from the remote-end

Figure 4.1-1 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Select command Off from remote-end
Select command On from local-end

Operate logic
Select command Off from local-end
Operate command
Select command On by the PLC function Operate logic
Select command Off by the PLC function
Figure 4.1-1 Outline of select command ‘On’

Figure 4.1-2 shows the select logic when a “Select command ON (Remote-ON-Control)” signal
applied to the SPOS01 function. This logic has the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” for
the reception of the selection command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC 61850

- 108 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
510001 7001016D08
Input Selection logic in SPOS01 Output
SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001)

Command “Remote-On-Control”
For SBO operation
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command
with ILK† condition & 1≥ &
command”
For DIR operation
To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(510001_8601011DC6)
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed
SPOS01-On 0 t Selection “success”
For SBO operation 0.1s
Select command &

without ILK† condition
For DIR operation 0 t
Selection “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operate

In DIR operate
510001 8601011DC
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.1-2 Select ON from the remote-end in SPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function can provide the operation criteria for
“On”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
defined by the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition).
§Note:An Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for
automatic control. The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being
in the operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control
*Note:The SPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using
IEC61850. To use this signal, the user must map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SPOS logics, see Table 4.1-4
and Table 4.1-8.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function can issue an output “Selection success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-
Control” signal received is true. If the SPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-
Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 109 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Receiving “select command Off” from the remote-end

Figure 4.1-3 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ from the remote- end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Select command On from front panel

Operate logic
Select command Off from front panel
Operate command
Select command On by the PLC Operate logic
Select command Off by the PLC
Figure 4.1-3 Outline of select command ‘Off’

Figure 4.1-4 shows the select logic when a “Select command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal
is received at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.
Input Selection logic in SPOS01 Output

Command “Remote-Off-Control”
For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed (510001_8A01011DC4)
SPOS01-Off 0 t Selection “success”
Select command &

Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.1-4 Select ‘OFF’ from the remote-end in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “Off”.
‡Note:The “select condition” signal is provided. See Figure 4.1-13.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SPOS logics, see Table 4.1-4

- 110 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
and Table 4.1-8.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” when the SPOS01 function determines that the “Select command Off
(Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is true. If the SPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-
OFF-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.
(iii) Receiving “Selection command On” from the local-end

Figure 4.1-5 outlines the reception of the selection command ‘On’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Selection logics Wait for a next command
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from remote-end

Cancel logic

Failed

from the front panel decision Success
Operate logic
Select command Off from front panel Operate command
Figure 4.1-5 Outline of selection command ‘On’
Input signal generated at the local-end.

Figure 4.1-6 shows the select logic when a “Select command On (Local-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SPOS01 function. The signal is provided when an “On” key is pressed on the
IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from the IEC61850 communication.
Note that the user should set the scheme switch [SPOS01-CTRAHMI] to SBO when operation
from the IED front panel is required; we discuss how to set this in chapter User interface:
Control sub-menu.

- 111 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Select logic in SPOS01 Output

For SBO operation
Command “Local-On-Control” Select command
For DIR operation SBO command”
Operate command To BO connection
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
SPOS01-On (510001_8601011DC6)
DIR
ILK† bypassing (“Interlock Bypass”) 1≥ 0 t
Selection “success”
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
0.6s
[SPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.1-6 Select ‘On’ on the front panel in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “On”. For testing, nullifying
the ILK function is possible using “Interlock bypassing”. “Interlock bypassing” is
indicated by the status “ICB” in a software switch controller (SOFTSW).
automatic control. The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when
it is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter
††Note: To identify the output signals of the other SPOS logic, see Table 4.1-8.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the SPOS01 function can issue a “Selection success”
signal at the output-point “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”.
Note: The signal “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.1-2. If the “Local-ON-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to
the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 112 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Receiving “Select command Off” from the local-end

Figure 4.1-7 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from remote-end Cancel command
Cancel logic

Failed

Selection logic Signal output Operate logic
Operate command

Figure 4.1-8 shows the select logic when a “Select command Off (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is
applied to the SPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user presses a “OFF” key on
the IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850 communication.
Input Select logic in SPOS01 Output

For SBO operation
Command “Local-Off-Control” Select command
For DIR operation SBO
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed with ILK† condition & “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”

SPOS01-Off (510001_8601011DC6)
DIR
ILK† bypassing (“Interlock Bypass”) 1≥ 0 t
Selection “success”
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t Selection “Failed”
0.6s
[SPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.1-8 Select ‘Off’ on the front panel in SPOS01††

†Note: The software interlocking (ILK) function can provide the operation criteria for
“Off”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is

- 113 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
automatic control. The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when
††Note: To identify the output signals of the other SPOS logics, see Table 4.1-8.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the SPOS01 function can issue a “Selection success”
signal at the output-point “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”.
1Note: The signal “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.1-4. If the “Local-OFF-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns
to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(v) Receiving “Selection command for ON” by PLC function

Figure 4.1-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by PLC
Failed Operate command
function
PLC logic programmed Select

by the user decision Success
Operate logic
Figure 4.1-9 Outline of select command ‘On’
Input signal required from the PLC function.

Figure 4.1-10 shows the select logic when a “Select command On (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this signal: The
former connection point (PLC#1) is used for the reception of the select-command requiring the
interlock check, the latter connection point (PLC#2) is used for the reception of the select-

- 114 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
command not requiring the interlock check. That is, for the SPOS01 function, when the “select
command ‘On’ (PLC-On-Control) signal generated in the user-programmed logic is applied, and
when the interlock check is required in the select logic, use the connection point (PLC#1;e.g.,
DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required, use the
connection point (PLC#2); e.g., DEV01_CL_COMMAND”. PLC#1 and PLC#2 are shown in
510001 7001016D08
Table 4.1-1.
Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in SPOS01 Output
1≥ &
ON-control command requiring ILK checking† To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC#1 connection point) command”
Operate command
To BO connection
510001 800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK with ILK† condition
& “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(510001_8601011DC6)
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed DIR
SPOS01-On 0 t Selection “success”
0.1s
ON-control command requiring no ILK checking† For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point) 0 t
Operate command Selection “Failed”
510001 800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
DIR
PLC in DIR operate

510001 8601011DC
Select condition‡
Figure 4.1-10 Select ‘On’ using the PLC function in SPOS01††

“On”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
defined in the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition).
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other SPOS logics, see Table 4.1-1
and Table 4.1-8.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The signal “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same as that shown in Figure 4.1-2.

- 115 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vi) Receiving “Select command Off” by PLC function

Figure 4.1-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by the PLC
function Operate command
Select command Off by PLC

Failed
function
Operate logic
Input signal from the PLC function

Figure 4.1-12 shows the select logic when a “Select command Off (PLC-OFF-Control)” signal
is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this signal,
like in the signal “Select command On (PLC-On-Control)” where four are available. That is, if
interlock checking is required, use the connection point (PLC#1:e.g.,
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock-check is not required, use the
connection point (PLC#2; e.g., DEV01_OP_COMMAND). PLC#1 and PLC#2 is shown Table
4.1-2.

- 116 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signals from user PLC logic Select logic in SPOS01 Output
1≥ &
OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation
(PLC#1 connection point)
510001 800101EE31 Operate command with To BO connection
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK
ILK† condition & “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed (510001_8601011DC6)
SPOS01-Off 0 t Selection “success”
0.1s
OFF-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
0 t
Operate command Selection “Failed”
510001 800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND &
without ILK† condition 0.6s
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 4.1-12 Selection logic for ‘Off’ by PLC in SPOS01††

“Off”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SPOS logic, see Table 4.1-2
for the input (PLC#1 and PLC#2) and Table 4.1-8 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The output point “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure
4.1-4.
(vii) Select condition

Figure 4.1-13 shows the select condition logic in the SPOS01 function. The SPOS01 function
checks the condition for the select command using the signal “SPOS01_STATE” (Table 4.1-24).
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, the following alternatives
are available:
1. The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic.
2. The user can add additional logic to the original logic.
How to add another select condition signal

If adding another condition is required, the user can add a signal to the select condition logic
using the PLC connection point “User Additional condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using SPOS01IN_TMP_31, which is listed as PLC#1 in
Table 4.1-6.

- 117 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2. Set the scheme switch [SPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to Fixed logic.
How to replace the original logic

If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic completely, the user can replace it using
the PLC connection point “User configurable condition”.
1. Connect the user-customized logic using SPOS01IN_TMP_32, which is listed as
PLC#2 in Table 4.1-6.
2. Set the scheme switch [SPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to PLC.
Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Traveling OR Select condition
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress Unmatched condition detected *4

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Event suppression detected *5
= SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
(510001 810101F59)
BI board connection error detected*6
= SPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(510001 820101F5A)
Command “ON control” received &

Command “OFF control” received &
received
SPOS01_STATE
(510001 0001011001)
[SCDEN]*7 Same Directional
Controlling Event
OFF
Additional condition (PLC#1 connection point)
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31
[SPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC #2connection point)
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EE62 SPOS01IN_TMP_32 &

From Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC#3 connection point)*8
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28
&
From CMNCTRL serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[SPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 4.1-13 Select condition logic for ON/OFF in SPOS01*9

1Note: “Command blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “Command
blocking” is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch controller
(SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines command blocking as “CmdBlk”. For
more information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and monitoring application:
Software switch controller. See the signal “S4301_STAEE of Table 4.1-5.
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the statuses of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of
any device for the duration that the event is detected. The detecting signal is
donated as “Travelling OR” in Table 4.1-5.

- 118 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a command
is not identical to “IED test status”.
5Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See section
4.1.4(i)-2)
6Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits.
7Note: The common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘On’ and ‘Off”
operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch
(SCDEN), the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same
operation- direction compared with the previous operation direction. (i.e., when
On (Off) is performed sequentially). On the other hand, if On is set for the scheme
switch, the logic is not blocked.
8Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition” The
using the connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see
chapter “Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy” see PLC#3 of
Table 4.1-6.
9Note: To identify the input point of the other SPOS, see Table 4.1-6 for PLC#1 and
PLC#2.
(viii) Signal name and number

each table:
used.
Table 4.1-1 PLC connection points (Input points for command ‘On’)
510001 800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND SPOS01 PLC On-control without checking O

…. …. ….
510001 800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK SPOS01 PLC On-control checking with interlock O
…. …. ….

- 119 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.1-2 PLC connection points (Input points for command ‘Off’)
510001 800101EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK SPOS01 PLC Off-control checking with interlock O

…. …. ….
510001 800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND SPOS01 PLC Off-control without checking O
…. …. ….
Table 4.1-3 PLC connection points (Interlock for command ‘On/Off’)

570001 3101011DA0 SPOS01-Off SPOS01 interlock condition for Off control. N/A
…. …. ….
570001 3101011DA2 SPOS01-On SPOS01 interlock condition for On control. N/A
…. …. ….
Table 4.1-4 Mapping points for the reception of control commands

510001 7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ SPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M

…. …. ….

522001 000A011001 CBK_STATE Command Blocking status ( Off / Blocked) N/A

522001 000A021001 ICB_STATE Interlock bypassing status(On / Bypass) N/A
5A0001 3108003F40 SDCEN (This is setting of CMNCTRL) N/A
Table 4.1-6 PLC connection points (Input signal for select condition logic)
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31 SPOS01 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O


- 120 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
…. …. ….
510001 810101EE62 SPOS01IN_TMP_32 SPOS01 user configurable select condition (PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 SPOS01 control hierarchy condition (PLC#3) M
…. …. ….
Table 4.1-7 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
510001 8001011F54 SPOS01_SC_ST_ERR SPOS01 select command mode is invalid.

…. …. ….
510001 8101011F59 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS01)
…. …. ….
510001 81010A1F59 SPOS20_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS20)
510001 8201011F5A SPOS01_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(SPOS01)
…. …. ….
Table 4.1-8 PLC monitoring points (On/Off Output-signal)

510001 8601011DC6 SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select (ON) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
510001 8A01011DC4 SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select (OFF) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
(ix) Setting names

Note: The “xx” of “SPOSxx” represents the SPOS function number. (e.g., if the SPOS03
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented from
“01” to “20”.)

- 121 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.1-9 Setting of SBO control in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function in SPOSxx On Off / On

SPOSxx-LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition in SPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
SPOSxx-CTRAHMI Activate local panel control in SPOSxx SBO DIR / SBO

- 122 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

In SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible; the function can discard
the select command when the cancel conditions are satisfied; finally, the operation returns to
the initial stage (i.e., waiting state “Wait for a command”.)

remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end Cancel from remote-end

Success
Select command Off from remote-end Cancel

Signal reception in
IEC61850 decision Failed
Select On from front panel

Cancel from front panel
Select command On by the PLC
function
function
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

applied to the SPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as
that for the signal “Select command On (Remote-On-Control)”.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in SPOS01 Output

Cancel command
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ “SPOS01_ CC_SS” (510001_8601011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Cancel condition† &
“SPOS01_CC_FS” (510001_8701011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 4.1-15 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in SPOS01

†Note: The logic “cancel condition” is shown in Figure 4.1-18
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function can issue an output signal “Success to cancel” at the monitoring point
“SPOS01_CC_SS”, when the SPOS01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel” signal

- 123 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
is true. Another “Operation failed” signal is issued at the monitoring point “SPOS01_CC_FS”
if the SPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal is not true.
(ii) Receiving “Cancel” from the local-end

Figure 4.1-16 outlines the reception of the cancel command from the local end.
Wait for a command
Cancel from the remote end

Selecting On from remote-end
Selecting Off from remote-end

Cancel from the front panel
Success
Selecting On from front panel
Press cancel Cancel
Selecting Off from front panel Cancel logic Do nothing
command decision Failed
Selecting On by the PLC function
Selecting Off by the PLC function

Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.1-16 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the local-end
Input signal generated at the local-end

Figure 4.1-17 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Local-cancel)” signal is applied
to the SPOS01 function. The signal is generated when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping. When the logic receives the
“Local-cancel” signal, the logic is able to output a result signal; provided that the “cancel
condition” checking is satisfied. 510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in SPOS01 Output

Cancel command
Command “Local-cancel” “SPOS01_ CC_SS” (510001_8601011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Cancel condition† & “Do nothing”

“SPOS01_CC_FS” (510001_8701011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 4.1-17 ‘Cancel’ from the front panel
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 4.1-17, is able to issue a “Select to cancel” signal
at the monitoring point “SPOS01_CC_SS”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the
“Local-Cancel” signal is true.

- 124 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Cancel condition logic

Figure 4.1-18 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria, “unmatched condition detected”
is connected normally for the cancel logic, set Fixlogic for the scheme switch
[SPOS01_LGCNFFC].
Unmatched condition detected *1 To cancel logic in

& 1≥ SPOS01
[SPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC connection point)
Fixedlogic
510001 800101EE69 SPOS01IN_TMP_46 &
Figure 4.1-18 Logic “Cancel condition” in SPOS01

1Note: The Criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
the cancel command is not identical to the “IED test status”, like in Figure 4.1-13.
2Note: With the exception of the above ‘cancel’ condition logic, there is an operate-
condition logic within the SPOS01 function; the operate-condition logic will always
checks conditions. That is, the user is required to set either the “operate-
condition” or the “cancel-condition” logic.
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, it can be replaced
with another logic using the connection point “User Configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic with the “SPOS01IN_TMP_46”.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.
(iv) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” in
each table:
“M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure using the signal;
otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure for the default
settings.
Table 4.1-10 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
510001 800101EE69 SPOS01IN_TMP_46 SPOS01 user configurable cancel condition O

… … …
Table 4.1-11 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
510001 8601011E95 SPOS01_CC_SS Cancel succeed in SPOS01

- 125 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

… … …
510001 8701011E96 SPOS01_CC_FS Cancel failed in SPOS01
… … …
(v) Setting name

Note: The “xx” within of “SPOSxx” represents the SPOS function number. (e.g., if
SPOS03 is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The numbers used for “xx” can be
represented by “01” to “20”.)
Table 4.1-12 Setting for ‘Cancel’ in SPOSxx
SPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition in SPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 126 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic start to control the device.
(i) Receiving “operate command On” from the remote- end

Figure 4.1-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the remote- end.
Wait for a command
On control from remote-end

Success
Select command On from remote-end Operation
Signal reception in Operate logic Signal output
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from remote-end Off control from remote-end
Select command On from front panel On control from front-panel
Select command Off from front panel Off control from front-panel
Select command On by the PLC On control by PLC function

function
Select command Off by the PLC Off control by PLC function
function
Figure 4.1-19 Outline of operate command for ‘On’

Figure 4.1-20 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command On (Remote-ON-
Control)” signal is applied to the SPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”
is used for the reception of the “Operate command On (Remote-On-Control)”.

- 127 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Operate logic in SPOS01 Output
“SPOS01-OEC_OK_CSF”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (510001_8001011E7F)
[SPOS01-CPW]
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed S

&
SPOS01-On R
User configurable condition

S
510001 810101EE57 SPOS01IN_TMP_35 &
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] R
& To BO connection
Fixedlogic
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3) §§
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
(PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ function§” is in progress PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]*
Var To “Wait for a command”
Fix
Latch “SPOS01_EX_FFL”
[SPOS01-RST]
0 t (510001_8601011E91) ††
“SPOS01-EX_CMP”
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
“SPOS01-FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
Figure 4.1-20 Operate ‘On’ logic by remote SAS in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “ON”.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic (see
Figure 4.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “Operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user and
used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic. The
alternative ”Operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point #1 ”User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
*Note:The user can set the type of the output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[SPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
When Latch is set, the output signal is kept issuing until the reception of
“Command Off”.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other SPOS logics, see Table
4.1-13 for PLC#1, Table 4.1-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.1-18, and Table 4.1-19 for
output signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected when
the time set by [SPOS01-RST] has been reached.

- 128 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
§§Note: The “SPOS01_OEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed “signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.1-20. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”,
hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point # 2 “user-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [SPOS01-
LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-20, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the received signal “Remote-
On-Control” is true.

- 129 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Receiving “operate command Off” from the remote end

Figure 4.1-21 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘Off ’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end On control from remote-end
Off control from remote-end

Success
Operation
Select command Off from remote-end decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Select command On from front panel On control from front-panel

Off control from front-panel
Select command On by the PLC On control by PLC function

function
Select command Off by the PLC Off control by PLC function
function
Figure 4.1-21 Outline of operate command ‘Off’
Mapping required for Input point from communication

Figure 4.1-22 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-
Control)” signal is applied to the SPOS01 logic. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-Control)”.

“SPOS01-FEC_OK_CSF”
(510001_8001011E7F)
[SPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed S
&
SPOS01-Off R
User Configurable condition

510001 800101EE56 SPOS01IN_TMP_34

[SPOS01-LGCTRCON]
&
Fixedlogic To BO connection
Operate condition‡ “SPOS01_FEX_BO” §§

(510001_8101011DD0)
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User Configurable condition
(PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ§ function is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]*
“SPOS01_EX_FFL” † †
Var [SPOS01-RST] (510001_8601011E91)
Fix
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
Figure 4.1-22 Operate ‘Off’ from the remote -end in SPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “Off”.

- 130 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
‡Note:An “operate condition” is generated in the operate-condition logic( see Figure

4.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch[SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If an
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use SPOS01IN_TMP_34.
the time set by [SPOS01-RST] has been reached.
§§Note: The signal “SPOS01_OEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed “signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.1-20. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”.
Hence, this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point # 2 “user-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [SPOS01-
“Command Off”.
4.1-13, Table 4.1-14, Table 4.1-18, and Table 4.1-19.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Off-
Control” is true.
(iii) Receiving “operate command On” from the local-end

Figure 4.1-23 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘On’ from the local-end.

- 131 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Operate command On from the local-end

Select command On from the local-end Success
Operation
Signal reception from Operate logic Signal output
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
Figure 4.1-23 Outline of operate command ‘On’

Figure 4.1-24 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command On (Local-ON-Control)”
signal is applied to the SPOS01 function. The signal is generated when “Execution of On” is
keyed on the IED front panel.
“SPOS01-OEC_OK_CSF”
(510001_8001011E7F)
Operate Cmd.
Command “Local-On-Control” [SPOS01-CPW]
with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operation Cmd.
SPOS01-On
S
&
ILK† bypassing ( Bypass) 1≥
R
ICB_STATE
User configurable condition (PLC#1 connection point) S

510001 810101EE57 SPOS01IN_TMP_35 &
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] R
&
PLC#1
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3) §§
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User configurable condition (PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ function§” is in progress PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]* To “Wait for a command”

Var
Fix “SPOS01_EX_FFL”
Latch
[SPOS01-RST] (510001_8601011E91) ††
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP”
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s
Operation Failed
“SPOS01-FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
Figure 4.1-24 Operate ‘On’ on the front panel

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “On”.

- 132 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic( see

Figure 4.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If an
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
“Command Off”.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the [SPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “SPOS01_OEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the scheme
logic [SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the logic
programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.1-20, connect the
signal “Operate completed” generated in the user-programmed logic at the
connection point # 2 “user configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-24, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the signal “Local-On-Control”
is true.

- 133 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Receiving “operate command Off” from the local-end

Figure 4.1-25 depicts the reception of the operate command for ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Operate command Off from the local-end

Select command Off from the local-end Success
Operate
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.1-25 Outline of operate command ‘Off’

Figure 4.1-26 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Local-OFF-Control)”
signal is applied to the SPOS01 function. The input signal is generated when “Execution for
Off” is keyed on the IED front panel.

- 134 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

“SPOS01-FEC_OK_CSF”
(510001_8001011E7F)
Operate Cmd. [SPOS01-CPW]
Command “Remote-Off-Control” with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed
SPOS01-Off S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥ R
ICB_STATE
User configurable condition (PLC#3 connection point)

510001 800101EE56 SPOS01IN_TMP_34
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON]
&
PLC#3
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”
“510001_8101011DD0 §§
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]* To “Wait for a command”

Var
Fix “SPOS01_EX_FFL”
[SPOS01-RST] “510001_8601011E91 ††
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP
(5A0101_8001011E93)
1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
Figure 4.1-26 Operate ‘Off’ on the front panel in SPOS01††

‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic( see
Figure 4.1-29), when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If
an alternative “Operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user
and used to replace the signal generated by the original operated-condition logic.
The alternative ”Operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set for the scheme switch
“Command Off”.
after reaching the time set by the [SPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “SPOS01_OEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued from

- 135 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”,

point # 2 “user- configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [SPOS01-
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-26, can issue a signal “Operate” at the output point
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Local-Off-
Control” is true.
(v) Receiving “operate command On” using the PLC function
Wait for a command
Select command On from remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Select command Off from remote-end Operate command Off control from remote-end
Select command On from front panel Operate command On control from front-panel
Select command Off from front panel Operate command Off control from front-panel
On control by PLC function

Success
Select command On by the PLC Operate
PLC logic programmed Operate logic Signal output
function decision
by the user
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off by the PLC Operate command Off control

function by PLC function
Figure 4.1-27 Outline of operate command for ‘On’

Figure 4.1-27 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘On’ with the PLC function; it
describes the operate logic when an “Operate command On (PLC-On Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this command signal,
unlike the signal “operate command closing” (PLC-On Control).; the former connection point
(PLC#3) is used for the reception of the operate-command requiring the interlock check, the
latter connection point (PLC#4) is used or the reception of the operate-command not requiring
interlocking check. That is, for the SPOS01 function, when the user wishes to apply for the
operate logic the signal “Operate command On (PLC-On-Control)” generated in the user-
programmed logic and when the interlock check is required in the operate logic, apply the
signal at the connection point (PLC#3; is DEV01_CL_COMMAND). Alternatively, if the
interlock check is not required, apply the signal at the other connection point (PLC#4 i.e.
DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK); The PLC#3 and PLC#4 is denoted as the PLC#1 and PLC#2 in
Table 4.1-1. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCTRCON].

- 136 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vi) Receiving “operate command Off” using PLC logic

Figure 4.1-28 outlines the reception of the operate command for Off using the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the remote-end
Select command On by the PLC Operate command On by the PLC
Operate command Off by the PLC

Success
Select command Off by the PLC Operation
decision
by the user
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.1-28 Outline of operate command for Off
Figure 4.1-28 depicts the operate logic when a signal “Operate Command Off (PLC-Off-
Control)” is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this
command signal, unlike the signal “Operate Command On (PLC-On-Control)”. That is, if an
inter-lock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3; i.e.,
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). If, on the other hand an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4; i.e., DEV01_OP_COMMAND).
PLC#1 an PLC#2 shown in Table 4.1-2 should be treated as PLC#3 and PLC#4 here.
Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
(vii) Operate condition

In a manner similar to which the conditions have been examined for the select command, the
conditions for an operate command should be understood. Figure 4.1-29 illustrates the logic to
examine an operate condition; the operate condition is determined by signal “SPOS01_STATE”,
if the functionality of the original logic does not meet with user-requirements, the following
alternatives are available:
2. The user can add another signal to the original logic.
Adding another operate condition signal

If the addition of another signal is required, the user can add the signal to the operate condition
logic using connection point “Additional Condition”
1. Add a user-preferred signal using “SPOS01IN_TMP_31”, listed as PLC#1 in Table

- 137 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.1-16.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixedlogic.
Replacing the original logic

If the user wishes to replace the operate condition logic completely, it can be achieved using
PLC connection point “User configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “SPOS01IN_TMP_41”, listed as PLC#2 in
Table 4.1-16.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to PLC.
Note: The user must program PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control
hierarchy condition to be provided with the user-programmed PLC logic may be
43R/L; it may be connected using PLC connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28” in
Figure 4.1-29.
Note: The output of the operate condition logic is provided separately for On-execution
and for Off-execution. To see the outputs, refer to Table 4.1-17.
Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Operate condition
Traveling OR
Unmatched condition detected *4
= SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
(510001 810101F59)

= SPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(510001 820101F5A)
Command “ON-control” received &

received
SPOS01_STATE
(510001 0001011001)
Controlling Event
OFF
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31
[SPOS01- LGEXFFCT]
User configurable operate condition (PLC#2 connection
Fixedlogic
point)510001 810101EE66
SPOS01IN_TMP_41 &
Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point)*8
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28
&
SERI_ERR
[SPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 4.1-29 Operate condition logic for ON/OFF in SPOS01

1Note: “Command blocking” disables any operation except for itself; “Command
Blocking” is implemented as “CBK”in software switch controller (SOFTSW).The
IEC 61850 standard defines communication blocking as “CmdBlk”. For more

- 138 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
information, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Software switch

controller. See the signal “CBK_STATE in Table 4.1-5.
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling signifies that other operators are changing
the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED should be
inhibited whilst ever the events is detected. The detection signal is donated as
“Travelling OR” in Table 4.1-5.
4Note: If an IED is in the process of issuing a trip command, all control operation is
blocked until the trip operation has been completed. If the IED has a relay
application, the trip command is issued at the output point.
5Note: The function “Event suppression” can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See section
4.1.4(i)-2)
7Note: The common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation –
direction of logic. When the user sets off for scheme switch (SCDEN), operation of
the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation – direction
compared with the previous operation direction. Alternatively, if On is set for the
scheme switch, the logic is not blocked.
8Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition” The user
must connect the “Control hierarchy condition” to the select condition logic using
the connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see chapter
“Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy” see PLC#3 of Table 4.1-6.
Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for both the On and the Off.

Note: The user should note the meaning of the following abbreviations shown in column
“M/O” of each table:
“O” signifies that the signal is provided for optional use.
“M” signifies that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user may experience an operational failure if the default settings is used.
“N/A” signifies that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 4.1-13 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 user a configurable condition)
510001 830101EE5B SPOS01IN_TMP_38 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O

…. …. ….

- 139 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.1-14 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#2 user configurable condition)
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O

…. …. ….
Table 4.1-15 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#3 user configurable condition)
510001 800101EE56 SPOS01IN_TMP_34 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O

…. …. ….
Table 4.1-16 PLC connection points (Input point PLC#1/#2 of additional and operate
conditions)

… … …
510001 810101EE66 SPOS01IN_TMP_41 SPOS01 user configurable operate condition (PLC#2) O
… … …

510001 8201011DD3 SPOS01_OEX_BO SPOS01 operate (ON) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
510001 8101011DD0 SPOS01_FEX_BO SPOS01 operate (OFF) command for Binary Output.
Table 4.1-18 PLC monitoring points (signals with in operate logic)

510001 8101011E82 SPOS01_OEC_OK_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command


- 140 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… …. ….
510001 8001011E81 SPOS01_FEC_OK_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command
… … …
Table 4.1-19 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for response)

510001 8601011E91 SPOS01_EX_FFL SPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic

…. …. ….
(ix) Setting names

is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented by either
a “01” to “20”).
Table 4.1-20 Setting of Operate in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-PLSM Method of command output(SPOS01-20) Fix Fix/Var/Latch

SPOSxx-CPW Duration of command output(SPOS01-20) 1.0[sec] 0.1~50.0[sec]
SPOSxx-RST Detection time for terminating control (SPOS01-20) 30.0[sec] 0.1~100.0[sec]
SPOSxx-LGCTRCON Logic selector for operate condition (SPOS01-20) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
SPOSxx-LGCFEXOT Logic selector for command output (SPOS01-20) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
SPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of SPOS01-20 On Off / On
SPOSxx-LGEXFFCT Logic selector for operate condition (SPOS01-20) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 141 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.1.4 Setup for BIO module

The user should connect the SPOS input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits;
subsequently, the SPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. The user should
execute the following four steps below.
i BI connection for status-signals
ii BO connection for “Select command On/Off”
iii BO connection for “operate command”
iv Contact health check
Note that the SPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [SPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
(i) BI connection for status-signals

Figure 4.1-30 exemplifies the reception of signals at the SPOS01 function; the user can set a
input-point using the setting [SPOS01-NOPSG]†.
†Note:Normally an input-signal corresponding to phase-A is generated using a normally-

open contact (NO). If the signal is generated by the normally-closed contact, the
user is required to set scheme switch [SPOS01-NSOSGI] On in order that the
input-signal should be decided in inversion.
Connection with Binary input circuit

Suppose an input signal is provided on the first BI circuit at IO#1 slot. In this case, the user
should set the input point (200B01 8001001110†) for the setting [SPOS01-NOPSG], otherwise,
the SPOS01 function cannot run correctly.
Signals by Binary input circuits Signal acquisition logic in SPOS01 Output ‡
“SPOS01_STATE”
Event suppression detector (510001_0001011001)
BI signal connected by
setting [SPOS01-NOPSG]
& 1≥
&
[SPOS01-EN] Status before chattering S
R “SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”
On
(510001_8101011F59)
[SPOS01-SPPEN] Chattering detector
On
& To select and operate
condition logics
Figure 4.1-30 Acquisition of binary input signal in SPOS01

†Note: The user should set the actual input-points. For Input points see in Chapter
Technical description: Binary IO module.
‡Note: In Figure 4.1-30 two signals can be issued: “SPOS01_STATE” and
“SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”. One is used in the select condition logic and the operate
condition logic (see Figure 4.1-13 and Figure 4.1-29). Another is used for operation
in the event suppression detector.

- 142 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Event suppression
If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the SPOS function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the SPOS function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created.
[SPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
from device On On On On On On On
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[SPOS-TELD] [SPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 4.1-31 Iterative signals and signals suppressed
Figure 4.1-31 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been
suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the
seventh signal (at Time B). This is because the function can count the iterative number of
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time A, the setting [SPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time B. The setting [SPOS-TELD] is pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time A (e.g., Time A to Time C).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [SPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time D to E).
To initiate event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch [SPOS01-SPPEN].
(ii) BO connection for “Select command On/Off”

Figure 4.1-32 exemplifies the connection for the select command On and Off. Suppose that
connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection point
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”†; as a result, the “ Select command On” and the “Select command Off”
signals are issued at the BOI.

- 143 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Terminal and
Selection logic in SPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”
(510001_8501011F76)
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
Select command in “BO1”

Signal designated by Select
SPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112) command
1≥
On/Off
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” & ≥1
Select command OFF in [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
SPOS01 [Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On &
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
PLC connection point in BO1
200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
Figure 4.1-32 Example of select command connection with BO1

†Note: Table 4.1-25 shows the remaining signals with the excepting
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”.
(iii) BO connection for “operate command On/Off”

Figure 4.1-33 exemplifies the connection for operate command On/Off. Suppose that
connections with the BOs are achieved by the PLC function using connection
point ”SPOS01_OEX_BO” and ”SPOS01_FEX_BO” as a result, the “Operate command On” and
the “Operate command Off” signal is issued at BO2 or BO3.
Terminal and
Operate logic in SPOS01 BO2 and BO3 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
“BO2”
Signal designated by Operate
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112) command
“Operate command On
On” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO2-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO2_CPL] On &
Connected by Off
(200B01_8102011113)
“Programming” [Input signal 5]
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“SPOS01_FEX_BO” 200B01 310201E11D BO2_SOURCE
(510001_8101011DD0)
“BO3”
“Operate command Off
Off” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO3-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8202021113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310202E11D BO3_SOURCE
Figure 4.1-33 Example of operate commands connected with BO2 and BO3 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.1-26 shows the remaining signals excepting “SPOS01_OEX_BO” and
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”.

- 144 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Contact health check

The SPOS01 function has contact health check feature for the BO circuits; hence, the user is
able to connect an output signal to the contact health check function when Fixedlogic is set for
scheme switch [SPOS01-LGXFEOT]†. Consequently, the SPOS01 function can determine
whether the signal has been successfully output from the BO. If a failure is reported, the
SPOS01 function determines that the signal has not been output successfully to the BO; then,
the command On or Off is canceled immediately and the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait
for a command” stage.
†Note:Table 4.1-28 shows settings for the health check feature in the other SPOS
functions.
Setting for “Select command On/Off”

For example, the point “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing
of the command, the user can connect point “BO1-RB” with the contact health check function
using the setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]. Do not key the point “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”.
Selection logic in
SPOS01
Contact health check

logic in SPOS01
(510001_8501011F76)
Result of contact
BO1 circuit at & health check in SPOS01 selection
IO_SLOT1
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Signal connected by
setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]
Connection made by the user
Figure 4.1-34 Example of connection of “Select command On” for the health check feature
Setting for “Operate Command On”

Similarly, the point “BO2-RB” must be applied for the setting [SPOS01-OEXBORD].
Operate logic in
SPOS01
“SPOS01_OEX_BO” Contact health check

“510001_8201011DD3” logic in SPOS01
Result of contact
BO2 circuit at & Health check
IO_#1
“BO2-RB”
“200B01_8102011113”
Signal designated by
setting [SPOS01-OEXBORD]
Figure 4.1-35 Example connection of “Operate Command On” for the health check

- 145 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Operate-Off command check

Similarly, the point “BO3-RB” must be applied for the setting [SPOS01-FEXBORD].
Operate logic in
SPOS01

“SPOS01_FEX_BO”
logic in SPOS01
“510001_8101011DD0”
Result of contact
BO3 circuit at & health check
IO_#1
“BO3-RB”
“200B01_8102021113”
setting [SPOS01-FEXBORD]
Figure 4.1-36 Example connection of “Operate command off” for the health check feature
Proper setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 4.1-37 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1, BO2 and BO3 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is
working correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table
4.1-21, to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
Table 4.1-21 Setting example for contact health check

Example #1 Health check setting for Example #1
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001113(BO1-RB) set for [SPOS01-SLBORD] OK
“SPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113(BO2-RB) set for [SPOS01-OEXBORD] OK
“SPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO3” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [SPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Remote/Local-end Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
(510001_8501011F76) SW1 driven with
BO1 at IO_SLOT1
Select BO1 SW 1
command ON/OFF
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113) SW 2 On
Command
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW 3 Off
Operate-On BO2 SW2 driven with Command
command BO2 at IO_SLOT1
“BO2-RB”
Minus (−)
(200B01_8102011113)
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
BO3 SW3 driven with
Operate-Off BO3 at IO_SLOT1
command “BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
Figure 4.1-37 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example #1
Setting for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 4.1-38 shows a setting example for an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The

- 146 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
settings are implemented incorrectly, as shown in Table 4.1-22. BO1-RB is not chosen,
instead BO1 is actually chosen. In this case, the setting [SPOS01-SLBORD] is meaningless;
hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.
Table 4.1-22 Erroneous setting example for contact health check

Example #2 Health check setting in example #2
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001112(BO1) set for [SPOS01-SLBORD] NG
BIO module
43SW
Remote/Local-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB) Plus (+)
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” mistakenly chosen with
(510001_8501011F76) “200B01_8002001112” SW1 driven with
BO1at IO_SLOT1
Select BO1 SW 1
Command
ON/OFF
SW 2 On
“SPOS01_OEX_BO” Command
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW 3 Off
Operate-On BO2 SW2 driven with Command
command BO2 at IO_SLOT1
“BO2-RB” designated with Minus (−)
“SPOS01_FEX_BO” “200B01_8102011113”
(510001_8101011DD0)
BO3 SW3 driven with

Operate-Off BO3 at IO_SLOT1
command
“BO3-RB” designated with
“200B01_8202021113”
Figure 4.1-38 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #2
Setting for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 4.1-39 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special example
can issue a select command; which is called “operated by internal select function”. The user
does not need to consider of a BO circuit for a select command, when there are no BO circuits
available.
Table 4.1-23 Extra setting example for contact health check
Example #3 Setting for example #3
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any “BO” “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” set for [SPOS01-SLBORD] OK

- 147 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
BIO module
43SW
Remote/Local end “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” Plus (+)
SW1 is not driven with
(510001_8501011F76) Plus (+)
any BO1
SW 1
Select
command Physical BO is
ON/OFF
virtualized.
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW2 is driven with
BO2 at IO#1
Operate-On BO2 SW 2 On
command Command
“BO2-RB”
“SPOS01_FEX_BO” (200B01_8102011113) SW3 is driven with SW 3 Off
(510001_8101011DD0) BO3 at IO#1 Command
BO3 Minus (−)

Operate-Off
(200B01_8202021113)
Figure 4.1-39 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #3
Table 4.1-24 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in SPOSxx)
510001 0001011001 SPOS01_STATE Status of SPOS01

…. …. ….
…. …. ….
Table 4.1-25 PLC monitoring points (Output of select signal in SPOSxx)

510001 8501011F76 SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG Select command signal in SPOS01

…. …. ….
Table 4.1-26 PLC monitoring points (Output of operate signal in SPOSxx)

… … …
… …. ….

- 148 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Setting names

“01” to “20”.)
Table 4.1-27 Settings for Binary input signals in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-EN Activate monitoring function of SPOS01-20 On Off / On

SPOSxx-NOPSG BI position for SPOS01-20 *none BI signal
SPOSxx-SPPEN Activate event suppression for SPOS01-20 On Off / On
SPOS-NELD Number of change to lock status 10 0~99
SPOS-TELD Time to lock status( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
SPOS-TELR Time to unlock status( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
Table 4.1-28 Settings for health check function in SPOSxx

SPOSxx-SLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user-preferred BO readback signal
SPOSxx-OEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user-preferred BO readback signal
SPOSxx-FEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user-preferred BO readback signal

- 149 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.1.5 Mapping for IEC 61850 communication

The user can operate the SPOS function over IEC 61850 communications† following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the SPOS function is designed for the class of “Single Point
Controller (SPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
steps, each of which is discussed below,

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the SPOS01 function. Figure 4.1-40
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “General Input/output (GGIO)” is chosen for the
SPOS01 function. After the user has defined an object “SPCSO”, the SPOS01 logical node can
be available with the name “GGIO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object
“SPCSO” in the SPOS01 logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in
the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.1-40 Defining “SPCSO” object in GGIO1501 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.1-41 exemplifies the SPOS01 logic node saved as “GGIO1501”. In the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GGIO1501$SPCSO” using GR-TIEMS:

- 150 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Figure 4.1-41 LN editing screen for SBO (for example)
Defining DIR setting mode

Figure 4.1-42 exemplifies the SPOS01 logic node saved as “GGIO1501”. In the DIR mode, the
following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin

The user should group the SPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and Report; the user should
map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 4.1-43 illustrates how to
map a signal; it indicates that the signals for the SPOS01 function are required to be mapped
for IEC 61850 communication.

- 151 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.1-29 Mapping signals for SPCSO object

Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 510001 3001011008 SPOS01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 510001 6A01011009 SPOS01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO stVal BOOLEAN ST 510001 0001011001 SPOS01_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO q Quality ST 510001 3101011005 SPOS01_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO t Timestamp ST 510001 9001011006 SPOS01_TIMESTAMP
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 510001 0001011D90 SPOS01_STD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 4.1-43 ocCat attribute mapped for SPCSO object of GGIO1501

The SPOS01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC 61850 communication. Table
4.1-30 shows the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO”; the user should map the input point to the Object reference having

- 152 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.1-30 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object for GIG01501
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
5100017 001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 4.1-44 Input-point mapped for GGIO1501

- 153 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.1.6 Setting
SPOS01 (FunctionID:510001)
Common items SPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

SPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
SPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
SPOS01-EN Off / On - SPOS01 switch for Device01 Off
DEV01 items SPOS01-DEVNAME [Preferred text] - item name of Dev1 SPOS_Dev1 !
SPOS01-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
SPOS01-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) On !
SPOS01-NOPSG [Preferred Signal] - Normally Open Signal of Dev1 Not Assigned
SPOS01-SPPEN Off / On - Automatic event suppression function Off
SPOS01-CTREN Off / On - control mode (control enable) Off
SPOS01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
SPOS01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
SPOS01-SLBORD [Preferred Signal] - select binary output read data(DataID) 5100018501011F76
on direction execute binary output read
SPOS01-OEXBORD [Preferred Signal] - Not Assigned
data(DataID)
off direction execute binary output read
SPOS01-FEXBORD [Preferred Signal] - Not Assigned
data(DataID)
on/off direction execute binary output read
SPOS01-OFEXBORD [Preferred Signal] - Not Assigned
data(DataID)
FixedLogic /
SPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic
PLC
FixedLogic /
SPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
FixedLogic / Change logic about execute command fail
SPOS01-LGEXFFCT - FixedLogic
PLC factor
FixedLogic / Change logic about off direction execute
SPOS01-LGFEXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
FixedLogic /
SPOS01-LGCNFFCT - Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
SPOS01-PLSM Fix / Var / Latch - pulse mode Var
SPOS01-CPW 0.1 - 50.0 s control pulse width 1.0
SPOS01-RST 1.0 - 100.0 s response check timer 30.0
SPOS01-APBD Process / Bay - status change origin Process
Note: The SPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have
omitted the others because their setting tables are the same as the 1st device table
with the exception of the device number.

- 154 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.1.7 Signal
 Signal monitoring points in SPOS01
SPOS01(FunctionID:510001)
8001011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL
0001001F74 SPOS_SEL_OR SPOS multi select check signal for Auto sequence
0001011001 SPOS01_STATE SPOS01 state
0001011D90 SPOS01_SLD_RPT SPOS01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
0001011D97 SPOS01_EX_BO_OPOK SPOS01 execute binary output signal for SAS
0001011F52 SPOS01_TRA SPOS01 travelling info
0001011F53 SPOS01_TRA_CTR SPOS01 travelling info for control
0001011F75 SPOS01_SE_RCV SPOS01 select or execute command received
3101011D00 SPOS01_MMC_ST SPOS01 state for MIMIC
3101011D01 SPOS01_LCD_ST SPOS01 state for LCD
3101011D80 SPOS01_TMP_06 SPOS01 control event data (selected)
3101011D81 SPOS01_TMP_07 SPOS01 control event data (select fail)
3101011D82 SPOS01_TMP_08 SPOS01 control event data (select release)
3101011D83 SPOS01_TMP_09 SPOS01 control event data (execute output on)
3101011D84 SPOS01_TMP_10 SPOS01 control event data (execute command ng)
3101011D86 SPOS01_TMP_11 SPOS01 control event data (execute fail)
8001011D02 SPOS01_ST_OFF SPOS01 status Off
8001011D51 SPOS01_SC_OWS SPOS01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D52 SPOS01_SC_RCC SPOS01 select command by RCC
8001011D53 SPOS01_SC_RMT SPOS01 select command by Remote
8001011D54 SPOS01_SC_LCD SPOS01 select command by LCD
8001011D55 SPOS01_EC_OWS SPOS01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D56 SPOS01_EC_RCC SPOS01 execute command by RCC
8001011D57 SPOS01_EC_RMT SPOS01 execute command by Remote
8001011D58 SPOS01_EC_LCD SPOS01 execute command by LCD
8001011D59 SPOS01_EC_PLC SPOS01 execute command by PLC
8001011E76 SPOS01_SLD_CS SPOS01 selected condition signal
8001011E7D SPOS01_SLR_CS SPOS01 select release condition signal
8001011E7E SPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8001011E7F SPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8001011E81 SPOS01_FEC_OK_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal
8001011E93 SPOS01_EX_CMP SPOS01 execute complete signal
8001011F54 SPOS01_SC_ST_ERR SPOS01 select command mode err
8001011F55 SPOS01_EC_ST_ERR SPOS01 execute command mode err
8001011F56 SPOS01_NSL_CS06 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 06
8001011F66 SPOS01_SLD_CS04 SPOS01 selected condition signal 04
8101011D03 SPOS01_ST_ON SPOS01 status On
8101011DD0 SPOS01_FEX_BO SPOS01 off direction execute binary output signal
8101011E7B SPOS01_SLF_CS SPOS01 no direction select fail condition signal
8101011E82 SPOS01_OEC_OK_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal
8101011E85 SPOS01_FEC_F_CSF SPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8101011E86 SPOS01_OEC_F_CSF SPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8101011E9A SPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS SPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8101011F59 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP TEMP31
8101011F64 SPOS01_FSL_CS21 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 21
8201011DD3 SPOS01_OEX_BO SPOS01 on direction execute binary output signal
8201011E88 SPOS01_FEC_F_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal
8201011F5A SPOS01_F_BI_ERR TEMP32
8201011F5F SPOS01_NSL_CS10 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 10
8301011E89 SPOS01_OEC_F_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal
8301011E9C SPOS01_CCF_FCT_CS TEMP21

- 155 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 Signal monitoring points in SPOS01

SPOS01(FunctionID:510001)
8301011E9D SPOS01_CTR_SGN SPOS01 control logic stage(unselected)
8401011F77 SPOS01_OFEX_BO SPOS01 on/off direction execute binary output signal
8501011E8F SPOS01_EX_SFL SPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8501011F5B SPOS01_OSL_CS42 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 42
8501011F60 SPOS01_FSL_CS19 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 19
8501011F65 SPOS01_OSL_CS40 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 40
8501011F76 SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG SPOS01 select binary output signal by fixedlogic
8601011DC6 SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 on direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8601011E91 SPOS01_EX_FFL SPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8601011E95 SPOS01_CC_SS TEMP18
8601011F5C SPOS01_OSL_CS43 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 43
8601011F5E SPOS01_NSL_CS07 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 07
8601011F62 SPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 SPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8701011E96 SPOS01_CC_FS TEMP19
8701011E98 SPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS SPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8801011E9B SPOS01_CC_ST_ERR TEMP20
8801011F5D SPOS01_OSL_CS41 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 41
8801011F6B SPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 SPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 07
8901011DC0 SPOS01_NSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8901011F6C SPOS01_EX_CS01 SPOS01 execute condition signal 01
8A01011DC4 SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 off direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8A01011F61 SPOS01_FSL_CS20 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 20
8A01011F6D SPOS01_EX_CS02 SPOS01 execute condition signal 02
8B01011EA2 SPOS01_CTR_SGU SPOS01 control logic stage(under selection)
8B01011F68 SPOS01_EX_CS05 SPOS01 execute condition signal 05
8B01011F6E SPOS01_EX_CS03 SPOS01 execute condition signal 03
8E01011F57 SPOS01_SLD_TMO SPOS01 time out after selected
8E01011F67 SPOS01_EX_CS04 SPOS01 execute condition signal 04
8F01011F58 SPOS01_EX_CMP_TMO SPOS01 timeout after execute completion

SPOS01(Function ID: 510001)
800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND dev01 close command
800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK dev01 close command with interlock bypass
800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND dev01 open command
800101EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK dev01 open command with interlock bypass
820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 SPOS01IN_TMP_28
800101EE53 SPOS01IN_TMP_29 SPOS01IN_TMP_29
820101EE5A SPOS01IN_TMP_37 SPOS01IN_TMP_37
830101EE5B SPOS01IN_TMP_38 SPOS01IN_TMP_38

- 156 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

SPOS01(Function ID: 510001)
810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42 SPOS01IN_TMP_42
820101EE5E SPOS01IN_TMP_44 SPOS01IN_TMP_44
830101EE5F SPOS01IN_TMP_45 SPOS01IN_TMP_45
 Mapping points in SPOS01

SPOS(FunctionID:510001)
7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ SPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data)
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SPOS function. We
example, when the user wishes to find the “SPOS01_SC_OWS” point for
the 2nd device, use the description of “SPOS01_SC_OWS” in place of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for SPOS01_SC_OWS (i.e.,
“8001011D51”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8001021D51” of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal
notation. Thus, the user must change the device number
from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.

- 157 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Software switch controller function (SOFTSW)

Sixty-three software-switches (CBK, ICB, and S43-01 to -61) are provided in the IED memory
as virtual switches; they are used to determine the operation of internal processes in the IED.
Either the criteria “Enable (On)” or “Disable (Off)” may be applied for each software switch,
S43. Two software switches have already been defined for special purposes; they are used to
blocking command (CBK) and bypassing interlock (ICB) functions. The other switches, S43-01
to S43-61, are provided for general-purpose usage.

- 158 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Figure 4.2-1 shows the eight switches and their controller functions. The statuses of the S43
switches are stored in the IED non-volatile memory; hence, the IED can retrieve their status
while power is not being supplied to the IED.
Switches for
CMDBLK ILKBYP special purposes
(CBK) (ICB)
SOFTSW1 SOFTSW2 SOFTSW3 SOFTSW61 General purpose

(S43-01) (S43-02) (S43-03) (S43-61) switches
Figure 4.2-1 Software switches (S43s) and their controller
The SOFTSW function can control a number of S43 software switches separately. To
simplify the explanation provided below only the SOFTSW1 function is discussed. The features
provided in CBK, ICB and SOFTSW2–61 switches are similar to the SOFTSW1 switch.
Tips: The user can operate CBK and ICB without user programming. Jump to section
4.2.5 where we discuss how to map their signals for IEC61850 communication.
When the user wishes to program the SOFTSW functions using the S43-01–S43-
61 switches, the user is required to read from section 4.2.2 onwards.
4.2.1 SOFTSW controlling

(i) Command blocking (CBK)
When the user wishes to avoid the control of devices by mistake during test and maintenance,
the user can use the command blocking function so that mal-operation can be avoided. The
execution of command blocking is available from the IED front panel. Additionally, the IEC
61850 standard provides command blocking (CmdBlk) for remote operation and the CBK
function is defined at the logical node (LN) given in IEC 61850-7-1 (Edition 2.0). Thus, the IED
can override all commands received when the command blocking function is engaged from the
local-end and the remote-end. With regard to the command “CmdBlk” from the remote-end,
the command is received at the input point “CBK_CONROL_REQ”, as shown in Table 4.2-1.
For SOFTSW1 operation, the user should set the scheme switch [CBK-EN] to On.
Input CBK logic Output
To “Select condition logic” and

Reception of CMDBLK “Operate condition logic” †
CBK_STATE
All control commands must be blocked simultaneously
Blocking of all commands is (522001 000A011001)
522001 700A016D08 CBK__CONTROL_REQ
performed.
Figure 4.2-2 Logic “CBK” and response “CBK_STATE”

†Note:The user is required to map a communication signal to the input-point. For
mapping, see section 4.2.5. The “CBK_STATE” signal is used in control
applications so that control applications can determine their operational
conditions. (See control and operation logic for the respective control applications.)

- 159 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Interlock bypassing (ICB) provided

When the user executes control applications from the IED front panel, the Interlock bypassing
(ICB) function enables control applications to bypass their interlock conditions if required.
When the ICB is engaged, all control processes, operated from the IED front panel, are able to
bypass their interlock conditions. The user should note that operation of the ICB function is
available for five minutes following its initiation. For operation of the ICB function, the user
should set the scheme switch [ICB-EN] to On.
Input ICB logic Output
To “Select logic” and
Reception of ILKBYP in S4302 ICB_STATE “Operation logic”†
All interlocking condition shall be bypassed Interlock bypassing is (522001 000A021001
on the operation from the IED front panel performed. )
Figure 4.2-3 Logic “ICB” and response “ICB_STATE”

†Note:The ICB_STATE is provided for the “Select logic” and “Operate logic” in the
control applications.
(iii) S43-01 to S43-61 controlling provided by SOFTSW1 to SOFTSW61†

The SOFTSW1 to SOFTSW61 functions are provided for control of the S43-01 to S43-61
switches, as described previously. For example, Figure 4.2-4 shows the SOFTSW1 function
controlling the S43-01 switch; control of the S43-01 switch is enabled when the user sets the
scheme switch [S4301-EN]† to On. Likewise, the user is required to set On for scheme switches
[S4302-EN] to [S4361-EN] with regard to the SOFTSW2–61 operations, respectively.
Input SOFTSW1 logic Output
To user-programmed logic
Command reception in S4301 S4301_STATE
Command provided by the PLC function
Software switch operation is (522001 000A041001)
522001 700A046D08 S4301__CONTROL_REQ performed.
Figure 4.2-4 Logic “SOFTSW1” and response “S4301_STATE”
(iv) SOFTSW output-status

Table 4.2-1 shows the list of output signals of the SOFTSW functions.
Table 4.2-1 Output signals of SOFTSW function
522001 000A011001 CBK_STATE CBK status ( Off / Blocked)

522001 000A021001 ICB_STATE IBK switch status
522001 000A041001 S4301_STATE S43-01 switch status
…. …. ….

- 160 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.2.2 Control logics for SBO/DIR modes

For example, the user should set scheme switch [S4301-EN] to On when the SOFTSW1
function is required to be operated. Table 4.2-9 shows all scheme switches for the SOFTSW
functions.
(i) Receiving “select command for On operation” from the remote-end

Figure 4.2-5 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-ON-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 function. The logic has an input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” for the
reception of the select command. That is, the input-point should be mapped for the IEC61850
communication. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is significant for the SOFTSW1
operation; hence, an operation failure in the IED is indicated if mapping is not performed
correctly. Section 4.2.5 discusses how to map the information of the IEC61850 to the input-
510001 7001016D08
points.
Input Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output
SOTFSW1 function (Function ID: 522001)

For SBO operation
522001_700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
For DIR operation

For monitoring
Operate command
& “S4301_OSD_CSF”
(522001_8F0A041F49)
0 t Select “success”
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s

In DIR operate
510001 8601011DC
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.2-5 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.2-5 and Table 4.2-8.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided from select condition scheme. For more
automatic control. The SOFTSW1 function is blocked for the ASEQ function when
*Note:The SOFTSW1 function can run on either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use the signal “ctlmodel” in the IEC61850 communication.

- 161 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Output signal for monitoring

The user can monitor a “Select success” signal at the output point “S4301_OSL_CSF”, when
the SOFTSW1 function determines that the received “Remote-ON-Control” signal is true. If
the SOFTSW1 function determines that the “Remote-ON-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1
function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(ii) Receiving “select command for Off operation” from the remote end
Figure 4.2-6 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is applied
at the SOFTSW1 function. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the reception
of the select command (Remote-OFF-Control).
SOFTSW1 function (Function ID: 522001)

For SBO operation
522001_700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
For DIR operation

For monitoring
Operate command
& “S4301_FSD_CSF”
(522001_8D0A041F45)
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.2-6 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.2-5 and Table 4.2-8.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided in Figure 4.2-11.

The SOFTSW1 function, in Figure 4.2-6, can issue a “Select success” signal at output point
“S4301_FSL_CSF” when the SOFTSW1 function determines that the input signal “Select
command (Remote-OFF-Control)” is true. If the SOFTSW1 function determines that the
“Remote-OFF-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.
(iii) Receiving “Selection command for On operation” from the front

- 162 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
panel
Input signal
Figure 4.2-7 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is applied to
the SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when “On” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped. Note that the user should set scheme
switch [S4301-CTRAHMI] to SBO when the operation from the IED front panel is performed;
chapter User interface: Control sub-menu discusses how to operate.

For SBO operation
& 1≥ &
Operate command For monitoring
(522001_8F0A041F49)
DIR
0 t
Select “success”
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.2-7 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.2-8.
‡Note:Signal “select condition” is provided. See Figure 4.2-11.
§Note:The SOFTSW1 function is blocked when the ASEQ function is in operation.

When the state of “select condition” is true, the SOFTSW1 function can issue an output signal
“Select success” at the output-point “S4301_OSD_CSF”.
Note: The signal “S4301_OSD_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure 4.2-5. If the
input signal “Local-ON-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to the
“Wait for a command” stage.
(iv) Receiving “Select command for Off operation” from the front panel
Input signal
Figure 4.2-8 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when the user presses “OFF” key on the
IED front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped.

- 163 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

For SBO operation
& 1≥ &
Operate command For monitoring
(522001_8D0A041F45)
DIR
0 t
0.1s

0 t Select “Failed”
0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.2-8 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: Figure 4.2-8 is used for the discussion of SOFTSW1 logic. To identify the output
points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.2-8.

When the state of “select condition” is true, the SOFTSW1 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “S4301_FSD_CSF”.
Note: The “S4301_FSD_CSF” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4.2-6.
That is, this signal of the logic appears at the same PLC monitoring point. If the
input signal “Local-OFF-Control” is not true, the SOFTSW1 function returns to
(v) Receiving “Select command for On operation” using the PLC

function
Input signal required to connect
Figure 4.2-9 shows that the select logic when a “Select command (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC
logic; the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_ON”.

- 164 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output

ON-control command
For DIR operation†
(PLC connection point #1)
Operate command
522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON For monitoring
(522001_8F0A411F49)
0.1s

Select condition‡ 0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
Figure 4.2-9 Select logic for ON operation by PLC in SOFTSW1††

†Note:Direct operation mode (DIR) is only available.
‡Note:“select condition” signal is provided. See Figure 4.2-11.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.2-2 and Table 4.2-8.

The SOFTSW1 function shown in Figure 4.2-9, can issue a “Select success” signal at output-
point “S4301_OSD_CSF”.
Note: The signal “S4301_OSD_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4.2-5.
(vi) Receiving “Select command for Off operation” using PLC function
Figure 4.2-10 shows the SOFTSW1 logic for a “Select command (PLC-OFF-Control)” signal.
The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC logic; the user can connect the
signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_OFF”.
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in SOFTSW1 Output

OFF-control command
For DIR operation†
Operate command
522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF For monitoring
(522001_8D0A411F45)
0.1s

Select condition‡ 0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
Figure 4.2-10 Select logic for OFF operation by PLC in SOFTSW1††

†Note:Direct operation mode (DIR) is available only.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.2-3 and Table 4.2-8.

- 165 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Output signal to monitoring

The SOFTSW1 function shown in Figure 4.2-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the
output point “S4301_FSD_CSF”.
Note: The output point “S4301_FSD_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.2-6.

Figure 4.2-11 shows the select condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function. The SOFTSW1
function can examine an operate-condition using “Command Blocking” signal1.

Command blocking*1 defined as ”CBK”)
To selection logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ Select condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL

received
S4301_STATE
(522001 000A411001)
Same Directional
Controlling Event

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point #3)*5
522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[S4301-EN]
On
Figure 4.2-11 Select condition logic for ‘ON/OFF’ in SOFTSW1

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except its own; see the signal
“CBK_STATE (Table 4.2-1)” as the state of “Command Blocking” in the SOFTSW
function.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB_RCV_OR in Table 4.2-7)” is an operation
philosophy. It can be used to protect a substation. The user can configure it using
GR-TIEMS.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling (Traveling OR in Table 4.2-7)” is detected in the
IED, it indicated that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus,
the IED should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event
is detected.
4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in command is
not identical to “IED test status”.

- 166 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Control hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be

43R/L; the user can connect it at PLC connection point “S4301_CTRL_RIGHT” of
Table 4.2-4.

each table:
used.
Table 4.2-2 PLC connection point #1 (Inputs point for ‘On’ control)
522001 850A01EDE1 CBK_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for CBK O

522001 850A02EDE1 ICB_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for ICB O
522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for SOFTSW1 (S43-01) O
…. ….. ….
Table 4.2-3 PLC connection point #2 (Input points for ‘Off’ control)
522001 860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for CBK O

522001 860A02EDE0 ICB_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for ICB O
522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for SOFTSW1 (S43-01) O
…. ….. ….
Table 4.2-4 PLC connection point #3 (Input points on select condition logic)
522001 820A01ED50 CBK_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in CBK M

522001 820A02ED50 ICB_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in ICB M
522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) M
…. ….. ….
Table 4.2-5 Mapping points for the command reception in SOFTSWx

522001 700A016D08 CBK_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in CBK M

522001 700A026D08 ICB_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in ICB M

- 167 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Control command received in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) M

…. ….. ….
Table 4.2-6 Mapping points for the output signals of SOFTSWx

522001 000A011D90 CBK_STSELD Selection completed signal in CBK M

522001 000A021D90 ICB_STSELD Selection completed signal in ICB M
522001 000A041D90 S4301_STSELD Selection completed signal in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) M
…. ….. ….
Table 4.2-7 Input signals for condition logic

5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking (DCB) is in progress. N/A
Table 4.2-8 PLC monitoring points (ON and OFF selection completion)
522001 8F0A011F49 CBK_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in CBK

522001 8F0A021F49 ICB_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in ICB
522001 8F0A041F49 S4301_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
…. …. …..
522001 8D0A011F45 CBK_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in CBK
522001 8D0A021F45 ICB_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in ICB
522001 8D0A041F45 S4301_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
…. …. ….
(ix) Setting names
Table 4.2-9 Setting of SOFTSWx control

CBK-EN Function activation in CBK On Off / On

ICB-EN Function activation in ICB On Off / On
S4301-EN Function activation in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) On Off / On

- 168 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
…. …. … ….
CBK-CTRAHMI HMI activation in CBK On Off / On
ICB-CTRAHMI HMI activation in ICB On Off / On
S4301-CTRAHMI HMI activation in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) On Off / On
…. …. … …

- 169 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel
conditions are satisfied, accordingly, the function can discard the select command.
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from remote-end

Figure 4.2-12 shows the logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is applied to
the SOFTSW1 function. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as the
“Selection command (Remote-On-Control)”510001
signal.
7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in SOFTSW1 Output

Cancel command
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ
Successes to cancel
&
Operation Failed
Unmatched condition &
detected†
Figure 4.2-12 Cancel logic by the reception of the command from the remote end
†Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
(ii) Receiving “Cancel” from local-end

Figure 4.2-13 shows the logic when a “Cancel command (Local-cancel)” signal is applied to the
SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the user is not required to map it. When the logic receives input “Local-cancel”
signal, the logic is able to output a result signal, provided that the “unmatched condition
detected” checking is satisfied.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in SOFTSW1 Output
Cancel command
Command “Local-cancel”
Successes to cancel
&
Unmatched condition
& Operation Failed
detected†
Figure 4.2-13 Cancel logic by the reception of the command at local end
†Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status”.

The user should map the operation command to the operate logic. If the operation conditions
are satisfied, the IED is able to change the state in the SOFWSW1–61 (S43-01 to S43-61).

- 170 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Receiving “operate command On” from remote-end

Figure 4.2-14 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Remote-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the “Select command (Remote-On-Control)”.
Input Operate logic in SOFTSW1 Output
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (522001_890A041F5A)
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Operate Command

& OFF to ON
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL “S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
522001_810A041D03 Operate completed

S4301_ST_ON &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.2-14 ‘ON’ Operation logic by remote end in SOFTSW1†

†Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other SOFTSW logics, see
Table 4.2-5, Table 4.2-7, Table 4.2-10, Table 4.2-13, and Table 4.2-14.
‡Note:“operate condition” signal is provided from operate condition scheme. For more
(ii) Receiving “operate command Off” from remote-end

Figure 4.2-15 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Remote-Off-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the signal “Operate command (Remote-Off-Control)”.
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-OFF-Control” (522001_8A0A041F5B)
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ Operate Command

& ON to OFF
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_OFF &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.2-15 ‘OFF’ Operation logic by remote end in SOFTSW1†

†Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table

- 171 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

§Note: The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
(iii) Receiving “operate command On” from the local end

Figure 4.2-16 shows the logic when an “Operate command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution of On” key is
pressed on the IED front panel.
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
(522001_890A041F5A)
Operate Command
Command “Local-On-Control”
& OFF to ON
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_ON &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.2-16 ‘ON’ Operation logic at local in SOFTSW1†

Table 4.2-10, Table 4.2-12, and Table 4.2-14.
(iv) Receiving “operate command Off” from the local end

Figure 4.2-17 shows the logic when an “Operation command (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution for Off” key is
pressed on the IED front panel.
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
(522001_8A0A041F5B)
Command “Local-Off-Control” Operate Command

& ON to OFF
(522001_870A041F62)

S4301_ST_OFF &
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.2-17 ‘OFF’ Operation logic at local in SOFTSW1†

- 172 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
†Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.2-11, Table 4.2-12, and Table 4.2-13.
‡Note: “operate condition” signal is provided from operate condition scheme. For more
§Note: The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
(v) Receiving “operate command On” using PLC logic

Figure 4.2-18 shows the logic when an “Operate command (PLC-ON-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC logic;
the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_ON”.
SOTFSW1 function (Function ID: 522001)
ON-control command “S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC”

(PLC connection point #1) (522001_8C0A041F5D)
522001 850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON Operate Command

& OFF to ON
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
S4301_ST_ON &
“S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.2-18 ‘ON’ Operation logic using PLC logic†

(vi) Receiving “operate command Off” using PLC logic

Figure 4.2-19 shows the logic when an “Operation command (PLC-Off-Control)” signal is
applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC
logic; the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_OFF”.

- 173 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
ON-control command “S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC”

(PLC connection point #2) (522001_8C0A041F5D)
522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF Operate Command

& ON to OFF
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
S4301_ST_OFF &
“S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Figure 4.2-19 ‘Off’ Operation logic using PLC logic†


Figure 4.2-20 shows the operate condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function. The SOFTSW1
function can examine an operate-condition using “Command Blocking” signal1.

Command blocking*1 (defined as ”CBK”)
To operate logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ operate condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR

ASEQ_MULTI_SEL

received
S4301_STATE
(522001 000A041001)
Same Directional
Controlling Event

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point #3)*5
522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[S4301-EN]
On
Figure 4.2-20 Operate condition logic for ON/OFF in SOFTSW1*6

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except for itself; See the signal
“S4301_STATE (Table 4.2-1)” as the state of “Command Blocking” in the SOFTSW
function.

- 174 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB_RCV_OR in Table 4.2-7)” is an operation

philosophy. It can be used to protect the substation. The user can configure it
using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling (Traveling OR in Table 4.2-7)” signifies that
other operators are changing the status of one or more devices. Thus, device
operation by the IED should be inhibited whilst the event is detected.
4Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when the “Test-bit status” in a
5Note: The user must program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control
hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be 43R/L;
the user can connect it with PLC connection point “S4301_CTRL_RIGHT” of
Figure 4.2-20.
6Note: To identify the PLC connection points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.2-4.

Note: The user should note the meaning of the following abbreviations as shown in
column “M/O” of each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for the optional use.
Table 4.2-10 Output signals on starting operation “Off to On”
522001 890A011F5A CBK_OEC_CHG “Off to On” operation start in CBK

522001 890A021F5A ICB_OEC_CHG “Off to On” operation start in ICB
522001 890A041F5A S4301_OEC_CHG “Off to On” operation start in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… …. ….
Table 4.2-11 Output signals on starting operation “On to Off”

522001 8A0A011F5B CBK_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in CBK

522001 8A0A021F5B ICB_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in ICB
522001 8A0A041F5B S4301_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
522001 8C0A401F5D S4361_FEC_CHG “On to Off” operation start in SOFTSW61 (S43-61)
Table 4.2-12 Success signals of the operation


- 175 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
522001 870A011F62 CBK_EX_SS Operation succeeded in CBK

522001 870A021F62 ICB_EX_SS Operation succeeded in ICB
522001 870A041F62 S4301_EX_SS Operation succeeded in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
Table 4.2-13 OFF status signals on the operation

522001 830A011D02 CBK_ST_OFF “Off” status of CBK

522001 830A021D02 ICB_OFF “Off” status of ICB
522001 830A041D02 S4301_ST_OFF “Off” status of SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
Table 4.2-14 ON status signals on the operation

522001 810A011D03 CBK_ST_ON “On” status of CBK

522001 810A021D03 ICB_ST_ON “On” status of ICB
522001 810A041D03 S4301_ST_ON “On” status of SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
Table 4.2-15 Failure signals generated by PLC control

522001 800A011DE0 CBK_PLC_CTRL_FAIL Control failure in CBK

522001 800A021DE0 ICB_PLC_CTRL_FAIL Control failure in ICB
522001 800A041DE0 S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL Control failure in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
… … …
Table 4.2-16 Output signals on starting operation “Off to On” by PLC

522001 8B0A011F5C CBK_OEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA022

522001 8B0A021F5C ICB_OEC_CHG_PLC ICB signal after KC_S43_SA022
522001 8B0A041F5C S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFTSW1 signal after KC_S43_SA022
… … …

- 176 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.2-17 Output signals on starting operation “On to Off” by PLC

522001 8C0A011F5D CBK_FEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA023

522001 8C0A021F5D ICB_FEC_CHG_PLC ICB signal after KC_S43_SA023
522001 8C0A041F5D S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC SOFTSW1 signal after KC_S43_SA023
… … …

- 177 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user can operate the SOFTSW1 function over IEC 61850 communications following
mapping using GR-TIEMS. Note that the SOFTSW1 function is designed for the class of
“Single Point Controller (SPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should
follow these steps, each of which is discussed below:

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the SOFTSW1 function. Figure 4.2-21
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “General Input/Output (GGIO)” is chosen for the
SOFTSW1 function for IEC 61850 communication. After the user has defined an object
“SPCSO”, the SOFTSW1 logical node can be saved with the name “GGIO” plus “LN Instance”.
Create a definition of the object “SPCSO” in SOFTSW1 logical node. Either the SBO mode or
the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.2-21 Defining “SPCSO” object in GGIO701 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.2-22 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO701” when the SBO mode is required for
the SOFTSW1 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“GGIO701$SPCSO” using GR-TIEMS;

- 178 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass (choice ”operate-once”)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.2-23 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO701” when the DIR mode is required for
the SOFTSW1 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using
GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin

The user should group the SOFTSW1 (S4301) signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT;
the user should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.

- 179 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.2-18 shows the required mapping signals in SOFTSW1 function to the IEC 61850
communications. Figure 4.2-24 shows how to map a signal.
Table 4.2-18 Mapping signals for SPCSO object.

Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 522001 310A041008 S4301_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 522001 6A0A041009 S4301_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO stVal INT32 ST 522001 000A041001 S4301_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO q Quality ST 522001 310A041005 S4301_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO t Timestamp ST 522001 900A041006 S4301_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 522001 000A041D90 S4301_STSELD
Figure 4.2-24 orCat attribute mapped into SPCSO object of GGIO701

The SOFTSW1 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 4.2-19 shows the input-point
“S4301_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO”; the user should map
the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC† to the input-point. Figure 4.2-25 shows

- 180 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.2-19 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object in SOFTSW1 function
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”

- 181 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.2.6 Setting
SOTFSW(FunctionID:522001)
CBK-EN Off / On - control command block switch Enable Off

ICB-EN Off / On - Interlock check bypass in controlled on LCD Off
S4301-EN Off / On - Soft 43 switch1 Enable Off
… …. …. ….
CBK CBK-NAME [Preferred text] - item name of control command block signal CMDBLK !
CBK-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
CBK-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) Blocked !
CBK-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
CBK-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
ICB ICB-NAME [Preferred text] - item name of interlock bypass signal ILKBYP !
ICB-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
ICB-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) Bypass !
ICB-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
ICB-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
S43 SW1 S4301-SWNAME [Preferred text] - item name of soft 43 switch signal SOFTSW1 !
S4301-OFFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(off) Off !
S4301-ONNAME [Preferred text] - state name of state(on) On !
S4301-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
S4301-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
SW2 S4302-SWNAME [Preferred text] - item name of soft 43 switch signal SOFTSW2 !
… … …. ….

- 182 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.2.7 Signal
SOFTSW(Function ID:522001)
000A011001 CBK_STATE CMDBLK status
000A011D90 CBK_STSELD CMDBLK the controllable data is in the status
310A011D00 CBK_STS_MIMIC CMDBLK status
310A011D01 CBK_STS CMDBLK status
800A011D51 CBK_SC_OWS CMDBLK select command by OWS(HMI)
800A011D52 CBK_SC_RCC CMDBLK select command by RCC
800A011D53 CBK_SC CMDBLK select command
800A011D54 CBK_SC_LCD CMDBLK select command by LCD
800A011D55 CBK_EC_OWS CMDBLK execute command by OWS(HMI)
800A011D56 CBK_EC_RCC CMDBLK execute command by RCC
800A011D57 CBK_EC CMDBLK execute command
800A011D58 CBK_EC_LCD CMDBLK execute command by LCD
800A011DE0 CBK_PLC_CTRL_FAIL CMDBLK PLC control fail
800A011F42 CBK_TMP2 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA002
810A011D03 CBK_ST_ON CMDBLK On state
830A011D02 CBK_ST_OFF CMDBLK Off state
830A011F41 CBK_NSD_CSF CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA001
850A011F4A CBK_TMP8 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A011F5E CBK_TMP11 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A011F43 CBK_TMP3 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A011F4E CBK_SLF_FCT_FLG01 CMDBLK signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A011F50 CBK_SLF_FCT_FLG02 CMDBLK signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A011F62 CBK_EX_SS CMDBLK signal execute success
880A011F4B CBK_TMP9 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A011F4D CBK_TMP10 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A011F5F CBK_TMP12 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A011F5A CBK_OEC_CHG CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA011
890A011F61 CBK_TMP14 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA014
8A0A011F47 CBK_TMP6 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A011F5B CBK_FEC_CHG CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A011F4C CBK_CTR_SGU CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A011F5C CBK_OEC_CHG_PLC CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A011F5D CBK_FEC_CHG_PLC CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A011F45 CBK_FSD_CSF CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A011F4F CBK_SLD_TM0 CMDBLK signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A011F49 CBK_OSD_CSF CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A011F51 CBK_EX_CMP_TM0 CMDBLK signal after MCTS43_SC002
000A021001 ICB_STATE ILKBYP status
000A021D90 ICB_STSELD ILKBYP the controllable data is in the status

- 183 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

310A021D00 ICB_STS_MIMIC ILKBYP status
310A021D01 ICB_STS ILKBYP status
800A021D51 ICB_SC_OWS ILKBYP select command by OWS(HMI)
800A021D52 ICB_SC_RCC ILKBYP select command by RCC
800A021D53 ICB_SC ILKBYP select command
800A021D54 ICB_SC_LCD ILKBYP select command by LCD
800A021D55 ICB_EC_OWS ILKBYP execute command by OWS(HMI)
800A021D56 ICB_EC_RCC ILKBYP execute command by RCC
800A021D57 ICB_EC ILKBYP execute command
800A021D58 ICB_EC_LCD ILKBYP execute command by LCD
800A021DE0 ICB_PLC_CTRL_FAIL ILKBYP PLC control fail
800A021F42 ICB_TMP2 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA002
800A021F63 ICB_FLG1 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA015
810A021D03 ICB_ST_ON ILKBYP On state
830A021D02 ICB_ST_OFF ILKBYP Off state
830A021F41 ICB_NSD_CSF ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA001
840A021F65 ICB_RST ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA017
850A021F4A ICB_TMP8 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A021F5E ICB_TMP11 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A021F43 ICB_TMP3 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A021F4E ICB_SLF_FCT_FLG01 ILKBYP signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A021F50 ICB_SLF_FCT_FLG02 ILKBYP signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A021F62 ICB_EX_SS ILKBYP signal execute success
870A021F64 ICB_FLG2 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA016
880A021F4B ICB_TMP9 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A021F4D ICB_TMP10 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A021F5F ICB_TMP12 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A021F5A ICB_OEC_CHG ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA011
890A021F61 ICB_TMP14 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA014
8A0A021F47 ICB_TMP6 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A021F5B ICB_FEC_CHG ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A021F4C ICB_CTR_SGU ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A021F5C ICB_OEC_CHG_PLC ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A021F5D ICB_FEC_CHG_PLC ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A021F45 ICB_FSD_CSF ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A021F4F ICB_SLD_TM0 ILKBYP signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A021F49 ICB_OSD_CSF ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A021F51 ICB_EX_CMP_TM0 ILKBYP signal after MCTS43_SC002
000A041001 S4301_STATE SOFT 43 switch1 status
000A041D90 S4301_STSELD SOFT 43 switch1 the controllable data is in the status

- 184 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

310A041D00 S4301_STS_MIMIC SOFT 43 switch1 status
310A041D01 S4301_STS SOFT 43 switch1 status
800A041D51 S4301_SC_OWS SOFT 43 switch1 select command by OWS(HMI)
800A041D52 S4301_SC_RCC SOFT 43 switch1 select command by RCC
800A041D53 S4301_SC SOFT 43 switch1 select command
800A041D54 S4301_SC_LCD SOFT 43 switch1 select command by LCD
800A041D55 S4301_EC_OWS SOFT 43 switch1 execute command by OWS(HMI)
800A041D56 S4301_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch1 execute command by RCC
800A041D57 S4301_EC SOFT 43 switch1 execute command
800A041D58 S4301_EC_LCD SOFT 43 switch1 execute command by LCD
800A041DE0 S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch1 PLC control fail
800A041F42 S4301_TMP2 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SA002
810A041D03 S4301_ST_ON SOFT 43 switch1 On state
830A041D02 S4301_ST_OFF SOFT 43 switch1 Off state
830A041F41 S4301_NSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA001
850A041F4A S4301_TMP8 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A041F5E S4301_TMP11 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A041F43 S4301_TMP3 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A041F4E S4301_SLF_FCT_FLG01 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A041F50 S4301_SLF_FCT_FLG02 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A041F62 S4301_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch1 signal execute success
880A041F4B S4301_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A041F4D S4301_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A041F5F S4301_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A041F5A S4301_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA011
8A0A041F47 S4301_TMP6 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A041F5B S4301_FEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A041F4C S4301_CTR_SGU SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A041F5C S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A041F5D S4301_FEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A041F45 S4301_FSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A041F4F S4301_SLD_TM0 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A041F49 S4301_OSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A041F51 S4301_EX_CMP_TM0 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after MCTS43_SC002

- 185 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 186 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

…. …. ….
000A3F1001 S4360_STATE SOFT 43 switch60 status
000A3F1D90 S4360_STSELD SOFT 43 switch60 the controllable data is in the status
310A3F1D00 S4360_STS_MIMIC SOFT 43 switch60 status
310A3F1D01 S4360_STS SOFT 43 switch60 status
800A3F1D51 S4360_SC_OWS SOFT 43 switch60 select command by OWS(HMI)
800A3F1D52 S4360_SC_RCC SOFT 43 switch60 select command by RCC
800A3F1D53 S4360_SC SOFT 43 switch60 select command
800A3F1D54 S4360_SC_LCD SOFT 43 switch60 select command by LCD
800A3F1D55 S4360_EC_OWS SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by OWS(HMI)

- 187 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

800A3F1D56 S4360_EC_RCC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by RCC
800A3F1D57 S4360_EC SOFT 43 switch60 execute command
800A3F1D58 S4360_EC_LCD SOFT 43 switch60 execute command by LCD
800A3F1DE0 S4360_PLC_CTRL_FAIL SOFT 43 switch60 PLC control fail
800A3F1F42 S4360_TMP2 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA002
810A3F1D03 S4360_ST_ON SOFT 43 switch60 On state
830A3F1D02 S4360_ST_OFF SOFT 43 switch60 Off state
830A3F1F41 S4360_NSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA001
850A3F1F4A S4360_TMP8 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA006
850A3F1F5E S4360_TMP11 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SA013
860A3F1F43 S4360_TMP3 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA002
860A3F1F4E S4360_SLF_FCT_FLG01 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before MCTS43_SC001
870A3F1F50 S4360_SLF_FCT_FLG02 SOFT 43 switch60 signal before MCTS43_SC002
870A3F1F62 S4360_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch60 signal execute success
880A3F1F4B S4360_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA006
880A3F1F4D S4360_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SC001
880A3F1F5F S4360_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA013
890A3F1F5A S4360_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA011
890A3F1F61 S4360_TMP14 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA014
8A0A3F1F47 S4360_TMP6 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA004
8A0A3F1F5B S4360_FEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA012
8B0A3F1F4C S4360_CTR_SGU SOFT 43 switch60 signal before KC_S43_SC001
8B0A3F1F5C S4360_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA022
8C0A3F1F5D S4360_FEC_CHG_PLC SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA023
8D0A3F1F45 S4360_FSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA003
8E0A3F1F4F S4360_SLD_TM0 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after MCTS43_SC001
8F0A3F1F49 S4360_OSD_CSF SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA005
8F0A3F1F51 S4360_EX_CMP_TM0 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after MCTS43_SC002

- 188 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF CMDBLK change to off
850A01EDE1 CBK_CHG_TO_ON CMDBLK change to on
820A01ED50 CBK_CTRL_RIGHT CMDBLK control right from PLC
860A02EDE0 ICB_CHG_TO_OFF ILKBYP change to off
850A02EDE1 ICB_CHG_TO_ON ILKBYP change to on
820A02ED50 ICB_CTRL_RIGHT ILKBYP control right from PLC
860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF SOFT 43 switch1 change to off
850A04EDE1 S4301_CHG_TO_ON SOFT 43 switch1 change to on
820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT SOFT 43 switch1 control right from PLC

- 189 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

….. …. …..
860A3FEDE0 S4360_CHG_TO_OFF SOFT 43 switch60 change to off
850A3FEDE1 S4360_CHG_TO_ON SOFT 43 switch60 change to on
820A3FED50 S4360_CTRL_RIGHT SOFT 43 switch60 control right from PLC
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SOFTSW function. We
example, when the user wishes to find the “S4301_EC_LCD” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “S4302_EC_LCD” in place of
“S4301_EC_LCD”. The user can obtain the ID value of “S4302_EC_LCD” by
using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for S4301_EC_LCD (i.e.,
“8C00041F45”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8C00051F45” of
“S4302_EC_LCD”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal

- 190 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Total time measurement function (TOTALTIM)

The total time measurement function (TOTALTIM) measures the time of the On state using a
signal which is selected with the logic programmed by the PLC function. The TOTALTIM
function increments the time for which the signal is in the “ON” state and stores it as a
cumulative time. The TOTALTIM function can monitor up to 12 signals simultaneously. This
function also has correction processes.

- 191 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.3.1 Operation feature

(i) Time accumulation process
Figure 4.3-1 outlines the time accumulation process within the TOTALTIM function. The
TOTALTIM function accumulates the time for which the state of the operating signal is in the
“ON” status every second. The accumulation process continues until the maximum
accumulated time reaches 10,000 days (almost 27 years).
Operation
signal
The value returns to zero if the
time counter reaches the
Cumulative maximum value.
time
864,000,000sec
60sec
Operation time
0sec The TOTALTIM function
checks the state of the
operation signal every
second. If the operation
signal is in the “On” state,
TOTALTIM accumulates
TOTALTIM process the “On” time.
Figure 4.3-1 Cumulative time process
(ii) Acquisition of operation signal

The user should connect the binary input circuit (BI) to the TOTALTIM function.
Figure 4.3-2 illustrates that 12 signals can be accommodated from external devices using
BIs. For example, when binary input circuit BI1 receives operating signal1, provided signal-
monitoring point “BI1” is applied for the acquisition of the signal, the user can make the logic
to connect “BI1” with TT01 of the TOTALTIM function using the PLC function.

- 192 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
IED TOTALTIM
Device
TOTAL12_PLC_SGNL
TT12
PLC
SAS
Device #12 BI12-NC BI12 BI12-CPL
Photo- Filter CPL
Operating signal #12
coupler
TOTAL02_PLC_SGNL
TT02
PLC
Device #2 BI2-NC BI2 BI2-CPL IED

TOTAL01_PLC_SGNL IED
Photo- front
Operating signal #2 Filter CPL screen
coupler screen
TT01
PLC
Device #1 BI1-NC BI1 BI1-CPL
Operating signal #1
Photo- Filter CPL
coupler
Contact-switch Binary IO module (BIO)
Figure 4.3-2 Acquisition of operation signals
(iii) Setting for the report (Dead band)

For sending data for the network, the TOTALTIM function will get a new accumulated data
every cycle that is defined with the setting [TTIM*-SDB]. For example, if the user wishes to
report the operation time about the device #1, the user should set ‘1’ to the setting [TTIM01-
SDB], provided the report cycle is required every one second.
Table 4.3-1 Setting for data revision
Scheme switch Set Comment
TTIM01-SDB 1 to 720sec Data revision period for operating signal 1
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted)
(iv) Data correction

In the TOTALTIM function the user can correct the accumulation time using either IED front
panel operation or GR-TIEMS operation (For IED screen operation, see Chapter User interface.
For GR-TIEMS operation, see Chapter Engineering tool)

- 193 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.3.2 Preparation for operation

The TOTALTIM function is enabled when the user sets [TTIM*-EN] On.
Table 4.3-2 TOTALTIM operation

TTIM01-EN On / Off Operation enable for operating signal #1
(omitted) (omitted) (omitted)

- 194 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user can operate the TTIM01 function using IEC 61850 communications after first
mapping the function using GR-TIEMS. The user should proceed as follows

The user must make a logical node (LN) for the TTIM01 function. Figure 4.3-3 exemplifies LN
editing; LN “GGIO1301” is selected for the TTIM01 function for IEC 61850 communication.
After the user has defined an object “ISCSO1”, the TTIM01 logical node can be saved with the
name “GGIO1301”. Define the object “ISCSO1” in the TTIM01 logical node. Either the SBO
mode or the DIR mode can be chosen when editing the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.3-3 Defining “ISCSO1” object in GGIO1301 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.3-4 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO1301” when the SBO mode is required for
the TTIM01 function. For SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“GGIO1301$ISCSO1” using GR-TIEMS;

- 195 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.3-5 exemplifies the settings in LN “GGIO1301” when the DIR mode is required for
the TTIM01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using GR-
TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns”)

The user should group the TTIM01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 4.3-3 shows the mapping signals within the TTIM01 function required for IEC
61850 communication. Figure 4.3-6 shows how to map a signal.

- 196 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.3-3 Mapping signals for ISCSO1 object.

Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$origin orCat orCategory ST 5410013015011D23 TTIM01_TIM_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5410016A15011FA7 TTIM01_TIM_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 stVal INT32 ST 5410013215011D20 TTIM01_TIM_SEC_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 q Quality ST 5410013115011D21 TTIM01_TIM_QLT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 t Timestamp ST 5410019015011D22 TTIM01_TIM_TIM
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5410010015011D91 TTIM01_TMP_01
Ctrl/GGIO1301$AnIn1$mag f FLOAT32 MX 5410013215011D20 TTIM01_TIM_SEC_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO1301$AnIn1 q Quality MX 5410013115011D21 TTIM01_TIM_QLT
Ctrl/GGIO1301$AnIn1 t Timestamp MX 5410019015011D22 TTIM01_TIM_TIM
Note: “Status (ST)” and “Measurement (MX)” are defined in the function constraint (FC)
of the IEC 61850 standard.
Drag and drop
Figure 4.3-6 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO1 object of GGIO1301

The TTIM01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the user
will need to map the input-point “TOTAL01_CMM_REQ”. Table 4.3-4 shows the input-point
“TOTAL01_CMM_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$”; the user should
map the input-point to the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC†. Figure 4.3-7
shows how to map a signal.

- 197 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.3-4 Mapping signals required for GGIO1301 object in TTIM01 function
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
5410017015016D08 TOTAL01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop

- 198 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.3.4 Setting
TOTALTIM（Function ID: 541001)
TTIM01-EN Off / On - Switch for total time metering at Dev.01 Off

Dev. 01 TTIM01-SDB 0 - 720 - Sending Dead Band number 0
TTIM01-DEVNAME [Preferred name] - Device name for Total Time1 TOTAL TIME 1 !
02 TTIM02-SDB 0 - 720 - Sending Dead Band number 0

- 199 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.3.5 Signal
TOTALTIM(Function ID: 541001)
0015001F41 TTIM00_CCTRL_TIME TTIM00 total time correction summarize
8015001D58 TTIM00_CH_EC_LCD TTIM00 total time change execute command by LCD
8015001D55 TTIM00_CH_EC_OWS TTIM00 total time change execute command by OWS(HMI)
8015001D56 TTIM00_CH_EC_RCC TTIM00 total time change execute command by RCC
8015001D57 TTIM00_CH_EC_RMT TTIM00 total time change execute command by Remote
8015001D54 TTIM00_CH_SC_LCD TTIM00 total time change select command by LCD
8015001D51 TTIM00_CH_SC_OWS TTIM00 total time change select command by OWS(HMI)
8015001D52 TTIM00_CH_SC_RCC TTIM00 total time change select command by RCC
8015001D53 TTIM00_CH_SC_RMT TTIM00 total time change select command by Remote
8415011E95 TTIM01_CC_SS TTIM01 cancel success signal
8915011EA2 TTIM01_CTR_SGU TTIM01 control logic stage(under selection)
8315011E8B TTIM01_EC_F_CN TTIM01 execute command fail condition signal
8215011E84 TTIM01_EC_OK_CS TTIM01 execute command OK condition signal
8A15011E76 TTIM01_SLD_CS TTIM01 selected condition signal
8B15011E7B TTIM01_SLF_CS TTIM01 select fail condition signal
3215011F41 TTIM01_TIM_MIN TTIM01 total time (minutes)
0015011D91 TTIM01_TMP_01 TTIM01 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
8315021E8B TTIM02_EC_F_CS TTIM02 execute command fail condition signal

- 200 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

84150A1E95 TTIM10_CC_SS TTIM10 cancel success signal
89150A1EA2 TTIM10_CTR_SGU TTIM10 control logic stage(under selection)
83150A1E8B TTIM10_EC_F_CS TTIM10 execute command fail condition signal
82150A1E84 TTIM10_EC_OK_CS TTIM10 execute command OK condition signal
8A150A1E76 TTIM10_SLD_CS TTIM10 selected condition signal
8B150A1E7B TTIM10_SLF_CS TTIM10 select fail condition signal

- 201 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

32150A1F41 TTIM10_TIM_MIN TTIM10 total time (minutes)
00150A1D91 TTIM10_TMP_01 TTIM10 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
84150B1E95 TTIM11_CC_SS TTIM11 cancel success signal
89150B1EA2 TTIM11_CTR_SGU TTIM11 control logic stage(under selection)
83150B1E8B TTIM11_EC_F_CS TTIM11 execute command fail condition signal
82150B1E84 TTIM11_EC_OK_CS TTIM11 execute command OK condition signal
8A150B1E76 TTIM11_SLD_CS TTIM11 selected condition signal
8B150B1E7B TTIM11_SLF_CS TTIM11 select fail condition signal
32150B1F41 TTIM11_TIM_MIN TTIM11 total time (minutes)
00150B1D91 TTIM11_TMP_01 TTIM11 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
84150C1E95 TTIM12_CC_SS TTIM12 cancel success signal
89150C1EA2 TTIM12_CTR_SGU TTIM12 control logic stage(under selection)
83150C1E8B TTIM12_EC_F_CS TTIM12 execute command fail condition signal
82150C1E84 TTIM12_EC_OK_CS TTIM12 execute command OK condition signal
8A150C1E76 TTIM12_SLD_CS TTIM12 selected condition signal
8B150C1E7B TTIM12_SLF_CS TTIM12 select fail condition signal
32150C1F41 TTIM12_TIM_MIN TTIM12 total time (minutes)
00150C1D91 TTIM12_TMP_01 TTIM12 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS

801500ED5A TOTAL00IN_TMP_51 TOTAL00IN_TMP_51
801501EDE0 TOTAL01_PLC_SGNL TOTAL01 plc signal
80150AEDE0 TOTAL10_PLC_SGNL TOTAL10 plc signal
80150BEDE0 TOTAL11_PLC_SGNL TOTAL11 plc signal
80150CEDE0 TOTAL12_PLC_SGNL TOTAL12 plc signal
 Mapping point in TTIM01

TOTALTIM (Function ID: 541001)
7015016D08 TOTAL01_CMM_REQ TOTAL01 correction request from cmm

- 202 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 Mapping point in TTIM01

TOTALTIM (Function ID: 541001)
70150A6D08 TOTAL10_CMM_REQ TOTAL10 correction request from cmm
70150B6D08 TOTAL11_CMM_REQ TOTAL11 correction request from cmm
70150C6D08 TOTAL12_CMM_REQ TOTAL12 correction request from cmm

- 203 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Software interlock function (ILK)

Devices must be controlled in accordance with the prevailing operational condition of the
electric power system. If a device does not act or behave in accordance with the operational
circumstances, inappropriate device control can result in outages or fatal incidents for the
network. In order to avoid such circumstances, software interlock (ILK) function is provided
that is able to examine the current operational situation and determine whether to permit the
control of a particular device.
When using the ILK function, an interlock-check formula is required. The interlock-check
formula examines the operational conditions for all devices, and is stored in the ILK database.
The ILK function provides an output signal “OK/NG decision information”; the “OK/NG
decision information” is transferred to the control functions†, which control the external
devices. Following which, the control functions can commence with the control of the selected
devices in response to the respective “OK/NG decision information”.
†Note:Details of SPOS, DPOS, and TPOS features are discussed separately elsewhere in
the instruction manual under the Chapter Control and monitoring applications.

- 204 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Prior to controlling a device, the interlock-check function is used to determine whether the
control of a device is correct or not. If the interlock-check finds that the conditions for device
control have not been satisfied in accordance with the appropriate interlock condition, control
of the device is forbidden. Figure 4.4-1 provides an overview of the interlock-check process.
Formulae for interlock-check are stored in an ILK database; these formulae are used in order
to enable the interlock-check function to output a decision. If the proposed operation of a
particular device is deemed correct then an “OK-decision” is determined by the formulae, and
device control is allowed. However, if the proposed operation of the device is deemed incorrect
then an “NG-decision” is determined by the formulae, and device control is not allowed.
Device IED
Binary
Circuit input Control
breaker Interlock Control
Device status circuits Device status Functions
(CB) Device status Function (ILK)
SPOS
DPOS
Dis- Binary OK/NG decision Interlock
and
connector Output
others
(DS) circuits
Device control Control Database
Other IE Ds
GOOSE GOOSE receiving information
GOOSE subscription
data
transmission
data
PC(GR-TIEMS)
Interlock formulas
Figure 4.4-1 Interlock–check process
4.4.1 ILK specification

(i) Maximum number of interlock-checks
Since the maximum number of interlock-checks is 83, ILK can be used to supervise 83 control
devices. An interlock-check can include up to 500 nodes; an interlock operator and input/output
signals are configured for each node; a node can accept up to 64 input signals. (Nodes are
discussed separately. See section 4.4.3)
(ii) GOOSE receiving information

When an interlock-check is required to determine an “OK/NG-decision”, the interlock-check
function collects the device status from all of the other IEDs during the interlock-check process.
In this case, GOOSE subscription information is used to acquire the device status required;
configuration of the interlock-check formula, including quality information corresponding to

- 205 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
other IEDs and GOOSE, is necessary.
4.4.2 Interlock-check formula

Figure 4.4-2 shows a device (Q0) in the feeder bay, if a control action to operate (Q0) is required,
an interlock-check will be necessary. To control the device (Q0), the interlock-check must verify
the status of several devices in the busbar and the bay.
Busbar1-A
Busbar2-A
Q1B Q2B Q15 Q25

Q1 Q2
Q52
Q0 Q0B
Q53
Q9 Q8
Q69
F52VT
F27L
Figure 4.4-2 Example of device status and Interlock-check
In accordance with the arrangement of the devices shown in Figure 4.4-2, interlock-check
formulae can be configured from equations (4.4-1) to (4.4-9). The status of respective devices,
(stVal) and interlock operators (“•” and “+”) are placed on the right-hand side of the equations;
and the interlock condition (e.g. Q0(Closing)) is placed on the left-hand side of the equations.
The interlock operators are also shown in Table 4.4-1.
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q2
Q1 = (Q0 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q52
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q15 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q53
̅̅̅̅̅)
(4.4-1)
+ (Q2 ∙ Q0 ∙ Q9 ∙ Q0B ∙ Q1B ∙ Q2B)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q1
Q2 = (Q0 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q52
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q25 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q53
̅̅̅̅̅)
(4.4-2)
+ (Q1 ∙ Q0 ∙ Q9 ∙ Q0B ∙ Q1B ∙ Q2B)
Q9 = (Q0 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q53
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q52 ̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q8
̅̅̅̅) (4.4-3)
Q0(Closing ‡) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
= 63QBE 63GBE
̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅
∙ ((Q1 Q2 ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q9) + ((Q1 + Q2) ∙ Q9)) (4.4-4)
∙ Closing Blocking
Q0(Opening ‡ ) = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
63QBF ∙ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
63GBE (4.4-5)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q69 ∙ F27L(No voltage) ∙ F52VT)
Q8 = (Q9 (4.4-6)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q52 = (Q9 Q1 ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q2) (4.4-7)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q53 = (Q9 Q1 ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q2) (4.4-8)
Q69 = Q8 (4.4-9)
where,

- 206 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Q0: Circuit breaker (CB)†

Q1, Q2, Q9: Disconnecting switch (DS)
Q52, Q53, Q8, Q15, Q25: Earthing switch (ES)
63QBE: OIL Pressure switch (e.g., “Off” state is shown at 270 bar or above.)
63QBF: OIL Pressure switch (e.g., “On” state is shown at 255 bar or below.)
63GBE: GAS Pressure switch (e.g., “On” state is shown at 6.5 bar or below.)
Closing Blocking: State of Protection lockout relay (“Off” state means active.)
F27L: State of under voltage relay (“On” state means no voltage.)
F52VT: State of VT MCB switch
Sign “•”: Interlock operator “AND”
Sign “+”: Interlock operator “OR”
†Note: When CB (𝑄0) is open, logic level of 𝑄0

̅̅̅̅ is “1”. On the other hand, when CB
(𝑄0) is closed, logic level of 𝑄0 is “1”.
‡Note: For example, on the left-hand side of equation (4.4-5), “Opening” reflects the
control direction of CB (𝑄0).
For example in equation (4.4-12), the interlock condition for DS (Q1) is satisfied when CB
(Q0), DS (Q2), ES for the Bus-bar1-A (Q15), ES (Q52) and ES (Q53) are open. In addition, the
interlock condition for DS (Q1) is also satisfied when DS (Q2), CB (Q0), DS (Q9), CB (Q0), DS
(Q1), and DS (Q2) are closed.

- 207 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.4-1 Names of operators used in the Interlock-check formulae

Sign of Example of
Interlock
interlock Description‡ interlock
operator
operator formula†
If both input signals are “1”, the resultant
AND(•) output signal is “1”. If not, the output signal Q1 • Q2
is “0”.
If either input signals is “1”, the resultant
OR(+) output signal is “1”. If not, the output signal Q1 + Q2
is “0”.
If the input signal is “1”, the resultant output
NOT(!) !(Q1)
signal is “0”. If not, the output signal is “1”.
Two input signals are compared. If the input
COMP signals are identical, the output signal is “1”. (Q1) COMP (1)
If not, the output signal is “0”.
†Note: Q1 and Q2 represent controllable objects.
‡Note: For further information, see section 4.4.3(iii).
4.4.3 Interlock-check method

(i) Node and input/output signals
A node is represented by an interlock-operator, input signals (stVal and Quality), and output
signals (stVal and Quality). For example, Figure 4.4-3 shows a node with an “OR” interlock-
operator, input signals, and an output signal. When stVal and ‘Quality’ are applied to the
inputs of the node, the resultant output signal is in accordance with the operation rule of “OR”.
(For details, see 4.4.3(iii)-2)
Node
stVal OR (+)
Input(A)
stVal
Quality Output
Quality
Input(B) stVal
Quality
Figure 4.4-3 Input/output signals

Note: A bold line reflects a signal “stVal”. A thin line reflects a signal “Quality”. The user
should note that the signal format generated by control functions should be
transposed for the stVal format, as shown in Table 4.4-7.

- 208 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Nodes and formulae for interlock-check

Figure 4.4-4 illustrates that an interlock-check is realized by using a number of nodes. For
each node, the user is required to configure input signals, interlock-operators, and links
between nodes. Following that, an interlock-check can be run.
Node #1
Node #2 Node #7
OR (+) AND(• )
Input A AND(• )
Input B
Output
Input C
Input D Node #4
Node #3
OR (+)
AND(• )
Input E
Input F
Input G
Node #5 Node #6
AND(• )
OR (+)
Input H
Input I
Input J
Users can see signals at signal monitoring Users can see

points using the GR -TIE MS. signals by IED
screens.
Signal monitoring point
Figure 4.4-4 Operation of interlock-check
We can see that equation (4.4-10) is a representation of Figure 4.4-4. This equation is computed
in accordance with the priority order of the interlock-operators: the first is parentheses [()], the
second is AND [•], followed by OR [+].
Output = ((A+B) •C) + (D+E•F) + (G•(H+I) •J) (4.4-10)

- 209 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Purpose of Quality information in the output signal

In the output signal, the quality information will affect the control of the device. Table 4.4-2
shows four types of output signal. When the quality information (Quality) of an output signal
issued by a node is indicated as being “NG”, it signifies that device control is forbidden. On the
other hand, quality information (Quality) “OK” means that that device control is allowed.
Table 4.4-2 Device status, quality information in the output signal

Output signal
Meaning
(stVal–Quality)
0–OK Control forbidden
0–NG Control forbidden
1–OK Control allowed
1–NG Control forbidden
Note: With regard to the value of ‘Quality’, we define “OK” as ‘0’ and “NG” as ‘1’ in the
logic operation.
AND interlock operator

When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “AND”, the “AND”
operator outputs the quality information intact. That is, the output quality information is not
affected by device status (stVal). Table 4.4-3 shows two-input-signals (A, B) and the output
signal for “AND”.
Table 4.4-3 Output signals (stVal–Quality) for AND
Input B (stVal–Quality)
0–OK 0–NG 1–OK 1–NG
0–OK 0–OK – – –
Input A 0–NG 0–OK 0–NG – –
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 0–OK 0–NG 1–OK –
1–NG 0–OK 0–NG 1–NG 1–NG
Figure 4.4-5 shows the logic symbol for the interlock operator “AND” with input signals
and an output signal. Figure 4.4-5 can be represented by equations (4.4-11) and (4.4-12).
stVal = stVa(A) • stVa(B) (4.4-11)
Quality=(Quality(A)+Quality(B))•(stVa(A)+ Quality(A))
(4.4-12)
•(stVa(B)+Quality(B))
For example, when the interlock operator “AND” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it
has to generate a signal (0–OK) using the equations (4.4-11) and (4.4-12). This is because the
quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the AND operator; the AND
operator produces zero (0) which is defined as “OK” in ‘Quality’. A note regarding the values

- 210 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
used for ‘Quality’ can be found immediately below Table 4.4-2.
AND (• )
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B)
Quality
Figure 4.4-5 Logic of interlock operator (AND) and Input/Output signals
OR interlock operator
When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “OR”, the quality
information is affected by device status (stVal). Table 4.4-4 shows two-input-signals (A, B) and
the output signal for “OR”
Table 4.4-4 Output signals (stVal–Quality) of OR
Input B (stVal–Quality)
0–OK 0–NG 1–OK 1–NG
0–OK 0–OK – – –
Input A 0–NG 0–NG 0–NG – –
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 1–OK 1–OK 1–OK –
1–NG 1–NG 1–NG 1–OK 1–NG
As shown in Table 4.4-4, if ‘0’ represents the status value “stVal” for all input signals, and
if the quality information of “NG” is given for an input signal, then the output signal “Quality”
is represented as “NG”. On the other hand, if all input signals “stVal” are represented by “1”,
and if the quality information for the input signals “stVal(1)” is given, then the representation
“OK” can be weighted for the output signal “Quality” . Note that quality information (OK) for
input signals with “stVal(1)” get priority if there are two or more input signals, which are
represented as “stVal(1)”.
Figure 4.4-6 shows the logic symbol for the interlock operator “OR” with input signals and an
output signal, which can be represented by equations (4.4-13) and (4.4-14).
OR (+)
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B) Quality
Figure 4.4-6 Interlock operator (OR) and Input/Output signals

stVal=stVa(A)+stVa(B) (4.4-13)
Quality=!((stVal(A)•!Quality(A))•(stVa(B)•!Quality(B))+
(4.4-14)
!(stVal(A)+Quality(A)+stVal(B)+Quality(B)))

- 211 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
For example, when the interlock operator “OR” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it
has to generate a signal (0–NG) using the equations (4.4-13) and (4.4-14). This is because the
quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the OR operator; the OR
operator produces one (1) which is defined as “NG” in ‘Quality’. A note regarding the values
used for Quality can be found immediately below Table 4.4-2
NOR interlock operator

When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “NOR”, the “NOR”
operator outputs the quality information intact. That is, the “NOR” interlock operator outputs
quality information, which is not influenced by device status (stVal). Table 4.4-5 shows an
input-signal (A) and the output signal for the “NOR” interlock operator.
Table 4.4-5 Output signals (stVal–Quality) of NOT
Output (stVal–Quality)
0–OK 1–OK
Input A 0–NG 1–NG
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 0–OK
1–NG 0–NG
Figure 4.4-7 depicts the logic symbol for the interlock operator “NOT” with input signals
and an output signal, which can be represented by equations (4.4-15) and (4.4-16).
NOT(!)
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B) Quality
Figure 4.4-7 Interlock operator (NOT) and In/Output signals

stVal=!stVa(A) (4.4-15)
Quality=Quality(A) (4.4-16)

- 212 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
COMP interlock operator

When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “COMP”, the “COMP”
operator outputs the original quality information intact. That is, the “COMP” interlock
operator outputs quality information, which is not influenced by device status (stVal). Table
4.4-6 shows two input-signals (A and B) and the output signal for the “COMP” interlock
operator.
Table 4.4-6 Output signals (stVal–Quality) of COMP
Input B (stVal)†
0 1
0–OK 1–OK 0–OK
Input A 0–NG 1–NG 0–NG
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 0–OK 1–OK
1–NG 0–NG 1–NG
Figure 4.4-8 depicts the logic symbol for the interlock operator “COMP” with input signals
and an output signal, which can be represented by equations (4.4-17) and (4.4-18).
stVal=stVa(A) COMP stVa(B) (4.4-17)
Quality=Quality(A) † (4.4-18)
†Note: Input signal (B) does not have quality information because its signal is a
threshold value.
COMP
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
Input(B) stVal
Figure 4.4-8 Interlock operator (COMP) and Input/Output signals
Device status output by control functions transposed

As shown in Figure 4.4-3, a node inputs a value (stVal). The user should be aware that the
node cannot directly read the value of device status generated by the control functions. This is
because each control function generates the device status in a different format. Thus, for the
ILK operation, the device status generated should be transposed to the stVal so that the node
can read the device status. The right-hand column of Table 4.4-7 shows the transposed “stVal”
in each node.

- 213 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.4-7 Signals generated in control functions

Control Device status generated by the control
“stVal” transposed in the node
function function described on the left column
0(off) 0
SPOS
1(on) 1
0x40(Open) 0† 0x40‡ 1§
DPOS 0x80(Close) 1† 0x80‡ 0§
“device status” except “0x40” and “0x80” 0
0x01(P1) 1
0x02(P2) 2
TPOS 0x04(P3) 4
“device status” except “0x01”, “0x02” and
0
“0x04”
BI
0(off) 0
signal
†Note: Values are altered when “AND”, “OR”, or “NOT” is applied as an interlock
operator.
‡Note: Values are altered when “COMP” is applied as an interlock operator.
§Note: Values are altered when the DPOS output is an inverted signal.
4.4.4 Configuration of Interlock formulae

Interlock-check formulae should be stored in the Interlock database, as shown in Figure 4.4-1.
These formulae are configured using GR-TIEMS†, and are uploaded into the ILK interlock
database.
†Note:The configuration of interlock-check formulae is discussed separately. See chapter

Engineering tool: Interlock configurator.

- 214 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.4.5 Signal
ILK (Function ID: 570001)
3100A11001 ILK_MID_UPDATING ILK condition number during counting
3101011DA0 SPOS01-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV01
3101011DA2 SPOS01-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV01
31010A1DA0 SPOS10-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV10
31010A1DA2 SPOS10-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV10
31010B1DA0 SPOS11-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV11
31010B1DA2 SPOS11-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV11
31010C1DA0 SPOS12-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV12
31010C1DA2 SPOS12-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV12
31010D1DA0 SPOS13-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV13
31010D1DA2 SPOS13-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV13
31010E1DA0 SPOS14-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV14
31010E1DA2 SPOS14-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV14
31010F1DA0 SPOS15-OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF(open) direction at SPOS DEV15
31010F1DA2 SPOS15-ON Result of interlock judgement in On(closed) direction at SPOS DEV15
3103011DA0 DPOS01-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV01
3103011DA2 DPOS01-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV01

- 215 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

31030A1DA0 DPOS10-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV10
31030A1DA2 DPOS10-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV10
31030B1DA0 DPOS11-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV11
31030B1DA2 DPOS11-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV11
31030C1DA0 DPOS12-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV12
31030C1DA2 DPOS12-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV12
31030D1DA0 DPOS13-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV13
31030D1DA2 DPOS13-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV13
31030E1DA0 DPOS14-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV14
31030E1DA2 DPOS14-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV14
31030F1DA0 DPOS15-OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV15
31030F1DA2 DPOS15-CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV15

- 216 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 217 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 218 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

3104011DA0 TPOS1-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV01
31040A1DA0 TPOS10-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV10
31040B1DA0 TPOS11-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV11
31040C1DA0 TPOS12-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV12

- 219 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

31040D1DA0 TPOS13-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV13
31040E1DA0 TPOS14-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV14
31040F1DA0 TPOS15-P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV15

- 220 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Double position device function (DPOS)

The double position device (DPOS) function is used when the user wishes to control a device
having On and Off states, which is equivalent to controlling a device from the “Closed” or “Open”
condition; the device is represented as DS or an ES. The DPOS function provides “Operation
counters” and “Operation time measurement”; these features are used for the examination of
the devices, these features are useful when the user wishes to assess the operating time of the
device, which is performed by counting the state-change of the device. The BO circuits
connected with the DPOS function are used for issuing commands; the BI circuits are used for
receiving responses; hence, the user should connect the BI and BO circuits with the DPOS
function(†). The DPOS function includes three logic groups: 1. Select logic, 2. Cancel logic, and
3. Operate logic.
For simplicity, only the DPOS01 function is discussed here; the features in the other
DPOS02–72 functions are identical to the DPOS01 function.
†Note:A binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits
(BOs); the user makes the connection between the DPOS01 function and the
binary IO module using a signal number (is made of a “Function ID” and an
“Element ID”). The signal name and number of the DPOS01 function are listed
later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the DPOS function quickly, go to sections 4.5.6 and
4.5.7, where setting of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signal-points for
IEC61850 communication is described.

- 221 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.5.1 Select logic for SBO/DIR modes

The user should set scheme switch [DPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to DPOS01 operation. Table
4.5-9 shows all of the scheme switches in the DPOS function.
(i) Receiving “Select command On” from the remote-end

Figure 4.5-1 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Select command Off from the remote-end
Select command On from the local-end

Operate logic
Select command Off from the local-end
Operate command
Figure 4.5-1 Outline of Select command ‘On’

Figure 4.5-2 shows the Select logic when a “Select command On (Remote-ON-Control)” signal
is applied to the DPOS01 function. The logic has the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”
for the reception of the select command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-
Control” signal is true. If the DPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-ON-Control”
signal is not true, the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 222 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Select logic in DPOS01 Output
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)

For SBO operation
For DIR operation command”
To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(512001_8603011DC6)
DPOS01-Close 0 t
Select on “Success”
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.5-2 Select ‘On’ from the remote-end in DPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function provides the operation criteria for “On”.
The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
automatic control. The DPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being
in operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control and
monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
*Note:The DPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode” using
a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using IEC61850.
To use this signal, the user must map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other DPOS logics, see Table 4.5-4
and Table 4.5-8.

- 223 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Receiving “Select command Off” from the remote-end

Figure 4.5-3 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Select logic Signal output

Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 4.5-3 Outline of Select command ‘Off’
Input point mapped from the communication

Figure 4.5-4 shows the Select logic when a “Select command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal
is applied at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.5-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” when the DPOS01 function determines that the received “Select
command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is true. If the DPOS01 function determines that
the “Remote-OFF-Control” signal is not true, the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.

- 224 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Selection logic in DPOS01 Output

For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed (512001_8A01011DC4)
DPOS01-Open 0 t
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.5-4 Select ‘Off’ from the remote-end in DPOS01††

automatic control. The DPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when
††Note: To know the input and output points of the other DPOS logics, see Table 4.5-4
and Table 4.5-8.

- 225 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Receiving “Select command On” from the local-end

Figure 4.5-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘On’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from the remote-end

Cancel logic

Failed

Operate logic
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command

Figure 4.5-6 shows the Select logic when “Select command On (Local-ON-Control)” signal is
applied to the DPOS01 function. The signal is provided when an “On” key is pressed on the
IED front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping. Note that the user should
set the scheme switch [DPOS01-CTRAHMI] to SBO when operation from the IED front panel
is required, we discuss how to set this in chapter User interface: Control sub-menu.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”.
Note: The “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.5-2. If the input signal “Local-ON-Control” is not true, the DPOS01 function
returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 226 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

For SBO operation
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed with ILK† condition & “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
DPOS01-Close (512001_8603011DC6)
DIR
ILK† bypassing 1≥ 0 t
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[DPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.5-6 Select ‘On’ on the front panel in DPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criterion for “On”. For testing, nullifying
the ILK function is possible using “Interlock bypassing”. “Interlock bypassing” is
indicated by the status “ICB” in a software switch controller (SOFTSW).
††Note: To identify the output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table 4.5-8.

- 227 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Receiving “Select command Off” from the local-end

Figure 4.5-7 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel command
Cancel logic

Failed

Select logic Signal output Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 4.5-7 Outline of Select command ‘Off’

Figure 4.5-8 shows the Select logic when a “Select command Off (Local-OFF-Control)” signal
is received is applied to the DPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user presses
the “OFF” key on the IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850
communication.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The signal “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.5-4. If the signal “Local-OFF-Control” is not true, the DPOS01 function returns
to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 228 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

For SBO operation
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed with ILK† condition & “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”

DPOS01-Open (512001_8A03011DC4)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t Select “Failed”
0.6s
[DPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.5-8 Select ‘Off’ on the front panel in DPOS01††

††Note: To identify the output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table 4.5-8.

- 229 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Receiving “Select command On” by PLC function

Figure 4.5-9 outlines the reception of the select command ‘On’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by PLC function

Operate logic

Figure 4.5-10 shows the Select logic when a “select command On (PLC-On-Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this signal: the
former connection point, (PLC#1) is used for the reception of the select-command requiring the
interlock check, the later connection point, (PLC#2) is used for the reception of the select-
command not requiring the interlock check. That is, for the DPOS01 function, when the “Select
command On (PLC-ON-Control)” signal generated in the user-programmed logic is applied for
the select logic and when the interlock check is required in the select logic, use the connection
point (PLC#1: e.g.DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock check is not
required, use the other connection point (PLC# 2: e.g., DEV01_CL_COMMAND) for the
injection. PLC#1 and PLC#2 is shown in Table 4.5-1.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.5-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” signal is the same signal as that shown in Figure
4.5-2.

- 230 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signals from user-PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output
1≥ &
ON-control command requiring ILK† checking To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC #1 connection point) command”
Operate command
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK To BO connection
& “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(512001_8603011DC6)
DPOS01-Close 0 t
0.1s
ON-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point) 0 t
Operate command Select “Failed”
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 4.5-10 Select ‘On’ using the PLC function in DPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function provides the operation criteria for “On”.
The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria is
for the inputs (PLC#1 and PLC#2) and Table 4.5-8 for the outputs.

- 231 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vi) Receiving “Select command Off” by PLC function

Figure 4.5-11 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Cancel logic
Cancel command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Select command On by the PLC function
Operate command

Failed
Operate logic
Figure 4.5-11 Outline of Select command Off

Figure 4.5-12 shows the Select logic when a “select command Off (PLC-Off-Control)” signal is
generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this signal: like
in signal “select command On (PLC-On-Control): That is, if interlock checking is required, use
the connection point (PLC#1: e.g. DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock
check is not required, use the connection point (PLC# 2: e.g. DEV01_OP_COMMAND). PLC#1
and PLC#2 are shown in Table 4.5-2.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.5-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The output point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as that shown in
Figure 4.5-4.

- 232 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signals from user PLC logic Select logic in DPOS01 Output
1≥ &
OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation
Operate command with To BO connection
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK
ILK† condition & “DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed (512001_8A03011DC4)
DPOS01-Open 0 t
0.1s
OFF-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
0 t
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 4.5-12 Select ‘Off’ by the PLC function in DPOS01††

for the inputs (PLC#1 and PLC#2) and Table 4.5-8 for the outputs.

- 233 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Figure 4.5-13 shows the select condition logic in the DPOS01 function. The DPOS01 function
checks the condition for the Select command using the signal “DPOS1_3PH_STATE” (see Table
4.5-31). If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, the following
alternatives are available:
1. The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic,

If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic, the user can replace it using the PLC
connection point “User configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “DPOS01IN_TMP_31”, which is listed as
PLC#2 in Table 4.5-6.
2. Set the scheme switch [DPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to PLC.

If adding another condition is required, the user can add a signal using the PLC connection
point “Additional condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using “DPOS01IN_TMP_32”, which is listed as PLC#1 in
Table 4.5-6.
2. Set the scheme switch [DPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to Fixedlogic.

- 234 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
From SOTFSW*1 DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To select logic
Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *4 Select condition

= DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
(512001 8103011F5F)

= DPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(512001 8203011F60)

received
DPOS01_3PH_STATE
(512001 3103011001)
[SCDEN]*7 Appearance of the
controls in the same
OFF direction
512001 810301EE62 DPOS01IN_TMP_32
[DPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
Fixedlogic
512001 800301EE61 DPOS01IN_TMP_31 &
From Control hierarchy *8 (PLC#3 connection point)
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28

&
From CMNCTRL
SERI_ERR
[DPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 4.5-13 Select condition logic for ‘ON/OFF’ in DPOS01*9

1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “Command
Blocking” is initiated by the status “CBK” in a software switch controller
(SOTFSW). The IEC61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”.
For more information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and monitoring application:
Software switch controller. See the signal ““CBK_STATE” of Table 4.5-5.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking” (DCB) is an operation philosophy in the common
control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation. The user
can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted as “DCB
RCV OR” in Table 4.5-5. For more information see Chapter Control and
monitoring application :Common controls.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it indicates
that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should
inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The
detected signal is denoted as “Travelling OR” in Table 4.5-5.
4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a command
is not identical to “IED test status”.
5Note: The function “Event suppression” can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See section
4.5.6(i)-3)

- 235 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
7Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘On and Off
operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch
[SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same
operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction (i.e., when on
(off) is performed sequentially). On the other hand, if On is set for the scheme
switch, the logic is not blocked.
using the connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see
Chapter Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy. See PLC#3 of
Table 4.5-6.
9Note: To identify the input point of the other DPOS, see Table 4.5-6 for PLC#1 and
PLC#2.

- 236 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

each table:
“O” indicated that the signal is provided for optional use.
used.
Table 4.5-1 PLC Connection points (Input points for Command ‘On’)
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND DPOS01 PLC On-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O

…. …. ….
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK DPOS01 PLC On-control without checking(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
Table 4.5-2 PLC Connection points (Input points for Command ‘Off’)
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND DPOS01 PLC Off-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O

…. …. ….
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK DPOS01 PLC Off-control without checking(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
Table 4.5-3 PLC Connection points (Interlock for Command ‘On/Off’)

570001 3103021DA2 DPOS01-Close DPOS01 interlock condition for On control. N/A

… … …
570001 3103011DA0 DPOS01-Open DPOS01 interlock condition for Off control. N/A
…. …. ….

- 237 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

512001 7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M

… … …


5A0001 0008001F40 Travelling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
Table 4.5-6 PLC Connection points (Input signals for select condition logic)
512001 810301EE62 DPOS01IN_TMP_32 DPOS01 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O

…. …. ….
5A0101 801016EF40 DPOS72IN_TMP_32 DPOS72 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
512001 800301EE61 DPOS01IN_TMP_31 DPOS01 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
… … …
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28 DPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
…. …. ….
Table 4.5-7 PLC Monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
512001 8003011F5A DPOS01_SC_ST_ERR DPOS01 select command mode is invalid.

…. …. ….
512001 8103011F5F DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS01)
…. …. ….
512001 8203011F60 DPOS01_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPOS01)
…. …. ….

- 238 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.5-8 PLC Monitoring points (On/Off output-signal for BIO)

512001 8A03011DC4 DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select (Off) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
512001 8603011DC6 DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select (ON) command for Binary Output.
…. …. …..
512001 8603481DC6 DPOS72_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS72 select (On) command for Binary Output.
(ix) Setting names

Note: The “xx” within “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if DPOS03
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The numbers used for “xx” can be
represented from “01” to “72”.)
Table 4.5-9 Settings for select logics

DPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of DPOSxx On Off / On

DPOSxx-LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition in DPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
DPOSxx-CTRAHMI Activate local panel control in DPOSxx SBO DIR/ SBO

- 239 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible; when the cancel
conditions are satisfied, accordingly the function can discard the select command; finally, the

remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Cancel from the remote-end

Success
Select command Off from the remote-end Cancel

Signal reception in

Cancel from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function

Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

applied to the DPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as
that for the signal “Select command On (Remote-ON-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“DPOS01_CC_SS”, when the DPOS01 function has determined that the signal “Remote-cancel”
is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued at monitoring point “DPOS01_CC_FS” if
the DPOS01 function is able to determine that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.

- 240 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) To “Wait for a command”

“DPOS01_ CC_SS”
Cancel command
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ (512001_8603011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Cancel condition† & “Do nothing”
“DPOS01_CC_FS”
(512001_8703011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 4.5-15 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in DPOS01

†Note: The “cancel condition” logic shall be seen in Figure 4.5-18.

local-end.
Wait for a command
Cancel from the remote end

Selecting On from remote-end
Selecting Off from remote-end

Cancel from the front panel
Success
Selecting On from front panel
Press cancel Cancel
Selecting Off from front panel Cancel logic Do nothing
command decision Failed
Selecting On by the PLC function
Selecting Off by the PLC function

Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic

to the DPOS01 function. The signal is generated when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
“Local-cancel” signal, the logic ia able to output a result signal, provided that the “cancel
condition” checking is satisfied.

- 241 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in DPOS01 Output
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001) To “Wait for a command”

“DPOS01_ CC_SS”
Cancel command (512001_8603011E95)
& Successes of cancel
Cancel condition & “Do nothing”

“DPOS01_CC_FS”
(512001_8703011E96)
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 4.5-17, is able to issue a “Success of cancel” signal
at the monitoring point “DPOS01_CC_SS”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the
signal “Local-Cancel” is true.

Figure 4.5-18 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria, “Unmatched condition detected”
is connected normally for the cancel logic, set Fixedlogic for the scheme switch [DPOS01-
LGCNFFCT].

& 1≥ DPOS01
[DPOS01-LGCNFFCT]
PLC#1
Fixedlogic
512001 800301EE69 DPOS01IN_TMP_44 &
Figure 4.5-18 Logic “Cancel condition” in DPOS01

the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status” as in Figure 4.5-13.
2Note: With the exception of the above ‘cancel-condition’ logic, there is an operate-
condition logic within the DPOS01 function; the operate-condition logic will
always checks conditions. That is, the user is required to set either the “operate-
condition” or the “cancel-condition” logic.
If the original logic does not meet with the requirement of the user, it can be relpced using
the connection point “User configurable condition”.
1. Connect the user-customized logic with the “DPOS01IN_TMP_44”, which is listed

in Table 4.5-10.
2. Set scheme switch [DPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.

- 242 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

each table:
otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure if the default
settings are used.
Table 4.5-10 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition logic)
512001 800301EE69 DPOS01IN_TMP_44 DPOS01 user configurable cancel condition O

… … … O
512001 8603011E95 DPOS01_CC_SS DPOS01 cancel success

… … …
512001 8703011E96 DPOS01_CC_FS DPOS01 cancel failed
…. … …
(v) Setting name

Note: The “xx” within “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if
DPOS03 is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The numbers used for “xx” can be
represented by “01” to “72”.)
Table 4.5-12 Setting for ‘Cancel’ in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition in DPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 243 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Once the operation of the select logic is complete, the operate logic start to control the device.
(i) Receiving “Operate command On” from the remote-end

Figure 4.5-19 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Operate command On from the remote-end

Success
Select command On from the remote-end Operation
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.5-19 Outline of Operate command ‘On’

Figure 4.5-20 illustartes the operate logic when an “Operate command On (Remote-ON-
Control)” signal is applied to the DPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”
is used for the reception of the “Operate command On (Remote-On-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.5-20, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the received signal “Remote-
On-Control” is true.

- 244 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Operate logic in DPOS01 Output
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7F)
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (512001 8103011E82)
[DPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.

&
DPOS01-Close R
512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
“DPOS01_OEX_BO” §§
Operate condition‡ (512001 8203011DD3)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL” ‡‡

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF” &
1.0s- 100.0s Operate Failed
Figure 4.5-20 Operate On from the remote-end in DPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “On”.
Figure 4.5-31), when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [DPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If
an alternative “operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user
and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic.
The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point “#1” user configurable condition. That is set the scheme switch
[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_35”.
§§Note: The “DPOS01_OEX_BO” signal is issued when Fixedlogic is set for scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate-completed” signal can also be issued
from the logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure
4.5-20. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
completed”, hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at
the connection point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
*Note:The user can select the type of the output signal. When Fix is set for scheme
switch [DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[DPOS01-CPW]. When Var is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.

- 245 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table
4.5-13 for PLC#1, Table 4.5-14 for PLC#2, Table 4.5-17 and Table 4.5-19 for output
signals.
the time set by the [DPOS01-RST] has been reached.
(ii) Receiving “Operate command Off” from the remote-end

Figure 4.5-21 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Off ’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Operate command Off from the remote-end

Success
Operation
Select command Off from the remote-end decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On l from the local-end
Figure 4.5-21 Outline of Operate command ‘Off’

Figure 4.5-22 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-
Control)” signal is applied to the DPOS01 logic. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Off (Remote-Off-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.5-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Remote-
Off-Control” is true.

- 246 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7E)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-Off-Control” (512001 8003011E81)
[DPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed S

&
DPOS01-Open R
512001 800301EE56 DPOS01IN_TMP_34

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
“DPOS01_FEX_BO” §§
Operate condition‡ (512001 8103011DD0)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL”

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF &
Figure 4.5-22 Operate Off from the remote-end in DPOS01††

connection point #3 “User-configurable condition”. That is set the [DPOS01-
LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_34”.
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued
from logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.5-20.
The user programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
completed”, hence this signal is now generated the user-programmed logic at
connection point #2 “User-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
*Note:The user can select a type of output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.

- 247 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table
signals.
after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST].
(iii) Receiving “Operate command On” from the local-end

Figure 4.5-23 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘On’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Operate command On from the local-end

Select command On from the local-end Success
Operation
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 4.5-24 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command signal On (Local-ON-
Control)” is applied to the DPOS01 function. The signal is generated when “Execution of On”
is keyed on the IED front panel.
Output signal to BO
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “Local-On-Control”
is true.

- 248 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
To BO connection
(512001 8003011E7F)
(512001 8103011E82)
Operate Cmd.
Command “Local-On-Control” [DPOS01-CPW]
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operate Cmd.
DPOS01-Close
S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥
R
ICB_STATE

512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35 &
[DPOS01-LGCTRCON]
(512001 8203011DD3)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
ASEQ function§” is in progress Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL” ††

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
Figure 4.5-24 Operate On on the front panel in DPOS01††

The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above using
connection point #1” user configurable condition”. That is set the [DPOS01-
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate comleted” signal can also be issued
from logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.5-20.
The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
completed”, hence this is now generated by the user-programmed logic at
connection point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch

- 249 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
signals.
(iv) Receiving “Operate command Off” from the local-end

Figure 4.5-25 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘Off ’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from remote-end
Operate command Off from the local-end

Select command Off from the local-end Success
Operate
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 4.5-26 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (Local-OFF-Control)”
signal is applied to the DPOS01 logic. The input signal is provided when “Execution for Off” is
Output signal to BO
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Local-Off-
Control” is true.

- 250 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF”
DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001) (512001 8003011E7E)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Operate Cmd. (512001 8003011E81)
Command “Local-Off-Control” [DPOS01-CPW]
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operate Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed
DPOS01-Open
S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥
R
ICB_STATE

512001 800301EE56 DPOS01IN_TMP_34 &
[DPOS01-LGCTRCON]
“DPOS01_FEX_BO” §§
(512001 8103011DD0)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
ASEQ function§” is in progress Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” &
Figure 4.5-26 Operate Off on the front panel in DPOS01††

an alternative “operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user
connection point #3 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the [DPOS01-
§§Note: The “DPOS01_OEX_BO” signal is issued when Fixedlogic is set for the scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued
4.5-20. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate
connection point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch

- 251 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table
signals.
(v) Receiving “Operate command On” using the PLC function

Figure 4.5-27 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘On’ with the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Operate command On by the PLC

Success
Select command On by the PLC function Operate
Signal generation by the Operate logic Signal output
decision
PLC function
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC

Figure 4.5-28 describes the operate logic when an “Operate command On (PLC-On-control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of the signal
“Operate command On (PLC-On-control)”: the former connection point (PLC#3) is used for the
reception of the operate-command when the interlock check is required, the later connection
point (PLC#4) is used for the reception of the operate-command when the interlock check is
not required. That is, for the DPOS01 function when the “Operate command On (PLC-On-
Control)” signal generated in the user-programmed logic and when the interlock check is
required in the operate logic, user should apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3: i.e.
DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4: i.e. DEV01_CL_COMMAND). The PLC#3 and PLC#4 are
denoted as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.5-1. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCTRCON].
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.5-28, can issue an “Operate” signal at output point
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-On-Control”

- 252 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
is true.
(512001 8003011E7F)
Command “PLC-On-Control” requiring ILK† check
(512001 8103011E82)
(PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW]
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-On-Control” not requiring ILK† check 0.1 – 50.0 s
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND Operate Cmd.

&
DPOS01-Close R
512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(512001 8203011DD3)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥

[DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
0 t
Figure 4.5-28 Operate On by the PLC function in DPOS01††

an alternative “operate-condition” programmed by the user is required in place of
the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic, connect the
alternative “operate-condition” to the logic shown in Figure 4.5-28 using
connection point #1 “User configurable condition”. That is set the scheme switch
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the logic
programmed by the user instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.5-20, connect the
“Operate completed” signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection
point #2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [DPOS01-
LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
[DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied

- 253 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
to [DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is
changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the other DPOS logics, see Table
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected
following expiration of the setting to timer [DPOS01-RST].
(vi) Receiving “Operate command Off” using PLC function

Figure 4.5-29 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘Off ’ by the PLC function.
Wait for a command
Select command On by the PLC Operate command On by the PLC
Operate command Off by the PLC

Success
Select command Off by the PLC Operation
decision
by the user l
Failed Do nothing

Figure 4.5-30 depicts the operate logic when an “Operate command Off (PLC-Off-control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this
command signal, like the signal “Operate command On (PLC-On-control)”, That is, if an
interlock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3: i.e.
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). If, on the other hand an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at the other connection point (PLC#4: i.e. DEV01_OP_COMMAND). PLC#3 and PLC#4
are denoted as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.5-2.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.5-30, can issue an “Operate” signal at output-point
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-Off-Control”
is true.

- 254 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” “DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “PLC-On-Control” with ILK†
(512001 8003011E7E) (512001 8003011E81)
(PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW]
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-On-Control” without ILK† 0.1 – 50.0 s
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND Operation Cmd.
ILK† condition (“Open”) passed S

&
DPOS01-Open R
512001 800301EE56 DPOS01IN_TMP_34

[DPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
PLC#1
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0)
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
1≥
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 & “DPOS01_EX_FFL”

PLC#2 [DPOS01-RST]
(512001 8603011E91)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” 0 t
(512001 8003011E7E)
&
Figure 4.5-30 Operate ‘Off’ by the PLC function in DPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for control of the “Off”
operation.
an alternative “operate-condition” programmed by the user is required in place of
the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic, connect the
alternative “operate-condition” to the logic shown in Figure 4.5-30 using
connection point #1 “User configurable condition”. That is set the scheme switch
§§Note: The “DPOS01_OEX_BO” signal is issued when Fixedlogic is set for the scheme
switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the programmed
logic by the user in place of the logic in Figure 4.5-20, connect the signal “Operate
completed” generated in the programmed logic to the connection point #2 “User
configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [DPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to
PLC and use “DPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
*Note:The user can select a type of the output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[DPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied
to [DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is

- 255 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
changed.
signals.

examine an operate condition; the operate condition is determined by signal
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”. If the functionality of the original logic does not meet with user-
requirements, the following alternatives are available:

connection point “User configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “DPOS01IN_TMP_39”, listed as PLC#2 in
Table 4.5-16.
2. Set scheme switch [DPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to PLC.

If the addition of another signal is required, the user can add the signal to the operate condition
logic using connection point “Additional condition”
1. Add a user-preferred signal using DPOS01IN_TMP_38, listed as PLC#1 in Table
4.5-16.
2. Set scheme switch [DPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixedlogic.

- 256 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
From SOTFSW*1 DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Operate condition
= DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
(512001 8103011F5F)

= DPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(512001 8203011F60)
Command “ON-control” received &

received
DPOS01_3PH_STATE
(512001 3103011001)
Controlling Event
OFF
512001 800301EE65 DPOS01IN_TMP_38
[DPOS01- LGEXFFCT]
User configurable operate condition (PLC#2 connection point)
Fixedlogic
512001 810301EE66 DPOS01IN_TMP_39 &
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28

&
From CMNCTRL
SERI_ERR
[DPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 4.5-31 Operate condition logic for On/Off in DPOS01
1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; “Command
Blocking” is implemented as “CBK” in a software switch controller (SOTFSW).
The IEC61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more
information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Software
switch controller. See the signal ““CBK_STATE” in Table 4.5-5.
monitoring application :Common controls.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling” signifies that other operators are changing
the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED should be
inhibited whilst ever the event is being detected. The detection signal is denoted
as “Travelling OR” in Table 4.5-5.
4Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to “IED test status”.
5Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See section
4.5.6(i)-3)

- 257 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
7Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation-
direction of logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch [SCDEN], operation of
the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction
compared with the previous operation-direction. Alernatively, if On is set for the
8Note: The user must program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The user
must connect the “Control hierarchy condition” to the select condition logic using
the connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy. See PLC#3 of Table
4.5-6.Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for both On and Off.

Note: The user should note the menaing of the following descriptions as shown in
“M” indicated that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” indicates that that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 4.5-13 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 User configurable condition)
512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35 DPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O

…. …. …..
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 DPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O

… … …

… … …

- 258 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.5-16 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 and PLC#2 for additional and
operate condition)
512001 800301EE65 DPOS01IN_TMP_38 DPOS01 user additional condition(PLC#1) O

… … …
512001 810302EE66 DPOS01IN_TMP_39 DPOS01 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….

512001 8203011DD3 DPOS01_OEX_BO DPOS01 operate (ON) command for Binary Output.
… …. …
512001 8103011DD0 DPOS01_FEX_BO DPOS01 operate (OFF) command for Binary Output.
…. …. ….
Table 4.5-18 PLC monitoring points (Signals within operate logic)

512001 8003011E7F DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF DPOS01 On-direction execute command

…. …. ….
512001 8003011E7E DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF DPOS01 Off-direction execute command
…. …. ….
512001 8103011E82 DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS DPOS01 On-direction execute command
… …. ….
512001 8003011E81 DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS DPOS01 Off-direction execute command
… …. ….

- 259 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.5-19 PLC monitoring points (Output signals for response)

512001 8003011E93 DPOS01_EX_CMP DPOS01 completed control

… … …
512001 8603011E91 DPOS01_EX_FFL DPOS01 failed control
…. …. ….
(ix) Setting names

Note: The “xx” of “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if the DPOS03
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented by “01”
to “72”.)
Table 4.5-20 Setting of Operate in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-PLSM Methods of command output(DPOS1-72) Fix Fix/Var/Latch

DPOSxx-CPW Duration of command output(DPOS1-72) 1.0[sec] 0.1~50.0[sec]
DPOSxx-RST Detection time for terminating control (DPOS1-72) 30.0[sec] 0.1~100.0[sec]
DPOSxx-LGCTRCON Logic selector for operate condition (DPOS01-72) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
DPOSxx-LGCFEXOT Logic selector for command output (DPOS01-72) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
DPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxx-LGEXFFCT Logic selector for operate condition (DPOS01-72) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 260 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.5.4 Operation counter

The DPOS01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation-counter to
predict the lifespan of switchgear and other functions. The user can select a count mode using
a setting. Table 4.5-21 and Figure 4.5-32 show the modes, for which a user is required to change
a mode in response to a device signal. For instance for the DPOS01 function, a user can select
the mode using scheme switch [DPOS01-CNTS], which is set to C-On; counting-up is performed
when a switchgear signal gives rise to a change in state from “Off to On”.
Table 4.5-21 Mode of operation counter

Mode Description
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to closed (On). When the signal
C-On
is changed from “Off to On”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to open (Off). When the signal
C-Off
is changed from “On to Off”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up occurs when any state change occurs: that is, “Off to On” or “On to
C-OnOff
Off”.
NA Stop the count function
†Note:The operation-counter value is not cleared when power is removed from the IED.
The operation-counter is available in the DPOS01 to DPOS72 functions.
On state
Off state
Figure 4.5-32 Device signal
The user can change the value of the operation-counter from either the front panel or
remotely. For example, in the sub-menu for “Operation counter”, the user can set a user-
preferred value for the operation-counter. See chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Operation Counter DPOS1-CNT1

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/4
_DPOS1-CNT > DPOS_Dev1-3Ph +
DPOS2-CNT > CANCEL
0
DPOS3-CNT >
DPOS_Dev1-APh +
DPOS4-CNT >
DPOS5-CNT > 0
ENTER DPOS_Dev1-BPh +
DPOS6-CNT >
Figure 4.5-33 Operation counter sub-menu

Note: With regard to signal “DPOS01_3PH_STATE”, the sub-menu represents it as
“DPOS_Dev1-3Ph”. Analogous to the signal “DPOS01_3PH_STATE”,
“DPOS01_APH_STATE” is represented as “DPOS_Dev1-APh”. Signals
“DPOS01_BPH_STATE” and “DPOS01_CPH_STATE” are displayed in a similar
manner.

- 261 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Receiving “change value for counter” from the remote-end

Mapping of Input signal required
Figure 4.5-34 depicts the logic when a command “change value for counter” is received at the
DPOS01 logic. With regard to a three-phase counter, the input-point
“DEV01_3PH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. With regard to a phase-A counter, the input-point
“DEV01_APH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. For phase-B and phase-C, the input-points
“DEV01_BPH_CONTROL_REQ” and “DEV01_CPH_CONTROL_REQ” are used.
“DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(512001 8A03031F86)
Command “change value for counter”
512001_7003016D09 DEV01_3PH_REQ Operate Command
&
Figure 4.5-34 Changing counter value for three-phase† with operation from the remote-end in
DPOS01
‡Note:The “operate condition” signal is provided from the operate condition logic of
Figure 4.5-36.
†Note: The user can apply other counter change commands for phase-A, -B, and –C as
shown in Table 4.5-22. The resultant signals for the other DPOS02-72 logics are
shown in Table 4.5-23.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
(ii) Receiving “change value for counter” from the local-end

Input signal from the front panel
Figure 4.5-35 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is provided in the
DPOS01 function. The command is provided from the sub-menu, as shown in Figure 4.5-33.

“DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(512001 8A03031F86)
Command “Change value”
Figure 4.5-35 Changing counter value by operation from the front panel in DPOS01
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.

- 262 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Operate condition for the counter

Figure 4.5-36 illustrates the operate condition logic. The DPOS01 function can determine an
operate-condition using a signal received from “Control-hierarchy”. The control-hierarchy
condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic; the user must connect the control-
hierarchy with the DPOS01 function using connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28” (see Table
4.5-6).
Command blocking*1 To counter logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ Operate condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection Unmatched condition detected *4
SERI_ERR = DPOS01_SC_ST_ERR
From Control hierarchy
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28
Figure 4.5-36 Operate condition logic for changing the counter in DPOS01
1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; the “Command
Blocking” function is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch
controller (SOTFSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “Command Blocking”
function as “CmdBlk”. For more information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and
monitoring application: Software switch controller. See the signal ““CBK_STATE”
of Table 4.5-5.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it indicates
that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should
inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The
detected signal is denoted by “Travelling OR” in Table 4.5-5.

Table 4.5-22 Mapping points
512001 7003016D09 DEV01_3PH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for 3-phase counter value
… … …
512001 7003016D0A DEV01_APH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for A-phase counter value

- 263 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… … …
512001 7003016D0B DEV01_BPH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for B-phase counter value
… … ….
512001 7003016D0C DEV01_CPH_REQ DPOS01 change command received. (Mapping Data) for C-phase counter value
… … …
Table 4.5-23 Results of changing counter

512001 8A03011F86 DPOS01_SLD_CSCN DPOS01 select command for Binary Output.

… … …
(v) Setting name

Table 4.5-24 Setting for operation counter in DPOSxx
DPOSxx-CNTS Mode selection of the counter in DPOSxx *user-preferred NA / C-On / C-Off / C-OnOff

- 264 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.5.5 Measurement of operation intervals

The DPOS01 function can measure operation intervals (OT1 to OT4) †; the intervals OT1 to
OT2 can represent the period of time when a switch changes from “Closed” to “open”. In the
DPOS01 function the operation period is grouped into sub-time periods, as shown in Table
4.5-25. The user should set scheme switch [DPOS01-OPETMEN] to On.
Table 4.5-25 Four intervals measured in DPOS01 function

Intervals Trigger Events for measurement
Start Signal “DPOS01_FEX_BO” sensed
OT1 End Switch status is changed from “On” to
“Intermediate”
Start Device status “Intermediate” sensed
OT2 End Switch status is changed from “Intermediate” to
“Off”
Start Signal “DPOS01_OEX_BO” sensed
OT3 End Switch status is changed from “Off” to
“Intermediate”
Start Device status “Intermediate” sensed
OT4 End Switch status is changed from “Intermediate” to
“On”
†Note:The function “operation time measurement” is available in the DPOS01 to
DPOS72 functions.
Signal “DPOS01_FEX_BO”
Sensing
intermediate state
On Intermediate Off
Device status for Off

OT1 OT2
Figure 4.5-37 Two intervals (OT1 and OT2) for Off-control
Signal POS01_FEX_BO”
Sensing
intermediate state
Off Intermediate On
Device status for On

OT3 OT4
Figure 4.5-38 Two intervals (OT3 and OT4) for On-control

- 265 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
The user can clear the intervals (OT1 to OT4) by key-operation of the “Operation time”
sub-menu Figure 4.5-39 or operation from the remote-end. See chapter User interface:
Monitoring sub-menu.
Operation Time DPOS1-OT1

10:48 1/26 10:48 1/5
_DPOS1-OT > DPOS_SYN-Dev1-OT1
DPOS2-OT > CANCEL ******.*** ms
DPOS3-OT > DPOS_SYN-Dev1-OT2
DPOS4-OT >
******.*** ms
DPOS5-OT > ENTER DPOS_SYN-Dev1-OT3
DPOS6-OT >
Figure 4.5-39 Operation time sub-menu
(i) Signal names and numbers

512001 7003006D0D DEV01_RESET_REQ DPOS01 operation time reset command received (Mapping Data)
(ii) Setting name

Table 4.5-27 Setting of operation time function in DPOSxx
DPOSxx-OPETMEN Activation of the operation time measurement in DPOSxx On Off / On

- 266 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user should connect the DPOS input/output points with the BI and the BO circuits;
subsequently, the DPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. In order to set
up the DPOS function the user should execute the following four steps.
i BI connection for status signal
ii BO connection for “Select command On/Off”
iii BO connection for “Operate command”
Note that the DPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [DPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
(i) BI connection for status signals

Figure 4.5-40 exemplifies the reception of signals at the DPOS01 function. To acquire the
status signal§ for phase-A, the user should set two input points for settings [DPOS01A-
NOPSG] and [DPOS01A-NCLSG].†
†Note:Normally an input-signal corresponding to phase-A is generated using a normally-

open contact (NO) and a normally-closed contact (NC). If a NO and a NC contact
are exchanged, the input-signal should be determined by inversion; that is, the
user is required to set On for both scheme switches [DPOS01A-NOPSGI] and
[DPOS01A-NCLSGI].
§Note: The state signal acquired can be monitored. For more information, see Chapter
Automatic supervision.
Grouping three-phase signals corresponding to a state

Suppose the status signals are acquired on the six BI circuits at IO#1 slot. The signals
corresponding to phase-A can be acquired via N/C and N/O contacts; thus, the user should set
two input-points (8001001110 and 810101110 at 200B01†) for the settings [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
and [DPOS01A-NCLSG], respectively, as shown in Figure 4.5-40. For input points
corresponding to phase-B and phase-C, the user must also apply input-points via settings. The
user sets And for both the scheme switches [DPOS01-OPC] and [DPOS01-CLC] respectively;
finally the scheme switch [DPOS01-DEVTYPE] should be set to 3-Pole.

- 267 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signals from the

BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01
devices Output ‡
DPOS01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”
(512001 3103011001)
Phase-A signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
&
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPOS01A-NCLSG]
“DPOS01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (512001 8103011F5F)
&
Phase-B signals
BI signal selected by & Faulty
N/O contact setting [DPOS01B-NOPSG]
signal &
BI signal selected by &

N/C contact setting [DPOS01B-NCLSG]
signal & Intermediate
Phase-C signals
BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01C-NOPSG]
signal & &
Close
BI signal selected by
N/C contact setting [DPOS01C-NCLSG]
signal &
[DPOS01-EN]
On &
[DPOS01-DEVTYPE]
3-Pole
[DPOS01-OPC]
And
&
[DPOS01-CLC]
And
Figure 4.5-40 Acquisition of a state signal

†Note:The user should set the actual input-points. See chapter Technical description:
Binary IO module.
‡Note:In Figure 4.5-40 two signals can be issued: “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” and
“DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”. One is used in the select condition logic and the operate
condition logic (see Figure 4.5-13 and Figure 4.5-28). Another is used for operation
in the event suppression function. Other signals are also provided:
DPOS01_APH_STATE, DPOS01_BPH_STATE, and DPOS01_CPH_STATE.
Acquisition of a signal corresponding to a phase

Suppose that a state signal is acquired on the two BI circuits at IO#1 slot. An individual phase
signal can be taken using the N/C and the N/O contacts; thus, the user should set two input-
points (8001001110 and 810101110 in 200B01†) for the settings [DPOS01A-NOPSG] and
[DPOS01A-NCLSG]. The user should set the scheme switch [DPOS01-DEVTYPE] to 1-Pole.

- 268 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signals from the

BI circuit and DPOS01 Signal acquisition logic in DPOS01
devices Output ‡
DPOS01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”
(512001 3103011001)
Single phase signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPOS01A-NCLSG]
“DPOS01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (512001 8103011F5F)
&
Faulty
&
Intermediate
&
Close
[DPOS01-EN]
On &
[DPOS01-DEVTYPE]
1-Pole
Figure 4.5-41 Acquisition of single-phase signal at DPOS01

‡Note:In Figure 4.5-41 two signals can be issued “DPOS01_3PH_STATE” and
“DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”, which are the same as the ones of the Figure 4.5-40.
Event suppression
If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the DPOS function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the DPOS function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce additional burden created.
The DPOS function has an event suppression detector. The user should take into account
of the scheme switches [DPOS-NELD], [DPOS-TELD] and [DPOS-TELR]†. Set On for scheme
switch [DPOS01-SPPEN].
[DPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[DPOS-TELD] [DPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E

- 269 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time ‘A’, the setting [DPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time ‘B’. The setting [DPOS-TELD] pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time ‘A’ (e.g., Time ‘A’ to Time ‘C’).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [DPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time ‘D’ to Time ‘E’).
To initiate the event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch [DPOS01-
SPPEN].
(ii) BO connection for “Select command On/Off”

Figure 4.5-43 exemplifies the connection for the select command On and Off. Suppose that
connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” and “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”†; as a result, the “Select command
On” and the “Select command Off” signals are issued at BO1 and BO2 respectively.
Terminal and
Select logic in DPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8603011DC6)
Select logic for select command On “BO1” Select
Signal captured by command
in DPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
On to the
DRIVER BO1 device
[Input signal 2]
To contact health & ≥1
check [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
Select logic for select command check
Off in DPOS01 [Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
PLC connection point on BO1
200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
Terminal and
BO2 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8A03011DC4) Select
“BO2”
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112) Off to the
device
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102011113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310201E11D BO2_SOURCE
Figure 4.5-43 Example of select commands connected with BO1 & BO2 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.5-8 shows the remaining signals with the exception of

- 270 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” and “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
(iii) BO connection for “Operate command On/Off”

Figure 4.5-44 exemplifies the connection for operate command On/Off. Suppose that connection
with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points “DPOS01_OEX_BO” and
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”; as a result, the “Operate command On” and the “Operate command Off”
signals are issued at BO3 and BO4 respectively.
Terminal and
Operate logic in DPOS01 BO3 and BO4 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
(512001 8203011DD3)
Operate
“BO3” command
Signal captured by
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8202021112) On to the
device
“Operate command [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO3
On” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO3-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8202021113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“DPOS01_FEX_BO” 200B01 310202E11D BO3_SOURCE
(512001 8103011DD0)
Operate
“BO4” command
Signal captured by
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8302031112) Off to the
device
“Operate command [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO4
Off” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO4-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8302031113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310203E11D BO4_SOURCE
Figure 4.5-44 Example of operate commands connected with BO3 and BO4 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.5-17 shows the remaining signals with the exception of
“DPOS01_OEX_BO” and “DPOS01_FEX_BO”.

The DPOS01 function has a contact health check feature for the BO circuits; hence, the user
is able to connect an output signal to the contact health check function when Fixedlogic is set
for scheme switch [DPOS01-LGXFEOT]†. Consequently, the DPOS01 function can determine
whether the signal has been successfully output from the BO. If a failure is reported, the
DPOS01 function determines that the signal has not been output successfully to the BO; then,
the command On or Off is canceled immediately and the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait
for a command” stage.
†Note:Table 4.5-33 shows settings for the health check feature in the other DPOS
functions.

- 271 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting for “Select command On”

For example, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing
of the command; the user can connect point “BO1-RB” with the contact health check function
using the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]. Do not key the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” .
Selecte logic in
DPOS01

logic in DPOS01
(512001 8603011DC6)
BO1 circuit at & Result of contact health check

IO#1
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]
Figure 4.5-45 Example connection of “Select command On” for the health check feature
Setting for “Select command Off”

Similar to “select command On”, the point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected with the BO2
circuit; the user is required to key point “BO2-RB” for the setting [DPOS01-FSLBORD]. Do not
key the point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
Selection logic in
DPOS01

logic in DPOS01
(55120018 A03011DC4)

IO#1
“BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPOS01-FSLBORD]
Figure 4.5-46 Example connection of “Select command Off” for the health check feature

- 272 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting for “Operate command On”

Similarly, the point “BO3-RB” must be applied for the setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD].
Operate logic in
DPOS01
“DPOS01_OEX_BO” Contact health check

“510001_8201011DD3” logic in DPOS01
BO3circuit at & Result of contact health check

IO#1
“BO3-RB”
“200B01_8202021113”
setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD]
Figure 4.5-47 Example connection of “Operate command On” for the health check feature
Setting for “Operate command Off”

Similarly, the point “BO4-RB” must be applied for the setting [DPOS01-FEXBORD].
Operate logic in
DPOS01

“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
logic in DPOS01
“512001 8103011DD0”

IO#1
“BO4-RB”
“200B01_8302031113”
setting [DPOS01-FEXBORD]
Figure 4.5-48 Example connection of “Operate command Off” for the health check feature

- 273 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 4.5-49 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1 to BO4 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working
correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table 4.5-28, to
demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.

Example #1 Contact health check settings for example #1
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001113(BO1-RB) set for [DPOS01-OSLORD] OK
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113 (BO2-RB) set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO3” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113(BO3-RB) set for [DPOS01-OEXBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO4” atIO#1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [DPOS01-FEXBORD] OK

BIO module
Plus (+)
(512001 8603011DC6) SW1 driven with
Select command On BO1 at IO#1
BO1 SW 1
On
“BO1-RB” command
(200B01_8002001113) SW 3
SW2 driven with
(512001 8A03011DC4)
BO2 at IO#1
Select command Off BO2 SW 2
Off
(200B01_8102011113) SW 4
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
SW3 driven with
(512001 8203011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
Operate command On BO3
Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0) SW4 driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command Off
“BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 4.5-49 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example #1

- 274 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Settings for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 4.5-50 shows a setting example of an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The settings
are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.5-29, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead BO1 is
actually chosen, which is incorrect. In this case, the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD] is
meaningless ; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.

Example #2 Contact health check setting for example #2
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001112 (BO1) set for [DPOS01-OSLORD] NG
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113 (BO2-RB) set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO4” at IO#1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [DPOS01-FEXBORD] OK

BIO module
Local/Remote-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB) Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
mistakenly chosen with
“200B01_8002001112”
(512001 8603011DC6) SW1 is driven with
BO1 at IO#1
Select command On BO1 SW 1
On
command
SW 3
SW2 is driven with
(512001 8A03011DC4)
BO2 at IO#1
Select command Off BO2 SW 2
Off
(200B01_8102011113) SW 4
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
SW3 is driven with
(512001 8203011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
BO3
Operate command On Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0) SW4 is driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command Off
“BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 4.5-50 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example#2

- 275 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Settings for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 4.5-51 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special setting
can issue a select command, which is called “operated by internal select function”. The user
does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there are no BIO
circuits available.

Example #3 Contact health check setting for example #3
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any “BO” “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” set for [DPOS01-OSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any “BO” “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
“DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO4” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [DPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Plus (+)
(512001 8603011DC6)
Select command On SW1 is not driven with any BO
SW 1
On
command
Physical BOs
are virtualized. SW 3
(512001 8A03011DC4) SW2 is not driven with any BO
Select command Off SW 2
Off
command
SW 4
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
SW3 is driven with
(512001 8203011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
Operate command On BO3
Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0) SW4 is driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command Off
“BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 4.5-51 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example#3

- 276 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Signal name and number
Table 4.5-31 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in DPOSxx)
512001 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state

…. …. ….
…. …. ….
(vi) Setting names

Note: The “xx” of “DPOSxx” represents the DPOS function number. (e.g., if the DPOS03
is considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented as “01”
to “72” for control (monitor).
Table 4.5-32 Setting for Binary input signals in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-CTREN Activate control function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On

DPOSxx-CTRAHMI Activate local panel control of DPOS01-72 SBO DIR / SBO
DPOSxx-EN Activate monitoring function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxx-DEVTYPE Selection of device type 3-pole 3-pole/1-pile/ switch
DPOSxx-OPC Activate monitoring function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxx-CPC Activate monitoring function of DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOSxxA-NOPSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxA-NCLSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxB-NOPSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxB-NCLSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxC-NOPSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxxC-NCLSG BI position for DPOS01-72 *none BI signal
DPOSxx-SPPEN Activate event suppression for DPOS01-72 On Off / On
DPOS-NELD Number of change to lock status. 10 0~99
DPOS-TELD Time to locking state( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
DPOS-TELR Time to unlocking state (sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
Table 4.5-33 Setting for health check feature in DPOSxx

DPOSxx-OSLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred
DPOSxx-FSLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred
DPOSxx-OEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred
DPOSxx-FEXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *user- BO read-back number
preferred

- 277 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user can operate the DPOS function over IEC 61850 communications following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the DPOS function is designed for the class of “Double Point
Controller (DPC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the DPOS01 function. Figure 4.5-52
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Common Switch controller (CSWI)” is chosen for the
DPOS01 function. After the user has defined an object “DPC”, the DPOS01 logical node can be
saved with the name “CSWI” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object “DPC” in the
DPOS01 logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing for
the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.5-52 Defining “DPC” object in CSWI4 logic node

- 278 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.5-53 exemplifies the DPOS01 logic node saved as “CSWI4”. In the SBO mode, the user
should select the following items for the “CSWI4$Pos” using GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.5-54 exemplifies the DPOS01 logic node saved as save as “CSWI4”. In the DIR mode,
the following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS.
 Oper
 origin

- 279 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user should group the DPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. (Figure 4.5-55 illustrates
how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the DPOS01 function are required to map
for IEC 61850 communications.
Table 4.5-34 Mapping signals required for CSWI4 object in DPOS01 function
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$origin orCat orCategory ST 512001 3103011008 DPOS01_3PH_ORCAT
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 512001 6A03011009 DPOS01_3PH_ORIDENT
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos stVal Dbpos ST 512001 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos q Quality ST 512001 3103011005 DPOS01_3PH_QUALITY
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos t Timestamp ST 512001 9003011006 DPOS01_3PH_TIMESTAMP
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos stSeld BOOLEAN ST 512001 0003011D90 DPOS01_STD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 4.5-55 Attribute mapped into DPCSO object of CSWI4

The DPOS01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
4.5-35 shows the input “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos”;
the user should map the input-point to the Object reference having attribute CO†. Figure 4.5-56
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control” in
the functional constraint (FC).

- 280 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.5-35 Mapping signals required for DPC object for CSWI4
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 4.5-56 Input-point mapped for CSWI4

- 281 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.5.8 Setting
DPOS01(Function ID: 512001)
Common DPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

DPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
DPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
DPOS01-EN Off / On - DPOS01 switch for Device01 Off
Dev01 DPOS01-DEVNAME [Preferred text] - item name of DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 !
DPOS01-00NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,0)state Travelling0 !
DPOS01-01NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,1)state Off !
DPOS01-10NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (1,0)state On !
DPOS01-11NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (1,1)state Travelling1 !
DPOS01-UDFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of undefined Undefine !
DPOS01-FLTNAME [Preferred text] - state name of faulty Faulty !
1-Pole / 3-Pole /
DPOS01-DEVTYPE - Device Type 1-Pole
switch
Normally Open Signal of the single-pole or
DPOS01A-NOPSG [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
phase A
DPOS01A-NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
Normally Close Signal of the single-pole or
DPOS01A-NCLSG [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
phase A
DPOS01A-NCLSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01B-NOPSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Open Signal of phase B Not assigned
DPOS01B-NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01B-NCLSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Close Signal of phase B Not assigned
DPOS01B-NCLSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01C-NOPSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Open Signal of phase C Not assigned
DPOS01C-NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01C-NCLSG [Preferred signal] - Normally Close Signal of phase C Not assigned
DPOS01C-NCLSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
DPOS01-OPC And / Or - Normally Open contact grouping And
DPOS01-CLC And / Or - Normally Close contact grouping Or
DPOS01-SPPEN Off / On - Automatic event suppression function Off
Off / On /
DPOS01-UDFEN - undefined pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
DPOS01-UDFTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette Undefined check timer 30.0
Off / On /
DPOS01-FLTEN - faulty pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
DPOS01-FLTTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette faulty check timer 30.0
DPOS01-CTREN Off / On - control mode (control enable) Off
DPOS01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
DPOS01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
select binary output read data(DataID)1 for no
DPOS01-NSLBORD1 [Preferred signal] - 5120018903011DC0
direction select command
DPOS01-NSLBORD2 [Preferred signal] - 5120018903011DC0
select binary output read data(DataID) for off
DPOS01-FSLBORD [Preferred signal] - 5120018A03011DC4
select binary output read data(DataID) for on
DPOS01-OSLBORD [Preferred signal] - 5120018603011DC6
execute binary output read data(DataID) for
DPOS01-FEXBORD [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
off direction execute command
DPOS01-OEXBORD [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
on direction execute command

- 282 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

FixedLogic /
DPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic
PLC
FixedLogic /
DPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
DPOS01-LGEXFFCT - FixedLogic
PLC factor
FixedLogic / Change logic about off direction execute
DPOS01-LGFEXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
FixedLogic / Change logic about on direction execute
DPOS01-LGOEXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
FixedLogic /
DPOS01-LGCNFFCT - Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
DPOS01-PLSM Fix / Var - pulse mode Fix
DPOS01-CPW 0.1 - 50.0 s control pulse width 1.0
DPOS01-RST 1.0 - 100.0 s response check timer 30.0
NA / C-On / C-
DPOS01-CNTS - count status NA
Off / C-OnOff
DPOS01-OPETMEN Off / On - Operation Time Measurement enable Off
DPOS01-APBD Process / Bay - status change origin Process
DPOS01-CTRDIR Off / On - Capable control direction On
Note: The DPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have
omitted the other tables because this will be the same as the table for the 1st
device with the exception of the device number.

- 283 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.5.9 Signal
 Signal monitoring points in DPOS01
8003011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL
3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state
3103011FE5 DPOS01_APH_STATE DPOS01 aph_state
3103011FEA DPOS01_BPH_STATE DPOS01 bph_state
8603011F7B DPOS01_CNT_CS07 DPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal
0003011D91 DPOS01_CNT_SEL DPOS01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D20 DPOS01_CNT_VAL DPOS01 count value
3103011FEF DPOS01_CPH_STATE DPOS01 cph_state
8B03011F79 DPOS01_CTR_SGU DPOS01 selected signal
8903011F99 DPOS01_CTR_SGUCN DPOS01 count change selected signal
8203011E8B DPOS01_EC_F_CS DPOS01 execute command fail condition signal
8103011E9A DPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS DPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
0003011D97 DPOS01_EX_BO_OPOK DPOS01 execute binary output signal for SAS
8003011E93 DPOS01_EX_CMP DPOS01 execute complete signal
8F03011F5E DPOS01_EX_CMP_TMO DPOS01 timeout after execute completion
8903011F9E DPOS01_EX_CMP_TMOCN DPOS01 count change timeout after execute completion
8603011E91 DPOS01_EX_FFL DPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8503011E8F DPOS01_EX_SFL DPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8003011E81 DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS DPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal
8103011DD0 DPOS01_FEX_BO DPOS01 off direction execute binary output signal
8403011F45 DPOS01_FLT_DET1 DPOS01 Faulty Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
8A03011DC4 DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 off direction select binary output signal
8A03011F81 DPOS01_FSL_CS19 DPOS01 select receive open signal check answer
3103011D01 DPOS01_LCD_ST DPOS01 state for LCD
3103011D00 DPOS01_MMC_ST DPOS01 state for MIMIC
8903011DC0 DPOS01_NSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select binary output signal
8603011F7E DPOS01_NSL_CS07 DPOS01 select receive signal check answer
8103011E82 DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS DPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal
8203011DD3 DPOS01_OEX_BO DPOS01 on direction execute binary output signal
8603011DC6 DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 on direction select binary output signal
8803011F73 DPOS01_OSL_CS41 DPOS01 on direction select condition signal 41
8603011F8B DPOS01_RST_CS07 DPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal
0003011F57 DPOS01_RST_SIG DPOS01 reset time signal
8503011F87 DPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTCN DPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal check
8503011F8A DPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTRT DPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal check
8003011E76 DPOS01_SLD_CS DPOS01 selected condition signal
8003011F67 DPOS01_SLD_CS04 DPOS01 selected condition signal 04
8A03011F86 DPOS01_SLD_CSCN DPOS01 count change selected condition signal
8A03011F89 DPOS01_SLD_CSRT DPOS01 reset time selected condition signal
0003011D90 DPOS01_SLD_RPT DPOS01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
8E03011F5D DPOS01_SLD_TMO DPOS01 time out after selected
8A03011F9D DPOS01_SLD_TMOCN DPOS01 count change time out after selected
8103011E7B DPOS01_SLF_CS DPOS01 no direction select fail condition signal
8703011E98 DPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS DPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8803011F9B DPOS01_SLF_FCT_F03CN DPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8703011F9C DPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04CN DPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8303011F9A DPOS01_SLF_FCT_F07CN DPOS01 count change selected timer for a check
8503011F65 DPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG05 DPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 05
8803011F6C DPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 DPOS01 selected timer for a check

- 284 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 Signal monitoring points in DPOS01

8003011E7D DPOS01_SLR_CS DPOS01 select release condition signal
8303011D02 DPOS01_ST_OFF DPOS01 Normal open state
8103011D03 DPOS01_ST_ON DPOS01 Normal close state
0003011D95 DPOS01_TMP_02 DPOS01 time reset selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3103011D80 DPOS01_TMP_06 DPOS01 control event data (selected)
3103011D81 DPOS01_TMP_07 DPOS01 control event data (select fail)
3103011D82 DPOS01_TMP_08 DPOS01 control event data (select release)
3103011D83 DPOS01_TMP_09 DPOS01 control event data (execute output on)
3103011D84 DPOS01_TMP_10 DPOS01 control event data (execute command ng)
3103011D86 DPOS01_TMP_11 DPOS01 control event data (execute fail)
0003011F53 DPOS01_TRA DPOS01 travelling info
8203011F43 DPOS01_UDF_DET1 DPOS01 Undefined Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
0003011FB6 DPOS01A_CNT_SEL DPOS01 A count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D24 DPOS01A_CNT_VAL DPOS01 A-phase count value
0003011FB7 DPOS01B_CNT_SEL DPOS01 B count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D28 DPOS01B_CNT_VAL DPOS01 B-phase count value
0003011FB8 DPOS01C_CNT_SEL DPOS01 C count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3203011D2C DPOS01C_CNT_VAL DPOS01 C-phase count value
 Common signal monitoring points

800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND dev01 close command
800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK dev01 close command with interlock bypass
800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND dev01 open command
800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK dev01 open command with interlock bypass
820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28 DPOS01IN_TMP_28
800301EE53 DPOS01IN_TMP_29 DPOS01IN_TMP_29
820301EE5A DPOS01IN_TMP_36 DPOS01IN_TMP_36
830301EE5B DPOS01IN_TMP_37 DPOS01IN_TMP_37
800301EDDA DPOS01IN_TMP_40 DPOS01IN_TMP_40
810301EDDB DPOS01IN_TMP_41 DPOS01IN_TMP_41
820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 DPOS01IN_TMP_42
830301EE5F DPOS01IN_TMP_43 DPOS01IN_TMP_43
800301ED5A DPOS01IN_TMP_45 DPOS01IN_TMP_45
800301ED77 DPOS01IN_TMP_46 DPOS01IN_TMP_46
 Mapping points in DPOS01

DPOS(Function ID: 512001)
7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data)

- 285 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the DPOS function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device; hence, the
user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For example, when the user
wishes to find the “DPOS02A_FLT_DET” point provided for the 2nd device, use the
description of “DPOS01A_FLT_DET”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“DPOS02A_FLT_DET” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for DPOS01A_FLT_DET (i.e., “8303011F49”)
Step 2 Identify the numbers at the fifth and sixth digit from the ID. (i.e.,
“01”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for the 2nd
device)
Step 4 Replace the sixth and fifth digit numbers with the new device
number. (i.e., get new ID “8303021F49” of “DPOS02A_FLT_DET”) The
ID is expressed in hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must change
the device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.

- 286 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Three position device function (TPOS)

The three-position device function (TPOS) is used when it is required to control a device having
a triple selector (e.g., the selector has three positions: P1, P2, or P3). The user can experience
the following devices as the triple selector: A 43-switch (43S), an earth-switch (ES) with a
disconnector (DS) and others.
a. P1–control b. P2–control c. P3–control
P1 P2 P3
Operation as DS Neutral position Operation as ES
Figure 4.6-1 Example of switch positions in EDS operation
The TPOS function has “Operation counters” and “Operation time measurement”; these
features are used to examine the devices; these features are useful when the user wishes to
assess the operating time of the device; these features are performed by counting the state-
changes for the device. The BO circuits connected with the TPOS function are used for issuing
commands; the BI circuits are used for receiving responses; hence, the user should connect the
BO and BI circuits with the TPOS function†. The TPOS function includes three logic groups:
1. Select logic, 2. Cancel logic, and 3. Operate logic.
EDS devices (43-switches) can be controlled separately; i.e., the function has a number of
separate sets for control (i.e., TPOS01, TPOS02, etc.). For simplicity, only the TPOS01 function
is discussed here; the features in the other TPOS functions are identical to the TPOS01
function.
†Note:A binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits
(BOs); the user makes the connection between the TPOS01 function and the
binary IO module using a signal number (is made of a “Function_ID” and an
“Element_ID”). The signal numbers and names in the TPOS01 function are listed
later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the TPOS function quickly, go to sections 4.6.6 and
4.6.5, where settings of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signal-points
for IEC61850 communication is described.

- 287 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-CTREN] to On prior to TPOS01 operation. Table
4.6-10 shows all of the scheme switches in the TPOS function.
(i) Receiving “select command P1-control” from the remote-end

Figure 4.6-2 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
P1 control from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Cancel command
Cancel logic
P2 control from the remote-end
P1 control from the local-end

Operate logic
Operate command
P1 control by the PLC function Operate logic
P2 control by the PLC function
Figure 4.6-2 Outline of select command ‘P1-control’

Figure 4.6-3 shows the select logic when a “Selection command (Remote-P1-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. This logic has the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” for
the reception of a select command; the input-point should be mapped for IEC 61850
discuss how to map the input-points for IEC 61850 communication in section 4.6.7.

- 288 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Selection logic in TPOS01 Output
TPOS01 function (Function ID: 513001)

Command “P1-Control” from the remote
For SBO operation
513001 7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Select command
command”
For DIR operation
To BO connection
Operate command
with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed
TPOS1-P1 0 t Select “success”
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operation

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.6-3 Select P1-control from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The software interlocking (ILK) function provides the operation criteria for “P1
control”. The ILK function is discussed separately; note that the operation criteria
is defined by the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition).
automatic control. The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being
in the operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control
*Note:The TPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using
IEC61850. To use this signal, the user must map for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.6-4,
Table 4.6-6, and Table 4.6-9.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue an signal “Select success” at the output point
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-P1-Control” received is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the “Remote-
P1-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

- 289 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Receiving “select command P2-control” from the remote-end

Figure 4.6-4 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P2-control’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P2 control from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed

IEC61850 decision Success Cancel logic

Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 4.6-4 Outline of select command ‘P2-control’
Input point mapped from the communication

Figure 4.6-5 shows the select logic when a “Select command P2 (Remote-P2-Control)” signal is
received at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.

For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC6)
Select command &

Select “Failed”
Operate command
& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.6-5 Select P2-control from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “P2-control”.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table

- 290 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.6-4,Table 4.6-6, and Table 4.6-9.

automatic control. The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-5, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FL” when the TPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Select command (Remote-P2-Control)” is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-P2-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
(iii) Receiving “select command P3-control” from the remote-end

Figure 4.6-6 outlines the reception of the select command e in P3-control from the remote end.
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P2control from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic

Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 4.6-6 Outline of select command for ‘P3-control’
Input point mapped from the communication.

Figure 4.6-7 shows the select logic when a “Select command P3 (Remote-P3-Control)” signal is
received at the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ”.

- 291 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

For SBO operation
For DIR operation

To BO connection
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC8)
Select command &

& 0.6s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.6-7 Select ‘P3-control’ from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “P3 control”.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.6-4,
Table 4.6-6 and Table 4.6-9.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-7, can issue a signal “Select success” at the output point
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FL” when the TPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Select command P3 (Remote-P3-Control)” is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-P3-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.

- 292 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Receiving “Select command P1-control” from the local-end.

Figure 4.6-8 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command
P2controlfromthe remote-end Cancel command

Cancel logic
Failed
Keying “Select Select

command” decision Success
Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 4.6-8 Outline of select command ’P1-control’

Figure 4.6-9 shows the select logic when a “Select command (Local-P1-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when a “Local-P1-control” key is
pressed on the IED front panel; the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850. Note
that the user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-CTRAHMI] to SBO when the operation from
the IED front panel is required, we will discuss how to set in chapter User interface: Control
sub-menu.

- 293 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

For SBO operation
Command “Local-P1-Control” Select command
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL”
TPOS01-P1 (513001_8A04011DC4)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.6-9 Selection logic for P1-control at the IED locally in TPOS01††
information, see Figure 4.6-20
††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.6-5,
Table 4.6-6 and Table 4.6-9.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL”.
Note: The signal “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.6-3. If the input signal “Local-P1-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function
returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
(v) Receiving “Select command P2-control” from the local-end.


- 294 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P2control from the local-end

Failed

command” decision Success Operate logic
Operate command
Figure 4.6-10 Outline of select command for ‘P2-control’

Figure 4.6-11 shows the select logic when a “Select command P2 (Local-P2-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user presses a “Local-P2-
control” key on the IED front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping.

For SBO operation
ILK† condition (“P2”) passed with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”
TPOS1-P2 (513001_8A04011DC6)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.6-11 Select P2-control on the front panel in TPOS01††


- 295 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.6-5,
Table 4.6-6, and Table 4.6-9.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.6-5. If the “Local-P2-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to
(vi) Receiving “Select command P3-control” from the local-end

Wait for a command

Cancel logic
P3control from the local-end

Failed
Operate logic
Selection logic Signal output Operate command
command” decision Success

Figure 4.6-13 shows the select logic when a “Select command (Local-P3-Control)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when the user press a “Local-P3-control”
key on the IED front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping.

- 296 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

For SBO operation
Operat command To BO connection
ILK† condition (“P3”) passed with ILK† condition & “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
TPOS1-P3 (513001_8A04011DC8)
DIR
ICB_STATE
0.1s

0 t
Select “Failed”
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Select condition‡
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.6-13 Select ‘P3-control’ on the front panel in TPOS01††

††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table
4.6-5,Table 4.6-6 , and Table 4.6-9.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same signal as shown in Figure 4.6-7.
If the “Local-P3-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the
(vii) Receiving “Select command P1-control” by PLC function

Figure 4.6-14 outlines the reception of the select command ‘P1-control’ by the PLC function.

- 297 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
P1control by the PLC function

Operate logic

Figure 4.6-15 shows the select logic when a “Select command P1-Control (PLC-P1-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception: the
former connection point(PLC#1) is used for the reception of the select-command when the
interlock check is required, the later connection point(PLC#2) is used for the reception of the
select-command when the interlock check is not required. That is, for the TPOS01 function,
when the signal “Select command P1-Contol (PLC-P1-Control)” generated in the user-
programmed logic is applied for the select logic, and when interlock-check is required in the
select-logic, use connection point (PLC#1:e.g.,DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK)”. Alternatively, if the
interlock check is not required, use the other connection point (PLC#2:e.g.,
DEV01_P1_COMMAND)”. PLC#1 and PLC#2 are shown in Table 4.6-1.

- 298 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
510001 7001016D08
Signals from user-PLC logic Selection logic in TPOS01 Output
1≥ &
P1-control command requiring ILK† check To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC connection point #1) command”
Operate command
513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK To BO connection
& “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
0.1s
P1-control command not requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC connection point #2) 0 t
513001 800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 4.6-15 Select ‘P1-control’ by the PLC function in TPOS01††

*Note:The TPOS01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using
IEC61850. To use this signal, the user must map for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output point of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.6-7
for the inputs PLC#1 and PLC#2, Table 4.6-9 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-15, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”1.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.6-13.
(viii) Receiving “Select command P2-control” by PLC function


- 299 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
P2control by the PLC function

Failed
Operate logic

Figure 4.6-17 shows the select logic when a signal “Selection command P2-Control (PLC-P2-
Control)” is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception, like
in the “Select command P1-Control (PLC-P1-Control)” signal. That is, if interlock checking is
required, use connection point (PLC#1:e.g., DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK). Alternatively, if the
inter-lock check is not required, use the connection point (PLC#2:e.g., DEV01_P2_COMMAND).
PLC#1 and the PLC#2 are shown in Table 4.6-2.

- 300 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
510001 7001016D08
1≥ &
P2-control command requiring ILK †check
For DIR operation
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC6)
0.1s
P2-control command not requiring ILK† check For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
513001 800401EE32 DEV01_P2_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate

510001 8601011DC
Select condition‡
Figure 4.6-17 Select logic ‘P2-control’ using the PLC function in TPOS01††
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.6-2
for PLC#1 and #2, and Table 4.6-9 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
1Note: The output point “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in
Figure 4.6-5.
(ix) Receiving “Select command P3-control” by the PLC function


- 301 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Wait for a command

Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
P3control by the PLC function Operate logic

Failed


Figure 4.6-9 shows the select logic when a “Select command P3-Control (PLC-P3-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this
signal, like in the “Select Command P1-Control (PLC-P1-Contol)” signal. That is, if interlock
checking is required, use the connection point (PLC#1; e.g., DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK).
Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required, use the connection point (PLC#2; e.g.,
DEV01_P3_COMMAND). PLC#1 and PLC#2 are shown in Table 4.6-3.

- 302 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
510001 7001016D08
1≥ &
P3-control command requiring with ILK† check
For DIR operation
Operate command
(513001 8A04011DC8)
0.1s
P3-control command not requiring without ILK† check For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
513001 800401EE36 DEV01_P3_COMMAND
PLC in DIR operate
Select condition‡
Figure 4.6-19 Select ‘P3-control’ using the PLC function in TPOS01††

††Note: To know the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.6-3 for
the input PLC#1 and PLC#2 and Table 4.6-9 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
1Note: The output point “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in
Figure 4.6-7.
(x) Select condition

Figure 4.6-20 shows the select condition logic in the TPOS01 function. The TPOS01 function
can check the condition for the select command using the signals “TPOS01_ST_P1”,
“TPOS01_ST_P2”, and “TPOS01_ST_P3” (see Table 4.6-34). If the original logic does not meet
with the requirements of the user, the following alternatives are available:

If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic, the user can replace it using the PLC
connection point “User configurable condition” set items:
1. Connect the user-customized logic with TPOS01IN_TMP_25, which is listed as PLC#2
in Table 4.6-7.
2. Set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to PLC.

- 303 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

If adding another condition is required, the user can add a signal to the select condition logic
using the PLC condition point “User Additional Condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using TPOS01IN_TMP_24, which is listed as PLC#1 in
Table 4.6-7.
2. Set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGSLFFCT] to Fixed logic.

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *4 Select condition
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress Event suppression detected *5

= TPOS01_QLT_SPP
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
(513001 8204011F59)
= TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR
(513001 8604011F5A)
[SCDEN]*7
Same Directional
OFF Controlling Event
P1-control command received
(513001 8304011D02) &
TPOS01_ST_P1
&
(513001 8104011D03)
TPOS01_ST_P2
“EDS” never permit to control
P3-control command received from “P1 to P3” and “P3 to P1”.
(513001 8504011D04) &
TPOS01_ST_P3
&
[TPOS01-DEVTYPE]*8
&
EDS

513001 800401EE61 TPOS01IN_TMP_24
[TPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
Fixedlogic
513001 810401EE62 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 &

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC#3 connection point) *9
513001 820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21
&
SERI_ERR
[TPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 4.6-20 Select condition logic for ‘P1–P3 control’ in TPOS01*11

*1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except its own; the “Command
blocking” is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch controller
(SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”.
For more information of “CBK”, see Chapter Control and monitoring application:
Software switch control. See the signal “CBK_STATE” of Table 4.6-5.
*2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used
to protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.

- 304 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
*3Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator

is changing the states of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of
denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.6-5.
*4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a
*5Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See
4.6.6(i)-3)
*6Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI
circuits.
*7Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test or check the P1–P3
control operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme
switch [SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the
same operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction. On the
other hand, if On is set for the scheme switch, the logic is not blocked.
*8Note: The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-DEVTYPE] to EDS when the
earth-switch(ES) is applied for the TPOS01 function.
*9Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”
The user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition
logic using the connection point “TPOS01IN_TMP_21”. For more information, see
chapter Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy”. See PLC#3 of
Table 4.6-7.
*10Note: To identify the input points of the other TPOS, see Table 4.6-7 for PLC#1 to
#3.

- 305 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(xi) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note that the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O”
for each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for the optional usage.
user may face an operational failure if the default settings are used.
Table 4.6-1 PLC connection points (Input points for ‘P1-control’)

513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK P1-control checking with interlock in TPOS01 (for PLC#1) O
… …. ….
513001 800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND P1-control without checking in TPOS01 (for PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
Table 4.6-2 PLC connection points (Input point for ‘P2-control’)

513001 800403EE33 DEV03_P2_INTERLOCK P2-control checking with interlock in TPOS03 (for PLC#1)
… …. ….
…. …. ….
Table 4.6-3 PLC connection points (Input point for ‘P3-control’)

… …. ….
…. …. ….

- 306 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

513001 7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ TPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M

… … …


522001 000A021001 ICB_STATE Interlock bypassing switch N/A
5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking (DCB) is in progress. N/A
570001 3103011DA2 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Automatic sequence control is in progress. N/A
Table 4.6-6 PLC connection points Interlock for P1, P2, and P3-control
570001 3104011DA0 TPOS1-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS01. N/A

570001 3104021DA0 TPOS2-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS02 N/A
… … …

… … …
Table 4.6-7 PLC connection points (Input signals for select condition logic)
513001 800401EE61 TPOS01IN_TMP_24 TPOS01 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O

… … …
513001 810401EE62 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 TPOS01 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
… … …
513001 820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21 TPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M

- 307 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… … ….
Table 4.6-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
513001 8004011F54 TPOS01_SC_ST_ERR TPOS01 select command mode is invalid.

… … …
513001 8204011F59 TPOS01_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS01)
… … …
513001 8604011F5A TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(TPOS01)
… … ….

513001 8A04011DC4 TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG Select command (P1) for Binary Output in TPOS01
… … …
513001 8A04181DC4 TPOS241SL_BO_FLG Select command (P1) for Binary Output in TPOS24
… …. ….
… …. ….
(xii) Setting names

Table 4.6-10 Settings for ‘SBO control in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-CTREN Activation of the control function in TPOS01–24 On Off / On

TPOSxx-LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
TPOSxx-DEVTYPE Equipment(EDS or 43SW) type selector switch switch / EDS
TPOSxx-CTRHMI Activation for the panel control locally (TPOS01–24) On Off / On
Note: The “xx” within “TPOSxx” represents the function number. If TPOS03 is
considered, “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented from 01 to 24.)

- 308 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

In the SBO control mode, the reception of a cancel command can be possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation
returns to the initial stage (i.e., “wait for a command”).

remote-end.
Wait for a command
P1 control from the remote-end Cancel from remote-end

Success
P2 control from the remote-end Signal reception in Cancel



Operate logic
P1 control by the PLC function Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.6-21 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from remote-end

applied to the TPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same as
that for the “Selection command P1 (Remote-P1-Control)” signal.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in TPOS01 Output

Cancel command
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
& To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_ CC_SS”
(513001_8604011E95)
Cancel condition† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
“TPOS01_CC_FS”
(513001_8704011E96)
Operation Failed
Figure 4.6-22 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in TPOS01

†Note: The logic “cancel condition” is shown in Figure 4.6-25.
Output signal to BO

- 309 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring, point
“TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel” signal
is true. Another “Operate failed” signal is issued at monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_FS” if the
TPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal is not true.

Figure 4.6-23 outlines the reception of the ‘cancel’ command from the local-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage
P1 control from remote-end
Cancel from the remote-end
Success
P1 control from front panel Keying “Cancel Cancel

command” decision Failed
P2 control from front panel
P3 control from front panel

Operate logic
P1 control by PLC function Operate command
P2 control by PLC function
Operate logic
P3 control by PLC function
Input signal
to the TPOS01 function. The signal is generated when the “Cancel” key is pressed on the IED
“Local-cancel” signal, the logic is able to output a result signal, provided that the “cancel
condition” checking is satisfied.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in TPOS01 Output
Cancel command
& To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_ CC_SS”
(513001_8604011E95)
Cancel condition &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
“TPOS01_CC_FS”
(513001_8704011E96)
Operation Failed

Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 4.6-24, is able to issue a “Selection to cancel” signal

- 310 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
at the monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Local-Cancel” signal is true.

Figure 4.6-25 shows the cancel condition logic. As the criteria “Unmatched condition detected”
is connected normally for the cancel condition logic, set Fixedlogic for the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGCNFFCT].

& 1≥ TPOS01
[TPOS01-LGCNFFCT]
Fixedlogic
513001 800401EE69 TPOS01IN_TMP_40 &
Figure 4.6-25 Logic “Cancel condition” in TPOS01

the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status”, like in Figure 4.6-20.
2Note: With the exception of the above ‘cancel’ logic, there is an operate-condition logic
within the TPOS01 function; the operate-condition logic will always checks
conditions. That is, the user is required to set either the “Operate-condition” or the
“cancel-condition” logic.
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, it can be replaced
using the connection point “User Configurable condition”:
 Connect the user-customized logic, with the “TPOS01IN_TMP_40”, which is listed
in Table 4.6-11.
 Set scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” in
each table:
otherwise, the user may experience an operational failure for the default
settings.
Table 4.6-11 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
513001 800401EE69 TPOS01IN_TMP_40 TPOS1 user configurable cancel condition O


- 311 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… … …
513001 8604011E95 TPOS01_CC_SS Cancel succeed in TPOS01

… … …
513001 8704011E96 TPOS01_CC_FS Cancel failed in TPOS01
… … …
(v) Setting name

Note: The “xx” within “TPOSxx” represents the TPOS function number. (e.g., if TPOS03
“01” to “24”.)
Table 4.6-13 Setting for ‘Cancel’ in TPOSxx

TPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition (TPOS01-24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC

- 312 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

After the completion of the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to control the
device.
(i) Receiving “Operate command for P1-control” from the remote-end

Figure 4.6-26 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘P1-control’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command

P1 control from the remote-end Success
Operation
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
P2 control from the remote-end P2 control from the remote-end
P1 control from the local-end P1 control from the local-end
P1 control by the PLC function P1 control by the PLC function
Figure 4.6-26 Outline of operate command ‘P1-control’

Figure 4.6-27 illustrates the operate logic when a “Operate command P1 (Remote-P1-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” is used
for the reception of the “Operate command P1 (Remote-P1-Control)”.

- 313 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input Operate logic in TPOS01 Output
“TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-P1-Control” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed S

&
TPOS1-P1 R
513001 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”
(5130018104011DD0) §§
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥
513001 820401EE5E TPOS01IN_TMP_38 & “TPOS01_EX_FFL”

[TPOS01-RST]
“TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7E)
&
Figure 4.6-27 Operate ‘P1-control’ from the remote-end in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “P1” control.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic (Figure
4.6-44) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “operate-condition” signal is required, it can be programmed by the
user and used to replace the signal the signal generated by the original operate-
condition logic. The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above
logic using connection point #1 “User configurable condition” That is, set the
scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_27”.
[TPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the P1-control in the other TPOS
logics, see Table 4.6-14 for PLC#1, Table 4.6-15 for PLC#2 and Table 4.6-19 for the
outputs.
the time set by the [TPOS01-RST] has been reached.
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch

- 314 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate-completed” signal can also be issued from

logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.6-26. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”,
point#2 “User-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-27, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the received “Remote-P1-
Control” signal is true.
(ii) Receiving “Operate command P2-control” from the remote-end

Wait for a command
Select logics Wait for a next command.

Operation
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Input signal required mapping

Figure 4.6-19 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command P2 (Remote-P2-Control)”

- 315 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Command “Remote-P2-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P2 R
513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥

[TPOS01-RST]
(513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
“TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF”
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&

alternative “operate-condition” signal is required, it can be programmed by the
user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition
logic. The alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point #3 “User configurable condition” That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
changed.
after reaching the time set by the setting [TPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “operate-completed” signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.6-26. connect
the signal “operate completed” generated in the programmed logic to the

- 316 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table
4.6-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.6-16 for PLC#3 and Table 4.6-19 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-29, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determine that the input signal “Remote-P2-
Control” is true.
(iii) Receiving “Operate command P3-control” from the remote-end

Wait for a command

Operation
Signal reception in Control logic Signal output
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Input signal required mapping

Figure 4.6-31 illustrate the operate logic when an “Operate command P3 (Remote-P3-Control)”

- 317 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Command “Remote-P3-Control” (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P3 R
513001 840401EE58 TPOS01IN_TMP_29

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD6) §§
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E80)
&

4.6-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.6-17 for PLC#4, and Table 4.6-19 for the outputs.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated inthe operate-condition logic (Figure
4.6-44) when Fix logic is set for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user
changed.
after reaching the time set by the setting [TPOS01-RST]
§§Note: The “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate-completed” signal can also be issued from

- 318 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the “operate completed” signal,
point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-31, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the input signal “Remote-
P3-Control” is true.
(iv) Receiving “Operate command P1-control” from the local-end

Figure 4.6-32 depicts the operation logic of the operate command ‘P1-control’ from the local-
end.
Wait for a command
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end

P1 control from the local-end Success
Operation
Signal reception from the Operate logic Signal output
decision
front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.6-32 Outline of Operate command ‘P1-control’

Figure 4.6-33 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command P1 (Local-P1-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is provided when “P1-control” is keyed on
the IED front panel.

- 319 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Command Local-P1-Control” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
S
TPOS1-P1 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥

513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
PLC#3
(5130018104011DD0) §§
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

PLC#2 [TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7E)
&
Figure 4.6-33 Operate ‘P1-control’ on the front panel TPOS01††
alternative “operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user and
alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
changed.
outputs.

- 320 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the scheme
switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued
4.6-26. The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the “operate
connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “Local-P1-Control”
signal is true.
(v) Receiving “operate command P2-control” from the local-end

Figure 4.6-34 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘P2-control’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command

Operation
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 4.6-35 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operation command P2 (Local-P2-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The input signal is provided when “P2-control” is

- 321 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Command Local-P2-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
S
TPOS1-P2 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥

513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(513001 8004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&
Figure 4.6-35 Operate ‘P2-control’ on the front panel in TPOS01††

alternative “operate-condition is required it can be programmed by the user and
alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the to the above logic using
connection point #3 “User configurable condition” That is, set the [TPOS01-
LGCTRCON] to PLC and using “ TPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
changed.
after reaching the time set by the [TPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the [TPOS01-
LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued from the logic
programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.6-26 . The user-
programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”, hence

- 322 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection point#2

“User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
signal is true.
(vi) Receiving “operate command P3-control” from the local-end

Figure 4.6-36 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘P3-control’ from the local-end.
Wait for a command

Operation
decision
front panel
Failed Do nothing

Figure 4.6-37 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operate command P3 (Local-P3-Control)”
signal is applied to the TPOS01 function. The input signal is provided when “P3-control” is

- 323 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Command Local-P3-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
S
TPOS1-P2 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥

513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(513001 8004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&
Figure 4.6-37 Operate ‘P3-control’ on the front panel in TPOS01

‡Note:An “operate condition signal” is generated in the operate-condition logic (Figure
alternative “operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user and
alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
changed.
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued from the

- 324 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”,
point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
signal is true.
(vii) Receiving “operate command P1-control” using the PLC function

Figure 4.6-38 outlines the reception of the operate command ‘P1-control’ using the PLC
function.
Wait for a command

P1 control by the PLC function Success
Operation
decision
PLC function
Failed Do nothing

Figure 4.6-39 describes the operate logic when an “Operate command P1 (PLC-P1-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception: the
former connection point (PLC#3) is used for the reception of the operate-command when the
interlock-check is required, the latter connection point (PLC#4) is used for the reception of the
operate-command when the interlock check is not required. That is, for the TPOS01 function
“Operate command P1 (PLC-P1-Control)” signal generated in the user-programmed logic and
when the interlock check is required in the operate logic, apply the signal at connection point
(PLC#3; i.e., DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK).Alternatively, if the interlock check is not required,

- 325 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
apply the signal at other connection point (PLC#4; i.e., DEV01_P1_COMMAND). We should
assume the PLC#3 and PLC#4 as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.6-1. Note that the user should
set PLC for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT].
Command “PLC-P1-Control” requiring ILK check “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS”

(PLC#3 connection point) (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-P1-Control” not requiring ILK check 0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
513001 800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND

&
TPOS1-P1 R
513001 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(5130018104011DD0) §§
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7E)
&
Figure 4.6-39 Operate P1- control using the PLC function in TPOS01††
†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for “P1” control.
alternative “operate-condition” programmed by the user is required in place of the
signal generated by the original operate-condition logic, connect the alternative
“operate-condition” to the logic shown in Figure 4.6-39 using connection point #1
“User configurable condition” That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_27”.
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied
to [TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
outputs.

- 326 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected
failing expiration of the setting applied to timer [TPOS01-RST]
§§Note: The “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. If the signal to be issued from the logic programmed by the
user instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.6-26, connect the “operate completed”
signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2 “User
configurable condition”. That is, set PLC to the scheme switch [TPOS01-
LGP1EXOT] and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-39, can issue a “Operate P1-control” signal at output point
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-P1-Control”
is true.
(viii) Receiving “operate command P2-control” using the PLC function

Figure 4.6-40 depicts the reception of the operate command “P2-control’ using the PLC function.
Wait for a command

Operation
decision
PLC function
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.6-40 Outline of Operate command ‘P2-control’ function

Figure 4.6-41 depicts the operation logic when an “Operate command P2 (PLC-P2-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for the reception of this
command signal, like in the “Operate command P2 (PLC-P2-Control)” signal. That is, if an
interlock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3:i.e.,
DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK). On the other hand, if an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4:i.e., DEV01_P2_COMMAND). PLC#3 and PLC#4 here are

- 327 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
to be treated as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.6-2. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme
switch [TPOS01-LGP2EXOT].
Command “PLC-P2-Control” requiring ILK check “TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS”

(PLC#3 connection point) (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001 800401EE33 DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-P2-Control” not requiring ILK check 0.1 – 50.0 s
513001 800401EE32 DEV01_P2_COMMAND Operate Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P2 R
513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD3) §§
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91 ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E7F)
&
Figure 4.6-41 Operate P2-Control by the PLC function in TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria foe operation for “P2” control.
alternative “operate-condition programmed by the user is required in place of the
LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
to [TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
after reaching the time set by the setting [TPOS01-RST]
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for [TPOS01-

- 328 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
LGP1EXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the logic programmed by the user
instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.6-26, connect the “operate completed” signal
generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2 “User configurable
condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use
“TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-41, can issue a signal “Operate P2-control” at output point
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “PLC-P2-Control” signal
is true.
(ix) Receiving “operate command P3-control” using the PLC function

Figure 4.6-42 outlines the reception of the operate command P3-control by the PLC function.
Wait for a command

Operation
Signal generation by Operate logic Signal output
decision
the PLC function
Failed Do nothing

Figure 4.6-43 depicts the operate logic when an “Operate command P3 (PLC-P3-Control)”
signal is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception of this
command signal, like the signal “Operate command P1 (PLC-P1-Control)”. That is, if an
interlock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3:i.e.,
DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK). If, on the other hand, an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4:i.e., DEV01_P3_COMMAND). We shall assume the PLC#3
and PLC#4 as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.6-3. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme

- 329 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
switch [TPOS01-LGP3EXOT].
Command “PLC-P3-Control”requiring ILK check (PLC#3
connection point) (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83)
[TPOS01-CPW]
Operate Cmd.
513001 800401EE37 DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-P3-Control ”not requiring ILK check 0.1 – 50.0 s
513001 800401EE36 DEV01_P3_COMMAND Operation Cmd.

&
TPOS1-P3 R
513001 840401EE58 TPOS01IN_TMP_29

[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] &
(513001 8204011DD6) §§
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
1≥

[TPOS01-RST] (513001 8604011E91) ‡‡
0 t
(513001 8004011E80)
&
Figure 4.6-43 Operate ‘P3-control’ using the PLC function TPOS01††

†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for “P3” control.
alternative “operate-condition programmed by the user is required in place of the
LGCTRCON] to PLC and using “TPOS01IN_TMP_29”.
to [TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S switch or an
ES is changed.
‡‡Note: The Operate failed” signal “is issued when a state-change remains undetected
following expiration of the setting applied to timer [TPOS01-RST].

- 330 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. If the signal is to be issued from the programmed logic by
the user instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.6-26, connect the “operate
completed” signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2
“User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch [TPOS01-
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.6-43, can issue a signal “Operate P3-control” at output point
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-P3-Control”
is true.
(x) Operate condition

examine an operate condition. The operate condition is determined by signal
“TPOS01_STATE”. If the functionality of the original logic does not meet with user-
requirements, the following alternatives are provided:

PLC connect point “User configurable operate condition”.
1. Connect the user-customized logic using “TPOS01IN_TMP_34”, listed as PLC#2 in
Table 4.6-18.
2. Set scheme switch [TPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to PLC.

If the addition of another operate condition is required, the user can add the signal to operate
condition logic using PLC connection point “Additional condition”.
1. Add a user-preferred signal using “TPOS01IN_TMP_33”, listed as PLC#1 in Table
4.6-18.
2. Set scheme switch [TPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixed logic.

- 331 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *4 Operate condition
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress Event suppression detected *5

= TPOS01_QLT_SPP
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
(513001 8204011F59)
= TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR
(513001 8604011F5A)
[SCDEN]*7
Same Directional
OFF Controlling Event
(513001 8304011D02) &
TPOS01_ST_P1
&
(513001 8104011D03)
TPOS01_ST_P2
“EDS” never permit to control
P3-control command received from “P1 to P3” and “P3 to P1”.
(513001 8504011D04) &
TPOS01_ST_P3
&
[TPOS01-DEVTYPE]*8
&
EDS
Additional condition (PLC connection point #1)

513001 800401EE65 TPOS01IN_TMP_33
[TPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC connection point#2)
Fixedlogic
513001 810401EE66 TPOS01IN_TMP_34 &

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point#3) *9
513001 820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21
TPOS01IN_TMP_41 &
SERI_ERR
[TPOS01-CTREN]
On
Figure 4.6-44 Operate condition logic for P1–3 control in TPOS01*10

*1Note: “Command Blocking” disables any operation except for itself; “Command
blocking” is implemented as “CBK” in a software switch controller (SOFTSW);.
The IEC 61850 defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more information
of “CBK”, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Software switch
control function. See the signal “CBK_STATE” in Table 4.6-5.
*3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling signifies that other operators are
changing the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED
should be inhibited whilst ever the event is detected. The detection signal is
*4Note: If an IED is in the process of issuing a trip command, all control operation is
blocked until the trip operation has been completed. If the IED has a relay
application, the trip command is issued at the output-point “GEN.TRIP” in Table

- 332 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.6-5.
*5Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a
*6Note: The Function “Event suppression” can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See
4.6.6(i)-3)
*7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI
circuits.
*8Note: The “Common control” (CMNCTRL) function can test or check the operation
– direction of logic. When the user sets off for scheme switch [SCDEN], operation
of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction
compared with the previous operation-direction. Alternatively, if On is set for the
*9Note: The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-DEVTYPE] EDS when the earth-
switch(ES) is applied for the TPOS01 function.
*10Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition” The
user must connect the “Control hierarchy” condition to the select condition logic
using the connection point TPOS01IN_TMP_21” for more information, see chapter
Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy” see PLC#3 of Table 4.6-7.
*11Note: To identify the input points of the other TPOS, see Table 4.6-7 for PLC#1 to
#3. Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for P1, P2 and P3-
control.
(xi) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note the meaning of the following abbreviations as shown in
“O” signifies that the signal is provided for the optional use.
“M” signifies that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
“N/A” signifies that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 4.6-14 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#1 user a configurable condition)
513001 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#1) O
… … …
Table 4.6-15 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#2 user configurable condition)
513001 820401EE5E TPOS01IN_TMP_38 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#2) O

- 333 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… … …
…. …. …
… … …
Table 4.6-18 PLC connection points (Input point additional, user configurable condition)
513001 800401EE65 TPOS01IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS01 (for PLC#1) O
… … …
… … …

513001 8104011DD0 TPOS01_P1EX_BO Operate command (P1) for Binary Output in TPOS01
… … …
…. …. ….

- 334 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… … …
513001 8004011E7E TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P1 direction execute command
… … …
513001 8004011E7F TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P2 direction execute command
… … …
513001 8004011E80 TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P3 direction execute command
… … …
513001 8004011E81 TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS TPOS01 P1 direction execute command
… … …
… … …
… … …
513001 8004011E93 TPOS01_EX_CMP TPOS01 completed control
… … …
513001 8604011E91 TPOS01_EX_FFL TPOS01 failed control
… … …
(xii) Setting names

Note: The “xx” of “TPOSxx” represents the TPOS function number. (e.g., if the TPOS03
“01” to “24”.)
Table 4.6-20 Setting of Operate in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-PLSM Method of command output(TPOS01–24) Fix Fix/Var

TPOSxx-CPW Duration of command output(TPOS01–24) 1.0[sec] 0.1~50.0[sec]

- 335 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
TPOSxx-RST Detection time for terminating control (TPOS01–24) 30.0[sec] 0.1~100.0[sec]

TPOSxx-LGCTRCON Logic selector for operate condition (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
TPOSxx-LGP1EXOT Logic selector for command output (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC
TPOSxx-LGEXFFCT Logic selector for operate condition (TPOS01–24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic/PLC

- 336 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.6.4 Operation counter

The TPOS01 function has an operation-counter†; the user can utilize the operation counter to
predict the lifespan of an EDS. The user can select a count mode in response to a device signal.
Table 4.6-21 and Figure 4.6-45 show the mode, for which a user is required to change a mode
in response to a device signal and the signal of the device such as the EDS. For instance of the
P1-control in the TPOS01 function, a user can select the mode using scheme switch [TPOS01-
P1CNTS], which is set to C-On; counting-up is performed when a switch-gear signal gives rise
to a change in state from “Open to Closing”.
Table 4.6-21 Mode of operation counter

Mode Description
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to closed (ON). When the signal
C-On
is changed from “Open to Closed”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up is performed when a signal changes to open (OFF). When the signal
C-Off
is changed from “Closed to Open”, the counter value is incremented.
Counting-up is made when any state change occurs: “Open to Closed” and
C-OnOff
“Closed to Open”.
NA Stop the count function
†Note:The operation-counter value is not cleared when power is removed from the IED.
This counter is available in the TPOS01 to TPOS03 functions.
Closed
Open
Figure 4.6-45 Device signal
The user can change the value of the operation-counter from either the front panel or
remotely. For example, in the sub-menu for “Operation counter”, the user can set a user-
preferred value for the operation-counter. See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu
on how to operate the sub-menu.
Operation Counter TPOS1-CNT

10:48 1/3 10:48 1/4
_TPOS1-CNT > TPOS_Dev1-All +
TPOS2-CNT > CANCEL
0
TPOS3-CNT >
TPOS_Dev1-P1 +
0
ENTER TPOS_Dev1-P2 +
Figure 4.6-46 Operation counter sub-menu

Note: With regard to the signal “TPOS01_ST_P1”, the sub-menu represents it as
“TPOS_Dev1-P1”. Analogous to the signal “TPOS01_ST_P1”, the signals
“TPOS01_ST_P2” and “TPOS01_ST_P3” are represented as “TPOS_Dev1-P2” and

- 337 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
“TPOS_Dev1-P3”, respectively. The “TPOS_Dev1-All” represents the net counter

of “TPOS01_ST_P1”, “TPOS01_ST_P2” and “TPOS01_ST_P3”.
(i) Receiving “change value for counter” from the remote-end

Mapping of Input point required
Figure 4.6-47 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is received at the
TPOS01 function. With regard to the net counter, the input-point “DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ” is
used. With regard to a P1-control counter, the input-point “DEV01_P1CNT_REQ” is used. For
P2-control and P3-control, the input-points “DEV01_P2CNT_REQ” and “DEV01_P3CNT_REQ”
are used.
“TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(513001 8A04011F8B)
Command “change value for counter”
513001_7004016D09 DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ Operate Command
&
Figure 4.6-47 Change counter value in net counter† by the remote-end in TPOS01
‡Note:The “operate condition” signal is provided from the operate condition logic shown
in Figure 4.6-49.
†Note: The user can apply the other counter change commands for P1-control, P2-control
and P3-control as shown in Table 4.6-23. The resultant signals for the other
TPOS02-24 logics are shown in Table 4.6-22.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
(ii) Receiving “change value for counter” from the local-end

Input signal from the front panel
Figure 4.6-48 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is provided in the
TPOS01 function. The command is provided from the sub-menu (see Figure 4.6-46).

“TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(513001 8A04011F8B)
Command “Change value”
Figure 4.6-48 Changing value by the operation of the front panel in TPOS01

- 338 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
(iii) Operate condition for the counter

Figure 4.6-49 illustrates the operate condition logic. The TPOS01 function can determine an
operate-condition using a signal received from “Control hierarchy”. The Control hierarchy
condition is provided by user-programmed PLC logic; the user must connect the control-
hierarchy with the TPOS01 function using connection point “TPOS01IN_TMP_41” (see Table
4.6-24).

Command blocking*1 To counter logic
CBK_STATE
1≥ Operate condition
&
DCB RCV OR

Traveling OR
Detection of serious errors

SERI_ERR
Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point)

513001 800401ED5A TPOS01IN_TMP_41
Figure 4.6-49 Operate condition logic for changing the counter in TPOS01
*1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; the “Command
blocking” function is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch
controller (SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “Command Blocking”
function as “CmdBlk”. For more information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and
monitoring application: Software switch control function. See the signal
“CBK_STATE” of Table 4.6-5.
*3Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator
is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of
*4Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a

Table 4.6-22 Results of changing counter
513001 8A04011F8B TPOS01_SLD_CSCN TPOS01 counter selected


- 339 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
… … …

513001 7004016D09 DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for summation counter value
… … …
513001 7004016D0A DEV01_P1CNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for P1 counter value
… … …
513001 7004016D0B DEV01_P2CNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for P2 counter value
… … …
513001 7004016D0C DEV01_P3CNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for P3 counter value
… … …
Table 4.6-24 PLC connection points for control hierarchy

513001 800401ED5A TPOS01IN_TMP_41 TPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#1) for counters M

… … …
(v) Setting name

Table 4.6-25 Setting for pulse counter in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-P1CNTS Mode selection of the counter in P1-control *user-preferred NA / C-On / C-Off / C-OnOff

- 340 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.6.5 Measurement of operation Intervals

The TPOS01 function can measure operation intervals time†, the intervals OT1 and OT2 can
represent the period of time when an earth-switch changes a position from another position.
As shown in Table 4.6-26 the eight intervals are defined as switching as shown in Figure 4.6-50
Intermediate
to Figure 4.6-53. The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-OPETMEN] On.
Signal “TPOS01_P2EX_BO”
Intermediate
Sensing intermediate state

P1
P2
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P1”
P3
P2-control
OT1 OT2
a. Switch motion (P1 to P2) b. Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion (P1 to P2)
Figure 4.6-50 Two Intervals (OT1 and OT2) for P2 control

Intermediate
Intermediate

P1
P2
P3
P1-control
OT3 OT4
Figure 4.6-51 Two Intervals (OT3 and OT4) for P1 control

Intermediate
Intermediate
Sensing Intermediate state

P1
P2
P3
P2-control
OT5 OT6
Figure 4.6-52 Two Intervals (OP5 and OP6) for P2 control

- 341 -
Intermediate 6F2S1958 (0.03)
Intermediate

P1
P2
P3
P3-control
OT5 OT6
Figure 4.6-53 Two intervals (OP7 and OP8) for P3 control
Table 4.6-26 Eight intervals measured in TPOS01 function

Intervals Trigger Events for measurement
Start Signal “TPOS01_P2EX_BO” sensed
OT1
End Signal “TPOS01_PT_P1” unsensed
Start Signal “TPOS01_PT_P1” sensed
OT2
OT3
Start Signal “TPOS01_PT_P2” is sensed
OT4
OT5
OT6
OT7
OT8
†Note:The function “operation time measurement” is also available in the TPOS02 and
TPOS03 functions.
The user can clear the operation-intervals (OT1 to OT8) by key-operation of the
“Operation time” sub-menu or operation from the remote-end. Figure 4.6-54 shows that the
user can clear the eight operation times using this screen. See chapter User interface:
Monitoring sub-menu for the operation.

- 342 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Operation Time TPOS1-OT

10:48 1/26 10:48 1/5
_TPOS1-OT > TPOS_Dev1- OT1
TPOS2-OT > CANCEL ******.*** ms
TPOS3-OT > TPOS_Dev1- OT2
TPOS4-OT >
******.*** ms
TPOS5-OT > ENTER TPOS_Dev1- OT3
TPOS6-OT >
Figure 4.6-54 Operation time sub-menu
(i) Signal names and numbers

Table 4.6-27 Mapping point for clearance of operation times
513001 7004016D0D DEV01_RESET_REQ TPOS01 operation time reset command (Mapping Data)
… … …
(ii) Setting names

Table 4.6-28 Setting of operation time function in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-OPETMEN Activation of the operation time measurement in TPOSxx On Off / On

- 343 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user should connect the TPOS input /output points with the BI and the BO circuits;
subsequently, the TPOS function is able to issue select and operate commands. The user should
execute the following four steps.
i BI connection for status signals
ii BO connection for “select command”
iii BO connection for “operate command”
Note that the TPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [TPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
(i) BI connection for status signals

Figure 4.6-55 exemplifies the reception of signals at the TPOS01 function; to acquire the status
signal§, the user should set input-point for the settings [TPOS01-P1NOPSG], [TPOS01-
P2NOPSG], and [TPOS01-P3NOPSG].
†Note:Normally the input-signals (P1, P2, P3) are generated using normally-open
contacts (NOs). If the P1 signal is generated by the normal-closed contact (NC),
the user should set scheme switch [TPOS01- P1NOPSGI] to On in order that the
P1 input-signal is inverted.
§Note: The state signal acquired can be monitored. For more information, see Chapter
Automatic supervision.
Connection with Binary input circuits

For example, as shown in Figure 4.6-1, suppose three kinds of signals (P1, P2, or P3) are
provided on the first (BI1), second (BI2), and third BI (BI3) circuits at IO#1 slot. In this case,
the user should set three input-points (200B01–8001001110, 8101011110, and 8201021110†)
for the settings [TPOS01-P1NOPSG], [TPOS01-P2NOPSG], and [TPOS01-P3NOPSG].
Signals by Binary input circuits Signal acquisition logic in TPOS01 Output ‡
“TPOS01_STATE”
Event suppression detector (513001_3104011001)
BI1, BI2, and BI3 signals desig
nated by settings
[TPOS01-P1NOPSG], & 1≥
[TPOS01-P2NOPSG],
and [TPOS01-P3NOPSG] S
Status before chattering
R “TPOS01_ QLT_SPP”
(513001_8204011F59)
[TPOS01-SPPEN] Chattering detector
On
& To select and operate
condition logics
Figure 4.6-55 BI1, BI2 and BI3 signals provided into TPOS01
†Note:The user should set the actual input- points, see Chapter Technical description:
Binary IO module.
‡Note:In Figure 4.6-55 two signals can be issued: “TPOS01_STATE” and

- 344 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
“TPOS01_QLT_SPP”. The former one is used in the select condition logic and the
operate condition (see Figure 4.6-20 and Figure 4.6-44). The latter is used for an
event suppression detector.
Decision by input signals

The logic in Figure 4.6-55 can give a decision in response to the reception of the signals; the
decision is of either “P1”, “P2”, “P3”, “Faulty”, and “Intermediate”. Table 4.6-29 exemplifies the
decisions in response to the BI1 - BI3 input signals; the decision can be acquired at the
monitoring point “TPOS01_STATE”.
Suppose, the BI1–BI3 circuits receive “On–Off–Off” signals when an earth-switch is

located at “P1” (see Figure 4.6-1); the value “1” is given, because the decision can be made with
the “On–Off–Off” signals.
If “On–On–Off” signals are applied to the BI1–BI3 circuits, the decision cannot be made
because the earth switch is still kinetic and is not standstill; thus, the decision is given as
“Intermediate”, the value “3” is given at the connection point ”TPOS01_STATE”.
If “On–On–On” signals are applied to the BI1–BI3 circuits, the decision cannot be made
because the earth-switch may be broken; hence, the value “7” is given.
Table 4.6-29 Decision made by the TPOS01 function
Input signals at IO#1 (200B01) Generated value
Decision by
BI1 BI2 BI3 “TPOS01_STATE”
TPOS01
(8001001110) (8101011110) (8201021110) (513001 3104011001)
Off (0) Off (0) Off (0) Intermediate 0
On (1) Off (0) Off (0) P1 1
Off (0) On (1) Off (0) P2 2
On (1) On (1) Off (0) Intermediate 3
Off (0) Off (0) On (1) P3 4
On (1) Off (0) On (1) Intermediate 5
Off (0) On (1) On (1) Intermediate 6
On (1) On (1) On (1) Faulty 7
Note: When handling the raw information other than the decision, the user can take
respective states of binary input circuits using other monitoring points. That is,
the user can take either state On (1) or state Off (0) corresponding to the BI1
circuit using the monitoring point “TOPS01_PT_P1”. Likewise, the BI2 and BI3
states can be taken using the monitoring points “TOPS01_PT_P2” and
“TOPS01_PT_P3”. (See Table 4.6-34)

- 345 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Event suppression detector

If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the TPOS function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the TPOS function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created.
[TPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[TPOS-TELD] [TPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time A, the setting [TPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time B. The setting [TPOS-TELD] is pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time A (e.g., Time A to Time C).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signal stops. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [TPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time D to E).
To initiate event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch [TPOS01-SPPEN].
(ii) BO connection for “select commands”

Figure 4.6-57 exemplifies the connections for operate commands P1/P2/P3. Suppose that
connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using connection points
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” to “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”; as a result, either of the signals
“Operate command P1 to P3” is issued at one of the BOs.

- 346 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Terminal and
Selection logic in TPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
Selection logic for select “BO1” Select
command P1 in TPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
P1
To contact health & ≥1
check [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
Selection logic for select check
command P2 in TPOS01 [Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
Terminal and
Selection logic for select BO2 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
command P3 in TPOS01
(513001 8A04011DC6)
“BO2” Select
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112)
P2
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102011113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310201E11D BO2_SOURCE
Terminal and
BO3 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
(513001 8A04011DC8)
“BO3” Select
P3
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO3-RB”
(200B01_8102021113)
Off
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310202E11D BO3_SOURCE
Figure 4.6-57 Example select connected with BO1-BO3
(iii) BO connection for “operate command”

Figure 4.6-58 exemplifies the connections for operate commands P1/P2/P3; the BO4–BO6
circuits issue the operate command.

- 347 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Terminal and
Operate logic in TPOS01 BO4–BO6 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
(513001_8104011DD0)
“BO4”
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8302031112)
command
P1-control P1
in TPOS01 & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO4-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8302031113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“TPOS01_P2EX_BO” 200B01 310203E11D BO4_SOURCE
(513001_8204011DD3)
“BO5”
P2-control P2
in TPOS01 & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO5-RB”
Connected by (200B01_8402041113)
Off
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]

“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” 200B01 310204E11D BO5_SOURCE
(513001_8204011DD6)
“BO6”
P3-control P3
in TPOS01 & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO6-RB”
Connected by Off
(200B01_8502051113)
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
200B01 310205E11D BO6_SOURCE
Figure 4.6-58 Example of operate commands connected with BO4-BO2

†Note:Table 4.6-19 shows the remaining signals except for “TPOS01”.

The TPOS01 function has contact health check feature for the BO circuits; hence, the user is
able to connect an output signal to the contact health check function when Fixedlogic is set for
scheme switches [TPOS01- LGP1EXOT] to [TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]†. Consequently, the TPOS01
function can determine whether the signal has been successfully output from the BO. If a
failure is reported, the TPOS01 function determines that the signal is not output successfully
to the BO; then the command is canceled immediately and the TPOS01 function returns to the
†Note:Table 4.6-20 shows settings for the health check feature in the other TPOS
functions.
Setting for “select command P1/P2/P3”

For example, the point”TPOS01_P1SL_BO” is connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing of

- 348 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
the command, the user can connect point “BO1-RB “ with the contact health check function
using the setting [TPOS01-P1SLBORD]. Do not key the point “TPOS01_P1SL_BO”. Likewise,
BO2-RB and BO3-RB are required to be set.
Selection logic in TPOS01 logic in TPOS01
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO” (513001 8A04011DC4)
BO1 circuit at & Result of contact health check of

IO_SLOT1 P1-select in TPOS01
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113) Signal connected by
setting [TPOS01-P1SLBORD]

“TPOS01_P2SL_BO” (513001 8A04011DC6)

“BO2-RB”
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO” (513001 8A04011DC8)

“BO3-RB”
Figure 4.6-59 Example contact health check feature for P1–P3 select commands
Setting for “Operate command P1/P2/P3”

Similarly, the points “BO4-RB” and “BO6-RB” are required to be set for the settings [TPOS01-
P1EXBORD] to [TPOS01-P3EXBORD].
Selection logic in TPOS01
Contact health check logic in TPOS01

“TPOS01_P1EX_BO” (513001 8104011DD0)

IO_SLOT1 P1-operate in TPOS01
“BO4-RB” Signal connected by

(200B01_8302031113) setting [TPOS01-P1EXBORD]
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO” (513001 8204011DD3)


“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” (513001 8204011DD6)


Figure 4.6-60 Contact health check logic for P1–P3 operate commands

- 349 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Proper setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 4.6-61 shows a setting example for 43S/EDS driving. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1–BO6 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working
correctly, the respective points of the BO (RBs) should be connected, as shown in Table 4.6-30,
to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.

Example #1 Health check settings for example #1
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001113(BO1-RB) set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] OK
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO” is connected to “BO4” at IO#1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [TPOS01-P1EXBORD] OK

- 350 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Remote/Local-end BIO module

“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” Drivers
(513001 8A04011DC4)
P1-select BO1
(200B01 8002001113)
(513001 8104011DD0)
P1-operate BO4
(200B01 8302031113)
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select BO2
(200B01 8102011113)
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
(200B01 8402041113)
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select BO3
(200B01 8202021113)
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” EDS
(513001 8204031DD3) Plus (+)
P3-operate BO6
command “BO6-RB” P1-Selection P2-Selection P3-Selection
(200B01 8502051113)
P1-Operate P2-Operate P3-Operate
Minus (−)
Figure 4.6-61 Contact health check setting and EDS scheme for example #1
Setting for erroneous in contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 4.6-62 shows a setting example for an improper setting of the 43S/EDS scheme. The
settings are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.6-31, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead
BO1 is actually chosen, which is incorrect. In this case, the setting [TPOS01-SLBORD] is
meaningless; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.

- 351 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Example #2 Health check setting for example #2
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” on SLOT1 200B01 8002001112 (BO1) set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] NG
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” on SLOT1 200B01 8102011113(BO2-RB) set for [TPOS01-P2SLBORD] OK
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO3” on SLOT1 200B01 8202021113(BO3-RB) set for [TPOS01-P3SLBORD] OK
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO” is connected to “BO4” on SLOT1 200B01 8302031113(BO4-RB) set for [TPOS01-P1EXBORD] OK

Remote/Local-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB)
BIO module
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” mistakenly chosen with
(513001 8A04011DC4) 200B01 8002001112 Drivers
P1-select BO1
command
(513001 8104011DD0)
P1-operate BO4
(200B01 8302031113)
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select BO2
(200B01 8102011113)
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
(200B01 8402041113)
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select BO3
(200B01 8202021113)
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” EDS
(513001 8204031DD3) Plus (+)
P3-operate BO6
command “BO6-RB” P1-Selection P2-Selection P3-Selection
(200B01 8502051113)
P1-Operate P2-Operate P3-Operate
Minus (−)
Figure 4.6-62 Contact health check setting and EDS diagram for example #2
Setting for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 4.6-63 shows an additional setting example for the EDS scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “SPO01_P1*SL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [TPOS01-P1*SLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special

- 352 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
example can issue a select command; which is called “operated by internal select function”.
The user does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there
are no BO circuits available.
Example #3 Setting for example #3
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is not connected to any BO “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] OK
Remote/Local end
(513001 8A04011DC4)
P1-select
command
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” BOs are not connected but virtualized.
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select
command “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
EDS
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select
command
Plus (+)
SAS/Local IED
BIO module P1-Operate P2-Operate P3-Operate
(513001 8104011DD0) Drivers
P1-operate BO4
(200B01 8302031113) Minus (−)
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
(200B01 8402041113)
(513001 8204031DD3
P3-operate BO6
(200B01 8502051113)
Figure 4.6-63 Contact health check setting and EDS diagram for example #3
(v) Signal name and number

Table 4.6-33 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in TPOSxx)

- 353 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

… … …
Table 4.6-34 PLC monitoring points (P1–P3 state signals in TPOSxx)

513001 8304011D02 TPOS01_ST_P1 TPOS01 P1 On(0/1)

… … …
(vi) Setting names

Note: The “xx” of “TPOSxx” represents the TPOS function number. (e.g., if the TPOS03
“01” to “24”.)
Table 4.6-35 Setting for Binary input signals in TPOSxx
TPOSxx-EN Activate monitoring function of TPOS01-24 On Off / On

TPOSxx-DEVTYPE Equipment type selector. switch switch/EDS
TPOSxxP1-NOPSG BI position for TPOS01-24 *none BI signal
TPOSxx-SPPEN Activate event suppression for TPOS01-24 On Off / On
TPOS-NELD Number of change to lock status. 10 0~99
TPOS-TELD Time to locking state( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
TPOS-TELR Time to unlocking state( sliding window ) 10[sec] 1~99[sec]
Table 4.6-36 Settings for health check function in TPOSxx

TPOSxx-P1SLBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *none BO readback signal
TPOSxx-P1EXBORD Select BO signal (BO*-RB) from signal list *none BO readback signal

- 354 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.6.7 Mapping for IEC61850 commination

The user can operate the TPOS function over IEC 61850 communications† following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the TPOS function is designed for the class of “Integer Status
Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the TPOS01 function. Figure 4.6-64
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Integer Status Controllable Status Output (ISCSO)”
is chosen for the TPOS01 function. After the user defined an object “ISCSO”, the TPOS01
logical node can be available with the name “GGIO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of
the object “ISCSO” in the TPOS01 logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be
chosen in the editing of the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.6-64 Defining “ISCSO” object in GGIO2701 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.6-65 exemplifies the TPOS01 logic node saved as “GGIO2701”. For the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GGIO2701$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS:

- 355 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 origin
 stSeld
Figure 4.6-65 LN editing screen for SBO (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.6-66 exemplifies the TPOS logic node saved as “GGIO2701”. In the DIR mode, the
following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin

The user should group the TPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 4.6-43 illustrates
how to map a signal; it indicates that the signals for the TPOS01 function are required to map
for IEC 61850 communication.

- 356 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.6-37 Mapping signals for ISCSO object

Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 513001 3104011008 TPOS01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 513001 6A04011009 TPOS01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 513001 3104011001 TPOS01_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO q Quality ST 513001 3104011005 TPOS01_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 513001 9004011006 TPOS01_TIMESTAMP
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 513001 0004011D90 TPOS01_SLD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 4.6-67 ocCat attribute mapped for ISCSO object of GGIO2701

The TPOS01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
4.6-38 shows the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO”; the user should map the input-point to the Object references having

- 357 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.6-38 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO2701
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”

- 358 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.6.8 Setting
TPOS01(FunctionID:513001)
Common TPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

TPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
TPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
TPOS01-EN Off / On - TPOS01 switch for Device01 Off
Dev01 TPOS01-DEVNAME [Preferred text] - item name of TPOS_Dev1 TPOS_Dev1 !
TPOS01-000NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,0,0)state Travelling0 !
TPOS01-001NAME [Preferred text] - state name of (0,0,1)state P1 !
TPOS01-UDFNAME [Preferred text] - state name of undefined Undefine !
TPOS01-FLTNAME [Preferred text] - state name of faulty Faulty !
TPOS01-DEVTYPE switch / EDS - Device Type switch
TPOS01-P1NOPSG [Preferred signal] - P1 Normally Open Signal of Dev1 Not assigned
TPOS01-P1NOPSGI Off / On - Signal inverse or not Off
TPOS01-SPPEN Off / On - Automatic event suppression function Off
Off / On /
TPOS01-UDFEN - undefined pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
TPOS01-UDFTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette undefined check timer 30.0
Off / On /
TPOS01-FLTEN - faulty pallet check function Off
CHKONLY
TPOS01-FLTTIM 0.1 - 100.0 s palette faulty check timer 30.0
TPOS01-CTREN Off / On - control mode (control enable) Off
TPOS01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
TPOS01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
TPOS01-NSLBORD1 [Preferred signal] - 5130018904011DC0
direction command
direction command
direction command
select binary output read data(DataID) for P1
TPOS01-P1SLBORD [Preferred signal] - 5130018A04011DC4
direction command
direction command
direction command
TPOS01-P1EXBORD [Preferred signal] - Not assigned
P1 direction command
FixedLogic /
TPOS01-LGCTRCON - Change logic about control condition FixedLogic
PLC

- 359 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
TPOS01(FunctionID:513001)
FixedLogic /
TPOS01-LGSLFFCT - Change logic about select fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
TPOS01-LGEXFFCT - FixedLogic
PLC factor
FixedLogic / Change logic about P1 direction execute
TPOS01-LGP1EXOT - FixedLogic
PLC output
PLC output
PLC output
FixedLogic /
TPOS01-LGCNFFCT - Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
PLC
TPOS01-PLSM Fix / Var - pulse mode Fix
TPOS01-CPW 0.1 - 50.0 s control pulse width 1.0
TPOS01-RST 1.0 - 100.0 s response check timer 30.0
TPOS01-CTRDIR P1 / P2 / P3 - Capable control direction P2
TPOS01-P1CNTS Off / On - P1 count status Off
TPOS01-OPETMEN Off / On - Operation Time Measurement enable Off
TPOS01-APBD Process / Bay - status change origin Process
Note: The TPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have
omitted the others because this will be the same as the 1st device with the
exception of the device number.

- 360 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.6.9 Signal
 Signal monitoring points in TPOS01
TPOS(FunctionID:513001)
8004001FA3 TPOS00_CH_EC_LCD TPOS00 count change execute command by LCD
8004001D5E TPOS00_CH_EC_OWS TPOS00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
8004001D5F TPOS00_CH_EC_RCC TPOS00 count change execute command by RCC
8004001D60 TPOS00_CH_EC_RMT TPOS00 count change execute command by Remote
8004001FA2 TPOS00_CH_SC_LCD TPOS00 count change select command by LCD
8004001D5B TPOS00_CH_SC_OWS TPOS00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
8004001D5C TPOS00_CH_SC_RCC TPOS00 count change select command by RCC
8004001D5D TPOS00_CH_SC_RMT TPOS00 count change select command by Remote
3204011D20 TPOS01_ALL_CNT_VAL TPOS01 all count value
0004011F7C TPOS01_AUTO_SIG TPOS01 Auto sequence signal
8304011E9C TPOS01_CCF_FCT_CS TEMP21
8704011E96 TPOS01_CC_FS TEMP19
8604011E95 TPOS01_CC_SS TEMP18
8804011E9B TPOS01_CC_ST_ERR TEMP39
0004011F7D TPOS01_CMNCTRL_SIG TPOS01 control receive signal
8604011F8D TPOS01_CNT_CS07 TPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal
0004011D91 TPOS01_CNT_SEL TPOS01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
0004011F7A TPOS01_CNT_SIG TPOS01 Count correction signal
8004011E9E TPOS01_CTR_SGC TPOS01 control logic stage(select command check)
8004011EA0 TPOS01_CTR_SGE TPOS01 control logic stage(execute command check)
8304011E9D TPOS01_CTR_SGN TPOS01 control logic stage(unselected)
8004011E9F TPOS01_CTR_SGS TPOS01 control logic stage(selected)
8B04011EA2 TPOS01_CTR_SGU TPOS01 control logic stage(under selection)
8904011FAB TPOS01_CTR_SGUCN TPOS01 count change selected signal
8904011FB1 TPOS01_CTR_SGURS TPOS01 reset time selected signal
8004011EA1 TPOS01_CTR_SGW TPOS01 control logic stage(wait for change)
8104011E9A TPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS TPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8004011D58 TPOS01_EC_LCD TPOS01 execute command by LCD
8004011D55 TPOS01_EC_OWS TPOS01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D59 TPOS01_EC_PLC TPOS01 execute command by PLC
8004011D56 TPOS01_EC_RCC TPOS01 execute command by RCC
8004011D57 TPOS01_EC_RMT TPOS01 execute command by Remote
8004011F55 TPOS01_EC_ST_ERR TPOS01 execute command mode err
0004011D97 TPOS01_EX_BO_OPOK TPOS01 execute binary output signal for SAS
8004011E93 TPOS01_EX_CMP TPOS01 execute complete signal
8F04011F58 TPOS01_EX_CMP_TMO TPOS01 timeout after execute completion
8904011FB0 TPOS01_EX_CMP_TMOCN TPOS01 count change timeout after execute completion
8904011FB6 TPOS01_EX_CMP_TMORS TPOS01 reset time timeout after execute completion
8904011F6F TPOS01_EX_CS01 TPOS01 response supervisory timer for P1
8A04011F70 TPOS01_EX_CS02 TPOS01 response supervisory timer for P2
8B04011F72 TPOS01_EX_CS03 TPOS01 P1 timer for under execution
8C04011F73 TPOS01_EX_CS04 TPOS01 P2 timer for under execution
8A04011F71 TPOS01_EX_CS05 TPOS01 response supervisory timer for P3
8C04011F74 TPOS01_EX_CS06 TPOS01 P3 timer for under execution
8604011E91 TPOS01_EX_FFL TPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8504011E8F TPOS01_EX_SFL TPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8404011F43 TPOS01_FLT_DET1 TPOS01 Faulty Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
8104011F42 TPOS01_FLT_STA TPOS01 Faulty Start
8204011E8B TPOS01_F_CS TPOS01 execute command fail condition signal
3104011D01 TPOS01_LCD_ST TPOS01 state for LCD
3104011D00 TPOS01_MMC_ST TPOS01 state for MIMIC

- 361 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

8904011DC0 TPOS01_NSL_BO_FLG TPOS01 no direction select binary output signal
8604011F80 TPOS01_NSL_CS07 TPOS01 select receive signal check answer
3104011F93 TPOS01_OT1_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time1 reset signal
3104011D30 TPOS01_OT1_VAL TPOS01 operation time1 value
3104011F9B TPOS01_OT5_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time5 reset signal
3104011D3C TPOS01_OT5_VAL TPOS01 operation time5 value
3104011F9D TPOS01_OT6_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time6 reset signal
3104011F9F TPOS01_OT7_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time7 reset signal
3104011FA1 TPOS01_OT8_SIGNAL TPOS01 operation time8 reset signal
8104011E85 TPOS01_P1EC_F_CSF TPOS01 P1 direction execute command fail condition signal
8004011E81 TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS TPOS01 P1 direction execute command OK condition signal
8004011E7E TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P1 direction execute command OK condition signal
8104011DD0 TPOS01_P1EX_BO TPOS01 P1 direction execute binary output signal
8A04011DC4 TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG TPOS01 P1 direction select binary output signal
8A04011F83 TPOS01_P1SL_CS19 TPOS01 select receive P1 signal check answer
0004011FCB TPOS01_P1_CNT_SEL TPOS01 P1 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3204011D24 TPOS01_P1_CNT_VAL TPOS01 P1phase count value
8004011E7F TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P2 direction execute command OK condition signal
0004011FCC TPOS01_P2_CNT_SEL TPOS01 P2 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3204011D28 TPOS01_P2_CNT_VAL TPOS01 P2phase count value
8004011E80 TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P3 direction execute command OK condition signal
0004011FCD TPOS01_P3_CNT_SEL TPOS01 P3 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3204011D2C TPOS01_P3_CNT_VAL TPOS01 P3phase count value
8004011DE0 TPOS01_PLC_CTRL_FAIL TPOS01 PLC control fail
8604011F5A TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR TEMP32
8204011F59 TPOS01_QLT_SPP TEMP31
8004011FA5 TPOS01_RE_EC_LCD TPOS01 reset time execute command by LCD
8004011D7B TPOS01_RE_EC_OWS TPOS01 reset time execute command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D7C TPOS01_RE_EC_RCC TPOS01 reset time execute command by RCC
8004011D7D TPOS01_RE_EC_RMT TPOS01 reset time execute command by Remote
8004011FA4 TPOS01_RE_SC_LCD TPOS01 reset time select command by LCD
8004011D78 TPOS01_RE_SC_OWS TPOS01 reset time select command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D79 TPOS01_RE_SC_RCC TPOS01 reset time select command by RCC
8004011D7A TPOS01_RE_SC_RMT TPOS01 reset time select command by Remote

- 362 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

8604011F91 TPOS01_RST_CS07 TPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal
0004011F7B TPOS01_RST_SIG TPOS01 Reset time signal
8004011D54 TPOS01_SC_LCD TPOS01 select command by LCD
8004011D51 TPOS01_SC_OWS TPOS01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8004011D52 TPOS01_SC_RCC TPOS01 select command by RCC
8004011D53 TPOS01_SC_RMT TPOS01 select command by Remote
8004011F54 TPOS01_SC_ST_ERR TPOS01 select command mode err
0004011F79 TPOS01_SEL_SIG TPOS01 Selected signal
8504011F8C TPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTCN TPOS01 count change selected fail condition signal check
8504011F90 TPOS01_SE_RCV_RMTRS TPOS01 reset time selected fail condition signal check
8004011E76 TPOS01_SLD_CS TPOS01 selected condition signal
8004011F66 TPOS01_SLD_CS04 TPOS01 selected condition signal 04
8A04011F8B TPOS01_SLD_CSCN TPOS01 count change selected condition signal
8A04011F8F TPOS01_SLD_CSRS TPOS01 reset time selected condition signal
0004011D90 TPOS01_SLD_RPT TPOS01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
8E04011F57 TPOS01_SLD_TMO TPOS01 time out after selected
8A04011FAF TPOS01_SLD_TMOCN TPOS01 count change time out after selected
8A04011FB5 TPOS01_SLD_TMORS TPOS01 reset time out after selected
8104011E7B TPOS01_SLF_CS TPOS01 select fail condition signal
8704011E98 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS TPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8804011FAD TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F03CN TPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8804011FB3 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F03RS TPOS01 reset time select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8704011FAE TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04CN TPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8704011FB4 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04RS TPOS01 reset time select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8304011FAC TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F07CN TPOS01 count change selected timer for a check
8304011FB2 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F07RS TPOS01 reset time selected timer for a check
8604011F62 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 TPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8704011F63 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG04 TPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04
8804011F6E TPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 TPOS01 selected timer for a check
8004011E7D TPOS01_SLR_CS TPOS01 select release condition signal
3104011001 TPOS01_STATE TPOS01 all_state
8304011D02 TPOS01_ST_P1 TEMP36
0004011D95 TPOS01_TMP_02 TPOS01 time reset selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
3104011D80 TPOS01_TMP_06 TPOS01 control event data (selected)
3104011D81 TPOS01_TMP_07 TPOS01 control event data (select fail)
3104011D82 TPOS01_TMP_08 TPOS01 control event data (select release)
3104011D83 TPOS01_TMP_09 TPOS01 control event data (execute output on)
3104011D84 TPOS01_TMP_10 TPOS01 control event data (execute command ng)
3104011D86 TPOS01_TMP_11 TPOS01 control event data (execute fail)
8204011F7E TPOS01_TMP_63 TPOS01 select bo signal check
8004011F7F TPOS01_TMP_64 TPOS01 select receive signal check
8104011F81 TPOS01_TMP_66 TPOS01 select bo P1 signal check
8504011F82 TPOS01_TMP_67 TPOS01 select receive P1 signal check
8004011F8A TPOS01_TMP_74 TPOS01 count change selected condition signal check

- 363 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

8004011F8E TPOS01_TMP_75 TPOS01 reset time selected condition signal check
0004011F77 TPOS01_TRA TPOS01 travelling info
0004011F78 TPOS01_TRA_CTR TPOS01 travelling info for control
3104011D49 TPOS01_TRST_S TPOS01 operation time reset signal
8204011F41 TPOS01_UDF_DET1 TPOS01 Undefined Detected (3 phase concentration data only)
8004011F40 TPOS01_UDF_STA TPOS01 Undefined Start

TPOS(Function ID: 513001)
800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND dev01 P1 command
800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK dev01 P1 command with interlock bypass
820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21 TPOS01IN_TMP_21
800401EE53 TPOS01IN_TMP_22 TPOS01IN_TMP_22
820401EE5A TPOS01IN_TMP_30 TPOS01IN_TMP_30
830401EE5B TPOS01IN_TMP_31 TPOS01IN_TMP_31
850401EE5C TPOS01IN_TMP_32 TPOS01IN_TMP_32
800401EDDA TPOS01IN_TMP_35 TPOS01IN_TMP_35
810401EDDB TPOS01IN_TMP_36 TPOS01IN_TMP_36
840401EDDC TPOS01IN_TMP_37 TPOS01IN_TMP_37
820401EE5E TPOS01IN_TMP_38 TPOS01IN_TMP_38
830401EE5F TPOS01IN_TMP_39 TPOS01IN_TMP_39
800401ED5A TPOS01IN_TMP_41 TPOS01IN_TMP_41
800401ED77 TPOS01IN_TMP_42 TPOS01IN_TMP_42
 Mapping points in TPOS01

7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ DPOS01 control command received. (Mapping Data)
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the TPOS function. We

- 364 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
example, when the user wishes to find the “TPOS01_SC_OWS” point for
the 2nd device, use the description of “TPOS01_SC_OWS” in place of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for TPOS01_SC_OWS (i.e.,
“8001011D51”)
Step 2 identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8001021D51” of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal

- 365 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ)

The function of the automatic sequence controller (ASEQ) is to control the PLC function that
is used within the automatic sequence control function, which can be coded by the user. This
control logic has software signals; the status of these software signals are changed by control
commands that are sent from upstream devices. One of the upstream devices is a SAS server.
Another is the front panel of the IED, which means that the user can operate the device locally
using the ASEQ function. The ASEQ function is divided into a couple parts, these are referred
to as “ASEQ01 etc.” functions (i.e., ASEQ01, ASEQ02 and others). Therefore, some PLC
functions are controlled by the ASEQ functions at the same time. For simplicity, only the
ASEQ01 function is discussed here, the features in the other ASEQ02 etc. functions are
identical to the ASEQ01 function.

- 366 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.7.1 Function setup

Figure 4.7-1 outlines the command reception in the ASEQ01 function. The ASEQ01 function
can generate a start command at the PLC monitoring point “ASEQ01_EXEC_START” (see
Table 4.7-4), when the start command is provided for the ‘ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ’. Similarly,
when a stop command is received in the ASEQ01 function, the stop command will be generated
at the PLC monitoring point “ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP” (see Table 4.7-5) †.
†Note: Create “IN1” and “IN2”points in the user programming logic; make the connection
between the ASEQ01 function and the user programing logic. Refer to chapter
PLC function. The user-programming logic is also required to have output points.
For example, if the user wishes to control a CB using the logic, the logic should
have two output points for two binary output circuits (BOs). Figure 4.7-1 shows
how two BOs are used for CB closing and CB opening.
‡Note: The ASEQ01 function does not have the responsibility to restart the programmed
logic after an emergency stop signal has been applied. Therefore, the user should
program the logic to generate an operation result signal in case of the emergency
stop signal being applied in the logic. See section 4.7.5 for the emergency
operation.
‡Note: PLC connection point “ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET” is provided for stopping the
ASEQ01 operation, as shown in Table 4.7-3.
IED
ASEQ01 User programming logic for

CB control
logic
In Out In Out
Binary Output Device
ASEQ01_ Circuit4
523001 700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ EXEC_START OUT1
Remote operation Xxxxxx 8xxxxxxxxx IN1 Driver Close

523001 820D10ED50 EMERSTOP_CONTROL_REQ
ASEQ01_
OUT2 Binary Output
EXEC_STOP circuit4
IED front panel
operation Xxxxxx 8xxxxxxxxx IN2
“Reply Signal” Driver
Open
EMERSTOP_
EXEC_STOP
“Emergency stop”
523001 800D01EDF2 ASEQ01-EXEC_RESET‡
Figure 4.7-1 ASEQ01 controls the user programing logic to operate a CB
Table 4.7-1 Mapping points for the r remote control commands

523001 700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ ASEQ01 control command received. (Mapping Data) M

… … …
523001 700D0F6D08 ASEQ15_CONTROL_REQ ASEQ15 control command received. (Mapping Data) M

- 367 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.7-2 Mapping points for Emergency command

523001 820D10ED50 EMERSTOP_CONTROL_REQ Emergency control for stopping the operation M
Table 4.7-3 PLC connection points (Inputs for stopping ASEQ operation)
523001 800D01EDF2 ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET Instruction to stop ASEQ01 operation O

… … …
523001 800D0FEDF2 ASEQ15_EXEC_RESET Instruction to stop ASEQ15 operation O
Table 4.7-4 PLC monitoring points (Outputs to start ASEQ operation)

523001 820D011F50 ASEQ01_EXEC_START Start instruction provided for ASEQ01 operation

… … …
523001 820D0F1F50 ASEQ15_EXEC_START Start instruction provided for ASEQ15 operation
Table 4.7-5 PLC monitoring points (Outputs to stop ASEQ operation)

523001 810D011F51 ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP Stop instruction provided for ASEQ01 operation

… … …
523001 810D0F1F51 ASEQ15_EXEC_STOP Stop instruction provided for ASEQ15 operation
Table 4.7-6 PLC monitoring points (Outputs of ASEQ operation status)

523001 000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC Status of ASEQ01 operation

… … …
523001 000D0F1001 ASEQ15_ACC_EXEC Status of ASEQ15 operation
4.7.2 Preparation of the operation

The ASEQ01 function has three scheme switches: [ASEQ01-EN], [ASEQ01-CTRMENU] and
[ASEQ01-CTRAHMI].
The scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRMENU] is used for a local operation (e.g., the front panel
operation on the IED). When On is set for the scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRMENU], the PLC
sequence #1 can be instructed locally. The scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRAHMI] is used to select
either a select-before-operation command (SBO) or a direct command (DIR) when the local

- 368 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
instruction is applied.
4.7.3 Example of automatic sequence operation

Figure 4.7-2 exemplifies some sequence logic programmed using the PLC function; the logic is
coded to operate two disconnector (DS1 and DS2) and a circuit breaker (CB). The logic can
provide an instruction to close DS1 (i.e., device #2), close DS2 (i.e., device #3), and then close
the CB (i.e., device #1) in a prescribed order.
Input signals Output signals

5Reset ASEQ01 execution
t 0 4ASEQ01 in execution
1Start command for ASEQ01 S Q
1s R 5s
S Q t 0 &
Closing Command for Device #2
End of execution of ASEQ01 1s R
≧1 2s 1
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_1
≥1
Temporary signal 001
5Reset of ASEQ01 execution
Temporary signal 002
Control failure In closing switch at device #1 &

UTOSEQ01）
Travelling detection ＆ In selecting device #1 1
4ASEQ01 in execution & t 0

S Q &
Termination of ASEQ01 at level #1 Closing Command for Device #3
1s R 2s 1
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 ≥1
In closing switch at device #2 ＆

In selecting device #2 1
＆ t 0
S Q ＆
Closing Command for Device #3
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 1s R 2s
1
Complete termination of ATSQ01 ≥1

Complete termination of ATSQ01
2Stop command for ASEQ01 S Q ＆ Temporary signal 001
1s R
In selecting device #1 ＆
In selecting device #3
3Emergency stop for ASEQ01 S Q ＆ Temporary signal 002

1s R
In selecting device #3
1DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL ≥1
6Control failure
1DEV2PLCCTRLFAIL
UTOSEQ01）
1DEV3PLCCTRLFAIL
Figure 4.7-2 Example of control logic programmed for device #1 to #3

1Note: If a start command is applied to the ASEQ01 function, the control logic

- 369 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
commences to operate the devices. Table 4.7-4 shows start commands.

2Note: If a stop command is applied to the ASEQ01 function, the operation of the control
logic will be canceled promptly provided that the control logic is not operating the
device. Alternatively, the control logic can wait for the operation being completed,
if the control logic is able to determine to continue the operation. Table 4.7-3
shows the stop commands.
3Note: See section 4.7.5. Table 4.7-8 and Table 4.7-9 show the emergency commands.
4Note: After the reception of the start command, the execution state can be monitored.
Table 4.7-6 shows the execution states.
5Note: The stop signal is provided for the logic. Table 4.7-5 shows the results of the stop
signals.
6Note: Following the generation of a control command by the control logic, if the control
command fails to initiate the operation of a device, the control logic determines
that the control command has failed. The control logic will generate signals in
order to express “Control failure”.
When a stop command is generated during the selection of Device #3, the control logic
will clear the operation if the control logic can determine that the operation of Device #3 is
complete. Figure 4.7-3 shows that Device #3 unable to operate following reception of the stop
command.
ON
Control logic in service.

Operating state OFF
*3The operating state turns to OFF, when the operation of Device#3 finishes
following the reception of a stop command from the ASEQ01 function.
Selection signal for Device #2

Start to close Completion of closing

Start to close Completion of closing

*4The operation of Device#3 failed.
*2The ASEQ01 function generates an operate signal for stopping the control logic.
*1The ASEQ01 function generates a select signal for stopping the control logic.
Figure 4.7-3 Timing chart for an automatic sequence when a stop command is injected during
the operation of Device#3
Figure 4.7-4 depicts the operating sequence when an emergency command is input; the
control logic will cancel the operation in accordance with the execution state given from a
device. If the operation signal is not controlling the device, the control logic will clear the
operation promptly. If the operation signal is controlling the device, the control logic will clear
the operation when the control logic function can determine that the operation of the device is
complete, in this case Device#1.

- 370 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
ON
OFF
Operating state
*4The operation state turns to OFF, when the control logic cancels the
selection of Device#1 following the reception of a stop command from
the ASEQ01 function.

*3The control logic turns the selection
signal to OFF when the control signal is
not sent for the device.
*2The ASEQ01 function generates an emergency

command for the control logic.
*1The ASEQ01 function generates a selection signal for

the emergency stop for the control logic.
Figure 4.7-4 Time chart of automatic sequence when emergency stop command is applied
during the operation of Device#1
4.7.4 Control hierarchy conditions

The user should program the “Control hierarchy” for the ASEQ01 function. The user should
connect the condition with the select condition logic using the connection point
“ASEQ01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see Chapter Control and monitoring application:
Control hierarchy. Table 4.7-7 shows the respective points in the ASEQ functions.
Table 4.7-7 Control hierarchy points on ASEQ functions
523001 820D01ED50 ASEQ01IN_TMP_28 ASEQ01 control hierarchy condition M

… … …
523001 820D0FED50 ASEQ15IN_TMP_28 ASEQ15 control hierarchy condition M
Table 4.7-8 Control hierarchy point for Emergency stop

523001 820D10ED50 EMERSTOPIN_TMP_28 Emergency control for stopping the operation M
4.7.5 Input for emergency stop

The ASEQ functions are able to receive an “EMERSTOP_EXEC_STOP” command (see Table
4.7-2); the user should program to acquire the sign so that the ASEQ logics can abandon for
controlling devices. The operation will stop instantly even if the control logic is waiting for
some condition (i.e., synchronization or others).
Table 4.7-9 PLC monitoring points (Outputs for ASEQ emergency status)
523001 000D0D1001 EMERSTOP_ACC_EXEC Reception of an emergency signal

523001 800D0D1D58 EMERSTOP_EC_LCD Emergency signal generated on the LCD scream
523001 800D0D1D55 EMERSTOP_EC_OWS Emergency signal generated from OWS(HMI)
523001 800D0D1D56 EMERSTOP_EC_RCC Emergency signal generated from RCC
523001 800D0D1D57 EMERSTOP_EC_RMT Emergency signal generated at Remote

- 371 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
523001 810D0D1F50 EMERSTOP_EXEC_STOP Command received for emergency stop

523001 310D0D1D01 EMERSTOP_LCD_ST State signal about LCD screen
523001 310D0D1D00 EMERSTOP_MMC_ST State signal about MIMIC screen
523001 800D0D1D54 EMERSTOP_SC_LCD Select command generated on the LCD
523001 800D0D1D51 EMERSTOP_SC_OWS Select command generated at OWS(HMI)
523001 800D0D1D52 EMERSTOP_SC_RCC Select command generated at RCC
523001 800D0D1D53 EMERSTOP_SC_RMT Select command generated at Remote

- 372 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user can operate the ASEQ function using IEC 61850 communications after first
completing the appropriate mapping using the GR-TIEMS software. Note that the ASEQ01
function is designed for the “Single Point Controller (SPC) class” described in the IEC 61850
communications standard. The user should follow steps:

The user should implement a logical node (LN) for the ASEQ01 function. Figure 4.7-5
exemplifies LN editing; the LN “(GAPC1)” is chosen for the ASEQ01 function. After the user
has defined an object “SPCSO1”, the ASEQ01 logical node is saved with the name “SPCSO1”
plus “LN Instance”. A definition for the object “SPCSO1” is made in the ASEQ01 logical node.
Choose either the SBO mode or the DIR mode when editing the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.7-5 Defining “SPCSO1” object in GAPC1 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.7-6 exemplifies the settings in LN “GAPC1” when the SBO mode is required for the
ASEQ01 function. In SBO control, the user should select the following items for the object
reference “GAPC1$SPCSO1” using the GR-TIEMS software;

- 373 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.7-7exemplifies the settings in LN “GAPC1” when the DIR mode is required for the
ASEQ01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using the GR-
TIEMS software:
 Oper
 Origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns”)

The user should group the ASEQ01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 4.7-10 shows the signals in the ASEQ01 function that require mapping to the IEC
61850 communications. Figure 4.7-8 shows how to map a signal.

- 374 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.7-10 Mapping signals for SPCSO1 object

Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$origin orCat orCategory ST 523001 300D011008 ASEQ01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 523001 6A0D011009 ASEQ01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 stVal BOOLEAN ST 523001 000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 q Quality ST 523001 310D011005 ASEQ01-QUALITY
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 t Timestamp ST 523001 900D011006 ASEQ01_TIME
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN ST 523001 000D011D90 ASEQ01_STSELD
Drag and drop
Figure 4.7-8 orCat attribute mapped into SPCSO1 object of GAPC1

The ASEQ1 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 4.7-11 shows the input-point
“ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1”; the user should
map the input-point to the Object references with attributes CO and CF under FC†. Figure 4.7-9

- 375 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 4.7-11 Mapping signals required for SPCSO1 object in ASEQ01 function
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
523001 700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 4.7-9 Input-point mapped for GAPC1

- 376 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.7.7 Setting
Auto Sequence(Function ID: 523001)
ASEQ01-EN Off / On - ASEQ01 switch Off

…. …. …. …..
EMERS EMERSTOP-EN Off / On - CTRL EMERSTOP Enable Off
EMERSTOP-DEVNAME [Preferred name] - item name of Auto Control EMERSTOP EMERSTOP !
EMERSTOP-OFFNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(off) Stop !
EMERSTOP-ONNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(on) Start !
EMERSTOP-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
EMERSTOP-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
ASEQ01 ASEQ01-DEVNAME [Preferred name] - item name of Auto Control Seqence01 ASC1 !
ASEQ01-OFFNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(off) Stop !
ASEQ01-ONNAME [Preferred name] - state name of state(on) Start !
ASEQ01-CTRMENU Off / On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ01-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
…. …. …. …..
! Note: The user can enter a preferred setting name using GR-TIEMS.

- 377 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.7.8 Signal
 Signal monitoring points in ASEQ01
ASEQ(Function ID: 523001)
000D001F40 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Status flag to not be selected for multiple operations
000D011001 ASEQ01_ACC_EXEC Reception state of the automatic sequence instruction command
000D011D90 ASEQ01_STSELD ASEQ01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
310D011D00 ASEQ01_MMC_ST ASEQ01 state for MIMIC
310D011D01 ASEQ01_LCD_ST ASEQ01 state for LCD
800D011D51 ASEQ01_SC_OWS ASEQ01 select command by OWS(HMI)
800D011D52 ASEQ01_SC_RCC ASEQ01 select command by RCC
800D011D53 ASEQ01_SC_RMT ASEQ01 select command by Remote
800D011D54 ASEQ01_SC_LCD ASEQ01 select command by LCD
800D011D55 ASEQ01_EC_OWS ASEQ01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
800D011D56 ASEQ01_EC_RCC ASEQ01 execute command by RCC
800D011D57 ASEQ01_EC_RMT ASEQ01 execute command by Remote
800D011D58 ASEQ01_EC_LCD ASEQ01 execute command by LCD
810D011F51 ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP Commencing command for automatic sequence
820D011F50 ASEQ01_EXEC_START Stop command for automatic sequence
000D0D1001 EMERSTOP_ACC_EXEC Reception state of an emergency signal to stop the operation
000D0D1D90 EMERSTOP_STSELD EMERSTOP selected signal (stSeld) for SAS
310D0D1D00 EMERSTOP_MMC_ST EMERSTOP state for MIMIC
310D0D1D01 EMERSTOP_LCD_ST EMERSTOP state for LCD
800D0D1D51 EMERSTOP_SC_OWS EMERSTOP select command from OWS(HMI)
800D0D1D52 EMERSTOP_SC_RCC EMERSTOP select command from RCC
800D0D1D53 EMERSTOP_SC_RMT EMERSTOP select command by Remote
800D0D1D54 EMERSTOP_SC_LCD EMERSTOP select command from LCD
800D0D1D55 EMERSTOP_EC_OWS EMERSTOP execute command from OWS(HMI)
800D0D1D56 EMERSTOP_EC_RCC EMERSTOP execute command from RCC
800D0D1D57 EMERSTOP_EC_RMT EMERSTOP execute command by Remote
800D0D1D58 EMERSTOP_EC_LCD EMERSTOP execute command from LCD
810D0D1F50 EMERSTOP_EXEC_STOP Commencing command for emergency stop
 Connection points in PLC logic in ASEQ01

820D01ED50 ASEQ01IN_TMP_28 Reception of control right for ASEQ01
800D01EDF2 ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET Reception of reset signal for ASEQ01 operation
820D10ED50 EMERSTOPIN_TMP_28 EMERSTOPIN_TMP_28
 Mapping point in ASEQ01

700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ ASEQ01 control command received. (Mapping Data)

- 378 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the ASEQ function. We
example, when the user wishes to find the “ASEQ01_EC_LCD” point for
the 2nd device, use the description of “ASEQ02_EC_LCD” in place of
“ASEQ01_EC_LCD”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“ASEQ02_EC_LCD” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for ASEQ01_EC_LCD (i.e.,
“800D011D58”)
the 2nd device)
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “800D021D58” of
“ASEQ02_EC_LCD”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal

- 379 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Operation time reset controller (OPTR)

As shown in Figure 4.8-1, all operation-times measured by the DPOS and TPOS functions†
can be cleared when the operation time reset controller (OPTR) function issues a reset
command “OPTR01_RST_CMD”. That is, within the respective functions the measured time
intervals (OT1 and the others‡) are entirely cleared upon occurrence of the reset command.
OPTR function
Sending reset command

“OPTR01_RST_CMD” DPOS01 function
Clearing measured time-intervals
“OT1”, “OT2”, “OT3” and “OT4”
Sending reset
command
“OPTR01_RST_CMD”
TPOS01 function
Clearing measured time-intervals
“OT1”, “OT2”, “OT3” and “OT4”
Figure 4.8-1 Reception of a reset command

†Note:For more information with regard to measurement, refer to the section
“Measurement of operation intervals” for the respective DPOS and TPOS
functions. The user should note that all interval OTs specific to a particular
function are cleared by the OPTR reset command.

- 380 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
‡Note:The measurements in DPOS function are grouped into four intervals in each
respective device. Measurement is possible by sensing the device events. The
measured intervals are accumulated; they are grouped into four intervals (OT1–
OT4), which the user can monitor from the IED screen. Figure 4.8-2 and Figure
4.8-3 exemplify the four intervals upon occurrence of On (Closing)-control event
and Off (Open)-control event, provided that the DPOS function operates.
Issuing Off control
Sensing
intermediate state On Intermediate Off
Device status for “Off”

OT1 OT2
Figure 4.8-2 Two intervals (OT1 and OT2) for Off-control event
Issuing On control
Sensing
intermediate state Off Intermediate On
Device status for “On”

OT3 OT4
Figure 4.8-3 Two intervals (OT3 and OT4) for On-control event
Tips: If the user wishes to implement the OPTR function quickly, go to section 4.8.4,
which discusses how to map signal-points for the IEC 61850 communication.

- 381 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user should set the scheme switch [OPTR01-EN] to On prior to the OPTIM operation.
Figure 4.8-4 shows select logic in the OPTIM function.
Wait for a command

Select logic
Cancel logic
Resetting OTs from the remote-end Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.8-4 Outline of select command for resetting
(i) Input point required mapping

Figure 4.8-5 shows the select logic when a “Select command (Reset)” signal enters the OPTIM
function. The logic has the input-point “OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception. That is,
the input-point should be mapped for the IEC61850 communication. The function encounters
an operation failure if mapping is not performed correctly. We discuss how to map the input-
points for the IEC61850 communication in section 4.8.4.
Input Select logic in OPTR Output
OPTIM function (Function ID: 529001)

OPTR01_FSE_RCV
Command “Reset”
For SBO operation (529001 800C011F42)
529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Select
command & 1≥
&
For DIR operation
Operate
command &
OPTR01_NSD_CSF
To “Wait for a next command”
(529001 830C011F41)
0 t
529001 000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD
0.2s
0 t
Failed
0.3s

In DIR operate
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function
(AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.8-5 Select logic for resetting intervals OT1 to OT4

the automatic control. The OPTIM operation is blocked for the ASEQ function
being in the operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter

- 382 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
*Note:The OPTIM function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a
signal “ctlmodel” when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
(ii) Output signal required to map

The OPTIM function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“OPTR01_NSD_CSF”, when the OPTIM function can decide that the input signal “Select
command (Reset)” is true. If the OPTIM function decides that the “Select command (Reset)” is
not true, the OPTIM function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.

Figure 4.8-6 shows the select condition logic in the OPTIM function.

Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE To selection logic
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL

529001 820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[OPTR1_EN]
On
Figure 4.8-6 Select condition logic in the OPTIM function*6

*1Note: The “command blocking” disables any operation except for itself: the
“command blocking” is stated with “CBK” in a software controller (SOFTSW). The
IEC61850 defines the “command blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more information on
CBK, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Software switch control
function. See the signal “CBK_STATE” of Table 4.8-1.
*2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is operation philosophy in the common
should program it using the GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted as
“DCB RCV_OR in Table 4.8-1. For more information, see Chapter Control and
*3Note: If events “device-travelling” are detected in the CMNCTRL function, we can
see that some statuses of the devices are being changed by other operators. Thus,
the IED should stop any operation while the events are being detected. The
detecting signal is denoted by “Traveling OR” in Table 4.8-1.

- 383 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
*4Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a

*5Note: The user should program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user should connect its condition with the select condition logic using the
connection point “OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT”. For more information, see chapter
Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy. “OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT”
is provided in Table 4.8-2.
*6Note: To know the input point of the OPTIM function, see Table 4.8-2.
Table 4.8-1 Input signal for condition logic


Table 4.8-2 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic)
529001 820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT OPTIM control hierarchy M
Table 4.8-3 Setting of the OPTIM function

OPTR01_EN Enabling the OPTIM function On Off / On

- 384 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.8.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode

In the SBO control mode the reception of the cancel command is possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the

Figure 4.8-7 outlines the reception of the cancel command from the remote end.
Wait for a command
Cancel by the remote-end

Success
Command Reset from the Signal reception in Cancel

remote-end IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.8-7 Outline of cancel command from the remote-end
(ii) Input point required mapping

Figure 4.8-8 shows the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal enters
the OPTIM function. The input-point “OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same point of the
510001 7001016D08
Figure 4.8-5.
Input Cancel logic in OPTR Output

Command “Cancel”
Cancel command
529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ
&
Unmatched condition To “Wait for a command”

detected† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 4.8-8 Cancel from the remote-end

†Note:The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when “Test-bit status” in a

- 385 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

After the completion of the operation of the select logic, the operate logic enters to clear all
interval OTs.
Wait for a command
Operate command from the remote-end

Command Reset from the Success
Operation
remote-end Signal reception in Operate logic Resetting OTs
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command from the local-end

Success
Operation
Selecting “Reset All” Operate logic Resetting OTs
decision
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 4.8-9 Outline of operate command for resetting intervals OT1 to OT4
(i) Input signal required mapping

Figure 4.8-10 shows the operate logic when an “Operation command (Reset)” signal enters the
OPTIM function. The input-point “OPTR_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the reception of the
“Operation command (Reset)” signal, which is the same point of the select logic.
Input Selection logic in OPTR Output
OPTR01_RST_CMD
Command “Operating reset”
529001 310C011EA1
529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Operate command
& Reset all OTs
≥
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§”
in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
From the operation on the front panel
Reset All
Figure 4.8-10 Operate logic for resetting intervals OT1 to OT4
(ii) Output signal required to map

The operate logic issues a “OPRT_RST_CMD” signal to clear all intervals OT1 to OT4. The
signal “OTS_RST_CMD” can be transferred to the remote-end, when mapping the signal is
carried out in the IEC61850 communication. (See section 4.8.4)

- 386 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Operate condition

Figure 4.8-11 shows the operate condition logic, which is used to examine a reset-condition in
the OPTIM function.
Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE To operate logic
DCB RCV OR


ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
529001 820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
SERI_ERR
[OPTR1_EN]
On
Figure 4.8-11 Operate condition logic in OPTIM

*1to5Note: The signals and settings of the Figure 4.8-11 are same as the ones of the
Figure 4.8-6.

- 387 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user can operate the OPTIM function over the IEC61850 communication after the
mapping using the GR-TIEMS. Note that the OPTIM function is designed for “Single Point
Controller (SPC) class” in the IEC61850 communication. The user should follow steps:

The user should make a logical node (LN) for the OPTIM function. Figure 4.8-12 exemplifies
LN editing; the LN “General Input / Output (GGIO)” is chosen for the OPTIM function. After
the user defining an object “SPCSO”, the OPTIM logical node can be saved with the name
“GIGO” plus “LN Instance”. Make a definition of the object “SPCSO” in the OPTIM logical node.
“Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.8-12 Defining “SPCSO” object in GIGO3302 logic node

- 388 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.8-13 exemplifies the OPTIM logic node saved as “GGIO3302”. In the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GGIO3302$SCPSO” using the GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
Figure 4.8-13 LN editing for SBO (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.8-14 exemplifies the OPTIM logic node saved as GGIO3302. In the DIR mode, the
following three items should be selected using the GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
Figure 4.8-14 LN editing for DIR mode (for example)

- 389 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

The user should group the OPTIM signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for the IEC61850 communication using the GR-TIEMS. Figure 4.8-15 shows
how to map a signal; it shows that the signals of the OPTIM function are required to map for
the IEC61850 communication.
Table 4.8-4 Mapping signals for SPC object
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$origin orCat orCategory ST 529001 200C011008 OPTR01_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 529001 310C01170A OPTR01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 stVal BOOLEAN ST 529001 310C011EA1 OPT_RST_CMD
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 Q Quality ST 301001 3110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 T Timestamp ST 200301 9010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN ST 529001 000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD
Figure 4.8-15 orCat attribute mapped into SPCSO object of GGIO3302

The OPTIM function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 4.8-5 shows the input-point
“OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GGIO3302$SCPSO”; the user should

- 390 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
map the input-point to the Object references having attributes CO and CF†. Figure 4.8-16 shows
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Table 4.8-5 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object of GGIO3302

Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper Check Check CO 529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$SPCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
Check “Input”

- 391 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.8.5 Setting
OPTIMRSTCTRL (Function ID: 529001)
OPTR01-EN Off / On - Reset Control Enable in OPTR Off

- 392 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.8.6 Signal
8B0C011F44 OPTR01_CTR_SGU OPTR01 signal before KC_OPTR_SC001
800C011D57 OPTR01_EC OPTR01 execute command
800C011D55 OPTR01_EC_OWS OPTR01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
800C011D56 OPTR01_EC_RCC OPTR01 execute command by RCC
8F0C011F49 OPTR01_EX_CMP_TM0 OPTR01 signal after MCTOPTR_SC002
800C011F42 OPTR01_FSE_RCV OPTR01 signal before LC_OPTR_SA002
830C011F41 OPTR01_NSD_CSF OPTR01 signal after KC_OPTR_SA001
310C011EA1 OPTR01_RST_CMD OPTR01 select command output
800C011D53 OPTR01_SC OPTR01 select command
800C011D51 OPTR01_SC_OWS OPTR01 select command by OWS(HMI)
800C011D52 OPTR01_SC_RCC OPTR01 select command by RCC
8E0C011F47 OPTR01_SLD_TM0 OPTR01 signal after MCTOPTR_SC001
860C011F46 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 OPTR01 signal before MCTOPTR_SC001
870C011F48 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 OPTR01 signal before MCTOPTR_SC002
000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD OPTR01 the controllable data is in the status selected (StSeld)
820C011F40 OPTR01_TMP1 OPTR01 signal before KC_OPTR_SA001
860C011F43 OPTR01_TMP2 OPTR01 signal after KC_OPTR_SA002
860C011F45 OPTR01_TMP3 OPTR01 signal after KC_OPTR_SC001

820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT OPTR01 control right from PLC
 Mapping point
700C016D08 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT Control command

- 393 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Event detection function for general BIs (GENBI)

The general BI event detection (GENBI) function finds the signals generated on the binary
input circuits (BIs); the GENBI function verifies the generating signals in terms of time, state,
and quality. Accordingly, the GENBI function can evaluate the value of the BI signals. Figure
4.9-1 shows the block diagram of the GENBI function; it shows signals from external devices
received at the BI circuits. The GENBI function operates for all BI circuits. For simplicity,
hereafter, the setting and operation of the GENBI function is discussed for binary input circuit
#1 (BI1) at IO#1 slot (i.e., GBI01 and SLOT1).
IED
Output Output from BI1
signal of BI1 Acquisition
Time at state State data
Binary Output changed (current value)
input signal of BI2 Direction information Time data
circuit#1 at state changed. (time stamp)
Quality information
Suppression when (accumulated)
Binary input
appearance of
circuit#2
States on external devices
repetitive signals Output from BI2

Output
signal of BIn Process #1
Binary input Process #2
circuit #n† Output from BIn†
BIO module Process #n†

(at IO#1) GENBI for slot #1
Respective
output signals
BIO module Output from BI1 to BIn†
(at IO#2) GENBI for slot #2
Respective
BIO module output signals
Output from BI1 to BIn†
(at IO#n‡) GENBI for slot #n‡
Figure 4.9-1 Block diagram of GENBI function

394
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.9.1 Operation features

The operation process of the GENBI function is divided into an acquisition part and a
suppression part.
(i) Signal acquisition process

The acquisition process checks for the occurrence of state changes in each BI circuit. If a
state change is detected, the acquisition process determines the direction of the state change
and observes the time that the state change occurred. Figure 4.9-1 outlines the signal issuing
on the BI circuit (BI1) at the IO#1 slot of the IED; the BI1-CPL signal is transferred for the
GBI01 scheme in the GENBI SLOT1 function; the function generates “SLOT1 GBI01_STATE
(580001 0010001001)” signal in Boolean form; it consists of “time stamp information” and
“quality information”.
External Device Binary input circuits (BIs) Operation logic in GENBI function
SLOT1 GBI01_STATE
Device #1 BI1-NC BI1 BI1-CPL GBI01 Status detection about the BI1 at IO#1 slot
Pulse train1 Photo-
Filter
coupler
BI module at IO#1 slot SLOT1 logic
Figure 4.9-2 Signal flowing at BI1 at IO#1 slot

†Note:The BI1-CPL signal is connected with the GBI01 function. For more information,
see chapter Technical description: Binary IO module.
(ii) Event suppression process

When the signal switches between the “On” and “Off” state frequently over a short period of
time, the GENBI function will receive these repetitive signals. When these repetitive signals
are converted into event information, repetitive events are issued on occurrence of the
repetitive signals. The event suppression function is provided to suppress event appearance
when the GENBI function determines that the signal is being generated repetitively.
Signal
from
On On On On On On On On
device
Event No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
[GBI-TELD] [GBI-TELR]
Event suppression
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 4.9-3 Example of signals and events suppressed by setting
Figure 4.9-3 illustrates the case where a device produces repetitive signals. From this
figure, it can be seen that the start of event suppression occurs at the tenth state-change (point
B) because the GENBI function counts the number of state-changes. The GENBI function
detects the commencement of the signal repeated from the signal initiation point ‘A’. Scheme

- 395 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
switch [GBI-NELD] is provided to set the number of state-changes so that this function will
start to suppress the signal from this point. The user can set [GBI-TELD] pertaining to the
detection period of the repetitive signals (point A to point C). For example, the user can set the
value “10” for the scheme switch [GBI-NELD]; period A–C is set for the setting [GBI-TELD].
The GENBI function should remove event suppressed operation when the repetitive
signals disappear, (that is, the operation of the device is steady); event suppression operation
is cleared when no repetitive signal is found for a set period. The user can set the period using
scheme switch [GBI-TELR]; this reset operation clears the event suppression function at point
E when the last state change is confirmed at point D. Here, the period D–E is set for the Scheme
switch [GBI-TELR].
The event suppression function is provided for every device; the user should set On for
the scheme switch [SLOT1 GBI01-SPPEN], for example.
Table 4.9-1 Example of event list screened

Event Event contents screened
Off No.1 event
On No.2 event
Off No.3 event
On No.4 event
Off No.5 event
On No.6 event
Off No.7 event
On No.8 event
Off No.9 event
On No.10 event suppression SET
On Event suppression RESET
Table 4.9-1 shows the event list screen. This event list is in response to the signals shown
in Figure 4.9-3. Table 4.9-2 lists the common settings for event suppression. Table 4.9-3 shows
the settings for a particular slot.
Table 4.9-2 Common settings for event suppression

GBI-NELD 0 – 99 sec Number of Event lock detect time
GBI-TELD 1 – 99 sec Timer of detect event lock
GBI-TELR 1 – 99 sec Timer of recovery from event lock
Table 4.9-3 Sets for event suppression in each slot

SLOT1 GBI01-SPPEN Off / On SLOT#1 BI-1 Automatic event suppression function
. . .

- 396 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
SLOTnGBI01-SPPEN Off / On SLOT#n BI-1 Automatic event suppression function‡
. . .
. . .
. . .
†Note:The specification and the number of binary input circuits depend upon the model
of BIO module. One of the BIO modules can provide 32 input circuits; thus, the
total number (n) for the process and the circuit is represented up to 32.
‡Note:The number of slots and the structure of the binary input circuits is influenced by
the IED model and the size of the case. For example, when a 1/1 case size is
available, eight slots are furnished within the IED. When the 1/3 case size is used,
two slots are provided in the IED. Hence, the user should distinguish these
configurations in accordance with the number of slots and the type of BIO
modules. (For further information, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module)

- 397 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Sending a report to the client is possible after the mapping is performed for IEC 61850
communication using GR-TIEMS. The user should proceed as follows,


The user must make a logical node (LN) for the GENBI function. Figure 4.9-4 exemplifies LN
making; LN “GGIO101” is selected for the GENBI function. After editing, the GENBI logical
node can be saved with the name “GGIO101”. Object “Ind1” is defined in the GENBI function.
Figure 4.9-4 Defining “Ind1” object in GGIO101 logic node

With the IEC 61850 communications standard a GOOSE message can be used to send a signal
to a client. The user will need to collect the signals corresponding to the GENBI function and
then map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 4.9-4 shows the mapping signals that are required within the GENBI function for
IEC 61850 communications. Figure 4.9-5 shows how to map a signal.
Table 4.9-4 Mapping signals for Ind1 object in GENBI function

Ctrl/GGIO101$Ind1 stVal BOOLEAN ST 580001 0010001001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE
Ctrl/GGIO101$Ind1 q Quality ST 580001 3110001005 SLOT1 GBI01_QUALITY
Ctrl/GGIO101$Ind1 t Timestamp ST 580001 9010001006 SLOT1 GBI01_TIMESTAM

- 398 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Drag and drop
Figure 4.9-5 Quality signal being mapped into Ind1 object of GGIO101

- 399 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.9.3 Setting
General BI (Function ID: 580001)
GBI-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10

GBI-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer of detect event lock 10
GBI-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer of recovery from event lock 10
IO#1 BI#1 SLOT1 GBI01-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit01 at Slot1 Off
SLOT1 GBI01-SPPEN Off / On - Switch to suppress events by itself at BI circuit On
BI#2 SLOT1 GBI02-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit02 at Slot1 Off
…. …. …. ….
IO#2 BI#1 SLOT2 GBI01-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit01 at SLOT2 Off
BI#2 SLOT2 GBI02-BIEVT Off / On - Switch to detect an event on BI circuit02 at SLOT2 Off
…. …. …. ….
…. …. …. ….
…. …. …. ….
…. …. …. ….

- 400 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
4.9.4 Signal
 Signal monitoring points in BI module at IO#1 slot
GENBI (Function ID: 580001)
0010001001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE Status of binary input circuit BI1 at IO#1 slot
…. …. ….
00101F1001 SLOT1 GBI32_STATE Status of binary input circuit BI32 at IO#1 slot
 Mapping points in BI module at IO#1 slot

GENBI (Function ID: 580001)
3110001005 SLOT1 GBI01_QUALITY SLOT1 GBI01 quality
… … …
31101F1005 SLOT1 GBI32_QUALITY SLOT1 GBI32 quality
0010001001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE SLOT1 GBI01 state
… … ….
00101F1001 SLOT1 GBI32_STATE SLOT1 GBI32 state
9010001006 SLOT1 GBI01_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI01 timestamp
…. …. ….
90101F1006 SLOT1 GBI32_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI32 timestamp
slot, but a 2nd and other slots are also provided in the GENBI function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every circuit;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other circuits. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “SLOT2 GBI02_STATE” point
for the 2nd circuit, use the description of SLOT1 GBI01_STATE in place of
“SLOT2 GBI02_STATE”. The user can obtain the ID value of “SLOT2
GBI02_STATE” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for SLOT1 GBI01_STATE (i.e.,
“0010001001”)
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth and sixth digits from the

- 401 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
ID. (i.e., “0”)

Step 3 Choose a new circuit number. (i.e., pick the number “1” for
the 2nd circuit)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth and sixth
digits with the new device number. (i.e., get new ID
“0010111001” of “SLOT2 GBI02_STATE”) The ID is
expressed in hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must
change the device number from decimal notation to
hexadecimal notation.

- 402 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5 Technical Description
Case structure and slot layout 406 CPU 414
Type using compression terminals 407
-1/2 size case 407
Type using ring terminals 409 Date and time 475
-1/2 size case 409 -Time synchronization 476
-DST(Summer time) 481
Binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) 421 -Time zone 480
-Input circuits 423
-Input features 422 Function keys with LEDs 467
-Output circuits 436
-Output features 434 Group setting for relays 484
-BIO3A module 441
LED indicators 462
Communication modules 415
-100Base-TX/1000Base-T 415 Monitoring jacks 472
-100Base-FX 415
-1000Base-LX 415 Operation keys 474
-RS485 415
-Fiber optic 415 Power supply module (PWS) 456
-IRIG-B000 415 -FAIL contacts 457
-Alarm threshold 459
Transformer modules for AC (VCT) 411

-VCT39B module 412

- 403 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
The IED hardware consists of a case, modules, and a human machine interface (HMI). For
instance, Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the GR-series IED which is mounted in 1/2×19”
rack. The user can find that the IED consists of a transformer module (VCT), a signal
processing and communication module (CPU), binary input and output modules (BI, BI, and
BIO, and a power supply module (PWS), which can be mounted in an order from left to right.
The IED case, which is designed for rack mount as shown in Figure 5-1, has two flanges
attached on the IED sides. Figure 5-2 shows hardware block diagram. The module structure
depends on the GR-series models, IED cases, and the customer specification. Therefore, the
user should check and confirm the actual modules with the ordering number in advance.
(The description of IED case helps to understand the IED structure and its functions.
Based on slot reference, terminal block, slot reference, GR-Series selects different cases. VCT,
CPU, BI, BO and BIO, PWS modules and HMI are described sequentially in this chapter. The
user is required to understand information provided in this chapter when wiring between the
IED and external devices and setting of the IED are performed. Hence, the user is required to
read this chapter thoroughly.)
VCT CPU BIO PWS
Figure 5-1 Modules in 1/2 19” rack’s chassis (Front view, removed the front panel)

- 404 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
CPU
VCT
CP1M LAN I/F
I Filter Tele-
A/D
CT×n communication
AC analogue input
LAN I/F system
V Local PC for
LAN I/F Maintenance
VT×m
HMI
LCD/MIMIC
BIO
LEDs
Binary output
circuits ×8 Binary output
Operation keys
Binary input
Monitoring jacks circuits ×6 Binary input
Function Key
USB
Maintenance I/F
PC
Power supply
PWS
Figure 5-2 Hardware Block Diagram (for example)

- 405 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
IED case and module slot

The IED case structure falls into two types: ‘Type using compression terminals’ and ‘Type using
ring terminals’. The former is designed with ‘Compression plug type terminal block’ used at
BIO and PWS modules. The latter is designed with ‘Ring type terminal block’. Figure 5.1-1
illustrates the difference of them.
PWS BIOs PWS BIOs

VCT VCT
Type using compression terminals Type using ring terminals
Compression plug type terminal Ring type terminal
Figure 5.1-1 Terminal type and case structure (1/2 size case, back view)

- 406 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.1.1 Type using compression terminals

(i) 1/2 size case
Figure 5.1-2 shows diagrams of the 1/2 size case constructed with type using compression
terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen
from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
Viewing from the front side (Figure 5.1-2.a)

Slots are provided for mounting modules. A transformer module (VCT), a signal processing and
communication module (CPU), and a power supply module (PWS) are mounted at predefined
locations in the case. Binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are placed in slots (IO#1–#3), these
slot locations are determined before factory shipment. For detailed information on slot
locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs, see external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical external connection).
Viewing from the rear side (Figure 5.1-2.b)

The group of terminal blocks viewed from the rear is shown. With respect to BIs, BOs, and
BIOs, their terminal blocks are designed with upper terminal and lower one and they are
labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T1” or “T2”. The upper and lower terminals are provided
in the form of one terminal block for respective BIs, BOs, or BIOs. Terminal screw numbers for
each terminal block relate to individual binary circuits. The user should check respective
configuration circuit (see section 5.4 or later). Each slot for the BIOs is identified with its alpha-
numeric reference (or slot reference) on an IED case. For example, the user can identify that
slot “IO#1” is linked with alpha-numeric reference “T1”.
PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side; hence, the user finds it with alpha-
numeric reference “T4”, and that is discussed later (see section 5.5).
Communication modules, which are placed between VCT and BIOs, are labeled with “C11”
to “C15”. Those are provided for LAN, IEC61850 communication, etc.
Schematic figure (Figure 5.1-2.c)

A schematic figure illustrates the location of slots and terminals: VCT, BIOs, and PWS. It is
useful when the user need to set BIO modules using their setting tables (see section 5.4).

- 407 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
a. View from front side

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 C11
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 C12
12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18
C13
19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24
C14
25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33
FG1
C15
34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35
E
36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 5.1-2 Type using compression terminals (1/2 size case)

- 408 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.1.2 Type using ring terminals

(i) 1/2 size case
Figure 5.1-3 shows diagrams of the 1/2 size case constructed with type using compression
terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen
from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
Viewing from the front side (Figure 5.1-3.a)

Slots are provided: the transformer module (VCT), the signal processing and communication
module (CPU), and the power supply module (PWS) and binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO)
are placed into slots. The binary IO module is located at slot “IO#1” or “IO#2”.
Viewing from the rear side (Figure 5.1-3.b)

With respect to the binary IO modules, the terminal block is designed with both upper and
lower terminals; they are labeled with the alpha-numeric reference “T1” or “T2”. Terminal
screw numbers relate to circuits individually, and the user has to check their circuits (see
section 5.4 or later). A BIO module is identified by its alpha-numeric reference (or slot
reference) on the IED case. For example, the user can identify that slot “IO#1” is linked with
alpha-numeric reference “T1”.
PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side; hence, the user finds it with alpha-
numeric reference “T3”. That circuit is discussed later (see section 5.5)
Communication modules, which are between VCT and BIOs, are labeled with “C11” to
“C15”. Those are used for LAN, IEC61850 communication, etc.
Schematic figure (Figure 5.1-3.c)

A schematic figure illustrates the location of slots and terminals: VCT, BIOs, and PWS. The
figure is useful when the user need to set BIO modules using their setting tables (see section
5.4).

- 409 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
a. View from front side
T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1 2 1 2
1
2
3 4 3 4
3
4
5 6 5 6
C12
5
6
7 8 7 8
7
8
9 10 9 10
9
10
11 12 11 12
11
12
13 14 13 14
13
14
15 16 15 16 C13
15
16
17 18 17 18
17
18
21 22 21 22
21
22
23 24 23 24
23
24
25 26 25 26
25
26 C14
27 28 27 28
27
28
29 30 29 30
29
30
31 32 31 32
31
32
33 34 33 34
33
34 FG1
C15
35 36 35 36
35
36
37 38 37 38
E
38
FG
FG FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 5.1-3 Type using ring terminals (1/2 size case)

- 410 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)

The IED has a transformer module (VCT) to be used to acquire the power system quantities.
A safety feature is available such that all of the VCT current inputs are shorted when a VCT
module is removed from the IED case. Note also that all of the voltage inputs are disconnected.
However, the user should make short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC
voltage inputs.
Note: We represent respective input signals at the “AC analog input (VCT)” as “Channel
numbers (Ch*)”

- 411 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.2.1 VCT39B
Transformer module (VCT39B) has four CTs. The first three CTs are provided for the three
phases high-impedance differential protection (DIF). The last one is provided for the single
phase restricted earth fault protection (REF).
VCT39B
Termina Input Type of AC analog

l Screw Full scale input
Number signal input channel(1)
1 2 – – – –
Ida
Ida
3 4 – – – –
5 6 – – – –
Idb 7 8 – – – –
Idb 9 10 Current 4.096A Ch5
Ida
Idc
11 12 Idb Current 4.096A Ch6
Idb
13 14 Idc Current 4.096A Ch7
15 16 Ide Current 4.096A Ch8
17 18 – – – –
19 20 – – – –
21 22 – – – –
Ide
Ide 23 24 – – – –
25 26 – – – –
27 28 – – – –
Figure 5.2-1 Transformer module (VCT39B)

(1)Note: Channel numbers are used to show terminal locations.
By the way, it is rare to use all 4 CTs, and the actual wiring style differs for each protection
using a varistor unit as shown in Figure 5.2-2.
VCT39B VCT39B
Varistor Unit
Resistor Ida
Varistor
Ida Ida
Idb
Idb Idb
Idc
Idb Idb
Varistor unit
Resistor Ide
Ide Varistor
Ide
(a)Three phases high-impedance (b)Single phase restricted

differential protection earth fault protection
Figure 5.2-2 Actual wiring style for each protection

- 412 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.2.2 Constitution of VCT

Figure 5.2-3 shows VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram (termed ‘VC1’);
the same terminal screw numbers are shown on both the left and the right figures. The user
should note that the last screw No. 30 and FG terminal are connected with a short-bar by
default.
VC1
VC1
VCT Alpha-
numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
Short-bar 21
22
23
FG1
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
1
Short-bar
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 5.2-3 VC1 terminals (Rear view)

1Note: Short-bar between the screw No. 30 and FG is connected by the manufacturer.
2Note: The figure is just drawn for general instruction about VCT structure. The number
of VTs and CTs on VCT is dependent on the VCT type that the user has ordered.

- 413 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signal processing and communication module (CPU)

A signal-processing and communication module (CPU) are made up of a main circuit board for
processing (CP1M) and ‘piggyback’ circuit boards for communication modules (COM#1 to
COM#5). These circuit boards are designed for LAN, time synchronization and others. They
are mounted on the CPU main board by their connectors. Figure 5.3-1 shows a board
implementation example.
CPU
CP1M
COM#1
CPU COM#2
COM#3
COM#4
COM#5
Figure 5.3-1 CUP and their communication modules (COM#1 to COM#5)

Note: The implementation of COM#1 to #5 may vary according to circumstances.
5.3.1 Signal processing

The operation of relay and control applications are achieved with the CPU on the CP1M board.
The CPU board has SDRAM, MRAM, and NOR-Flash; the NOR-Flash is used to store setting
data and recording data; the MRAM is used to store several counter values, etc. Both are of
non-volatile memory so that the stored data will be not be erased if the power is cut off.
IED
CPU COM#1
LAN network
BIO#1
CP1M
COM#2
VCT#1 VCT#2
BIO#2 COM#3
BIO#3
BIO#4
BIO#5
BIO#6 COM#4
BIO#7
BIO#8
COM#5 IRIG-B
Figure 5.3-2 Diagram of processing

414
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.3.2 Communication modules

The tables below show piggyback-circuit-modules provided for the communication. They are
mounted on CPU module directly. The actual mountings depend on the user ordering; thus,
the user should locate the actual implementations by the ordering using Appendixes: Ordering
and Typical external connection.
Table 5.3-1 Communication modules for Network

Module 100Base-TX/1000Base-T 100Base-FX 1000Base-LX
Connector RJ45 type SC type (Duplex) LC type (Duplex)
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic Fiber optic
Substation automation Substation automation Substation automation
Usage
system and others system and others system and others
100/1000 100BASE-ＦX 1000
BASE-T BASE-LX
Symbol
TX
RX
Table 5.3-2 Communication modules for Miscellaneous

Module RS485 Fiber optic interface IRIG-B
Connector PCB connector ST type PCB connector
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic(GI) Shielded twist pair
Data transfer in Data transfer in Time

Usage
IEC103 IEC103 (2km class) synchronization
RS485 Remote IRIG-B000
A1 Comm. A1
B1 B1 SIG
COM-A
A2 A2(Disuse)
Symbol
RX
B2 B2(Disuse)
COM-B
A3 A3
B3 B3
COMM TX GND
1. 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module (RJ-45 plug)

A twisted-pair cable is required for the LAN connection. The module is used for the GR-TIEMS
operation or the LAN communication. Use a shielded twisted pair cable so that electric
magnetic compatibility is satisfied.
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-3 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module

- 415 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2. 100Base-FX module (SC plug)

A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100Base-FX module is used for the LAN
communication. Dual slots space (i.e., labeled with “C11” and “C12”) is occupied when a single
(Port A) module is mounted (see Figure 5.3-4; i.e., space “C12” is not blank). Therefore, the
total number for communication ports needs to be cared.
C11 C11
C12 C12
Figure 5.3-4 100Base-FX module (left for single port; right for dual ports)
3. 1000Base-LX module (LC plug)

A pair of optic fiber cables is required. The 1000Base-LX module can be used for the GR-TIEMS
operation or the LAN communication. Use SM mode fiber when long distance is required.
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-5 1000Base-LX module
4. RS485 module
RS485 module has a PCB connector. The module should be connected with a shielded-twisted-
pair cable; it is used for the communication of the IEC60870-5-103. The terminal arrangement
and references are shown below. The cable sheath should be connected with the frame ground
(FG) in the IED case. For the use of the a shielded-twisted-pair cable, the user should note that
the total length should be less than 1200 meter (0.75 miles); the terminal resistor (150 ohms)
should be connected when any connector is not connected. For setting the parameters, see
Chapter Communication protocol: RS485 communication.

- 416 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Sheath
Top
PCB connector A1 A cable for
A1 B1 B1 an IED
COM-A(+)
A2
A2 B2 Sheath
COM-B(−) B2
A cable for
A3 B3 A3
another
Bottom
COMM(GND) B3
IED
0V
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit Frame ground (FG)
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-6 RS485 connection and module
5. Fiber optic module

Fiber optic module is used for the serial communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Figure 5.3-7 Fiber optic module
6. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used to receive the digital signal generated with an external clock; the
signal is in conformity to serial IRIG-B000 format. Note that the IRIG-B000 module is able to
receive digital signal (TTL) only (i.e., the reception of AM signal is not applicable). This module
is isolated using a photo coupler; the user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not used. The
peak value of IRIG-B000 signal should be greater than 3.5 volts; the IRIG-B000 module has
the input resistor (about 3k ohm). Thus, the terminal resistor can be required when the IRIG-
B000 signal is delivered for several devices; the value of the terminal resistor depends on the

- 417 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
number of deliveries and the performance of the external clocks. For setting of time
synchronization, see Chapter Technical Description: Clock function.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-8 IRIG-B000 module

- 418 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.3.3 Location of communication modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the
reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external
connection)
Figure 5.3-9 exemplifies IED has a LAN module (1000BASE-FX) at C11. RS485 and IRIG-B
modules are located at C13 and C15.
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT

100BASE-FX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE
C11 Blank -FX
C12
RS485
C12 Blank
Blank C13
C13 •A1
485
•A2•
B1 COM-A
•B2
•A3• COM-B
•B3
• • COMM
C14
C14 Blank
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 5.3-9 Modules structure (’6C code’ at E&F pos.)

†Note:The modules and their locations are dependent on actual ordering codes. In the
above example, an IRIG-B is placed at C15, but the user can see differences if
another ordering code is given. To find actual locations, read a practical ordering
code in Appendix: Ordering (see page 839).

419
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Figure 5.3-10 illustrates a structure, which has 100BASE-FX, RS385, and IRIG-B000 modules.
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT

100BASE-FX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE
C11 -FX
100BASE-FX
C12
RS485
C12 100BASE
-FX
Blank C13
C13 •A1
485
•A2•
B1 COM-A
•B2
•A3• COM-B
•B3
• • COMM
C14
C14 Blank
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 5.3-10 Modules structure (’9D code’ at E&F pos.)

420
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)

Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary
IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to
external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED. There are
standard type and variable type in Binary IO modules as shown in Table 5.4-1.
Table 5.4-1 Number of input and output circuits1

Number of Number of output circuits2
Module Module
# input Fast Semi-fast Auxiliary
name3 Type4 Hybrid Form C
circuits operating operating (Normal)
1 BI1A Standard 18 0 0 0 0 0
2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0
3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0
4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0
5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0
6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1
1Note: PWS module supplies a DC voltage for binary IO modules: 48Vdc or 220Vdc.
Hence, the BIOs output circuits operate with the supplied DC voltage. Dual
voltages output (i.e., 48Vdc and 220Vdc) is not possible in the binary IO
modules.
2Note: For the structure and the number of binary IO modules, see section 5.4.5.
3Note: For details of the output circuits, see Table 5.4-8.
4Note: For the binary input circuits in the standard type, the user can choice either
a high voltage or a low voltage with regard to the input threshold. For the
ones of the variable type, the user itself can set a threshold value with regard
to input voltage using settings.

- 421 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.1 Binary input feature

Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent,
but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 5.4-2.
Table 5.4-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module
Module Input features Example Symbols
type sign
1 BI1A - Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw number
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
BI1 BI1
-Sharing common
Circuit number
connections (+)
2
BI2
Circuit
number
Terminal screw
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 5.4.5.

- 422 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.2 Binary input circuit

The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the
threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a
function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable logic
for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with
settings. Table 5.4-3 shows the respective settings and ranges in the standard type. Table 5.4-4
shows the ones in the variable types.
Table 5.4-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
THRES_Lvl Low/High – Threshold level for input voltage Low

Common
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI1 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the off-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BIn Off

BIn2 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
1Note: Setting items are provided in each slot; see Figure 5.4-4.
2Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For
example, the user can configure 18 CPLs in the BI1A module.
3Note: Each setting item above is required to set at every IO_slots.

- 423 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.4-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A module)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
BI1-3_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI1, BI2, and BI3 77

BI4-6_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI4, BI5, and BI6 77
Common BI7-9_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI7 to BI9 77
BI10-12_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI10 to BI12 77
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI2_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 2 Off
BI3_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 3 Off
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI n Off

BIn4 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
4Note: BI1_CPL~BI12_CPL settings are provided for the BI2A module.
As an example, Figure 5.4-1 shows the binary input circuit of the BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. The BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has
three settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.

- 424 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
From 8001001111 8001001110

External devices For Relay & and
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions
BI1-NC Filter BI1
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI1 BI1-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
BI2-NC BI2
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
[THRES_Lvl]
High
R1
R1
Figure 5.4-1 Common programmable logic for the BI1A module
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that the BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes
to see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
element ID (8001001172) and the function ID of IO#1 slot‡.

- 425 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on the BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the
function ID “200B001” and Element ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when
the signal “BI2-CPL” on the BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should
designate that signal using the function ID “200B002” and Element ID
“8001001172”. For more information with regard to the function ID and the Data
ID at IO#1, see sections 5.4.6(i), 5.4.7(i), and others.

- 426 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Setting threshold level

For Standard type (the BI1A module and others)
The voltage level "High or Low", which tells a threshold of pick up / drop off, is selectable using
the selection switch [THRES_Lvl].
Table 5.4-5 shows the threshold voltage of picking-up/dropping-off for binary inputs at the high
and low level. This also shows how to set them with the selection switch.
Table 5.4-5 Threshold voltage of picking-up / dropping-off for binary inputs

(a) In the case of DC rated voltage “110-250 Vdc”
Threshold voltage of picking-up / dropping-off for binary inputs
Voltage level
How to set Note
Selection switch
High Typical 136V —
[THRES_Lvl] = High
Selection switch
Low Typical 71V This is default.
[THRES_Lvl] = Low
(b) In the case of DC rated voltage “24-60 Vdc”

Threshold voltage of picking-up / dropping-off for binary inputs
Voltage level
How to set Note
Selection switch
High Typical 30V —
[THRES_Lvl] = High
Selection switch
Low Typical 15V This is default.
[THRES_Lvl] = Low

- 427 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
As the threshold voltage is expressed with Table 5.4-5, the user should set High or Low to
match to the voltage value to input to binary inputs. Table 5.4-6 shows the recommended
settings.
This matter means that the user should also set a threshold voltage at the power supply unit
to determine the degree of the power failure (see Chapter: Technical description: Power supply
module).
Table 5.4-6 Recommended setting for the voltage level

Voltage value
Recommended setting for the voltage level
to input to binary inputs
250V
High
220V
125V
Low
110V

Voltage value
to input to binary inputs
60V
High
48V
30V
Low
24V

- 428 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
For Variable type (exclusive for the BI2A)

The BI2A module has a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user
can determine the guaranteed-minimum-pick-up voltages (thresholds) as required. This
unique feature is performed with settings [BI1-3_PICKUP], [BI4-6_PICKUP], [BI7-9_PICKUP],
and [BI10-12_PICKUP]; every setting is applied to a group of three binary input circuits.
Binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting [BI1-3_PICKUP] and the user should set
the value between 18 to 222V DC2 for this setting. For the setting [BI4-6_PICKUP], the above
mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary input circuits; similarly the setting [BI7-
9_PICKUP] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits; and finally the setting [BI10-12_PICKUP]
is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
1Note: The threshold value is fixed for all types of BIO modules except the BI2A. The
user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type” influences these values
(see the 1st note in Table 5.4-1). These particular values are found when 220V dc
type is used.
2Note: In the variable type, the user can set the threshold arbitrarily between 18 to 222V
in DC, and can regulate its threshold voltage in a voltage step. Table 5.4-7 shows
the corresponding values with regard to guaranteed and typical thresholds in
response to the setting values. Note that the operation in the variable type is
segmented into ‘Operate’, ‘Intermediate’, ‘and ‘Non-operate’ areas, which are
decided by the guaranteed-pick-up, typical-pick-up, and guaranteed-drop-off
levels, as illustrated in Figure 5.4-2.

- 429 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.4-7 Guaranteed and typical thresholds in the variable type

Guaranteed levels Typical levels
Setting values [V]
Pick-up voltage [V] Drop-off voltage [V] Pick-up voltage [V]
18 17.9 10.5 14.2
19 18.5 11.1 14.8
20 19.9 12.3 16.1
21 20.5 12.9 16.7
22 to 29 21.8 14.0 17.9
30 29.3 20.8 25.0
31 to 32 30.8 22.2 26.5
33 32.5 23.7 28.1
34 to 35 34.0 25.0 29.5
36 to 37 36.0 26.8 31.4
38 to 39 37.5 28.3 32.9
40 39.2 29.8 34.5
41 to 49 40.8 31.2 36.0
50 to 52 49.8 39.4 44.6
53 to 56 53.0 42.2 47.6
57 to 59 56.3 45.3 50.8
60 to 61 59.5 48.1 53.8
62 to 63 61.8 50.2 56.0
64 to 65 63.6 51.8 57.7
66 65.9 53.9 59.9
67 to 70 66.7 54.7 60.7
71 70.1 57.7 63.9
71 to 73 70.3 57.9 64.1
74 73.2 60.6 66.9
75 to 79 74.4 61.6 68.0
80 to 83 79.7 66.4 73.0
84 to 88 83.7 70.1 76.9
89 to 92 88.2 74.0 81.1
93 to 99 92.3 77.8 85.0
100 to 106 99.4 84.2 91.8
107 to 111 106.4 90.6 98.5
112 to 113 111.4 95.0 103.2
114 to 119 114.0 97.4 105.7
120 119.3 102.3 110.8
121 to 127 121.0 103.8 112.4
128 to 130 128.0 110.1 119.0
131 130.1 112.0 121.0
132 to 135 131.9 113.7 122.8
136 to 137 135.9 117.3 126.6
138 to 141 137.1 118.3 127.7
142 to 143 141.5 122.3 131.9
144 143.9 124.5 134.2
145 to 146 144.6 125.2 134.9
147 to 151 146.1 126.5 136.3
152 to 154 151.8 131.6 141.7
155 to 161 154.4 134.0 144.2
162 161.3 140.3 150.8
163 to 165 162.6 141.4 152.0
166 to 170 165.8 144.3 155.0
171 to 173 170.6 148.6 159.6
174 to 176 173.6 151.4 162.5
177 to 183 176.3 153.8 165.0
184 to 189 183.3 160.1 171.7
190 to 193 189.7 165.9 177.8
194 to 200 193.6 169.4 181.5
201 to 203 200.3 175.5 187.9
204 to 211 203.1 178.1 190.6
212 to 221 211.5 185.7 198.6
222 222.0 195.2 208.6

- 430 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Input voltage
Operating area
Guaranteed pick up level

Intermediate area
Typical pick up level
Guaranteed drop off level
Non-operating area
Figure 5.4-2 Operating area in the variable type

Note: In practice, the pick-up voltages depend on respective binary circuits physically
This means the characteristics are not affected by the ambient conditions and the
applied voltages.
(ii) Comparison feature for contact chatter

The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and
this feature is configured using the setting [CMP_NUM]. Figure 5.4-3 illustrates this feature;
the comparison feature removes contact chatter. The period ‘t’ applied for the removal of contact
chatter can be configured by setting a value for [CMP_NUM]. The formula for the calculation
of ‘t’ is,
1
[CPM_NUM]×
System Frequency×12
The setting [CMP_NUM] is provided for all binary input circuits.
Actual input signal
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
Figure 5.4-3 Chattering countermeasure (e.g. [CMP_NUM] = 4)

- 431 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) CPL switch

If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for
scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if
CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On
or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit. The number of CPL is equal to number
of binary input circuits: that is, if BI1A is selected, the number of CPLs is 18.
(iv) Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal

Both an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for input signals, the user should set their respective time values for settings [On Delay
Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input
circuit; the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch [INVERSE-
SW]. A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required.
(vi) How to set the settings for binary input circuits

Figure 5.4-4 illustrates an example of the binary IO module arrangement for the binary input
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs); it illustrates the setting targets are on a BI1A at IO#1
and a BIO1A at IO#3. The user should key the settings with regard to the BI1A and BIO1A
using the setting tables for IO_SLOT1 and IO_SLOT3. As the setting points are for the BI1A
and BIO1A at the IO#1 and IO#3, the user should take the setting table of the standard type
(in sec. 5.4.6).

- 432 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
IO#n
IO#4
IO#2
IO#3
IO#1
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BI1–BI18

and Common. Setting targets: BI1–BI7
and Common.
a. Setting targets for BI1A (IO#1) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 5.4-4 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3
The setting table of section 5.4.6 is available for all binary IO modules except for the BI2A
module; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are relevant to the
BI1A module. That is, for the BI1A, the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e.,
binary input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. On the other hand, for the BIO1A
module, the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to
#7) from IO_SLOT3 setting table. The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are
shown in sec. 5.4.6. The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later. (See chapter
User interface: I/O setting sub-menu)

- 433 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.3 Binary output feature

A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types
of BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and
capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below:
(1) Fast operating
(2) Semi-fast operating
(3) Hybrid
(4) Auxiliary
(5) BO with Form-C
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 5.4-1 and Table 5.4-8. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 5.4.5.

- 434 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.4-8 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A at 290Vdc
-OP Time: 3ms (typical) N/O contact
2 Semi-fast -Normally open (N/O) BO1A

-Dry contact BO1(SF)
operating BIO1A
-Closure is faster than
(SF) normal. BIO2A
Type
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 6ms (typical)
3 Hybrid -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO2A
-Polarity dependent BO1(H) number
(H) (+)
-Interruption capability for 1
(−)
high-current (up to 10A) 2
Type
-Consisting of an IGBT BO number
device and a contact
-Make and carry: 8A cont. N/O
-Break: 10A at 220/110Vdc
-OP Time: 1ms
4 Auxiliary -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO1A
-Dry contact BO1 number
BIO1A
-Normal speed closure 1
-Make and carry: 8A cont. 2 BIO2A

-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc BO number BIO3A
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/O contact
5 Form-C -Uses a N/C and a N/O Terminal screw number BIO2A

contact BO1
BIO3A
-Shares a common 35
connections 37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc N/O
0.2A at 125Vdc 38
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/C
Contact

- 435 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.4 Binary output circuit

Either a CPL logic or a PLC signal can drive a binary output circuit. Table 5.4-9 shows the
settings summary of CPL function.
Table 5.4-9 Setting items for binary output circuits
Setting-range or
Unit
Setting items Contents Default
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
…..
BOn_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off

BOn Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BOn Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs
are listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are
summarized in each slot. (See sections 5.4.8(i) and 5.4.8(ii))

- 436 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Figure 5.4-5 shows the binary output circuits on the BO1A module in order to help
understand the settings. The BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has
timers and switches. The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed
below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
[LOGIC-SW] & ≥1
t 0 0 t BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On &
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BO2
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO2
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
810201113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO2 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
820202112 Contact
& ≥1 BO3
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO3
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8202021113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO3 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
8********* Contact
& ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BOn
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BOn RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
Figure 5.4-5 Binary Output Circuit for the BO1A (#1 to #n=18)
In Figure 5.4-5 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective

- 437 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that a
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, with regard to the function
ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see section 5.4.9(i). On the other hand, for IO#2
slot see section 5.4.9(ii).
(i) CPL switch

When the user needs to operate the CPL for binary output circuit #1, the user should set On
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since all binary output circuits have CPLs setting between
On and Off is required for every binary output circuit. The number of CPL is equal to the
number of binary output circuits: that is, if the BO1A module is selected, the number of CPLs
is 18. Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the
scheme switch.
(ii) Selection of input signals

Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions, eight
ports for input signals are provided, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user
must ensure that input-signal1 to input-signal8 are configured with eight DataIDs. That is,
the user can select input-signals that are available from other functions, these input-signals
are designated using DataIDs. The user can key the DataIDs into settings [Input signal1] to
[Input signal8]. The DataIDs are selected from the Signal monitoring point list, which is
provided for every function.
(iii) Logic gate switch

A binary input circuit has a logic scheme for the eight input signals, and can combine the eight
input signals as required using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the user should set either
AND, OR or XOR.
(iv) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

An on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in the CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for binary output circuits, the user should set their respective time values for settings
[On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].

- 438 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Logic level inversion

The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
(vi) Logic timer switch

In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a scheme
switch and a setting are provided. The programmable reset characteristic consists of four types
and the user can select the type required using a scheme switch: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type,
(3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type:
Instant type
When the user uses a binary output signal without the following characteristics, the user
should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting [Reset
signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should determine
the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal monitoring point for
each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
Note: When Latch is set, the state of BO circuit will be sustained during power turn-
on/off.

- 439 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vii) How to set the settings for binary output circuits
IO#n
IO#2
IO#4
IO#3
IO#1
BO1A BIO1A
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BO1–BO18 Setting targets: BO1–BO10

b. Setting targets for BO1A (IO#2) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 5.4-6 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3
Figure 5.4-6 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary
output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output circuits,
the setting targets are on BO1A and BIO1A at locations IO#2 and IO#3. The user should key
the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT.
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should understand
and select setting points that are relevant to the BO1A and BIO1A. That is, for the BO1A the
user should choose the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #18) from

- 440 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for the BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output
circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section 5.4.8(ii).
(viii) PLC and the binary output circuits

The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output
circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly. In the
case that the binary output circuit is controlled by the PLC, the user is required to connect the
PLC to the binary output circuit. In Figure 5.4-5, the PLC logic connection points are
designated with BO1-SOURCE, BO2-SOURCE, and others. (The PLC is discussed separately.
Note that Connection points on the PLC are shown with the DataIDs of BIO_SLOT. See section
5.4.9(i)-3 and 5.4.9(ii)-3. (For more information of PLC function, see Chapter PLC function)
5.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module

Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types, and their arrangements of respective
input-and-output circuits are particular to respective binary IO module types, as shown in
Figure 5.4-7–Figure 5.4-9.
Figure 5.4-10 shows a diagram of how an actual terminal block connects with circuits of the
module. The use can identify the correspondence using the left side block figure and the right
side schematic figure. If the user takes account of wiring works on the BI1A, their targets are
designated with terminal screw numbers (1 to 40) that are shown next to the terminal block.
Slot number labeled by alpha-numeric reference “T*” is used to identify the location of the slot,
and the asterisk(*) is substituted for any one of the slot numbers. For the actual
implementation of a binary IO module, the user should examine the arrangement of binary IO
modules from External connection figures, which are shown separately. (See Appendix: Typical
external connection)
Polarity is shown on some input-and-output circuits, hence, the user should check the polarity
sign (+) or (−), respectively.

- 441 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
BI1A BI2A BI3A

(+) 1 (+) 1 (+) 1
2 BI1 2 BI1 2 BI1
(−) (−) (+) BI2
(+) 3 (+) 3
4 BI2 4 BI3
(−) (+) BI4
(+) 5 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI2 6 BI5
(−) (−) (+) BI6
(+) 7 (+) 7 (+) 7
8 BI4 8 BI3 8 BI7
(−) (−) (+)
9 9 BI8
(+) (+)
10 BI5 10 BI9
(−) (+)
11 11 11 BI10
(+) (+) (+)
12 BI6 12 BI4 12 BI11
(−) (−) (+)
13 13 13 BI12
(+) (+) (+)
14 BI7 14 BI5 14 BI13
(−) (−) (+)
15 15 BI14
(+) (+)
16 BI8 16 BI15
(−) (+)
17 17 17 BI16
(+) (+) (+)
18 BI9 18 BI6 18 BI17
(−) (−) (+) BI18
(+) 21 (+) 21 (+) 21

22 BI10 BI7 BI19
(−) (−) 22 (+) 22
BI20
(+) 23 (+) 23
24 BI11 24 BI21
(−) (+) BI22
(+) 25 (+) 25 (+) 25
26 BI12 26 BI8 26 BI23
(−) (−) (+) BI24
(+) 27 (+) 27 (+) 27
28 BI13 28 BI9 28 BI25
(−) (−) (+) BI26
(+) 29 (+) 29
30 BI14 30 BI27
(−) (+) BI28
(+) 31 (+) 31 (+) 31
32 BI15 32 BI10 32 BI29
(−) (−) (+) BI30
(+) 33 (+) 33 (+) 33
34 BI16 34 BI11 34 BI31
(−) (−) (+) BI32
(+) 35 (−) 35
(−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
(+) 37 (+) 37 (−) 37
38 BI18 BI12
(−) (−) 38 (−) 38
FG
Figure 5.4-7 Input arrangements for BI1A, BI2A and BI3A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 5.4-2 or Table 5.4-8. The BI2A
should be earthed to the FG of the case. See Figure 5.4-11.

- 442 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
BO1A BO2A
1 1
(+)
BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
(−)
3 3
(+)
BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
(−)
5 5
(+)
BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
(−)
7 7
(+)
BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
(−)
9 9
(+)
BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11
(+)
BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13
(+)
BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15
(+)
BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17
(+)
BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
21 21 (+)
BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 (+)
BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 (+)
BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 (+)
BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 (+)
BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 (+)
BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 (+)
BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35
BO17 36
37
BO18 38
Schematic figures
Figure 5.4-8 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 5.4-2 or Table 5.4-8.

- 443 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
BIO1A BIO2A BIO3A
(+) 1 1 (+) 1
BI1 (+) BI1 BI1
(−) 2 2 (−) 2
(−)
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
BI2 (+) BI2 BI2
(−) 4 4 (−) 4
(−)
(+) 5 5 (+) 5
BI3 (+) BI3 BI3
(−) 6 6 (−) 6
(−)
(+) 7 7 (+) 7
BI4 (+) BI4 BI4
(−) 8 8 (−) 8
(−)
(+) 9 9 (+) 9
BI5 (+) BI5 BI5
(−) 10 10 (−) 10
(−)
(+) 11 11 (+) 11
BI6 (+) BI6 BI6
(−) 12 12 (−) 12
(−)
(+) 13 13 (+) 13
BI7 (+) BI7 BI7
(−) 14 14 (−) 14
(−)
15 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) (+)
16 16 BI8 16 BI8
(−) (−)
17 17
BO2(SF) (+) BI9
18 18
(−)
21 21 21
BO3(SF) 22 (+) 22 BI10 BO1(F) 22
23 (−) 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11 BO2(F) 24
25 (−) 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12 BO3(F) 26
27 (−) 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28 BO4(F) 28
29 29 29
BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30 BO5(F) 30
31 31 31
BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
BO9 34 BO4 34 BO7 34
35 35 35
37 37 37
BO10 36 BO5 36 BO8 36
38 38 38
Schematic figures
Figure 5.4-9 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A, BIO2A and BIO3A
Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 5.4-2 or Table 5.4-8.

- 444 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “*”

is substituted T*
for the actual slot location number.
BIO3A
T* T*
(+) 1
1 2 BI1
2 (−)
(+) 3
3 1 2 BI2
(−) 4
4
3 4 (+) 5
5 BI3
(−) 6
6
5 6 (+) 7
7 BI4
(−) 8
8 7 8
(+) 9
9 BI5
(−) 10
10 9 10
(+) 11
11 BI6
12 11 12 (−) 12
13 (+) 13
13 14 14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
15 16 16 BI8
16 (−)
17 17 18
18
19 21 22
20
23 24
25 26
21 21
27 28 BO1(F)
22 22
23 29 30 23
BO2(F) 24
24
25 31 32 25
BO3(F) 26
26 33 34
27 27
BO4(F) 28
28 35 36
29 29
30 37 38 BO5(F) 30
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 Ring type terminal 33
34 BO7 34
35
36 35
37 Terminal screw numbers 37
38 are denoted with the BO8 36
39 same one.
40 38
Compression plug type

terminal
Terminal blocks Schematic figure
Figure 5.4-10 IO module corresponded with ring or compression terminal
Note: Terminal block–for Type using compression terminals– is manufactured by

PHOENIX CONTACT®; its model is described in “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF
5.08”. The user can fit a cable in the compression terminal without a cable ferrule,
when a cable thickness is AWG14 and its stripping length is 10mm. When the
cable requires a ferrule, use a ferrule made by PHOENIX CONTACT ®.

- 445 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Compression plug type terminal Ring type terminal
BI2A BI2A BI2A

T* (+) 1 (+) 1
1 2 BI1 2 BI1
(−) (−)
2
3
4 (+) 5 (+) 5
5 (−) 6 BI2 BI2A (−) 6 BI2
6 (+) 7 T* (+) 7
7 8 BI3 8 BI3
(−) (−)
8
9
10 (+) 11 1 2
(+) 11
11 12 BI4 12 BI4
(−) 3 4 (−)
12 (+) 13 (+) 13
13 14 BI5 5 6 14 BI5
(−) (−)
14
15 7 8
16 (+) 17 (+) 17
17 18 BI6 9 10 18 BI6
(−) (−)
18
11 12
19
20 13 14
15 16
(+) 21
(+) 21 BI7 17 18 (−) 22
BI7
(−) 22
21
22
21 22
23
(+) 25
24
(+) 25 23 24 26 BI8
25 26 BI8 (−)
26 (−) 25 26 (+) 27
(+) 27 28 BI9
27 28 BI9 (−)
28 (−) 27 28
Short wire 30
29
29 30 FG
30 31
31 (+)
32 BI10 31 32 (+) 31 BI10
32 (−)
33 (−) 32
33 (+)
34 BI11 33 34 (+) 33
BI11
34 (−) (−) 34
35 35 36
36
(+) 37 37 38
(+) 37
37 BI12
38 (−) 38 (−) 38
BI12
39 40
40 FG Ring type terminal
Short wire
FG FG
Figure 5.4-11 The BI2A module and its frame ground screw
Note: The BI2A is earthed to the frame’s ground screw (FG) using a short wire.

- 446 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
For the standard type being furnished
Unit Default setting
Setting item Range Contents Notes
s value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
BI1 BI1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary input enable Off
On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s On delay timer value 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Binary signal inversion Normal
…… …… …… …… ……

For the variable type being furnished

s value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

Threshold through BI1 to BI3
THRES_Grp1 10 - 220 V Applicable only in BI-2 module and 75
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
…… …… …… …… ……


- 447 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID:

200B02 to 200B0n)
For the standard type being furnished
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1)
For the variable type being furnished

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2)

- 448 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI5 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI7 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI9 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI11 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI13 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI15 signal without filter
8A011A1111 BI27-NC BI27 signal without filter
8B011B1111 BI28-NC BI28 signal without filter
8C011C1111 BI29-NC BI29 signal without filter
8D011D1111 BI30-NC BI30 signal without filter
8F011F1111 BI32-NC BI31 signal without filter
8E011E1111 BI31-NC BI32 signal without filter
After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8001001110 BI1 BI1 signal with filter

- 449 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)

8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter
8A011A1110 BI27 BI27 signal with filter
8B011B1110 BI28 BI28 signal with filter
8C011C1110 BI29 BI29 signal with filter
8D011D1110 BI30 BI30 signal with filter
8E011E1110 BI31 BI31 signal with filter
8F011F1110 BI32 BI32 signal with filter
The ends of binary input circuits

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8001001172 BI1-CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic

- 450 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)

8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic
8201121172 BI19-CPL BI19signal with filter and programmable logic
8301131172 BI20-CPL BI20ignal with filter and programmable logic
8A011A1172 BI27-CPL BI27 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B011B1172 BI28-CPL BI28 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C011C1172 BI29-CPL BI29 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D011D1172 BI30-CPL BI30 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E011E1172 BI31-CPL BI31 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F011F1172 BI32-CPL BI32 signal with filter and programmable logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n

(Function ID: 200B02 to 200B0n)
Before the filter
Table is the same as the table in previous section (i)-1.
After the filter

The ends of binary input circuits


- 451 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID 200B01)
Default setting
Units
value
BO1 BO1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary output enable Off

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Operation selection in Logic gate AND
TIMER-SW Off / Delay / Dwell / Latch - Selection of Logic circuit Off
Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell"
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
Reset signal (Data-ID from other FBs) - Reset signal selection for "Latch" circuit Not assigned
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Keying Data ID#2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
……. ……. ……. …….
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit

- 452 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID

200B02 to 200B0n)
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i))

- 453 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.4.9 Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the contact-driver
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8002001112 BO1 BO1 signal
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal
After the contact-driver

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal

- 454 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Connection points for the PLC

310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic
31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
Before the contact-driver
After the contact-driver

Connection points for the PLC


- 455 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Power supply module (PWS)

5.5.1 PWS structure
The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters.
There are two types for the PWS module about the DC rated voltage. The first type is for “110-
250 Vdc” rated, and the second is for “24-60Vdc” rated. One of DC rated voltage types is chosen
with the ordering table, and then the type is applicable in the PWS.
Table 5.5-1 PWS specifications

DC rated Voltage fluctuation
Description
voltage5 permissible
Input voltage (110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc) is
110-250 Vdc 88-300 Vdc available where the voltage varies in ±20% of the
rated voltage (110V× 80% to 250V×120%).
Input voltage (24/48/60Vdc) is available where the
24-60 Vdc 19.2-72 Vdc voltage varies in ±20% of the rated voltage (24V×
80% to 60V×120%).
Note: The IED composed of a PWS module whose DC rated voltage is “110-250 Vdc”, can
run on AC power supply (100–220Vac).
However, it is recommended to input AC power only for temporary operations such
as tests where DC power cannot be inputted. In addition, if the supervision function
is enabled, the IED detects the Power failure (error) when AC power is inputted.
Figure 5.5-1 shows the difference between ‘Compression plug type terminal’ and ‘Ring type
terminal’. Alpha-numeric reference “T*” identifies slot locations, and an asterisk “*” shows its
slot number. An external connection figure illustrates the PSW location (see Appendix: Typical
External connection).

- 456 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
substituted for actual slot location number.2(A) substituted for actual slot location number. 2(B)
T
T
* *
PWS PWS
*
T
1
Ring plug type
2
3 terminal block
4
5 T*
6 2
2
7
8 4
4 1 2
9
10 FAIL1 3 4
FAIL1
3 3
11
12 5 6 1
1
13
14 7 8
15
9 10
16
17 8 11 12 8
18
10 13 14 10
19
20
FAIL2 9 15 16 FAIL2 9
17 18
7 7
21 21 22
22 23 24
23
24 25 26
25 29 29
26 Positive(+) DC 27 28 Positive(+) DC
30 30
27 / 29 30 /
28
29 31 DC 31 DC
Negative(−) 31 32 Negative(−)
30 32 32
31 33 34 Short-wire
35 35
32
33 35 36
Short-wire 36 36
34 37 38
35 37 37
36 FG
Short-bar
37 38 38
38 Short-wire
39
40
E E
FG FG
FG
1 1
E E
Frame earth Screw Frame earth Screw

Schematic diagram Schematic diagram

Figure 5.5-1 Schematic diagram and relationship of PWS terminal block
CAUTION
1Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its cross-
section is AWG9 or larger.
2ANote: The user–for Type using compression terminals–can connect a cable to this
terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the recommended cables are
AWG14 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI 2.5 -10 BU” ferrule for
AWG14 when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by PHOENIX
CONTACT®.

- 457 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.5.2 Input and output items of PWS

Table 5.5-2—Table 5.5-4 show the input and output items of PWS.
< Input items>

Table 5.5-2 Input items of PWS
Terminal
Items screw No.
Remarks
Positive (+) 29 or 30
DC voltage Used to operate the IED
Negative (-) 31 or 32
< Output items>

Table 5.5-3 Output items of PWS
Terminal
Items screw No.
Remarks
N/C contact is used for output.
1 Note)
This contact will close when relay is
Used to output
in fail status or DC voltage is off.
FAIL1 2 or 4 that relay is in
N/O contact is used for output.
fail status.
3 Note)
This contact will open when relay is
in fail status or DC voltage is off.
7 Same as N/C contact of FAIL1
FAIL2 8 or 10 Same as FAIL1
9 Same as N/O contact of FAIL1
< Other items>

As shown in Table 5.5-4, there are differences between the IED case structures “Type using
compression terminals” and “Type using ring terminals”.
Table 5.5-4 Other items of PWS
Terminal
Items screw No.
Remarks
Type using compression terminals

Shot-wire 35 37 The connection has been installed by the manufacturer.
Read Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test carefully
Shot-wire 38 FG and follow the instructions during testing.
ditto
Short-wire 36 FG
This wire exists only in the type DC rated voltage: 24—60 Vdc.
Type using ring terminals
Shot-wire 35 36 The connection has been installed by the manufacturer.
Read Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test carefully
Short-bar 37 FG
and follow the instructions during testing.
ditto
Short-wire 38 FG
This wire exists only in the type DC rated voltage; 24-60 Vdc.

- 458 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.5.3 DC voltage monitoring

(i) Threshold voltage for detection/non-detection of power error
DC voltage is monitored, and a power supply failure can be outputted from the PWS for the
Automatic supervision function. The user should set its failure level for the PWS. See Chapter
Automatic supervision function for more information.
Table 5.5-5 shows the threshold voltages for detection/non-detection of the power error at the
level high and low. This also shows how to set them with a shunt connector.
Table 5.5-5 Threshold voltage for detection/non-detection of the power error

Threshold voltage for detection/non-detection of the power error
Voltage level
How to set Note
3
Insert a shunt connector
High Typical 170V 2 —
1
to position”1-2” at JP4
This is
3
Low Typical 85V 2
1
to position”2-3” at JP4 default.

Threshold voltage for detection/non-detection of the power error
Voltage level
How to set Note
3
High Typical 34V 2 —
1
to position”2-3” at JP4
This is
3
Low Typical 19V 2
1
to position”1-2” at JP4 default.
Figure 5.5-2 Location of JP4 on the PWS module

- 459 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Recommended setting for the voltage level

As the threshold voltage is expressed with Table 5.5-5, the user should set High or Low to
match to the voltage value to input to PWS. Table 5.5-6 shows the recommended setting.
After that, the user should set the threshold voltage about the picking-up/dropping-off of the
binary input (see Chapter: Technical description: Binary IO module (BI, BO and BIO)).
Table 5.5-6 Recommended setting for the voltage level

Voltage value to
input to PWS
250V
High
220V
125V
Low
110V

Voltage value
Recommendation for setting for the voltage level
to input to PWS
60V
High
48V
30V
Low
24V

- 460 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

5.6.1 Outlook
Figure 5.6-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI) on the front panel.
The HMI has a screen (standard LCD or large LCD ‘MIMIC’), LED indicators (#1– #26),
operation keys, function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB receptacle.
The LCD can display information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data, monitoring,
fault records and others. We shall see the menus on the display in Chapter User interface later.
A USB receptacle in B-type is provided for the connection to the PC. Thus, the user can connect
the engineering tools (GR-TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®) with the IED using the
USB receptacle.
LED indicators
(#1–#26) Screen
Indicator label
Operation keys
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
Figure 5.6-1 HMI on front panel

- 461 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.6.2 LED Indicators

The LED indicators #1 and #2 are used to indicate the IED statuses. The others (#3 to #26) are
provided to indicate statuses, which the user wishes to check; the settings or by the PLC
function can control to indicate the statuses. The user can make a new indicator label using
the label maker of the GR-TIEMS®. (See Chapter Engineering tool)
The LED indicators‡ (#3 to #26) are also provided as user-programmable indicators.
Figure 5.6-2 shows the schematic diagrams. Each LED indicator can be lit and controlled using
a logic-gate-switch setting and others. For simplicity, we discuss setting the LED indicator #3
only, but the user can take account that setting the other LED indicators (#4 to #26) is the
same as the #3. Table 5.6-1 shows the LED indicator settings; Table 5.6-2 shows the signal
monitoring points on all LED indicator logics.
‡Note:Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in Chapter User interface:
I/O setting sub-menu.
(i) Selection of input signals

The LED indicator (#3) is lit by entering signals from other functions; eight ports are provided
for the entering signals, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user should ensure
one or more DataIDs are set for the input-signal1 to input-signal8. Entering signals are
designated using DataIDs, respectively; the user should set respective DataIDs for the settings
[Input signal1] to [Input signal8].
(ii) Logic gate switch

In the LED indicator logic #3 a logic scheme is provide for the eight entering signals; the
entering signals are grouped by the selection using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the
user should set either AND, OR or XOR.

- 462 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
LED-03
3100031001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
[LOGIC-SW] Dwell & Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-04
3100041001 LED indicator #4
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer]
& ≥1
[Input signal 2]
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1
[Input signal 3] & 0 t
&
≥1 OR 0.000-300.000s
[INVERSE-SW] Normal
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-26
31001A100
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #26
& ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 5.6-2 LED indicator logics (#3 to #26)
(iii) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

For the LED indicator logic #3 the user can use an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer; both
are used to adjust the timing for lighting the LED indicator #3. The user should set their
respective time values for settings [On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(iv) Logic level inversion

On the LED indicator logic #3 the entering signal is inverted by the logic inversion function;
inverting an entering signal is carried out when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. Set Normal for the scheme switch when logic inversion is not required.

- 463 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Logic timer switch

The LED indicator #3 can have programmable reset characteristics using scheme switch
[TIMER-SW]. Four types are available: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type, (3) latch type, and (4)
instantaneous type:
Instant type
When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set
Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator with a delayed characteristic, the user should
set Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires lighting the LED indicator as a one shot pulse, the user
should set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using
setting [Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value
in the setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other
hand, if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width
will be equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator to be removed by a reset signal, the user should
set Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW]; the user should set the Data ID of the reset signal
for setting [Reset signal]. Since lighting the LED indicator is cleared with the Data ID, the
user should determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the
signal monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
(vi) Selection of the LED color

For the LED indicator #3, color selection of either RED/GREEN/YELLOW is possible using the
setting [Color].

- 464 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.6-1 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #26 (Function ID: 201B01))
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW - LED#3 color selection RED

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on LED#3 AND
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of LED#3 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on LED#3 Off
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#4 (No Assigned)
……….
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#26 (No Assigned)

- 465 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.6-2 Signal monitoring points on all LED indicator (Function ID: 201B01)
3100021001 ERROR Error LED
3100011001 IN SERV In service LED
3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3
31000A1001 LED-10 Output signal of the LED indicator #10
31000B1001 LED-11 Output signal of the LED indicator #11
31000C1001 LED-12 Output signal of the LED indicator #12
31000D1001 LED-13 Output signal of the LED indicator #13
31000E1001 LED-14 Output signal of the LED indicator #14
31000F1001 LED-15 Output signal of the LED indicator #15
31001A1001 LED-26 Output signal of the LED indicator #26

- 466 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.6.3 Function keys with LEDs

The function keys (F1 to F7) are provided to jump to other menus during the LCD operation;
the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 5.6-3). However, the user
can program the F1 to F7 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally,
the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user
presses the function key.
Table 5.6-3 Function keys and jump destinations (default)
Function LED lit when
Jump destination as default
Key# pressing
F1 Metering menu Yellow

F2 Fault Record menu Yellow
F3 Event Record1 menu Yellow
F6 Diagnostics menu Yellow
F7 (Not defined) Yellow
For testing, the user can also program to generate binary signals when the user presses
the F1 to F7 keys. The F1 to F7 circuits have LEDs; accordingly, the user can also program to
light the LEDs using the settings.
(i) Screen jump pressing the function key

The user can program the F1 to F7 keys as the user-preferred jump keys. For example, when
the user wishes to use the F1 key to jump to another screen, set Screen jump for scheme switch
[Function] in the F1 key (see Table 5.6-6). We shall see the setting in Chapter User interface:
Setting sub-menu: Configuration of Function keys.
(ii) Binary signal generated pressing the function key

When the user wishes to generate a binary signal upon occurrence of pressing the F1 key, set
Assign Signal for scheme switch [Function] in the F1 key. For instance, if the user wishes to
send a signal generated pressing F1 to the binary output circuit (BO1‡) at the IO#1 slot, set
the Data ID of “FUNC-KEY1(240001 310001730)” for the setting [Input signal 1] of the BO1‡
circuit. Note that the user should set On for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL] when the connection
is done using the setting [Input signal 1]. Figure 5.6-3 shows that a generate signal is outputted
at the FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL. Table 5.6-7 shows the other FUNC-KEY2 to 7 points. We shall
see the setting procedure in Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu: Signal control function.

- 467 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Function key logic for F1 Terminal and

(Function ID: 240001) BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“BO1”
Setting Data ID “F1 Signal designated by
SIGNAL” for the Signal to the
device
“FUNC-KEY1” [Input signal 1] [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
& ≥1
Pressing the F1 key (240001_ 3100001730)
[Input signal 3]
& “BO1-RB”
F1 [Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On
Off
&
(200B01_8002001113)
[Input signal 5]
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
“F1 SIGNAL”
Setting Data ID (240001_ 3100001737) PLC connection point in BO1
“BO1_SOURCE”
&
for the [Signal]† 200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
[Logic] Instant
Toggle
Figure 5.6-3 F1 key connected with the BO1‡

‡Note:The BO1 circuit is used just for an explanation; it is discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Binary IO module.
†Note:When the user wishes to inject the signal at the PLC connection point of the “BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D at the IO#1 slot)”, the user should set the BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D) for the setting [Signal] of the F1 key. Then, set Off
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]
The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using scheme
switch [LOGIC], as shown in Table 5.6-4. Thus, the user can substitute “F1-SIGNAL (240001
310001737)” for the “FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL (240001 310001730)”, provided the Toggle mode
is preferred. In the Table 5.6-7 the other FUNC-KEY2 to FUNC-KEY7 are shown.
Table 5.6-4 Signal mode selection using setting [LOGIC]
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Pressing Key
Toggle
Binary signal
Pressing Key
Instant
Binary signal
(iii) Lighting LEDs on F1 to F7

Figure 5.6-4 shows the F1 to F7 LED logics. Programing to light the LEDs (F1 to F7) is the
same as the programing of the LED indicators (#3 to #26) (for the programming, see section
5.6.2). As a default, e.g., the “FUNC-KEY1 (240001 310001730)” is set for the setting [Input
signal 1] of the F1 LED logic. The LED-F2 to F7 points are listed in Table 5.6-8.

- 468 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
31001B1001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic
& ≥1
t 0 0 t LED-F1
[Input signal 1] DRIVER
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 31001C1001 F2 LED logic
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F2
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 3]
[INVERSE-SW]
&
≥1 OR Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 3100211001 F7 LED logic

& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F7
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 5.6-4 LED logics on the function keys F1 to F7
Table 5.6-5 Settings of Function keys (Function ID: 240001)

Default setting
value
Screen Jump / Assign Signal /
Function - Operation mode for the F1 key Screen Jump
No Assign
F1
Signal (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the input on F1 key (No Assigned)
Logic Instant / Toggle - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 Instant
No Assign
F2
……….
No Assign
F7

- 469 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.6-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
value
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F1. (No Assigned)
F1 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F1. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F1 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F1 0.00
……….

- 470 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.6-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100001730 FUNC-KEY1 Signal generated directly when pressing F1
Table 5.6-8 Signal monitoring points for function LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
31001B1001 LED-F1 Signal generated during pressing the F1 key
31001C1001 LED-F2 Signal generated during pressing the F2 key
31001D1001 LED-F3 Signal generated during pressing the F3 key
31001E1001 LED-F4 Signal generated during pressing the F4 key
31001F1001 LED-F5 Signal generated during pressing the F5 key
3100201001 LED-F6 Signal generated during pressing the F6 key
3100211001 LED-F7 Signal generated during pressing the F7 key

- 471 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.6.4 Monitoring jacks

A monitoring jack including a LED is provided so that the user can monitor a binary signal on
the logic straightforwardly. For example, when the user wishes to monitor the operating state
of a relay function, set the signal number (Data ID) that the user wishes to monitor; then the
user can see lighting the LED when the relay is operated. Using with an oscilloscope, the user
can also observe the binary signal that comes from the monitoring jack; three monitoring jacks
(Term A, B, and C) are available on the front panel.
Table 5.6-9 Output terminals for signal monitoring (No default setting)
Jack Jack name LED Color Remarks
A Term A Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number

B Term B Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
C Term C Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
When the user wishes to test the phase-A element the OC1 relay using an oscilloscope,
for example, set the phase-A monitoring point (44001 8000011C20†) for the setting [Term A],
as shown in Figure 5.6-5. Consequently, the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at
the Term A. The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal. The user can use
to monitor the phase-B and phase-C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the [Term
B] and [Term C]. We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in Chapter User interface:
Test sub-menu: Signal monitoring screen.
OC function
(Function ID: 440001) Monitoring jack (Function ID: 201301) Jacks and LEDs
setting [Term A] DRIVER Term Signal to the
440001 8000011C20
A oscilloscope
A
OC1 440001 8100011C21
B “TEST-A”
440001 8200011C22 (201B01_3100221001)
C
Term A LED
setting [Term B] DRIVER Term Signal to the
B oscilloscope
“TEST-B”
(201B01_3100231001)
Term B LED
setting [Term C] DRIVER Term Signal to the
C oscilloscope
“TEST-C”
(201B01_3100241001)
Term C LED
Figure 5.6-5 Monitoring logics A, B and C

†Note:The monitoring point is just selected for the explanation; the user can select a
monitoring point from the relay applications and the control and monitoring
applications. The monitoring points is listed as PLC monitoring points in each
function.

- 472 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.6-10 Settings of Monitoring jacks (Function ID: 201301)

Setting items Range Contents
s value
Term A (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned)
Term B (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned)
Term C (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term C (No Assigned)
Table 5.6-11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100221001 TEST-A TEST-A
3100231001 TEST-B TEST-B
3100241001 TEST-C TEST-C

- 473 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.6.5 Operation keys

(i) L/R key
The IED has two LEDs on the L/R key; either LEDs is lit in response to a local mode or a
remote mode. Lighting the LED is instructed by the LOCRMT function. Table 5.6-12 shows
the signal monitoring points on the L/R LEDs.
Table 5.6-12 Signal monitoring points for L/R LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100251001 LOC LED Local
3100261001 REM LED Remote
(ii) Operation keys except L/R key

Like in the function keys (F1 to F7), the operation keys can provide signals when pressing the
keys; the user can monitor the signals at the signal monitoring points in Table 5.6-13.
Table 5.6-13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL
31000E1730 CLEAR Key situation of CLEAR
31000D1730 CLOSE Key situation of CLOSE
31000F1730 DOWN Key situation of DOWN
3100071730 ENTER Key situation of ENTER
3100091730 HELP Key situation of HELP
3100111730 LEFT Key situation of LEFT
31000A1730 LOC/REM Key situation of LOC/REM
31000C1730 OPEN Key situation of OPEN
3100121730 RIGHT Key situation of RIGHT
3100101730 UP Key situation of UP

- 474 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Clock function
Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence
of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of
the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the
UTC is selected; the clock can run in accordance with the user’s time zone and summer
time(DST)† by referring the UTC when the time zone and the DST are set. The explanation is
also found in Chapter User interface: Time sub-menu.
†Note:In other words, it is called “daylight saving time (DST)”. For setting, see section
5.7.5.
‡Note:For example, the Internet and World Wide Web standards run in the UTC. For
more information, see section 5.7.4.
5.7.1 Clock setting

The user can set the time using the time sub-menu as shown in Figure 5.7-1. The user also can
set the time using the GR-TIEMS†.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 5.7-1 Time sub-menu in Clock menu

†Note:Make the calibration the when the clock is set using the GR-TIMES. This is
because the transmission time is required from the PC to the IED.
5.7.2 Selection of date and time formats

The user can select user-preferred date/time format; setting [Data_fmt] is provided for the
selection of the format. For example, ‘March 24th 2014 10:48’ can be displayed when the format
“DDMMYYYY” is selected.
 “2014-03-24 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “YYYYMMDD”.
 “03-24-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “MMDDYYYY”.
 “24-03-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “DDMMYYYY”.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 5.7-2 Setting screen of Display format

- 475 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.7.3 Time Synchronization

The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective
IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting
[Time_Sync_Src]:
 SNTP method
 IRIG-B method
 Binary Input (BI) method
(i) Synchronization using SNTP

Example of SNTP synchronization
The SNTP method is possible when IEDs connect with time-servers. Figure 5.7-3 exemplifies
two servers are connected with the IEDs using the LAN.
Time server1 Time server2
LAN
………….
IED_1 IED_2 IED_n
Figure 5.7-3 Two time servers connected on the LAN
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set SNTP for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [SNTP].
2) Set the address of a time server using settings [Server1]. The settings [Server2],
[Server3], and [Server4] are provided for other time-servers.
3) Check that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-4.
4) Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly (see 5.7.4 and 5.7.5).
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] > Check “SNTP” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
SNTP
Figure 5.7-4 Time setting for SNTP

Table 5.7-1 Settings for the SNTP synchronization
Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method SNTP
SNTP Off /On Operation of SNTP ()On
Server1 000.000.000.000–255.255.255.255 Setting for Time server 1 197.1.23.11

- 476 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Synchronization using IRIG-B

Example of IRIG-B synchronization
The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is provided.
The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†.
IED
IRIG-B000†
Clock
10:00 1/2
Signal [Time] +
A1 2012-11-21 10:00:05
IRIG-B signal
[Format]
generator Unit GND
A3 YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
IRIG-B
Figure 5.7-5 IED connected with the signal generator unit using IRIG-B000 module
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
Setting procedure
1) Set IRIG-B for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [IRIG-SYNC].
2) Check that the IRIG-B is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-6.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
Check “IRIG-B” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
IRIG-B
Figure 5.7-6 Time setting for IRIG-B
Setting year in IRIG-B

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the IEEE C37.118 / IRIG-B000 format, the user should
set On for setting [USE_BCDYEAR]. Conversely, when the IRIG-B data with absence the
C37.118† is generated, Off should be set for the setting [USE_BCDYEAR].
†Note: “Year” is informed from the IED clock itself when the C37.118 is absent.
Setting UTC/local time

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the UTC†, set Off for the setting [USE_LOCALTIME].
Conversely, when the IRIG-B data is generated in the local time‡, set On for setting
[USE_LOCALTIME]; set Off for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
†Note:We shall see the settings of the UTS in section 5.7.4.
‡Note:In the IRIG-B signal generator unit, the DST settings should be corresponded to
the DST settings of the IED. We shall see the DST settings in section 5.7.5.

- 477 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 5.7-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization

Setting
example
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method IRIG-B
IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B On
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On Operation in the local time Off
(iii) Synchronization using BI signal

When accurate1Hz square-wave can be supplied as a reference clock, the clock function can
make the time synchronization. The 1Hz square-wave is transferred using a binary input
circuit (BI).
Example of time synchronization via BI circuit

Figure 5.7-7 exemplifies that the 1Hz square-wave is provided via the BI1 circuit†.
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 5.7-7 IED connected with the signal generator via BI module
†Note:The BI1 circuit is just used for the explanation; hence, an actual BI circuit should
be selected in accordance with wiring cables. For more information of the BI
circuit, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module.

- 478 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting procedure
1) Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC].
2) Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-8.
3) Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID]. For example, as shown in the Figure 5.7-7, when
the user wishes to inject the signal at the BI1 on the IO#1 slot, the user should set
BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID].
4) Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g., −0.050s)
for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should be
synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the
operating time on the BI circuit.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
BI
Check “BI ” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 5.7-8 Time setting for BI
Table 5.7-3 Setting items for the BI Time synchronization

Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method BI
BI-SYNC Off /On Operation of BI On
BI_ID [Preferred ID] Signal monitoring point 200B01 8001001111
Time adjust factor (in −：Leading the clock
SYNC ADJ −0.050 to +0.050 0.000
sec.) +：Delaying the clock

- 479 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.7.4 Setting time zone

When the clock should run in the UTC, the user should set On for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
Additionally, the user should set the time zone† when the time should be displayed in the Local
standard time. The time zone is divided in every 15 minutes; the user can set it using 0.25
units (i.e., 15 min = 0.25 unit). For example, if the IED is used in Venezuela (UTC-04:30), the
user should set “−4.50” for the setting, as shown Figure 5.7-9.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
-4.50hour
Figure 5.7-9 Setting screen of Time zone

Table 5.7-4 Example time offsets and locations
Time offset† Example locations
UTC−10:00 United States (Hawaii)
UTC−09:00 United States (Anchorage)
UTC−08:00 United States (PST)
UTC−06:00 Canada , Costa Rica, El Salvador, Ecuador, Mexico, United States (CST)
UTC−05:00 Brazil (Acre), Colombia, Cuba, Jamaica, Panama, Peru, United States (EST)
UTC−04:30 Venezuela
UTC−04:00 Bolivia, Brazil, Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico, Barbados
UTC−03:00 Argentina, Brazil (Bahia, Pernambuco), Chile
UTC−02:00 Brazil (Fernando de Noronha)
UTC±00:00 United kingdom, Iceland, Ireland, Senegal, Saint Helena, Mali
UTC+01:00 Germany, Hungary, Italy, France, Montenegro
UTC+02:00 Egypt, Estonia, Finland, Slovenia, Greece
UTC+03:00 Ethiopia, Iraq, Kenya, Madagascar, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Turkey
UTC+04:00 Armenia, Azerbaijan, Oman, Seychelles, United Arab Emirates
UTC+05:00 Pakistan
UTC+05:30 India, Sri Lanka
UTC+06:00 Bangladesh, Bhutan, Kazakhstan
UTC+06:30 Myanmar
UTC+07:00 Western Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos
UTC+08:00 China, Malaysia, Philippines, Australia (Western Australia), Mongolia
UTC+09:00 Japan, South Korea
UTC+10:00 Australia (Queensland)
UTC+12:00 New Zealand
†Note:Time zone is expressed in the difference between UTC and the local standard time
(wintertime).
Table 5.7-5 Setting time zone

Setting
example
IS_UTC_base On / Off Selection of either the UTC or the local time On

- 480 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting)

When the summer time (DST) is applied, the user should set the beginning and the ending
dates of the DST in the clock function. The user should set On for the setting [Summer time]
for DST.
Note: The clock function is not designed for particular DSTs such as they are depending
on the religious events and the astronomy.
(i) DST set by the day (Mon to Sun) of week

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fifth week in March and it
ends at 2:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fourth week in October, the user has the following settings.
Note that transposing the calendar is required, as shown in Figure 5.7-10; accordingly the first
of the month is located at the first row and the first column of the transposed calendar.
Beginning of the DST at 01:00 a.m. in Mar. 29 E nding of the DST at 02:00 a.m. in Oct. 25
March October
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30
30 31
Transposed Transposed
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 5 for the [Start_Week] Setting 4 for the [End_Week]
Setting Sun for the [Start_Wday] Setting Sun for the [End_Wday]
Setting 1 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 2 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 5.7-10 DST setting examples by the day of week
(ii) DST set by the day (1st or 15th) of month

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 p.m. on the first day in March and it ends at 3:00
p.m. on the middle day in October; the user has the following settings.

- 481 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Beginning of the DST E nding of the DST

at 01:00 p.m. in Mar. 1 at 03:00 p.m. in Oct. 15
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 1 for the [Start_Week] Setting 3 for the [End_Week]
Setting – for the [Start_Wday] Setting – for the [End_Wday]
Setting 13 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 15 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 5.7-11 DST setting examples by the day (1st or 15th) of month
(iii) Time shift

After setting the DST, the clock is forwarded by 1 hour at the DST start; the clock is backed by
1 hour at the DST end.
Table 5.7-6 DST settings
Setting
example
Summer time On / Off Enabling DST operation On
Start_Month 1 to 12 Set the beginning of DST in the month 3
Start_Week 1 to 5 Set the beginning of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
Start_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the beginning of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
Start_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 1
End_Month 1 to 12 Set the end of DST in the month 10
End_Week 1 to 5 Set the end of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
End_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the end of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
End_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 2

- 482 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5.7.6 Setting
Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301)
s value
Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00
--- / SNTP / BI /
TimeSyncSrc - Time sync source SNTP
IRIG-B
YYYYMMDD /
Date_fmt MMDDYYYY / - YMD/MDY/DMY YYYYMMDD
DDMMYYYY
Date_delimiter -///. - - or / or . -
Time_delimiter :/. - : or period :
Sec_delimiter ./, - . or , .
SummerTime Off / On - Summer time enable Off
IS_UTC_base Off / On - Is setting value base on UTC? On
Start_Month 1 - 12 - Start month 3
Start_Week 1-5 - Start week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
Start_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - Start day of week Sun.
Sat.
Start_Hour 0 - 23 - Start hour 1
End_Month 1 - 12 - End month 10
End_Week 1-5 - End week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
End_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - End day of week Sun.
Sat.
End_Hour 0 - 23 - End hour 1
Setting of SNTP_SYNC (Function ID: 200A01)

s value
SNTP Off / On - Enabling SNTP synchronization On
Server1 0 - 255 - IP address#1 0. 0. 0. 0
Setting of BI_SYNC (Function ID: 202001)

s value
BI SYNC Off / On - BI sync switch Off
BI_ID [Preferred ID] - Source BI Data ID
SYNC ADJ -0.050 to 0.050 s Time adjust factor 0.000
Setting of IRIG_SYNC (Function ID: 202101)

s value
IRIG SYNC Off / On - IRIGB sync switch Off
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On - Use BCD year code Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On - Use local time Off

- 483 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Group setting for protection functions

As shown in Figure 5.8-1, protection settings (i.e., DIFHZ and TCS settings) are segmented
into eight groups, and different setting values of the relays can be set as per circumstances
such as operation conditions and others. Note that changing the group cannot be not carried
out instantly.
Setting
Protection
Group1
Trip DIFHZ
TCS
Group2
Trip DIFHZ
TCS
Group8
Trip DIFHZ
TCS
Figure 5.8-1 Eight group settings for FS function
(i) Changing group number by menu operation

The user can change the group number using the menu† on the IED screen. See the Chapter
User interface: Setting sub-menu.
(ii) Changing group number by user-programming

Another changing method is provided by programing PLC logics (For more information about
PLC programing, see the Chapter PLC function.) Figure 5.8-2 exemplifies a PLC logic:
changing group2 from group1 is performed while BI1 circuit is energized. The group setting
function “Setting (Function ID 201400)” has a signal reception point ‘PLC_Group_ENUM’ in
UNIT type; thus changing the group is performed when either numbers (1 to 8) enters at the
signal reception point. The example logic, designed for changing to group2 from group1,
consists of a binary input circuit (BI1), a number generation function (‘Binary selection’
provided in basic functions of the PLC editor), and the signal reception point. That is, when
the B1 switch is closed, a signal enters the BI1 circuit and is carried to the Binary selection;
accordingly the Binary selection, which is programmed to generate a group number ‘2’ in UNIT
when signal ‘1’ is injected in BOOL(BIT), can generates and inject the group number ‘2’ at the
‘PLC_Group_ENUM’. Consequently, the Setting function (201400) starts change the group
from number ‘1’ to ‘2’. Note that changing is only performed during the BI1 is closed in the

- 484 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
example logic; hence, the setting number goes back to ‘1’ when the BI1 is open.
GR200 IED
Binary selection
(+) (–)
IO_SLOT1 (200B01)
BI1 8001001110 Entering → Leaving 201400 314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Operation of
BI1 changing
‘1’ in BOOL ‘2’ in UNIT
‘0’ in BOOL ‘1’ in UNIT
BI2 8101011110
BI2
PLC basic-function PLC basic-function A group number enters

Binary input circuits BI1 and BI2
(Flip-Flop) (SEL) to “Setting function (FunctionID: 201400)”
at IO#1 (IO_SLOT1)
2 3
2
SEL DOUT_UNIT
1
DIN_BOOL RS
Unit#16#201400 FID ST
DO Q1 G
FID SET Unit#16#31 DTYPE
RESET1 Unit#16#1 IN0 Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DTYPE ST
IN1 DI
DID Unit#16#2
1
DIN_BOOL
FID DO
DTYPE ST
DID
Figure 5.8-2 Example for changing a group setting4

1Note: Function block for the binary input circuit (Binary input FB) is provided in User
library of PLC editor. See the Chapter PLC editing in Basic manual
“Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor” attached the PLC software.
2Note: The SEL and RS functions are the basic functions. In the logic, when signal ‘1’
enters the SEL function, value ‘2’ is generated. For more information, see the help
menu on the PLC editor.
3Note: For your reference, changing to group3 is performed when value ‘3’ enters. In
other words, values ‘1’ to ‘8’ correspond to ‘group1’ to ‘group8’, respectively.
4Note: This example is designed to change ‘group1’ to ‘group2’ or ‘group2’ to ‘group1’.
Figure 5.8-3 exemplifies that selecting a group among eight groups is required by the
usage of three BI circuits (i.e., Group 1→Group2, Group3,… Group8).
Binary input circuits BI1 to BI3 A group number enters
at IO#3 (IO_SLOT1) PLC basic-function PLC basic-function
to “Setting function
(Ondelay) (SEL)
(Function ID: 201400)”
BI3_1
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01001111 Delay time# PT ET
DID ADD
XX ms
BI3_2
DIN_BOOL TON DOUT_UNIT_1
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT MUL
DOUT_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST Unit#16#201400 FID ST
Delay time# PT ET
UDINT#16#01011111 DID UDINT#16#2 Unit#16#31 DTYPE
XX ms
Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DI
BI3_3
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 ADD ADD
FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
MUL
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01021111 DID Delay time# PT ET
XX ms UDINT#16#4
UDINT#16#1
Figure 5.8-3 Logic for changing a group setting

- 485 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Setting
Setting_PF (Function ID: 201400)
Un Default setting
its value
Active Group 1 to 8 – Selection of a setting group number 1
(iv) Signal (Data ID)

 Connection point on PLC logic
314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Reception for setting group number

3200001001 ACT_GRP
3010011001 COM_CHG
3010031001 CTRL_CHG
3010021001 PRO_CHG
3010001001 SYS_CHG

- 486 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
6 Engineering tool
Common tools 490 Settings for Relay and control functions 491
Configuration tools 491 Settings for Input and output signals 491
Comparison of settings 490 Settings for Event recorder 492
Configuration in IEC 61850 492 Setting of Interlock (ILK) 492
Configuration in IEC 60870-5-103 492 Signal monitor 490
Connection with PC 489 Status monitor 490
Double command blocking (DCB) 490 Tool for Fault recorder 491
Tool for Disturbance recorder 491
Tool for Event recorder 491
Label creator 490
Logging management 490
MIMIC configuration 492
Project management 490

- 487 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Overview of GR-TIEMS
When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed
into a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states (Table 6.1-1) on a
PC screen connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using the GR-TIEMS.
Figure 6.1-1 GR-TIEMS® screen on PC
Table 6.1-1 Information on the GR-TIEMS

Information Displaying format
Display of voltage and current waveform Oscillograph, vector display
Symmetrical component analysis On arbitrary time span
Harmonic analysis On arbitrary time span
Frequency analysis On arbitrary time span
The GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and
event records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is
connected with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in the GR-TIEMS
operations, see separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.

- 488 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Connection
Figure 6.2-1 illustrates that the user can connect the local PC with the IED (type B receptacle)
using a USB cable. Alternatively, the user can connect the local PC with the IED by connecting
a RJ45 cable to the LAN port (if available in the IED). In Figure 6.2-2, when using the LAN
port, the user has to select the communications option, which can be found from the Main menu
in GR-TIEMS (go to “Tool” ->“Option…”; “Option” dialog will be displayed; change
communications option with the second tab – ‘Communication’).
Tip: See Chapter Communication protocol.
IED
LAN
USB Cable
Personal Computer
Figure 6.2-1 USB Communications
Figure 6.2-2 GR-TIEMS Communications Options

- 489 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Common tools
(i) Project management
Project files are required to engage sub-engineering tools. The user can manage to read/write
the project file of the IED using the project management function. The user can also see the
contents of the project files.
(ii) Comparison
When the user wishes to get the comparison between respective IEDs, using the compare
function the user can get the comparison data about Settings, Disturbance record binary
signals, PLCs, Interlock, Large LCD (MIMIC)†, IEC61850, and IEC60870-5-103 data†.
(iii) Pocket label creator

The user can create the name label of LEDs and Function keys for the IED front panel using
a pocket label sheet, which is provided together with the IED. For more information with
regard the LEDs and Function keys, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine
interface.
(iv) Logging
The user can view the recorded data with regard to the logging date/time. As the user can also
find operation recorded when an operator/engineer logs into the IED, analyzing a problem is
possible when an error is detected during the IED operations.
(v) Double command block

For controlling, there is a principle that a first receiving-command shall be carried out
primarily. In other words, succeeding receiving-commands cannot have the right to run until
the first receiving-command is not completed to operate (that is, the principle of double
command blocking (DCB) is established). The principle is significant for the device protections;
hence, the user should DCB setting. For more information with regard to set the DCB, see the
“Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082): Double Command Block” and Chapter General
control function: Common controls: Double command blocking.
Monitoring tools
The user can monitor status and measurement value obtained in the IED using the monitoring
tools. All signals monitored are tabulated in the monitoring list dialog. When the user wishes
to monitor a signal, select a signal in the monitoring list dialog after the operation of the drag-
drop on the monitoring window. The monitoring tools can generate an exporting layout file in
the CSV; it also can obtain the layout file in the CSV.

- 490 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Record tools
(i) Fault record
Fault records are including measuring information before and after the occurrence of the faults.
Accordingly, the user can see information before the fault so that the user can analyze the fault
more precisely. The user can select a fault from the recorded lists; the user can save it into the
fault information file in the CSV. The user can also view the fault records when the exported
data file in the CSV are retrieved into the IED.
(ii) Disturbance record

Disturbance record is a kind of module information measured so that the user can see them in
several graphs: an oscilloscope chart, a harmonic graph, a 3D harmonic graph, a vector in relay
operation analysis (ROA) chart. The user can see disturbance records when the disturbance
records file in COMTRADE are provided. The user can also save disturbance records into the
COMTRADE file.
(iii) Event list

The event list is recorded events information in the IED. The user can generate events
information file in the CSV; the user can retrieve events data file into the IED to view when
the file is in the CSV.
Note: In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time (UTC)
when the clock is selected to operate in UTC. In the record tools within the PC the
date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted
for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock
operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving
time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED
and the PC. For more information about the clock and time, see Chapter Technical
description: Clock function.
Generic configuration tools

(i) Setting (general setting for the relay and controlling functions)
The user can make the IED settings on the GR-TIEMS; the IED settings are transferred into
the IED by the connection between the IED and the GR-TIEMS.
(ii) Setting I/O

The user can see and make the setting with regard to binary input/output circuits (BIO), LEDs
using the setting I/O function. For more information about the BIO, and the LED, see chapter
Technical description.

- 491 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Setting event list

The user can set information with regard to the event of an IED using the event list function.
(iv) Interlock configurator

The user can program conditions for executing to control the primary equipment using the
interlock (ILK) configurator. For example, controlling a circuit breaker (open and closing) is
significant; note not induce mal-operations caused by improper conditions; otherwise a severe
fault/blackout results in. The ILK configurator can provide the user to program conditions
concerning the status of the power system. For more information of the ILK, see chapter
Control and monitoring application.
IEC 61850 configuration tool

The user can configure conversion data for the IEC61850 communication†, provided the IED
exchanges the data with the SAS. The user also configures a logical device, a logical node,
Goose publish information, and Goose subscribe information. For setting and configuration for
the IEC61850 communication see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication”.
†Note:The configuration of the IEC 61850 standard is dependent on the software and the
hardware configurations in the IED. Thereby, the user should understand that the
operations of the GR-TIEMS are in response to hardware/software configurations
(i.e., the configurations has been determined when the IED model is selected
using the ordering code, which is described in Appendix: Ordering code)
IEC 60870-5-103 configuration tool

The user can edit the data of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol† to perform communications
between IEDs. The IEC 60870-5-103 data consists of the IEC 60870-5-103 Slave and the
IEC60870-5-103 Master data; the user can edit either the Slave Data or the Master Data‡ at
a time.
†Note:The configuration of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is dependent on the software
and the hardware configurations in the IED. Thereby, the user should understand
that the operations of the GR-TIEMS are in response to hardware/software
configurations (i.e., the configuration has been determined when the IED model is
selected using the ordering code, which is described in Appendix: Ordering code)
‡Note:Editing the master data is not available at present.
MIMIC configuration tool

When the IED has a large LCD†, the user can create user-preferred screens using the MIMIC

- 492 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
configurator. The large LCD will be able to display measurement values, diagrams and others
after the configuration. Note that the MIMIC is not available when the standard LCD is equipped
for the IED.

- 493 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
7 PLC function
Contents Pages
About PLC function 495 PLC driver 496
BIT (Boolean) type 496
Error check 495 USINT (Unsigned short integer) type 498
IED screen information 495 UNIT (Unsigned integer) type 498
UDINT (Unsigned double integer) type 499
SINT (Short integer) type 499
INT (Integer) type 499
DINT (Double integer) type 499
Timer variable setting 500
Setting [UTM1] ~ [UTM24] 502

- 494 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Overview of PLC function

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) software is used for configuring the Inputs/outputs
(I/Os), alarms, indications, recording and others. PLC logic consist of “timers”, “flip-flops”, and
logic gates “AND, OR, XOR, NOT”. The user can configure PLC-logic using the PLC editor
(MULTIPROG®), which should be installed in the user’s PC. Figure 7.1-1 shows the screen for
the PLC editor.
Figure 7.1-1 PC screen of MULTIPROG®

Note: To handle the PLC editor on the PC, the user shall purchase a software license
(EP-261; see Appendix: Ordering) from Toshiba sales representative. For more
information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Basic manual:
Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor (6F2S1904)).
PLC data error

The Automatic supervision reports the error information when an error occurs in PLC logic.
The error information† is shown in the Monitoring sub-menu on the IED screen. See Chapter
Automatic supervision: Supervision tasks: Supervision of data in PLC function.
PLC data error 1/1
10:48
[Minor error]
[00000006] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
PLC error code†
Figure 7.2-1 Error code at 1st row and 1st column on Monitoring sub-menu

- 495 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
PLC driver
The PLC driver is provided for the user-programmed logic.
7.3.1 Monitoring point for PLC driver

The user can assign several values for the operation. Three-hundred-and-twenty PLC drivers
are grouped for 128 BITs, 32 USINTs, 32 UINTs, 32 UDINTs, 32 SINTs, 32 INTs, and 32 DINTs
in the function “PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230302)”.
(i) BIT type
 Monitoring point at PLC Driver
PLC_DRV in BIT type (Function ID: 230302)
8010101BB0 BIT_00_0 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8A10101BBA BIT_01_2 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8F10101BBF BIT_01_7 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8B10111BBB BIT_03_3 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………

- 496 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………

- 497 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
(ii) USINT type

PLC_DRV in USINT type (Function ID: 230302)
3011001BB0 U08_00 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
(iii) UINT type

PLC_DRV in UINT type (Function ID: 230302)
3112001BB0 U16_00 Reserved: Monitoring point for quality of IEC61850
3112011BB0 U16_01 Reserved: Monitoring point for quality of IEC61850
…….. ……….. ………

- 498 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) UDINT type

PLC_DRV in UDINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………
(v) SINT type

PLC_DRV in USINT type (Function ID: 230302)
2014001BB0 S08_00 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
(vi) INT type

PLC_DRV in UINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………
(vii) DINT type

PLC_DRV in DINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………

- 499 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Timer variable settings using PLC drivers

The user can set variable timers of user’s PLC logics using settings of PLC drivers (FB:
PLC_DRV 230302). The LCD screen menu provides settings [UTM1] ~ [UTM24], and the user
can set those timer values through the LCD screen.
Figure 7.4-1 shows that a delay timer “TON1” has been set 500ms in the PLC logic, but the
user can set new value using the setting [UTM1] (e.g., the user can change 500ms to 200ms on
the LCD). Since an internal IED memory is able to access the [UTM1], the IED can operate
with new value of the [UTM1] when new one is set.
IED memory PLC function
PLC editor
Timer FB
Constant value set
Fixed PLC = 500ms
Input Output
A timer value inputted

PLC driver FB ( 500 [ms] or 200 [ms] )
Function ID: 230302
Element ID: 3200013001
Variable value set

Setting [UTM1] = 200 ms
= 5000ms
User PLC logic
Figure 7.4-1 Time delay FB is adjusted by setting [UTM1] (example)

- 500 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Example of timer action1

Supposed that the timer was set the [UTM1]=30 and the TON1 timer counter has
started. When the counter counts 15 ms, and if the user sets 10 for the [UTM1],
the FB output is yielded instantly.
On
FB output Off
On
FB input Off
Run
Counter Stop
0 15 30 45 60
Timer counter
(millisecond)
[UTM1] = 30 ms [UTM1] = 10 ms
Figure 7.4-2 Input and output time chart on TON1 delay timer
Note: Entering new value for the setting [UTM1] does not make the timer counter reset,
if the timer counter is running.
Example of timer action2

Supposed that the timer was set the [UTM2]=30. Signal is inputted in the FB for
45 ms, so the timer counter is running at 45 ms. However, if the user changes the
setting [UTM2] to 60 at 45 ms, the FB output still remain (i.e., the counter is not
reset).
On
FB output Off
On
FB input Off
Run
Counter Stop Timer counter

(millisecond)
0 15 30 45 60
[UTM2] = 30 ms [UTM2] = 60 ms
Figure 7.4-3 Input and output time chart onTON2 delay timer
Note: If the FB output has be yielded already, when new value is set for the timer and
that new value is longer input signal duration, the timer counter is not reset.

- 501 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Setting value

The [UTMxx] value is selected among 0 to 10,000,000 [ms] (see Table 7.4-1). Figure 7.4-4 and
Figure 7.4-5 illustrates how to see a value for the [UTMxx].
PLC timer settings: [UTM1]~ [UTM24]
Figure 7.4-4 [UTMxx] timer setting menu (GR-TIMES operation)
Setting Setting Common PLC Timer

10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/24
Record > Common + CLP > UTM1 +
Metering > Active Group Fault Locator > 0 ms
Communication > Copy Group (A->B) + PLC Timer > UTM2 +
Protection > Group1 + 0 ms
Control > Group2 + UTM3 +
Statistic > Group3 + 0 ms
UTM24 +
0 ms
Figure 7.4-5 Timer setting menu (LCD operation)

- 502 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 7.4-1 UTM setting table

PLC timer (Function ID: 230302)
UTM1 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer ##1 0

UTM2 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer #2 0

- 503 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 7.4-2 Inputs for driving the timers

PLC timer (Function ID: 230302)
Function ID + Element ID Setting name Description
230302 3200013001 UTM1 Input point for the delay timer(UTM1)
230302 32000A3001 UTM10 Input point for the delay timer(UTM10)
230302 32000B3001 UTM11 Input point for the delay timer(UTM11)
230302 32000C3001 UTM12 Input point for the delay timer(UTM12)
230302 32000D3001 UTM13 Input point for the delay timer(UTM13)
230302 32000E3001 UTM14 Input point for the delay timer(UTM14)
230302 32000F3001 UTM15 Input point for the delay timer(UTM15)

- 504 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8 Recording function
Disturbance recorder 520 Event recorder 512
-Maximum number of recording 521 -Setup 518
-Recording signals 520 -Trigger signals 512
-Recording time and capacities 520 -Trigger modes 517
Fault recorder 506
-Trigger settings for PLC 523 -Screen information 507
-Types of recording information 523 -Setup 508

- 505 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
The recording function consists of three recording features: (1) Fault recorder, (2) Event
recorder, and (3) Disturbance recorder. The fault recorder collects the information about the
power system quantities when a fault occurs. The event recorder groups state information
when the changes are detected. The disturbance recorder is designed to memory the various
quantities—numerical analog data and logic data (binary data)—from the monitoring function
and the BIO modules; it is possible to analyze the disturbance using the engineering tool (GR-
TIMES), which can draw several chronological waves.
Fault recorder
During the fault, the fault recorder can memorize reasons by equipment failures/operation
states, system information etc. The fault recorder captures the following items for each fault:
 Date and time at the fault
 Operating mode information
 Fault and pre-fault quantities
8.1.1 Types of recording information

The fault recorder can cyclically memory past eight faults; the oldest memory will be erased
cyclically if another fault occurs. The memorized information has 1ms accuracy. If a fault
occurs, the fault recorder is directed to operate to memory operating modes etc. about the fault.
(i) Date and time at fault

The date and time at the fault is recorded. The date and time information is provided by the
clock function (see Chapter Technical description: Clock function).
(ii) Mode information

At the occurrence of a fault, the protection functions give the fault recorder the reasons of
tripping; the reasons are brought using operation identifiers† and logical signals‡. The fault
recorder can have up to 192 of all identifiers and signals in the IED. The operation identifiers
are chosen using the settings [OP Mode ID1] to [OP Mode ID128]. The settings [OP Mode
ID201] to [OP Mode ID264] are used for general purposes to record the logical signals.
†Note:A number of the operation identifiers are provided by the protection functions. For
example, the ‘DIF1-OPT’ operation identifier is used to identify the pickup of the
differential function (DIF) of three-phases. See the protection function in Chapter
Relay application.
‡Note:64 logical signals are selectable for recording. For example, in this purpose, the
user may choose an operation signal on the circuits of the BIO modules (BIOs).

- 506 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Fault quantities and pre-fault-quantities

The quantities of current amplitudes are memorized in the fault recorder, as shown in Table
8.1-1. The quantities just before the fault are also memorized. Those pre-fault quantities are
captured 10 seconds before tripping, but it is possible to take back longer using the setting
[Pre-Fault time].
Table 8.1-1 Recording quantities before the fault and at the fault
Recording quantities Abbreviations
Current in phase Ida, Idb, Idc,Ide
8.1.2 Screen information

Figure 8.1-1 illustrates the information displayed on the IED screen†, which can display up to
eight fault records (#1 to #8). Figure 8.1-2 illustrates the structure of the first fault record#1.
The line○
c shows how tripping occurred. Quantitates when the fault occurred are shown below
messages○ e .
d ○
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/22
#1 2019-11-28 > 2019-11-28
19:47:15.651 19:47:15.651
#2 2019-11-28 > Phase A
20:15:55.018 DIF1
#3 2019-07-21 > Fault values
21:11:29.621 Ida
List of fault records (#1 to #8) Details of #1 information
Figure 8.1-1 Information of the fault recorder displayed on the IED screen
†Note:For more screen information, see Chapter User interface: Record sub-menu.

- 507 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Fault Record#1 ○
a Record Number (#1)
19:47 1/22
2019-11-28 ○
b Date and Time at Fault (YYYY-MM-DD)
19:47:15.651
Phase A ○
c Mode information
DIF1
Fault values ○
d Fault quantities
Screen scroll down Ida
0.632A
Idb
0.000A
Idc
0.000A
Ide
0.000A
PreFault values ○
e Pre-fault quantities
Ida
0.632A
Idb
0.000A
Idc
0.000A
Ide
0.000A
Figure 8.1-2 Screen structure about the information #1.
8.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder

(i) Operation identifiers (ID1–ID128)
The user can select the operation identifies arbitrarily using the settings [OP Mode ID1] etc.
For example, when the operation result with regard to the DIF1 element (i.e., DIF1 in phase-
A) shall be recorded, choose the operated signal ‘DIF1-A (415001 8000011C20)” and set it for
the [OP Mode ID1]. Remember to program the displaying name about the DIF1-A using the
setting [OP Mode Name1] (e.g., “DIF1-A relay OP-ed”). Note that the length of the displaying
name should be less than 18 letters. The user should find blanks in the setting list, because
several IDs have been already set.
(ii) Logical signals (ID201–ID264)

Wishing to record a logical level ‘1 (TRUE)’ or ‘0 (FALSE)’ on the circuits, the user can pick the
logical signal using settings the [OP Mode ID265] etc. For example, the user wishes to record
the output level of the binary output circuit#1 (BO1) at the IO#1 slot, set its PLC monitoring
point ‘200B01 8002001112’ for the setting [OP Mode ID265]; set the displaying name using the
[OP Mode Name265].
(iii) Additional triggers for the recording

Wishing to start the fault recorder except for the trip instruction, the user can use the PLC
connection points ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1’ to ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4’, respectively.

- 508 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Time setting for Pre-fault

The instant before the trip is programmable using the setting [Pre-Fault Time] among 10s, 50s,
100s, 200s, 300s.

- 509 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 8.1-2 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264)

Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Data IDs Screen names connection points Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID1] 415001 8000011B6D [OP Mode Name1] DIF1 DIF1-OPT [OP Mode ID97] Not assigned [OP Mode Name97] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID2] 415001 8400011B6E [OP Mode Name2] DIF2 DIF2-OPT [OP Mode ID98] Not assigned [OP Mode Name98] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID3] 415001 8000021B65 [OP Mode Name3] REF1 REF1-OPT [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] 415001 8100021B66 [OP Mode Name4] REF2 REF2-OPT [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] Not assigned [OP Mode Name5] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned

- 510 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.1.4 Setting
Setting of FAULT_RECORD(Function ID: 200602)
s value
Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 Sec. Recording time before the fault 10
Op Mode Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID1 –
Op Mode ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier –
Op Mode ID2 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier2 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
8.1.5 Signal
FAULT_RECORD (Function ID: 200602)
Name Element ID Description
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001 Receiving Trigger1
FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001 TRIG1 signal generated
FAULT RECORD TRIG3 8200031001 TRIG3 signal generated
FLTRCDING 8020101001 Data writing in the fault recorder
FR_CLR 3000001001 Data erasing in the fault recorder

ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 802000E001 Input1 for the external trigger

- 511 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Event recorder
Signals are generated in the logics of BIO modules etc. in the IED. The event recorder can
memory the generated signals as events. To operate the event recorder, the user should pick a
preferred signal as a trigger of the event recorder; the event recorder can have 768 triggers,
some of which have been set as a default. The user can group the triggers into three categories;
consequently, it is possible that a number of the events are divided depending on the degree of
the errors, the meaning of the operations, and the signals of relay elements, etc. The user can
also program how an event is to be detected. An event is recorded with millisecond accuracy.
The information are memorized until the number of the events reaching 1024; the oldest event
will be deleted when a new event appears.
8.2.1 Trigger signals

The event is memorized when the event recorder detects changing the trigger signal that is
connected with the logic signal; they are defined using settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID768].
Settings [End of E.Record-1] and [End of E.Record-2] are provided for grouping†; the user can
adjust the size of the ‘Event Record1’ group using the [End of E.Record-1]. The next ‘Event
Record2’ group is set with the [End of E.Record-2]. The remains are set for the ‘Event Record3’
group. Remember that the [Trigger ID1] etc. are required to set together with the [Event
Name1] etc.; user’s preferred names should be less than 18 letters.
July 25, 2012 July 26, 2012
10:31:12 Deleting the fault record 12:34:51 Deleting the fault record
Setting [End of E.Record-1] = 256
Setting [End of E.Record-2] = 512 10:56:12 Changing system setting
Pulse train
3000001001
FR_CLR List of ‘Event record1’
FAULT RECORD (200602)
Event #3
On 2012-07-25 10:31:12
Event #3 F.Record clear ‘On’
Setting [Trigger ID14] = 200602 3000001001

Setting [Trigger Mode14] = On
Setting [Event Name14] = F.Record clear
Event #2
3010001001
Active group Active group
2012-07-25 10:56:12
SYS_CHG Set group change
‘3’ Changed to ‘4’
Setting_PF (201400)
Event #2
Setting [Trigger ID7] = 201400 3010001001 Event #1

Setting [Trigger Mode7] = Change On 2012-07-26 12:34:51
Setting [Event Name7] = Set group change
Event #1 F.Record clear ‘On’
Figure 8.2-1 Relation between function signals and triggers for Event record1
Figure 8.2-1 illustrates signals connected with triggers in the event recorder. For example,
‘SYS_CHG’ is connected with trigger#7 using the [Trigger ID7] and ‘FR_CLR’ is connected with

- 512 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
trigger#14 using the [Trigger ID14]. Note that the both triggers (#7 and #14) are smaller than
the setting [End of E.Record-1]=256; hence, the both are listed in the ‘Event recored1’ list.
Keep in mind that the event names are set by the [Event Name7] and [Event Name14].Table
8.2-1 and the others tabulate the ones.
†Note:The GR-TIEMS uses terms ‘Level1’, ‘Level2’, and ‘Level3’ to represent the ‘Event
Record1’, ‘Event Record2’, and ‘Event Record3’. The scope of each level is the same
as the scope of each group. The GR-TIEMS does not show unused triggers and
Trigger ID numbers automatically when the triggers are displayed on the screen.

- 513 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 8.2-1 [End of E.Record-1] (1/3)

Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names
[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID2] 220001 3110211001 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID92] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID182] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID183] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID6] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID96] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID186] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID14] 200602 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID15] 200710 3001001001 On E.Record1 clear [Trigger ID105] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID195] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID18] 200401 30A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] 4A1001 8300001B6F Off GEN.TRIP [Trigger ID161] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID72] 4A1001 8400001B64 Off GEN.ALARM [Trigger ID162] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID252] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID73] 4A1001 8000001B71 Off OPT.PHASE-A [Trigger ID163] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID253] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID74] 4A1001 8100001B72 Off OPT.PHASE-B [Trigger ID164] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID75] 4A1001 8200001B73 Off OPT.PHASE-C [Trigger ID165] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID255] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID77] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID167] (Not Assigned) Off -

- 514 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 8.2-2 [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record-2]=512 (2/3)

[Trigger ID257] 5100010001011001 On-Off SPOS1 [Trigger ID347] 5120018303211D02 On DPOS33 Open [Trigger ID437] 5120018203031F43 On DPOS3 Undefined
[Trigger ID258] 5100010001021001 On-Off SPOS2 [Trigger ID348] 5120018103211D03 On DPOS33 Close [Trigger ID438] 5120018403031F45 On DPOS3 Faulty
[Trigger ID266] 51000100010A1001 On-Off SPOS10 [Trigger ID356] 5120018103251D03 On DPOS37 Close [Trigger ID446] 5120018403071F45 On DPOS7 Faulty
[Trigger ID267] 51000100010B1001 On-Off SPOS11 [Trigger ID357] 5120018303261D02 On DPOS38 Open [Trigger ID447] 5120018203081F43 On DPOS8 Undefined
[Trigger ID268] 51000100010C1001 On-Off SPOS12 [Trigger ID358] 5120018103261D03 On DPOS38 Close [Trigger ID448] 5120018403081F45 On DPOS8 Faulty
[Trigger ID269] 51000100010D1001 On-Off SPOS13 [Trigger ID359] 5120018303271D02 On DPOS39 Open [Trigger ID449] 5120018203091F43 On DPOS9 Undefined
[Trigger ID270] 51000100010E1001 On-Off SPOS14 [Trigger ID360] 5120018103271D03 On DPOS39 Close [Trigger ID450] 5120018403091F45 On DPOS9 Faulty
[Trigger ID271] 51000100010F1001 On-Off SPOS15 [Trigger ID361] 5120018303281D02 On DPOS40 Open [Trigger ID451] 51200182030A1F43 On DPOS10 Undefined
[Trigger ID272] 5100010001101001 On-Off SPOS16 [Trigger ID362] 5120018103281D03 On DPOS40 Close [Trigger ID452] 51200184030A1F45 On DPOS10 Faulty
[Trigger ID273] 5100010001111001 On-Off SPOS17 [Trigger ID363] 5120018303291D02 On DPOS41 Open [Trigger ID453] 51200182030B1F43 On DPOS11 Undefined
[Trigger ID274] 5100010001121001 On-Off SPOS18 [Trigger ID364] 5120018103291D03 On DPOS41 Close [Trigger ID454] 51200184030B1F45 On DPOS11 Faulty
[Trigger ID275] 5100010001131001 On-Off SPOS19 [Trigger ID365] 51200183032A1D02 On DPOS42 Open [Trigger ID455] 51200182030C1F43 On DPOS12 Undefined
[Trigger ID276] 5100010001141001 On-Off SPOS20 [Trigger ID366] 51200181032A1D03 On DPOS42 Close [Trigger ID456] 51200184030C1F45 On DPOS12 Faulty
[Trigger ID277] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID367] 51200183032B1D02 On DPOS43 Open [Trigger ID457] 51200182030D1F43 On DPOS13 Undefined
[Trigger ID278] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID368] 51200181032B1D03 On DPOS43 Close [Trigger ID458] 51200184030D1F45 On DPOS13 Faulty
[Trigger ID279] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID369] 51200183032C1D02 On DPOS44 Open [Trigger ID459] 51200182030E1F43 On DPOS14 Undefined
[Trigger ID280] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID370] 51200181032C1D03 On DPOS44 Close [Trigger ID460] 51200184030E1F45 On DPOS14 Faulty
[Trigger ID281] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID371] 51200183032D1D02 On DPOS45 Open [Trigger ID461] 51200182030F1F43 On DPOS15 Undefined
[Trigger ID282] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID372] 51200181032D1D03 On DPOS45 Close [Trigger ID462] 51200184030F1F45 On DPOS15 Faulty
[Trigger ID283] 5120018303011D02 On DPOS1 Open [Trigger ID373] 51200183032E1D02 On DPOS46 Open [Trigger ID463] 5120018203101F43 On DPOS16 Undefined
[Trigger ID284] 5120018103011D03 On DPOS1 Close [Trigger ID374] 51200181032E1D03 On DPOS46 Close [Trigger ID464] 5120018403101F45 On DPOS16 Faulty
[Trigger ID285] 5120018303021D02 On DPOS2 Open [Trigger ID375] 51200183032F1D02 On DPOS47 Open [Trigger ID465] 5120018203111F43 On DPOS17 Undefined
[Trigger ID286] 5120018103021D03 On DPOS2 Close [Trigger ID376] 51200181032F1D03 On DPOS47 Close [Trigger ID466] 5120018403111F45 On DPOS17 Faulty
[Trigger ID287] 5120018303031D02 On DPOS3 Open [Trigger ID377] 5120018303301D02 On DPOS48 Open [Trigger ID467] 5120018203121F43 On DPOS18 Undefined
[Trigger ID288] 5120018103031D03 On DPOS3 Close [Trigger ID378] 5120018103301D03 On DPOS48 Close [Trigger ID468] 5120018403121F45 On DPOS18 Faulty
[Trigger ID301] 51200183030A1D02 On DPOS10 Open [Trigger ID391] 5120018303371D02 On DPOS55 Open [Trigger ID481] 5120018203191F43 On DPOS25 Undefined
[Trigger ID302] 51200181030A1D03 On DPOS10 Close [Trigger ID392] 5120018103371D03 On DPOS55 Close [Trigger ID482] 5120018403191F45 On DPOS25 Faulty
[Trigger ID303] 51200183030B1D02 On DPOS11 Open [Trigger ID393] 5120018303381D02 On DPOS56 Open [Trigger ID483] 51200182031A1F43 On DPOS26 Undefined
[Trigger ID304] 51200181030B1D03 On DPOS11 Close [Trigger ID394] 5120018103381D03 On DPOS56 Close [Trigger ID484] 51200184031A1F45 On DPOS26 Faulty
[Trigger ID305] 51200183030C1D02 On DPOS12 Open [Trigger ID395] 5120018303391D02 On DPOS57 Open [Trigger ID485] 51200182031B1F43 On DPOS27 Undefined
[Trigger ID306] 51200181030C1D03 On DPOS12 Close [Trigger ID396] 5120018103391D03 On DPOS57 Close [Trigger ID486] 51200184031B1F45 On DPOS27 Faulty
[Trigger ID307] 51200183030D1D02 On DPOS13 Open [Trigger ID397] 51200183033A1D02 On DPOS58 Open [Trigger ID487] 51200182031C1F43 On DPOS28 Undefined
[Trigger ID308] 51200181030D1D03 On DPOS13 Close [Trigger ID398] 51200181033A1D03 On DPOS58 Close [Trigger ID488] 51200184031C1F45 On DPOS28 Faulty
[Trigger ID309] 51200183030E1D02 On DPOS14 Open [Trigger ID399] 51200183033B1D02 On DPOS59 Open [Trigger ID489] 51200182031D1F43 On DPOS29 Undefined
[Trigger ID310] 51200181030E1D03 On DPOS14 Close [Trigger ID400] 51200181033B1D03 On DPOS59 Close [Trigger ID490] 51200184031D1F45 On DPOS29 Faulty
[Trigger ID311] 51200183030F1D02 On DPOS15 Open [Trigger ID401] 51200183033C1D02 On DPOS60 Open [Trigger ID491] 51200182031E1F43 On DPOS30 Undefined
[Trigger ID312] 51200181030F1D03 On DPOS15 Close [Trigger ID402] 51200181033C1D03 On DPOS60 Close [Trigger ID492] 51200184031E1F45 On DPOS30 Faulty
[Trigger ID313] 5120018303101D02 On DPOS16 Open [Trigger ID403] 51200183033D1D02 On DPOS61 Open [Trigger ID493] 51200182031F1F43 On DPOS31 Undefined
[Trigger ID314] 5120018103101D03 On DPOS16 Close [Trigger ID404] 51200181033D1D03 On DPOS61 Close [Trigger ID494] 51200184031F1F45 On DPOS31 Faulty
[Trigger ID315] 5120018303111D02 On DPOS17 Open [Trigger ID405] 51200183033E1D02 On DPOS62 Open [Trigger ID495] 5120018203201F43 On DPOS32 Undefined
[Trigger ID316] 5120018103111D03 On DPOS17 Close [Trigger ID406] 51200181033E1D03 On DPOS62 Close [Trigger ID496] 5120018403201F45 On DPOS32 Faulty
[Trigger ID317] 5120018303121D02 On DPOS18 Open [Trigger ID407] 51200183033F1D02 On DPOS63 Open [Trigger ID497] 5120018203211F43 On DPOS33 Undefined
[Trigger ID318] 5120018103121D03 On DPOS18 Close [Trigger ID408] 51200181033F1D03 On DPOS63 Close [Trigger ID498] 5120018403211F45 On DPOS33 Faulty
[Trigger ID333] 51200183031A1D02 On DPOS26 Open [Trigger ID423] 5120018303471D02 On DPOS71 Open
[Trigger ID334] 51200181031A1D03 On DPOS26 Close [Trigger ID424] 5120018103471D03 On DPOS71 Close
[Trigger ID335] 51200183031B1D02 On DPOS27 Open [Trigger ID425] 5120018303481D02 On DPOS72 Open
[Trigger ID336] 51200181031B1D03 On DPOS27 Close [Trigger ID426] 5120018103481D03 On DPOS72 Close
[Trigger ID337] 51200183031C1D02 On DPOS28 Open [Trigger ID427] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID338] 51200181031C1D03 On DPOS28 Close [Trigger ID428] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID339] 51200183031D1D02 On DPOS29 Open [Trigger ID429] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID340] 51200181031D1D03 On DPOS29 Close [Trigger ID430] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID341] 51200183031E1D02 On DPOS30 Open [Trigger ID431] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID342] 51200181031E1D03 On DPOS30 Close [Trigger ID432] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID343] 51200183031F1D02 On DPOS31 Open [Trigger ID433] 5120018203011F43 On DPOS1 Undefined
[Trigger ID344] 51200181031F1D03 On DPOS31 Close [Trigger ID434] 5120018403011F45 On DPOS1 Faulty
[Trigger ID345] 5120018303201D02 On DPOS32 Open [Trigger ID435] 5120018203021F43 On DPOS2 Undefined
[Trigger ID346] 5120018103201D03 On DPOS32 Close [Trigger ID436] 5120018403021F45 On DPOS2 Faulty

- 515 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 8.2-3 [End of E.Record-2]=512 (3/3)

[Trigger ID513] 5120018203291F43 On DPOS41 Undefined [Trigger ID603] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID693] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID514] 5120018403291F45 On DPOS41 Faulty [Trigger ID604] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID694] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID515] 51200182032A1F43 On DPOS42 Undefined [Trigger ID605] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID695] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID516] 51200184032A1F45 On DPOS42 Faulty [Trigger ID606] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID696] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID517] 51200182032B1F43 On DPOS43 Undefined [Trigger ID607] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID697] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID518] 51200184032B1F45 On DPOS43 Faulty [Trigger ID608] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID698] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID519] 51200182032C1F43 On DPOS44 Undefined [Trigger ID609] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID699] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID520] 51200184032C1F45 On DPOS44 Faulty [Trigger ID610] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID700] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID521] 51200182032D1F43 On DPOS45 Undefined [Trigger ID611] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID701] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID522] 51200184032D1F45 On DPOS45 Faulty [Trigger ID612] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID702] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID523] 51200182032E1F43 On DPOS46 Undefined [Trigger ID613] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID703] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID524] 51200184032E1F45 On DPOS46 Faulty [Trigger ID614] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID704] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID525] 51200182032F1F43 On DPOS47 Undefined [Trigger ID615] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID705] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID526] 51200184032F1F45 On DPOS47 Faulty [Trigger ID616] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID706] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID547] 51200182033A1F43 On DPOS58 Undefined [Trigger ID637] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID727] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID548] 51200184033A1F45 On DPOS58 Faulty [Trigger ID638] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID728] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID549] 51200182033B1F43 On DPOS59 Undefined [Trigger ID639] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID729] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID550] 51200184033B1F45 On DPOS59 Faulty [Trigger ID640] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID730] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID551] 51200182033C1F43 On DPOS60 Undefined [Trigger ID641] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID731] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID552] 51200184033C1F45 On DPOS60 Faulty [Trigger ID642] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID732] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID553] 51200182033D1F43 On DPOS61 Undefined [Trigger ID643] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID733] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID554] 51200184033D1F45 On DPOS61 Faulty [Trigger ID644] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID734] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID555] 51200182033E1F43 On DPOS62 Undefined [Trigger ID645] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID735] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID556] 51200184033E1F45 On DPOS62 Faulty [Trigger ID646] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID736] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID557] 51200182033F1F43 On DPOS63 Undefined [Trigger ID647] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID737] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID558] 51200184033F1F45 On DPOS63 Faulty [Trigger ID648] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID738] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID577] 522001000A011001 On Command Blocking [Trigger ID667] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID767] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID580] 523001000D011001 On ASEQ1 Start [Trigger ID670] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID581] 523001000D101001 On EMERGENCY Stop [Trigger ID671] (Not Assigned) Off -

- 516 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.2.2 Trigger modes

We can simplify the trigger signals into four: ‘On’, ‘Off ’, ‘On and Off ’, and ‘Change’ modes. Thus,
the user can should set a mode for respective triggers using [Trigger Mode1] and others.
(i) ‘On’ mode

In the ‘On’ mode, the event recorder can take an action when the trigger signal is switched to
‘On’, as shown in Figure 8.2-2. For the operation, set On for the [Trigger Mode*].
On
Pulse train
Off
Triggers generated Triggers generated Triggers generated
Figure 8.2-2 Trigger generated at ‘On’ mode
(ii) ‘Off’ mode

The ‘Off ’ mode is the other way of the ‘On’ mode; set Off for the operation.
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 8.2-3 Trigger generated at ‘Off’ mode
(iii) ‘On-Off’ mode

In the ‘On-Off ’ mode, the trigger signal is generated when the pulse train is changed from ‘On
to Off ’ and ‘Off to On’ both, as shown in Figure 8.2-4. Set On-Off for the operation
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 8.2-4 Trigger generated at ‘On-Off’ mode
(iv) ‘Change’ mode

The ‘Change mode’ is provided to detect the increment or the decrement of a number, when
new number is generated in the PLC logic. For example, this mode allows to detect the change

- 517 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
of group settings (e.g., the ‘SYS_CHG’ signal; which has been connected with the trigger#9
using the setting [Trigger ID9], as default; we have been discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Group setting for protection functions.)

Figure 8.2-5 illustrates the structure about the ‘Event Recored1’ group, which can be shown
the latest event#1 at the top structure (line ○
b ). The lines ○
c and ○
d describes how an event
occurred for the event#1. Preceding event#2, event#3, etc. are shown below the event#1.
Similarly, the information about the ‘Event Record2’ and ‘Event Record3’ groups are displayed
on the IED screen.
†Note:For more information about the screen operation, see Chapter User interface:
Record sub-menu.
Event Record1 ○
a Event record1 list
10:48 1/4
#1 2012-07-26 ○
b The latest event#1
12:34:51.223
F.Record clear ○
c Trigger inform ation
On ○
d Trigger m ode inform ation
#2 2012-07-25
Screen scroll down 10:56:12.021
○
e Event#2
Set group change

4
#3 2012-07-25 ○
f Event#3
10:31:12.159
F.Record clear
On
#4 2012-07-23 ○
g Event#4
23:56:12.159
Figure 8.2-5 Event information grouped in the Event record1
8.2.4 Setup for the event recorder

Consider that “CLEAR” key, which is denoted with Data ID ‘240001 31000E1730’, should be
sorted into the ‘Event record1’ group. The settings [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of
E.Record-2]=512 have been made as default; hence, we may select it with the trigger#157 by
setting the [Trigger ID157]= ‘240001 31000E1730’. Set On for the [Trigger Mode157], because
the signal should be recorded when the key is pressed. Remember that the preferred name for
the Trigger ID157 should be set using the [Event Name157].

- 518 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.2.5 Setting
Setting of EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710)
s value
End of E.Record-1 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group1 256
End of E.Record-2 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group2 512
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal1 for the operation –
Tigger Mode1 On / Off / On-Off / Change – Mode setting for the detection –
Event name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
8.2.6 Signal
EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
ER1_CLR 3001001001 Clearing the data in Event group1
POWER ON 3100001001 Detection of switch On

- 519 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Disturbance recorder
A phenomenon of fault occurring will be recorded in the disturbance recorder and its
phenomenon is recorded within 1ms accuracy. The recorder starts when TRC trip command is
issued. The recorder, additionally, will be instructed by PLC function, so an instruction is
managed with a setting. The amount of recording time and the sampling time are adjustable.
Therefore, measured values, such as current voltage and frequency, are recorded in accordance
with the amount and the sampling time. Logic signals are also recorded together with
disturbance phenomena. The recorder can hold up to 256 logic signals. The number of
disturbance phenomena to be recorded is limited by the amount of recording time and the
sampling time.
8.3.1 Recording time and amount

(i) Time settings
Period of the recording is set using the [Record Time]. The disturbance recorder can operate
before the occurrence of the fault; the time before the fault occurrence can be set using the
[Pre-fault Time]. The user can choose a time among 0.1 sec. to 10.0 sec.
Setting [Record Time]
Setting [Pre-fault time]

Fault
Pre-fault information Succeeding formation
Start of recording Operating mode information of fault recorder is generated. End of recording
Figure 8.3-1 Period of recording time

(ii) Sampling rate setting
Sampling time is defined with setting [Sampling rate]; it can be selected either 7.5 electrical
degrees or 15 electrical degrees. For example, if the user set 7.5 for the [Sampling rate], the
disturbance recorder starts to collect the date in the sampling rate (2400Hz) in 50Hz system.
(iii) Trip command setting

As shown in Figure 8.3-1, the disturbance recorder starts when the operating mode
information of fault recorder is generated, provided On is set for the [Trip Trig.Sw]. The user
has to set Off for the setting, if the disturbance recorder shall not start with the trip command.

- 520 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.3.2 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena

Note that the maximum number for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the
recording time and the sampling rate. Table 8.3-1 illustrates the maximum number. For
example, the 255 phenomena can be memorized in the disturbance recorder, when the [Record
Time] =1 and the [Sampling Rate] =7.5° elec., if the ○
A operates in 50Hz system. The user can
also check the maximum number on the IED screen (See Figure 8.3-2).
Table 8.3-1 Max number depending on time settings
Recording Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
period set with Setting [Sampling Rate] in 50Hz sys. Setting [Sampling Rate] in 60Hz sys.
[Record Time] 7.5º 15º 7.5º 15º
1 sec 204 255 255 255
3 sec 78 146 93 170
5 sec 46 93 56 102
8.3.3 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder
Logical signals (i.e., 256) are recorded as disturbance phenomena.
Number of logical signals

As mentioned earlier, the disturbance recorder can hold the traces of logic signals during the
recording time. Using settings [Binary Signal*], the user can select 256 logic signal arbitrary.
The logic signals that the user has selected should be termed with user’s preferred names using
settings [Binary Sig.Name*]. Table 8.3-2 exemplifies the default settings.

- 521 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 8.3-2 Setting list for logic signals

[Binary
[Binary Sig.
Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name] Origins Settings Data IDs Sig. Origins Settings Data IDs Origins
Name]
Name]
[Binary Signal1] 4A1001 8300001B6F GEN.TRIP TRC [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal2] 4A1001 8400001B64 GEN.ALARM TRC [Binary Signal92] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal192] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal3] 415001 8000011B6D DIF1-OPT DIFHZ [Binary Signal93] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal193] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal4] 415001 8400011B6E DIF2-OPT DIFHZ [Binary Signal94] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal194] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal5] 415001 8000021B65 REF1-OPT DIFHZ [Binary Signal95] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal195] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal6] 415001 8100021B66 REF2-OPT DIFHZ [Binary Signal96] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal196] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal7] 415001 8000041B61 DIF-SV-DET DIFHZ [Binary Signal97] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal197] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal8] 415001 8000051B60 REF-SV-DET DIFHZ [Binary Signal98] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal198] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal9] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal99] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal199] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal57] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal157] (Not Assigned) - ….

- 522 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.3.4 Trigger settings for PLC programming

If the PLC program instructs the operation of the disturbance recorder, the user should set the
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]. That is, the program-output points should be set for the settings
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]; then, set On for the [Trigger SW1] to [Trigger SW4], respectively.

Figure 8.3-2 indicates the maximum number of the recording operations as the number is
changed depending on the time settings, which are shown in Table 8.3-1. Figure 8.3-3 shows
the operation time and the date for the disturbance recorder and the figure illustrates five
disturbance phenomena have been memorized in the IED.
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2
_Record List >
Number of items
5/77
Clear Records +
Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
Operating counter
Figure 8.3-2 Running counter and Max number in the disturbance recorder
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/5
#1 2012-07-25 ○
a Disturbance record#1
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 ○
b Disturbance record#2
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/21 ○
c Disturbance record#3
Screen scroll down 13:11:29.621
#4 2012-07-02 ○
d Disturbance record#4
23:32:09.015
#5 2012-06-20 ○
e Disturbance record#5
09:37:48.915
Figure 8.3-3 Detail information in the disturbance recorder
The information in the disturbance recorder is managed in the COMTRADE format,

hence, the user can transfer the disturbance recording file to the PC using the engineering tool
‘GR-TIEMS’. Figure 8.3-4 shows the example of the GR-TIMES screen. For more information,
see Chapter Engineering tool.

- 523 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Figure 8.3-4 Screen shot from GR-TIEMS

- 524 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.3.6 Setting
Setting of DISTURB_REC(Function ID: 200401)
Uni Default
ts setting value
Record Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Time for disturbance recording 3.0

Sampling Rate 7.5 - 15.0 deg Sampling rate in electrical degree 7.5
Pre-fault Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Pre-fault time 0.3
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal1 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trigger SW1 Off / On – Enabling the signal1 of user’s program Off
Trigger ID2 - – Signal2 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trip Trig.SW Off / On – Operation with operating command On
Binary Signal1 (Preferred DataID) – Logic signal1 for the operation –
Binary Sig.Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the logic signal1 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Binary Signal256 (Preferred DataID) – Mode setting for the detection –
Binary
(Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal768 –
Sig.Name256

- 525 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.3.7 Signal
DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
30A0001001 DSTR_CLR Data erased
80A0031001 DSTR_MADE Completion for writing the disturbance data
32A0011001 DSTR_MAX Maximum possible number of the operations
32A0021001 DSTR_NUM Operation counter
22A0051001 DSTR_UPDATE Date update
80A0041001 DSTRING Writing the disturbance data

- 526 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Transferred information during fault

The IED can transfer the information during the fault in the IEC61850 communication†.
†Note:The transferring is only available in “Edition1 with option” or “Editon2” of the

IEC61850. For the information about the option, see Chapter Communication
protocol: IEC 61850 communication: About protocol, separately.
8.4.1 Transferred metering values

Table 8.4-1 shows transferring information during the fault†. When the IED is running on the
IEC61850 Edition1 option, these signals should be mapped for Private Object AnInDatUpd.
When the IED is running on the IEC61850 Editon2, they should be mapped for Normal Object
AnIn.
Table 8.4-1 Transferred values taken during the fault
Signals
Items Unit
names
Ida FLTMS0142 A
Idb FLTMS0144 A
Idc FLTMS0146 A
Ide FLTMS0148 A
†Note:See section 8.1.1(iii) about the information about fault recording quantities. To
find Data ID, see section 8.4.3.

- 527 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.4.2 Transferred state information

Information collected by setting [OP Mode ID*] can transferred with the signals in Table 8.4-2.
For more information about the statuses, see sections 8.1.3(i) and (ii).
Table 8.4-2 Transferred information by OP mode settings

Items Signal names
State taken by setting [OP Mode ID1] FLTOPM001
…. ….
Logical state taken by setting [OP Mode ID201] FLTOPM201
…. ….

- 528 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
8.4.3 Transferring record value and information

 Signal generated for transferring
Element ID Signal name Description
3130001180 FLT_CNT Count of Fault Record
9030001006 FLT_TM Fault Time
8030001B60 FLT_PH_A Fault Phase A
8130001B61 FLT_PH_B Fault Phase B
8230001B62 FLT_PH_C Fault Phase C
8330001B63 FLT_PH_N Fault Phase N
8030001B20 FLT_OP_A Operating Phase A
8130001B21 FLT_OP_B Operating Phase B
8230001B22 FLT_OP_C Operating Phase C
8430001B24 FLT_OP2_A Reserved
8530001B25 FLT_OP2_B Reserved
8630001B26 FLT_OP2_C Reserved
8830001B28 FLT_OP_1 Reserved
8930001B29 FLT_OP_2 Reserved
8A30001B2A FLT_OP_3 Reserved
8B30001B2B FLT_OP_4 Reserved
8C30001B2C FLT_OP_5 Reserved
8D30001B2D FLT_OP_6 Reserved
4330001001 FLTMS0001 Value taken during the fault (0001)
43300A1001 FLTMS0011 Value taken during the fault (0011)
43300B1001 FLTMS0012 Value taken during the fault (0012)
43300C1001 FLTMS0013 Value taken during the fault (0013)
43300D1001 FLTMS0014 Value taken during the fault (0014)
43300E1001 FLTMS0015 Value taken during the fault (0015)
43300F1001 FLTMS0016 Value taken during the fault (0016)

- 529 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 530 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 531 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 532 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

4330AA1001 FLTMS0171 Value taken during the fault (0171)
4330AB1001 FLTMS0172 Value taken during the fault (0172)
4330AC1001 FLTMS0173 Value taken during the fault (0173)
4330AD1001 FLTMS0174 Value taken during the fault (0174)
4330AE1001 FLTMS0175 Value taken during the fault (0175)
4330AF1001 FLTMS0176 Value taken during the fault (0176)
4330BA1001 FLTMS0187 Value taken during the fault (0187)
4330BB1001 FLTMS0188 Value taken during the fault (0188)
4330BC1001 FLTMS0189 Value taken during the fault (0189)
4330BD1001 FLTMS0190 Value taken during the fault (0190)
4330BE1001 FLTMS0191 Value taken during the fault (0191)
4330BF1001 FLTMS0192 Value taken during the fault (0192)

- 533 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

4330CA1001 FLTMS0203 Value taken during the fault (0203)
4330CB1001 FLTMS0204 Value taken during the fault (0204)
4330CC1001 FLTMS0205 Value taken during the fault (0205)
4330CD1001 FLTMS0206 Value taken during the fault (0206)
4330CE1001 FLTMS0207 Value taken during the fault (0207)
4330CF1001 FLTMS0208 Value taken during the fault (0208)
4330DA1001 FLTMS0219 Value taken during the fault (0219)
4330DB1001 FLTMS0220 Value taken during the fault (0220)
4330DC1001 FLTMS0221 Value taken during the fault (0221)
4330DD1001 FLTMS0222 Value taken during the fault (0222)
4330DE1001 FLTMS0223 Value taken during the fault (0223)
4330DF1001 FLTMS0224 Value taken during the fault (0224)
4330EA1001 FLTMS0235 Value taken during the fault (0235)
4330EB1001 FLTMS0236 Value taken during the fault (0236)
4330EC1001 FLTMS0237 Value taken during the fault (0237)
4330ED1001 FLTMS0238 Value taken during the fault (0238)
4330EE1001 FLTMS0239 Value taken during the fault (0239)
4330EF1001 FLTMS0240 Value taken during the fault (0240)

- 534 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

4330FA1001 FLTMS0251 Value taken during the fault (0251)
4330FB1001 FLTMS0252 Value taken during the fault (0252)
4330FC1001 FLTMS0253 Value taken during the fault (0253)
4330FD1001 FLTMS0254 Value taken during the fault (0254)
4330FE1001 FLTMS0255 Value taken during the fault (0255)
4330FF1001 FLTMS0256 Value taken during the fault (0256)
8050001135 FLTOPM001 Status at Operation identifier ID1
8A500A1135 FLTOPM011 Status at Operation identifier ID11
8B500B1135 FLTOPM012 Status at Operation identifier ID12
8C500C1135 FLTOPM013 Status at Operation identifier ID13
8D500D1135 FLTOPM014 Status at Operation identifier ID14
8E500E1135 FLTOPM015 Status at Operation identifier ID15
8F500F1135 FLTOPM016 Status at Operation identifier ID16

- 535 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 536 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 537 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

8050801135 FLTOPM201 Status at Logical operation identifier ID201
8A508A1135 FLTOPM211 Status at Logical operation identifier ID211
8B508B1135 FLTOPM212 Status at Logical operation identifier ID212
8C508C1135 FLTOPM213 Status at Logical operation identifier ID213
8D508D1135 FLTOPM214 Status at Logical operation identifier ID214
8E508E1135 FLTOPM215 Status at Logical operation identifier ID215
8F508F1135 FLTOPM216 Status at Logical operation identifier ID216
8A509A1135 FLTOPM227 Status at Logical operation identifier ID227
8B509B1135 FLTOPM228 Status at Logical operation identifier ID228
8C509C1135 FLTOPM229 Status at Logical operation identifier ID229
8D509D1135 FLTOPM230 Status at Logical operation identifier ID230
8E509E1135 FLTOPM231 Status at Logical operation identifier ID231
8F509F1135 FLTOPM232 Status at Logical operation identifier ID232
8050A01135 FLTOPM233 Status at Logical operation identifier ID233

- 538 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

8A50AA1135 FLTOPM243 Status at Logical operation identifier ID243
8B50AB1135 FLTOPM244 Status at Logical operation identifier ID244
8C50AC1135 FLTOPM245 Status at Logical operation identifier ID245
8D50AD1135 FLTOPM246 Status at Logical operation identifier ID246
8E50AE1135 FLTOPM247 Status at Logical operation identifier ID247
8F50AF1135 FLTOPM248 Status at Logical operation identifier ID248
8050B01135 FLTOPM249 Status at Logical operation identifier ID249
8A50BA1135 FLTOPM259 Status at Logical operation identifier ID259
8B50BB1135 FLTOPM260 Status at Logical operation identifier ID260
8C50BC1135 FLTOPM261 Status at Logical operation identifier ID261
8D50BD1135 FLTOPM262 Status at Logical operation identifier ID262
8E50BE1135 FLTOPM263 Status at Logical operation identifier ID263
8F50BF1135 FLTOPM264 Status at Logical operation identifier ID264

- 539 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
9 Monitoring function
Accumulated time 545 Signal and Measurand 549
-Monitoring results 549
Counter features – -Software 31 measurands 549
-Information in GCNT 544
Total time measurements –
Dead band features – -Information in TOTALTIM 546
-V, I, Frequency. 542
-Phase 542
-GCNT 544
-TOTALTIM 546
Metering features –
-Information 542
-Information on the screen 542

- 540 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Outline
The monitoring function is provided to measure the number of power quantities and statistics
data obtained on the VCT and BI circuits†. When the measuring instruments start measures
quantities, mathematical means is applied to the quantities from the circuits so that the actual
data (i.e., secondary value) is shown accurately on the IED screen.
†Note:The VCT and BIO structures and their features are discussed in Chapter
Technical description.

- 541 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Metering data (Metering group)

Several abbreviations are screened for metering data, which is tabulated in the below table.
Table 9.2-1 Metering data

Gr. Displayed quantities Abbreviations
Metering Differential Current Ida, Idb, Idc, Ide
9.2.1 Metering information on the screen

The user can examine the values provided by the metering function on the IED screen; Figure
9.2-1 illustrates the information about currents. The metering function has minimum sensing
threshold; thus, the user shall notice that zero (0) is displayed, if the provided data is lesser
than the threshold.
Metering
10:48 1/4
Ida
12.345A
Idb
12.345A
Idc
12.345A
Figure 9.2-1 Current meter on the IED screen

Note: If any quantity does not enter to the VCT, the value on the screen is displayed
such as “***.**” and “–––––”.
9.2.2 Setting for the report (Dead band feature)

The data collected in the metering function will be sent to the network upward, but the data
sent may give the network a heavy burden because the amount of the data sent could be larger.
Thus, the dead band (SD) feature is designed not to send unnecessary data will not be sent
(say, the dead band feature regulates not to send the same data repeatedly). In practice the
analog values in the metering are not always the same; hence, the regulation for not sending
is defined by the user can change it using a setting in each power quantity.
(i) Counting operation in SD feature

Figure 9.2-2 illustrates the operation for the SD feature about entering a current. At Time=0,
the current enters into the VCT and it is observed (Time=0). When the entering current is
being beyond the upper limit (Time=a), a repeated number is set for ‘1’. If the entering current
is out of the upper and lower limits (Time=b), the repeat number gets to have ‘2’. Note that the
repeated number is kept to have ‘2’ even if the entering current goes back within the upper
and lower limits (Time=c). The repeated number will be larger than the setting [Period SD]=3,

- 542 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
when the entering current is out of the upper and lower limits again (i.e., Time=d). Then, at
Time=e, the value of the entering current will be sent to the network, because the repeated
number is incremented. After that, the repeated number will be set zero (0); the new positon
for the SD feature is set (i.e., from Time=e).
Entering current (I)
Following SD position with [ISD]

Upper limit
First SD position with [ISD] First SD standardization level
Lower limit
Repeat number
4
3
2
1
0 Time
a b c d e f g h i j k
Figure 9.2-2 Dead band operation with [PeriodSD]=3
(ii) Check cycle in SD feature

The check cycle is defined for 500 milliseconds in the SD feature. (i.e., interval ab in Figure
9.2-2 is equal to 500ms). If the entering current, in Figure 9.2-2, is required to send promptly
when the entering current is beyond the limits, set 0 for the setting [Period SD].

- 543 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Statistics data (Counter group)

The user can check the counting numbers provided by the general counter function†. Table
9.3-1 and others show the user to find the count numbers in the counter group.
Table 9.3-1 Counter data
Counter number Correspondences
Group Origin of info (default)
displayed to GCNTs†
COUNT1 (Not assigned) GCNT01
Counter COUNT3 (Not assigned) GCNT03
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter General control function: Counter function for the general (GCNT).

- 544 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Statistics data (Accumulated time)

Over all running time for which the IED has operated is provided in “Accumulated Time”. The
user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen. The time will be cleared when
the IED is switched off.
Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
ACT_TIME +
***d **h **m
Figure 9.4-1 Example of Accumulated Time screen

Note: The user can also clear the Accumulated time in the screen menu. For key
operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Statistics sub-menu.

- 545 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Statistics data (Total time group)

Total times are provided by the total time measurement function†, as shown in Table 9.3-1.
Table 9.5-1 Total time data
Correspondences
Group Displayed quantities Origin of time data
to TOTALTIM†
TOTAL TIME 1 TOTALTIM01 function TT1
Total time TOTAL TIME 3 TOTALTIM03 function TT3
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter Control and monitoring application: Total time measurement

function
9.5.1 Time information on the screen

The user can see the total times on the IED screen.
Total Time
10:48 1/12
TOTAL TIME 1 +
****d **h **m
TOTAL TIME 2 +
****d **h **m
TOTAL TIME 3 +
****d **h **m
Figure 9.5-1 Example of Total Time screen

Note: See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Statistics sub-menu.
9.5.2 Report setting for TOTALTIM (Dead band feature)

The data collected with the TOTALTIM function will be sent to the network; thus, the user
should set a regulation value using the SD feature in the TOTALTIME function. See section
Setting for the report (Dead band) in the TOTALTIME function.

- 546 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions

Operating status of relay elements, binary IO modules, communication modules, GOOSE, and
diagnostics are displayed in the monitoring function.
(i) Relay element

(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-
menu: Relay Elements. The relay functions and their characteristics are discussed in Chapter
Relay application).
(ii) Communication
menu: Communication. The communication features about the LAN port is discussed in
Chapter Communication protocol: LAN communication. The hardware information is
discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module).
(iii) Binary IO
menu: Binary I/O. The structure and its operation is discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module).
(iv) Goose monitoring

menu: Goose monitoring. The information about the GOOSE is discussed in Chapter
Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication).
(v) Diagnostics
menu: Diagnostics sub-menu. The information about the diagnostics is discussed in Chapter
Automatic supervision).

- 547 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting
Metering settings in MES (Function ID: 710001)
Unit Default
s setting value
PeriodSD 0-4 – Period of Sending Dead band 0

- 548 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signal and measurand (Data ID)

(i) Common signal
MES_MANAGEMENT (Function ID: 711001)
3100901060 CT-ERR CT Monitoring Result
3100921060 V0-ERR V0 Monitoring Result
3100931060 V2-ERR V2 Monitoring Result
(ii) Measurand in Software 31

Measurand Data IDs Measurand to be used in Software 31
GR-TIEMS and
Metering values Types of inputs Unit IEC61850 Fault recording Note
IEC103
Ida DIF-L Phase-A Id measurement secondary for fault record / metering A 7110014301A71050 #N/A 7110014301A71050
Idb DIF-L Phase-B Id measurement secondary for fault record / metering A 7110014301A71052 #N/A 7110014301A71052
Idc DIF-L Phase-C Id measurement secondary for fault record / metering A 7110014301A71054 #N/A 7110014301A71054
Ide DIFG-L Id0 measurement secondary for fault record / metering A 7110014301A91056 #N/A 7110014301A91056

- 549 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10 Automatic supervision
Aux. contacts monitoring 581 Interruption 563
BIO module#1 error 568 LAN pinging error 576
BIO module#2 error 569 LRE error 577
BIO module#3 error 570 MRAM memory error 559
Check-sum error 556 PLC Data error 573
Clock error 566 Power supply failure 572
ECC memory error 558 Program code error 561
Error detection of differential current 583 RAM error 557
FPGA problem 560 ROM and RAM mismatch 555
GOOSE publishing error 580 Sampling error 564
HMI malfunction 571 Setting error 565
Supervision of communication setting 578

- 550 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Outline of automatic supervision

In power system, the protection function is not required to operate during normal conditions.
That is, the protection function should stay silent for the unfaulty conditions, but it has to start
respond immediately upon the occurrence of the fault. Therefore, as for the operation of the
protection system, the detection of an unhealthy condition, such as malfunction or errors in
the hardware or in the software, is requisite within the IED. The automatic supervision
function is designed to detect the unhealthy condition within the IED; the following concepts
are taken into account:
 The operating performance of the protection system should not be distorted.
 Supervision should be carried out by itself without any failure whenever
possible.
 The protection system should identify the fault instantly upon its occurrence.
Tips: The alarms can be blocked when Off is set for the switch [A.M.F]. The switch can
be used to remove alarms during testing. See Chapter User interface: Test sub-
menu for more information.
(i) Error levels

In the applications and the hardware, the number of items are supervised for detecting the
operation failure; hence, the results of the supervision functions are grouped and they are
classified into five error-levels to identify the error degree directly: warning (level 5=the minor
error) to the serious error (level 1=the critical error). Incidentally, zero (level 0) can be
identified as no error. Table 10.1-1 shows the errors grouped by the error degree. The grouping
is provided, for setting the degree of error, the user can select an user-defined degree for each
error occurs randomly. If a number of failures occur on several levels at same time, the
automatic supervision function selects the critical error among them to represent the error
inside the IED.
Table 10.1-1 Meanings and error degree in the supervision function
Levels Degree of error Example failures and errors
0 No error No error exists
1‡ Serious Fatal failures such as the memory errors within the IED
2†‡ Serious (Comm.) Failures on tele-communication
3†‡ Minor Failure on LAN (Ethernet) communication
4 Alarm Minor errors such as invalid errors by the user using settings
5 Warning Detection of warnings classified by the user using settings
†Note:Level 2 and level 3 are shown, but the difference between the level 2 and the level
3 not given; thus, we can take the both having the same degree.
‡Note: The IEC 61850quality value is also changed depending on the error level. For
more information, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication: Quality signal.

- 551 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Error LED and LCD error message

The IED has LEDs and LCD screen† so that the automatic supervision function issues a result
for the LEDs and the LCD screen. When the IED is linked with the SAS, it is possible to
transfer the result for the LED and LCD screen using the communication system. Table 10.1-2
shows that which indicators are used for result generation in the function.
Table 10.1-2 Displays on LEDs, LCD, and SAS
Levels “In service” LED “Error” LED Error message on LCD
0: No error On Off (Not displayed)
1: Serious Off On Displayed
2: Serious (Comm.)‡ On On Displayed
3: Minor On (Off§) On Displayed
4: Alarm On Off Displayed
5: Warning On Off Displayed
†Note:For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline and Diagnostics.
‡Note:It depends on the degree of the communication failure.
§Note:If the “In service” has to be turned off while a minor error (level:3) is occurring, set
On for the setting [ErrorLED_cond].
The user can see a current error information in Monitoring sub-menu† on the LCD screen†
(see Figure 10.1-1); Table 10.1-3 shows the six detail information, which the user can examine
carefully using the hexadecimal number. When two or more errors occur at the same time, an
error code is given by the summation of the error codes. That is, when X and Y errors (e.g., X-
error-code ‘00000002’ and Y-error-code ‘00000004’) occur, the sum value ‘00000006’ is screened.
CP1M(ROM/RAM) error 1/1 C u r r e n t e r r o r i n d i c a te d b y S u p e r v i s i o n
10:48 C u r r e n t l o c a l ti m e ( N o t E r r o r o c c u r r i n g ti m e )
[Serious error] E rro r d e g re e (le ve l) d is p la ye d
D e ta i l e d i n f o r m a ti o n i n H e x a d e c i m a l d u m p
[00000011] [01234567] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[01234567]
[01234567]
[01234567]
[00000000] [ “Top left” ][ “Top right” ]
[ “Middle left” ][ “Middle right” ]
[ “Bottom left” ][ “Bottom right” ]
Figure 10.1-1 Example error codes and detailed information on Diagnostics sub-menu
†Note:See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics. It will not be
updated automatically. If new information is required, refresh LED screen again.
Table 10.1-3 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in the ROM and the RAM error (example)
Display Meaning of the detailed information
area Left column Right column
00000001: ROM read error
Top row ROM address
00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle row RAM address ROM value
Bottom row RAM value (No information displayed)

- 552 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Error outputs with contacts and binary output circuits

Automatic supervision function drives a contact of the power supply module (PWS)† when an
error occurs without warning; additionally, binary output circuits (BOs‡) will be locked out to
drive when serious error (Level 1=Critical error) is detected.
Table 10.1-4 FAIL contact, BO, LED outputs depending on levels
PWS† contact outputs
Error FAIL1 terminal FAIL2 terminal Error
BO‡ locked out
Levels Screw No. 1 Screw No. 3 Screw No. 7 Screw No. 9 LED
(N/C) (N/O) (N/C) (N/O)
0: No error Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
1:Serious Closed Open Closed Open Locked out On
2:Serious(Comm.) Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
3:Minor Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
4:Alarm Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
5:Warning Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
Error output by PWS contact†

If serious error (Level1) is detected by Automatic supervision function, normally-closed-contact
(N/C) on FAIL1 and FAIL2 terminals is closed. On the other hand, the N/O contact is open on
the serious error, as shown in Table 10.1-4.
Locking out of BO circuit operation‡

BO is locked out to operate, when serious error (Level1) occurs. Serious error stops trip signal
generations to the BO circuit. When serious error is removed, the operation will be recovered.
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Power supply module. FAIL1 (FAIL2) contact
is in Form-C; terminal-screw No. 2 & 4 (8 &10) are provided with the common.
‡Note:BO is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Binary output circuit.
(iv) Affection of application operation by error levels

The error levels influence the operation of relay and control and monitoring application.
Table 10.1-5 Operation states in the IED applications affected by the error levels
Levels Relay applications Control and monitoring applications Notes
0: No error – –
1: Serious Stopped Stopped
2: Serious (Comm.) Not affected† Not affected
3: Minor Not affected Stopped
4: Alarm Not affected Not affected
5: Warning Not affected Not affected
†Note: Serious (Comm.) can be related to communication of tele-protection applications.

- 553 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Generic supervision tasks

Displaying errors regarding to common problems are summarized in Table 10.2-1; the error is
cleared when recovered
Table 10.2-1 Supervision items and error levels for generic

Detailed Error
Sec. No. Supervision items (Screen message) Info. Lvl. LED
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) Displayed 1 On
10.2.6 Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.7 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.8 Supervision of task operation (RUN error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.9 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) Displayed 3 On
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.14 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.17 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) Displayed 3 On
10.2.18 Supervision of power supply module (Power error) N/A 3 On
10.2.19 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error) Displayed 3 On
10.2.20 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error) Displayed 3 On
10.2.21 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) Displayed 3 On
10.2.22 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) Displayed 1 On
10.2.23 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error) Displayed 3 On
10.2.24 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) Displayed 3 On
10.2.25 Aux. contacts monitoring (DOPS/TOPS faulty or undefined) Displayed 3 On
10.2.26 Error detection of differential current (Id error) Displayed 3 On

- 554 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error)

The ROM and RAM on the CPU module are verified every two minutes; when the error is
found, an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, checking error on
the RAM and the ROM is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1.
1Note: The CPU module is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing
and communication module: Processing module.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-2 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ROMRAM

Message and level Meaning of the information
Mismatch between the RAM and ROM detected on the following
CP*_ (ROM/RAM) error module instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Error level Serious error (Level 1)
Table 10.2-3 Detailed information in CHK_ROMRAM

Top 00000001: Read error in ROM
ROM address
row 00000002: Mismatch between ROM and RAM
Middle
RAM address ROM value
row
Bottom
RAM value (No information displayed)
row

- 555 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error)

The check sum in the memory on the CPU module is verified every four minutes; when the
error is found the error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, the check-sum error
on the memory is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error message
is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-4 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUM

Sum error in the memory detected on the following module:
CP*_ (SUM) error
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-5 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUM

Top 00000001: Read error in ROM
Sum value calculated
row 00000002: Sum incorrect in ROM RAM
Middle Address information that read error occurs

Sum value pre-programmed
row in the ROM
Bottom
(No information displayed) (No information displayed)
row

- 556 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error)

The read-write operation on RAM circuit of the CPU module is verified at any time; when the
error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the RAM is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-6 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RAM

Error detection in the RAM located on the following module
CP*_(RAM) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-7 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_RAM

Top
Read value Write value
row
Middle
Error address (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row

- 557 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error)

The error-correcting code memory (ECC memory), in the CPU module, is verified at any time.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking error on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
is made promptly when the error is solved.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-8 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ECC

Error in the ECC is detected on the following module instructed
CP*_ (ECC) error with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-9 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ECC

Top
err_cnt value Error address
row
Middle Address for rewriting failure occurred after
Number of detections of bit errors
row the correction of single bit error
ECC status
00000001: Completion of correction
Bottom Number of rewriting failure occurred 00000002: Failure of correction
row after the correction of single bit error 00000004: Detection of single error
00000008: Detection of several errors
00000010: Writing failure of data correction

- 558 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM)

The error detection on the Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory (MRAM memory) of the
CPU module is verified every 1 second; when the error is found, an error message is displayed
by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The function supervise for the MRAM on the CPU module1. Clearing the error
message is made in 1 second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-10 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_MRAM

Error detection in the MRAM located on the following module:
CP*_(MRAM) error
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-11 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_MRAM

Top 00000001: Error detected with 0xaaaaaaaa
Address at error occurs
row 00000002: Error detected with 0x555555555
Middle
(No information is displayed) (No information is displayed)
row
Bottom
row

- 559 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.6 Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error)

Detecting the error in the FPGA is achieved when the CPU module detects fatal failures.
(i) Error level

The error level is set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on the
FPGA is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED begins to restart its operation
automatically. Clearing the error message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-12 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FPGA

Problem detected in the FPGA on the following module
CP*_ (FPAG) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-13 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_FPGA

Top
00000004: FPGA mode 00000008: FPAG interruption process
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 560 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.7 Supervision of program codes (CPU error)

The program code in the ROM and RAM on the CPU module is verified every time; when the
error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, detecting Program
errors on the RAM and the ROM are carried out every second. If the error is detected, the IED
restarts its operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1.
Clearing the error message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-14 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PROGRAM

Error detection in the RAM and ROM located on the following
CP*_(CPU) error module:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-15 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PROGRAM

00000000: Add error
Top 00000002: Sub error
00000004: Mul error Task number causing overflow
row 00000008: Div error
00010000: Detection of overflow in Task stack
Middle
Head address of overflowing task (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row

- 561 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.8 Supervision of task operation (RUN error)

Task operations in the IED are monitored every two minutes. Error messages can be screened
when the tasks stop. The tasks are supervised every 15 minutes if they are idling.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) unconditionally.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, the error message can be shown on the LCD and the LED is lit.
Table 10.2-16 Error messages provided by the supervisor in MNT_LOGIC

CP1M(RUN) error Detection of the stopped task in the IED
Table 10.2-17 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in MNT_LOGIC

WW XX YY ZZ
Top 10000000: Supervision function itself
WW: FB index in SSP2(2)
20000000: Idle task (1)
row XX: FB index in SSP2(1)
40000000: Idle task (2)
YY: FB index in SSP1(2)
YY: FB index in SSP1(1)
WW XX YY ZZ WW XX YY ZZ
Middle WW: FB index in PCM(2) WW: FB index in 100MS(2)
row XX: FB index in PCM(1) XX: FB index in 100MS(1)
YY: FB index in SSP3(2) YY: FB index in 10MS
YY: FB index in SSP3(1) YY: FB index in 5MS
WW XX YY ZZ WW XX YY ZZ
Bottom WW: FB index in CONVSET WW: FB index in SUB4
row XX: FB index in NMT XX: FB index in SUB3
YY: FB index in 200MS(2) YY: FB index in SUB2
YY: FB index in 200MS(1) YY: FB index in SUB1

- 562 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.9 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error)

The occurrences of non-maskable-interruptions (NMIs) on the CPU module are examined
every time; when the interruption is triggered, an interruption message is detected and
displayed.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision; detecting the
interruption carried out at any time. If the interruption is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error
message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-18 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_NMI

Interruptions occurs on the following module instructed with
CP*_(NMI) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-19 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in NMI

Top
NMI code LR register
row
Middle
SRR0 register SPP1 register
row
Bottom
Stack pointer FRSCR register
row

- 563 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error)

The sampling error is verified at any time; when the error is found an error message is
displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; sampling errors are
checked every seconds. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation automatically.
The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error message is made in a
second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-20 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SAMPLING

Sampling error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (SMP) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-21 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SAMPLING

Top
00000001: Occurrence of error Diff time
row
Middle
Current timing Pervious timing
row
Bottom
row

- 564 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error)

The values of the Settings are checked every second; the error message is displayed when the
erroneous value is found.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; the detection is
carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not try to restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the saved settings in the CPU module1. When the
erroneous setting is removed, the error messages will be cleared in a second.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-22 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SETTING

Setting error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (Setting) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-23 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SETTING

Top 00000001: Failure exists in the common settings Offset address corresponding to
00000002: Failure exists in the group setting
row 00000004: Error data found in the setting table the failure in the common settings
Middle Offset address corresponding to the failure in Error information about the
row the group setting setting table
Bottom
row

- 565 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error)

The state of the real time clock (RTC) is checked every five minutes; the error message is
displayed when the clock stops.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program
the level using setting [CHK_RTC:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_RTC:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets five (5) minutes is set to detect the failure; it is reset within five minutes
when the clock starts to operate again.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-24 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RTC

Error detection is performed on the RTC on the following
CP*_(RTC) error module:
CP1M: CPU module
Error level Minor error (Level 3)
Table 10.2-25 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_RTC

Top 00000001: shows that the error exists in
Time in the second when the RTC stopped
row the RTC
Middle Time in the minute when the RTC

(No information displayed)
row stopped
Bottom
row

- 566 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.13 Supervision of A/D accuracy on VCT#1 (AI#1 ACC error)

It is possible to detect the failure of the analog to digital conversion in the VCT module†.
†Note:For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input module.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1). For example, the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_ACC1:LVl] when the VCT module at the VCT#12
slot should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_ACC1:Sw]. The manufacture set
one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: The entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected.
2Note: The location of the VCT is discussed in Alpha-numerical references. See chapter
Technical description: IED case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

When the function operates and detects error, an error message can be shown at the LED and
the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-26 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ACC
AI#1(ACC) error Detection of the conversion deterioration at VC1 slot
Table 10.2-27 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ACC

00000001: P error
00000002: N error
Top 00000004: Neg error
Plus value / Minus value
row 00000010: P(H) error
00000020: N(H) error
00000040: Neg(H) error
Middle
Plus rev value / (none) Plus value / Minus value
row
Bottom
Plus rev value (No message displayed)
row

- 567 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.14 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the first binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
†Note:The function can operate for respective BIO modules mounted in the IED; the user
should have settings in them, which are located at the IO slot identified with the
number.
(i) Error level

can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO1:LVl] when the BIO module at the IO#12 slot
should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one
(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: When the error is detected, the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
2Note: The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description: IED case
and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-28 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO1

BIO#1 error Detection of the BIO failure at IO slot#1
Table 10.2-29 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BIO1

Top 00000001: CRC error
00000002: Connection error Count number by the CRC error
row 00000004: Read back error
Middle
Count number by the connection error Count number by the read-back error
row
Bottom
(No message displayed) (No message displayed)
row

- 568 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the second binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: When the error is detected, the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 569 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the third binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 570 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.17 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error)

Supervising the failure in the human machine interface (HMI) is provided.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error1). However, the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_HMI:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_HMI:Sw].
The manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset within 10 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
2Note: The functions of the HMI is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-34 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_HMI
HMI error Detection of the HMI failure
Table 10.2-35 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_HMI

Top 00000001: Timeout of LCD communication Culminated value for the
00000002: Format error in LCD communication
row 00000004: Communication error in MIMIC LCD timeout
Middle Counter of the MIMIC
Counted value for the format error
row communication
Bottom (No information is
(No information is displayed)
row displayed)

- 571 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.18 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)

A power error is issued when the DC voltage generated in the power supply module (PWS†) is
less than a threshold. The user can select either 85V or 170V thresholds for issuing the power
error; it is determined by inserting a shut connector (JP4) on the PWS.
†Note:For more information about the PWS, see Chapter Technical description, Power
supply module. When the AC supply—however, the manufacture does not
guarantee the operation in the AC power—is connected with the PWS module, the
user shall set Off for the setting [CHK_POWER:Sw] (that is, the supervision
function concerning to the PWS module are stopped). Remember that the state of
the binary input circuit (BI) will be latched when the Power error occurs anytime.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), as default, but the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_POWER:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_POWER:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with
in a second when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-36 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_POWER
Power error Detection of the failure in the PWS
Table 10.2-37 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_POWER

Top
00000001: PWS failure (No information displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 572 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.19 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)

Error in the PLC function is detected because the data coded by PLC editor1 has an error.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw].
The manufacturer sets one-hundred-twenty (120) second to detect the failure; it is reset within
60 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message will be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-38 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PLC_DAT

PLC data error Detection of the failure in the PLC function
1For more information about the task and its kind, see Chapter PLC editing in PLC editor
(6F2S1904) separately.

- 573 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 10.2-39 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ PLC_DAT

00000001 No PLC data exists in the 00000001 Watch dog error
IED. 00000002 CPU load exceeded
00000002 Error in input Data2 00000003 File error
00000004 Error in output Data3 00000004 Test info string error
00000008 Time over in computation4 00000010 PLC stopped
00000010 PLC stopped by the editor5 00000011 No PLC stop Identifier
00010000 Watch dog error 00000012 Output string is too short
00020000 CPU load exceeded 00000013 Input string is too short
00040000 File error 00000014 Invalid input parameter
Top 00080000 Divided by zero 00000015 2nd is of the output string
00100000 Array index out of range 00000016 Invalid string comparison
row 00200000 Stack over flow 00000017 Unsupported type in conversion
00400000 System error 00000018 Error in the format string
00800000 Working memory over flow 00000019 Invalid input for format string
01000000 Internal error 0000001A Error during string conversion
0000001B Mismatch in Flash memory
000003E8 Division by zero
000003E9 Array index out of range
000003EA Stack over flow
000003EB System error
000003EC Working memory over flow
Middle
(No information) (No information)
row
Bottom
(No information) (No information)
row
2It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DIN function.
3It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DOUT function.
4The kind of tasks (Main_1, Main_2, or Main_3) may be too large.
5The PLC stops manually by the PLC editor.

- 574 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.20 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error)

Network communication module is monitored every 60 seconds; the error message is screened
if the one does not operate correctly.
†Note:For more information about the modules with regard to the LAN network, see
Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN communication or Chapter Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_LAN*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_LAN*:Sw].
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-40 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_LAN
Detection of the failure on the module instructed with
“LAN*” as follows:
LAN* error LAN1: Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2: Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
LAN3: Communication module (COM#3 at C13)
Table 10.2-41 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LAN

00000001: LAN does not exist
00000008: MAC address error
Top 00000080: Connection failure in 10Mbps
00000800: Double IP addresses First MAC address in four Octets
row 00008000: Internal error occurs
00080000: LAN driver error
00800000: Descriptor error
XXXX YYYY
Middle Number of responses from double IP
row addresses YYYY: Counter of full receptions
XXXX: No. of write-error in reception
Descriptor being in error:
00000001: Sending error
00000004: Error in top address
XXXX YYYY
Bottom 00000008: Reception error
00000010: Error in size definition
row YYYY: Counter for reception halted
00000020: Error in top address
XXXX: Counter for sending halted
Driver being in error:
Interruption state indicated

- 575 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.21 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error)

Communication error on the LAN† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed.
†Note:For more information about the LAN, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
communication. For the information about the LAN hardware, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module. When
network modules operate, the message is provided for the network modules.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_PING*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_PING*:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets one-hundred (100) second to detect the failure; it is reset in 20 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-42 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING

Detection of the pinging failure instructed with “LAN*” as
follows:
LAN* (ping) error LAN1 (ping): Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2 (ping): Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
LAN3 (ping): Communication module (COM#3 at C13)
Table 10.2-43 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PING

Top
Destination address for pinging (No information is displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 576 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.22 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error)

Operation of the LRE is checked and the error message is screened when the LRE does not
operate correctly or wrong data is written in the FPGA.
†Note:For more information about the LRE, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
operation.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error), but the user can
program the level using settings [CHK_LRE:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_LRE:Sw].
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-44 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_LRE

Detection of the failure in the LRE instructed with “CP*_” as
CP*_(LRE) error follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-45 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LRE

Top 00000001: Type error in FPGA
00000002: Port state error in redundant module FPGA type number in CP1M
row 00000004: Mode error in redundant module
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 577 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.23 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error)

A setting error can be detected if contradictory data has been set in the memory. Error
messages are shown depending on a kind of the communication protocols.
(i) Error level

The default error level has set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can change it using setting
[CHK_CMLV:LVl]; and then, set On for the setting [CHK_CMLV:Sw]. Errors can be detected in
two minutes after the IED switches on.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED turns
on.
Table 10.2-46 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Data(cmmslv) error Detection of the failure in the settings
(iii) Setting error information

If a signal mapping has not been performed correctly, error messages be shown in Hexadecimal
codes.
Table 10.2-47 61850 setting error information in CHK_CMLV
0001xxxx: IEC61850 error Number (high-order) of Data ID
Top row
0010xxxx: IEC60870-5-103 error mistakenly be mapped in the IED
Number (low-order) of Data ID
Middle row Internal information
mistakenly be mapped in the IED
Bottom
Internal information Internal information
row
Data(cmmslv) error
10:48 1/1
[Minor error]
[00010004] [51200131]
[03011001] [4747494F]
[32245354] [7456616C]
Figure 10.2-1 Sample error message

Note: Figure 10.2-1 is an example of 61850 error; and the content of that can be
different depends on degree errors; hence, this is just an example:
 The first of the top left part (i.e., “0001”) is showing the error belongs to

- 578 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
the IEC61850 protocol.

 The second of that (i.e., “0004”) is a reason (see Table 10.2-48), and it turns
out the 61850 initialization.
 The top right and the middle left parts are the Data ID of the reason (i.e.,
“51200131” and “03011001”; the user can combine them into “512001
3103011001”).
 The others are used to show the name of the 61850 logical data. Figure
10.2-1 has “4747494F, 32245354, 7456616C” codes, so the user can convert
the codes to the “GGIO2$STtVal” message using Hexadecimal to ASCII
conversion method.
Table 10.2-48 Detailed error information of 61850error

Reasons of errors
Error# messages Error# Messages
Erroneous index being used in the data
0002 Function error found 000D
for the protocol stack designated
Failure occurred on going through the
0003 000E Time out
selection process with regard to the protocol
Failure occurred during initialization of
0004 000F Going through the process
protocol process
0005 Failure for opening file 0010 Found invalid arguments
0006 Failure of access 0011 Found the data type not being supported
Failure of the acquisition of the authority
0007 No buffer space 0012
right
No space left in the buffer provided for the
0008 0013 Failure occurred on the setting process
SSP mapping
Failure of memory allocation in the memory
0009 0014 Failure of the event registration
dynamically
000A Check sum errors 0015 No event occurred
000B Failure of object search 0016 Restarting
000C Failure of the defining of data type 0017 Communication error

- 579 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.24 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error)

Publishing error in the IEC 61850 communication† is detected when a GOOSE message is not
received.
†Note:For more information about GOOSE, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC
61850 communication.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw]. Detecting the error is expressed in five-minutes when the IED detects
no reception of the GOOSE. When the GOOSE is started to receive, it is reset in one-minute.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-49 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_GOOSERCV

LAN(GOOSE) error Detection of the failure in GOOSE
Table 10.2-50 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_GOOSERCV

Top Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
row subscribe information#1† subscribe information#2†
Middle Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
Bottom Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
†Note:“c000” is shown when no reception.

- 580 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.25 Aux. contacts monitoring (DOPS/TOPS faulty or undefined)

When signals of an external device (i.e., a circuit breaker) are provided in a pair of auxiliary
contacts1, the signals may be grouped into four states: Open, Fault, Undefined, and Closed.
This is because, two different kinds of N/C and N/O contacts operates in the other way around;
hence, there is a possibility that the generated signal may have an incorrect condition (Faulty)
or an intermediate condition (Undefined). When receiving the signal by the BI circuit1 of the
IED, a preliminary logic2 starts to group the receiving signals into Open and the other states.
Consequently, the control function is able to operate securely not being affected by improper
signals (i.e., Fault, Undefined). In the supervision function, the received signals are sorted
with the definition of the error levels programmed by the manufacture, but the user can
program the sorting procedure arbitrarily using the settings in CHK functions (CHK_DPOS,
and CHK_TPOS).
1Note: The BI circuit is discussed in the Binary IO module. For more information, see
Chapter Technical description.
2Note: The preliminary logic is designed to acquire a signal coming from the BI circuit
and to sort the signal into the ‘Open’, ‘Fault’, ‘Undefined’, and ‘Closed’ states. The
preliminary logic is furnished in every control functions. For example, we can find
the logic in section “Setup for BIO module” in Chapter Control and monitoring
application: Double position device function.
(i) Correspondence between CHK functions and applications

There are a number of CHK operations in the automatic supervision function; hence, the user
is required so that the control applications correspond with the CHK functions, as shown in
Table 10.2-51.
Table 10.2-51 Correspondence table for the control applications
CHK functions Control applications
Function ID Names Function ID Names
DPOS01 function
DPOS02 function
229101 CHK_DPOS 512001 DPOS03 function
….
DPOS72 function
TPOS01 function
TPOS02 function
229201 CHK_TPOS 513001
….
TPOS24 function
†Note:To detect the “Faulty” and “Undefined” states in the DPOS01 function, the user
can adjust the time for supervision using settings [DPOS01-FLTTIM] and
[DPOS01-UDFTIM], each of which is accommodated in the DPOS1 function. Then,
set [DPOS01-FLTEN] On for the operation. Likewise, settings are available in the
DPOS02 and others.

- 581 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Error level

For the operation, the user can set the error level when the function detects the error
concerning the operation. Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error)
and level 4 (Alarm) for the faulty state and the undefined state, respectively. However, the user
can program them using settings. For example, when the user wish to program the fault and
undefined states in the DPOS01 function, use the settings [CHK_DPOS1:FLvl] and
[CHK_DPOS1:ULvl], respectively; then, set On for the setting [CHK_DPOS1:Sw].
(iii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-52 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DPOS/_TPOS
XXXX* undefine ‘Undefine” detected at * of the XXXX function
Minor error (Level 3) for ‘Faulty’; Alarm (Level 4) for
Error level
‘Undefine’
Table 10.2-53 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_DPOS/_TPOS

Top 00000001: Detecting ‘Alarm’
(No information is displayed)
row 00000002: Detecting ‘Minor error’
Middle
row
Bottom
row

- 582 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.26 Error detection of differential current (Id error)

Operations are monitored by the operation of DIF-SV and REF-SV elements† in the three
phases high-impedance differential protection function (DIF) and the single phase restricted
earth fault protection (REF). The automatic supervision function can alarm its erroneous
operation.
†Note:The DIF function has a supervision feature; and, the user can set it using settings
[DIF-SV] and [TDIF-SV]; then set On for the scheme switch [DIF-SV-EN].
The REF function also has a supervision feature; and, the user can set it using
settings [REF-SV] and [TREF-SV]; then set On for the scheme switch [REF-SV-
EN].
For more information about the Id supervision, see Chapter Relay application:
High-impedance differential protection and Restricted earth fault protection:
Supervision of differential current.
(i) Error level

The default error level is set at 3 (Minor error), but the user can change it using setting
[CHK_ID:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_ID:Sw].
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-54 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ID
Id error Detection of the erroneous differential current
Table 10.2-55 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ID

Top 00000001: ORed state in DIF-SV-A, B, C
00000001: DIF-SV-A
row and REF-SV
Middle
00000002: DIF-SV-B 00000004: DIF-SV-C
row
Bottom
00000001: REF-SV (No message displayed)
row

- 583 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.27 Setting
Setting of CHK_SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
CHK_SPSYNC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

--- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) /
CHK_ SPSYNC1:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Minor error / Alarm/ Warning
CHK_SPSYNC2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
CHK_ SPSYNC2:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01)

Note
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value
s
CHK_ACC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC 1:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221103)

Note
s
CHK_BIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#1 On

CHK_ BIO 1:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
CHK_ BIO2:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#2 On

CHK_ BIO2:Lvl Error level at BIO#2 Serious error
CHK_ BIO3:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#3 On

CHK_ BIO3:Lvl Error level at BIO#3 Serious error
Setting of CHK_HMI (Function ID: 221301)

CHK_HMI:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ HMI:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)

CHK_RTC:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_RTC:Lvl Error level Minor error
Minor error / Alarm / Warning

- 584 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting of CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_POWER:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_POWER:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PLC_DAT (Function PLC_DAT: 223202)

CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_PLC_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PING1/2/3 (Function ID: 223601, 223602, and 223603)

CHK_PING1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for LAN1 Off

CHK_PING1:Lvl Error level for LAN1 Minor error
Target IP address for

PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192.168.1.1
LAN1


PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192.168.1.1
LAN2


PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192.168.1.1
LAN3
Setting of CHK_CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)

CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

- 585 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting of CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)


CHK_GOOSERCV:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_DPOS (Function ID: 229101)

Default setting
value
CHK_DPOS1:Sw Off / On Enable switch to supervising the DPOS01 On
CHK_DPOS1:ULvl Error level for undefined error at DPOS01 Alarm
CHK_DPOS1:FLvl Error level for faulty error at DPOS01 Minor error
… …. … ….
Setting of CHK_TPOS (Function ID: 229201)

Default setting
value
CHK_TPOS1:Sw Off / On Enable switch to supervising the TPOS01 On
CHK_TPOS1:ULvl Error level for undefined error at TPOS01 Alarm
CHK_TPOS1:FLvl Error level for faulty error at TPOS01 Minor error
… …. … ….

- 586 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting of PRP_LRE (Function ID: 224101)

CHK_LRE:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_LRE:Lvl Error level Serious error (Comm)
Setting of CHK_LAN1/2/3 (Function ID: 220D01, 220D02 and 220D03)

CHK_LAN1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ LAN1:Lvl Error level Minor error


Setting of CHK_ID (Function ID: 2214C1)

Note
s
CHK_ID:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ID:Lvl Error level Minor error

- 587 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.2.28 Signal
MNT_LOGIC (Function ID: 220001)
3211001001 ACT_TIME System active time in minutes
3110101001 ALLALRM All alarm
3110131001 ALRM_CND Alarm condition
3110021001 BO_LCK BO lock
3110031001 COM_LCK Tele-protection lock
3010011001 ERROR_LED Error led
3110201001 ERR_LV1 Error level1
3010001001 INSRV_LED In service led
3110501001 LCK_STA Supervisor locked
3110121001 MINR_ERR Minor error
3110111001 SERI_ERR Serious error

CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220101)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201)
3210101001 CHECKSUM
3210111001 CHECKSUMC
32E0001001 CHK_POINT
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210201001 LOADERSUM
3210121001 PROG_SIZE
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
30E0001001 CHKPOINT test point1
30E0011001 CHKPOINT2 test point2

- 588 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter
3210001001 RESULT check result
3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant)

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point
3210021001 ECC_SECNT ECC single error cnt

CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602)

CHK_ SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01)

- 589 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01)
3210021001 RES_FAST check result(fast)

CHK_MRAM (Function ID: 220F01)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point

CHK_ BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221103)

CHK_ HMI (Function ID: 2201301)

CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501)

CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT Test point

- 590 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223202)

CHK_PING1/2/3 (Function ID: 223601, 223602, and 223603)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 execute counter
RESULT 3210001001 check result
RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant)

CHK_ CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_DPOS (Function ID: 229101)
32110111B0 CDP1_RES CHK_DPOS1 result
… … …

CHK_TPOS (Function ID: 229201)
32110111B0 CTP1_RES CHK_TPOS1 result

- 591 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

CHK_TPOS (Function ID: 229201)
… … …

CHK_FPGA (Function ID: 220B01)

PRP_LER (Function ID: 224101)

CHK_LAN1/2/3 (Function ID: 220D01, 220D02, and 220D03)

CHK_ID (Function ID: 2214C1)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223202)

- 592 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)

- 593 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Trip circuit supervision task

The TCS function provides an alarm when it detects a failure in the circuit breaker tripping
control circuit. The failure could be caused by loss of power supply in the trip circuit or an open
circuit in the control circuit connection.
Displaying error message founded by the TCS function is shown in Table 10.3-1; the error
is cleared when recovered
Table 10.3-1 Supervision items and error levels for Trip supervision
Detailed Error
Sec.No. Supervision items(Screen message) Info. Lvl LED
10.3.1 Trip circuit error (TC error) N/A 3 On

- 594 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.3.1 Detecting erroneous operation

(i) Operation logics
The TCS has six sets of monitoring logic (TCS1 to TCS6), as shown in Figure 10.3-1. For
example, the TCS1 logic issues a signal “TC1_Fail” when the following conditions are
determined in the TCS1 logic:
 Both signals at PLC connection points “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”
being absent for more than 0.4 sec.
 Either On or OPT-On† being set for scheme switch [TCS1-EN].
8000011BB0
800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1 &

8000011B60
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
8000011BB2
800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
TCS1-EN
On
8100021B60
TCS2 scheme logic (same as TCS1 scheme logic) TC2_FAIL
8200031B60
8300041B60
8400051B60
8500061B60
≥1
8F00001B60
TC_FAIL
Figure 10.3-1 Six sets of TCS scheme logic

†Note:If the user wishes to add a user-programmed condition for the TCS1 decision, set
OPT-On and connect the user-programmed signal at PLC connection point
“TC1_FAIL_COND”. The TCS1 monitor will then only be available when a user-
programmed signal is present at PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_COND”.
(ii) Applications
Example1
Figure 10.3-2 provides an application example of the TCS function. Two binary-input signals
are assigned to PLC connection points “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”.
When the trip circuit is healthy, a small current will flow in the BI circuits, the CB auxiliary
contacts, and the trip coil. This small current can be observed to flow in both the CB-open
condition and the CB-closed condition. If the small current supplied to the trip circuit is lost,

- 595 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
or if the connections between the trip circuit and the BI circuits become open circuit, a signal
"TC1_FAIL" is generated; then, the TCS1 logic will issue a Trip Circuit Fail alarm.
Note: A threshold setting voltage is required for the BI circuits. The user should set the
threshold to one-half of the value of the trip supply voltage. This is because in this
scheme there are two BI circuits connected in series. The supply voltage across the
BI circuit will be divided by two when the 52 contact is closed and the 52b contact
is open. Thus, the BI circuit may fail to operate if the BI sensitivity is only set in
response to the supply voltage. For example, the BI threshold voltage should be
set below 55V when a trip supply voltage of 110V is applied. For the TCS function,
the user should select two BI circuits from the BI2A module, because the BI
circuits of both of these modules can have lower threshold voltages than the BI
circuits that are available in other modules.
Trip circuit
()
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
BI1 Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1
circuit &
8000011B60
R 8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
BI2 Binary input 800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s

circuit
8000011BB2
52a 52b 800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
TCS1-EN On
Trip coil
()
LCP & GIS
Figure 10.3-2 Connection Example1 for TCS1 logic
Example2
In Example2 a binary input signal is assigned to PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1”.
With this arrangement if the CB is open, the small monitoring current will not be able to flow
in the BI circuit. Therefore, it is recommended that setting OPT-On is selected for the scheme
switch [TCS1-EN] and that a CB-closed-status signal is applied to PLC connection point
“TC1_FAIL_COND”. Monitoring is only enabled while the CB is in the closed position when
using this setting. This setting avoids unnecessary monitoring when the circuit breaker is open
when using this scheme.

- 596 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Trip circuit
()
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
BI1 Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1

circuit &
8000011B60
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
52a
8000011BB2
800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
CB closed TCS1-EN On
status signal
Trip coil
()
LCP & GIS
Figure 10.3-3 Connection Example2 for TCS1 logic

- 597 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.3.2 Trip circuit error (TC error)

(i) Error level
For the operation, the user can set the error level when the function detects the error
concerning the operation. Generally, the default error level is set at level 3 (Minor error), but
the user can program the level for the TCS1—6 using settings [CHK_TCS1:LVL] to
[CHK_TCS6:LVL]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_TCS1:Sw] to [CHK_TCS6:Sw].
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.3-2 Error messages provided by the supervisor in TCS
Item Meaning of the information
TCx error Detection of an error located at x
Table 10.3-3 Detailed information in TCS

Display area Meaning of the detailed information
N/A (No message is displayed)

- 598 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.3.3 Setting
Setting of TCS(Function ID: 482001)
Note
Setting item Range Units Contents Default setting value
s
TCS1(Trip Circuit Supervision 1)
TCS1-EN Off / On / OPT-On — Off
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
Setting of CHK_TCS (Function ID: 223B01 to 223B06)

Default setting
value
CHK_TCS1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
--- / Serious error / Serious
CHK_ TCS1:Lvl error(Comm) / Minor error / Alarm/ Error level Minor error
Warning
…. …. …. ….
CHK_TCS6:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

--- / Serious error / Serious
CHK_ TCS6:Lvl error(Comm) / Minor error / Alarm/ Error level Minor error
Warning

- 599 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
10.3.4 Signal (Data ID)

TCS(Function ID: 482001)
8000011B60 TC1_FAIL Trip circuit1 fail
8000011BB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit1 fail signal1
8000011BB2 TC1_FAIL_COND TC1 fail condition
8F00001B60 TC_FAIL Trip circuit fail
 Signal Connection point

800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND TC1 fail condition
800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit1 fail signal1

- 600 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
 Signal Connection point


CHK_TCS (Function ID: 223B01 to 223B06)

- 601 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11 Communication protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 operation – LAN operation –
-Interface 675 -IP address 604
-Interoperability 678 -Hot standby operation 605
-Operation 699 -PRP/HSR operation 613
IEC 61850 operation 625 -RSTP operation 617
-About protocol 625 -Monitoring (Hot standby) 607
-Communication service 628 -Monitoring (PRP/HSR) 615
-Engineering work 631 Selection of slave protocol 603
-Goose monitoring status 655 RS485operation 704
-Protocol selection 652 USB operation 703
-Quality signal 653
-Setting 650
-Supervise 652
-61850 Editon1 option 627
-61850 Editon2 627
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such protocols depends on the selection of protocols. Several
IED models do not have the protocols. To determine whether the protocols are implemented in
the IED, locate IED ordering codes, and check them at the “U and G&T” positions referring to
the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table Comparative table in respective ordering codes
Ordering codes
Sec.
Position “U” 1 2
11.3 IEC 61850 ✓1

11.4 IEC 60870-5-103 ✓2 NA
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
1 LAN modules, designed for PRP/HSR/RSTP marked with “L or N” code at position “E”, shall
be selected and mounted in the IED, if the network requires PRP/HSR/RSTP operation.
2 One of protocols (i.e., either 61850 or 103) shall be selected before the in-service operation.

- 602 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Selection of slave protocol

LAN modules are provided for the IEC61850 and other protocols†, and an optional serial
module‡ will be provided for the IEC60870-5-103 slave communication.
Figure 11.1-1 illustrates the IED has both IEC61850 and IEC103, and the user can select one
of two using SLAVE PROTOCOL setting of Communication sub-menu. IEC61850 and IEC103
have their own settings. For example, an IED has IEC61850 settings, such as [GOINT],
whereas it has IEC103 settings, such as [103ADDR].
Communication SLAVE PROTOCOL SLAVE PROTOCOL

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/1 10:48 1/4
LAN > Slave Protocol + IEC61850
USBCOM > IEC61850 IEC103
RS485 > DNP3.0†
SLAVE PROTOCOL > Modbus†
IEC61850 >
IEC103 SLV >
Figure 11.1-1 SLAVE PROTOCOL setting

†Note:Selection and operation is dependent on the IED configurations, which the
customer has determined with the ordering code. Accordingly, the selection and
operation can be unavailable if the protocol is not provided (see p.602). To examine
the IED configuration, check your ordering code referring Appendix: Ordering.
Neither DNP3.0 nor Modbus is supported here (even though DNP3.0 and Modbus
are displayed on the LCD).
‡Note:We have discussed that optional communication interface (see Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module).
CNM_SLAVE (Function ID: 300001)

Slave Protocol IEC61850 / IEC103 Protocol selection IEC61850

3100013406 ProcType A type of the protocol selected in the IED

- 603 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
LAN operation
11.2.1 LAN address (IP address)
When LAN module(s) are provided, the IED can communicate using the “Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”. The user can set the information about IP addresses and
other TCP/IP. Table 11.2-1 shows the setting items provided for the LAN†.
These setting values have been included in the CID file of the IEC61850. When the IED starts
up and if values except for the 0.0.0.0 values or default are set in the CID file, the CID
information is taken into the IED.
As the setting values have been included in the CID file, the user can define these values with
the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS). If the user wishes to modify those and the IEC61850 is used
to communicate, the user can change those with the GR-TIEMS. The user is required to write
both of setting values and IEC61850-CID file into the IED.
Table 11.2-1 TCP/IP settings of LAN modules

Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value
LAN at IPADDRESS1‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 First IP address 192.l68.1.11
C11 SUBNETMASK1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
(Port A) GATEWAY1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
LAN at IPADDRESS2‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Second IP address 192.l68.1.11
C12 SUBNETMASK2 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
(Port B) GATEWAY2 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
LAN for IPADDRESS3 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Third IP address 192.l68.1.13
Local PC at SUBNETMASK3 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
C13§ GATEWAY3 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
When wishing to change addresses, the user has to use the setting menu. Figure 11.2-1 shows
the setting menu provided to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192. 168. 1. 11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255. 255. 255. 1
GATEWAY1 +
192. 168. 1. 1
Figure 11.2-1 Local LAN setting menu (on IED screen)

†Note:For more information with regard to the communication modules, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:Three LAN modules can be mounted at C11, C12, and C13 when triple LAN
modules are ordered; hence, the user should assign triple address respectively.

- 604 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(Just for the record, subscript ‘1’ of “IPADDRESS1, SUBNETMASK1, and

GATEWAY1” is for first LAN module.)
§Note:“LAN for Local PC” is positioned at C13 when three LAN modules are provided;
that is used for local PC engineering tool (i.e., GR-TEIMS, PLC editor). That is not
designed for the network such as IEC61850, Hot-standby, IEC62439-3(PRP) etc.
The locations of LAN modules in the IED are dependent on the ordering codes. To
find the locations about the LAN modules, see Appendix: Ordering (→page 841).
11.2.2 Redundant LAN (Hot-standby)

Hot-standby is designed to change to another LAN path if an error occurs on the LAN
communication; accordingly, the LAN communication can have more security (i.e. “Redundant
communication”). The “Hot-standby (HOTST)” operation is possible when the IED has dual
communication modules for the LAN network. The Hot-standby runs when the user sets
Hot_Standby for scheme switch [RedundantMode]†.
†Note: When the user wishes not to operate Hot-standby, or the network is not ready for
the redundant, set Fixed for the [RedundantMode]. Port B (located at C12 if
provided) can only operate for the connection with the engineering tool (GR-
TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®).
‡Note: See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication
module.
(i) Overview
For the Hot-standby communication, the first communication module for Network is used as
the primary port, (i.e. Port A at C11) while a second communication module for Network, (i.e.
Port B at C12) is used as the secondary port; the IED will communicate using Port A for normal
operation. If a communications failure occurs at Port A, the IED can automatically switch
communication from Port A to Port B.
When the IED detects the occurrence of a communications failure, for which the LAN
module is unable to respond to the IED (i.e. a communications link is down), the IED starts a
timer. When the timer exceeds a setting [DownTime], the IED will switch ports. Thus, Port B
is then used for communications. (Note that Port A can be determined to be the secondary port
on the occurrence of the failure. If Port B is unable to continue to operate, then Port A will be
re-switched to run after a predetermined setting [UpTime]. Then, Port B will be discriminated
as the secondary port.)
(ii) Primary port selection

The user can select any one of the ports to be the primary port although the Port A is normally

- 605 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
used as the primary port. For example, provided that both Port A and Port B are physically
connected to the LAN, when the user wishes to use Port B as the primary port, the user should
set Port2(i.e., Port B) for the [PrimaryPort]. If the user wishes not to select the primary port,
set None for the [PrimaryPort].
(iii) Llink-down timer

As mentioned earlier, the occurrence of a communication failure is determined when the timer
exceeds the setting [DownTime]. Thus, the user should set a time setting for this decision.
(iv) Link-up timer

Another timer is provided in the Hot-standby function. Let us assume that the communication
on Port A is changed to Port B. If the failure of Port A is removed after changing to Port B, the
IED will try to re-start using Port A as the primary port. In this case, the user can define a
time to revert to the original port and re-start communication on the original port by applying
a re-start time for setting [UpTime].
Table 11.2-2 Summary of Hot-standby communication setting

Setting Items Range Meaning Default
Fixed / Fixed: Hot-standby is not activated..

RedundantMode Fixed
Hot_Standby Hot_Standby: Hot-standby activated.
A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication
DownTime 0–10000ms failure (link down). The standby port commences 5ms
communication in the DownTime.
Selection of priority port
None / Port1 / None: No selection for the priority port.
PrimaryPort None
Port2 Port1: Port A selected as the priority port.
Port2: Port B selected as the priority port.
A timer starts when the primary port is ready to commence
UpTime 0–10000ms 5ms
communication after switching port.
The user should be aware of the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of Port A for the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of Port B is not used even if communication is carried out on Port
B.
2 The user should ensure that an optical fiber is correctly connected when a 100Base-
FX module is used, otherwise a repeat communication failure (link-down) will be
experienced continuously. If the period for which the link-down is shorter than the
setting [DownTime], another port cannot be switched as the primary port. Thus,
the user should determine the setting value to be applied for [DownTime] on the
basis of the system requirement. It is allowable for the user to apply a setting of
zero for [DownTime] so that the switching of the ports will be performed
immediately; conversely, the user can set any value less than 3000ms in order that

- 606 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
the system need not experience chattering failures if the optical fiber were not
connected securely. Switching between the primary and the secondary ports is not
carried out during a value is setting for the [DownTime]. The user should consider
the setting approach for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting [DownTime].
3 The auto-negotiation function is executed when the 100Base-TX modules establish
communication over the communications network. The auto-negotiation function
selects a mode for communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the
communication speed. In the case of a link-down condition, the auto-negotiation
function will run again immediately. The link-down condition continues until auto-
negotiation has been completed (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user can
apply a setting for [DownTime] for any value of time less than that required by the
auto-negotiation function in response to the system requirement (i.e. the user can
set [DownTime] to be zero milliseconds). In this case, switching between the
primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i.e. prior to the auto-
negotiation function running. If switching between ports is not required before the
completion of the auto-negotiation function, the user can set the setting
[DownTime] longer than the time required by the auto-negotiation function. The
user can consider the setting for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
(v) PLC switching

Compulsory signals may be used to switch the ports. For example, if a compulsory signal is
issued via PLC connection point “CH1_CH_CHG”, communication is switched from Port A to
Port B. On the other hand, changing from Port B to Port A can be executed upon the reception
of a signal via PLC signal “CH2_CH_CHG”.
(vi) Monitor
LCD screen: The user can examine the statuses about the communion modules by
the monitoring function. Figure 11.2-2 shows the port status about the modules; terms
‘Up’ and ‘Down’ mean running and stopping, respectively. For menus operations, see
Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.

- 607 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
Port 1 (i.e., Port A) is connected. Ports 1&2 (i.e., Port A&B) are connected.
Port 2 (i.e., Port B) is not connected.
Figure 11.2-2 Communication status
Status signals for Port A and Port B: The user can also examine the LAN status
using PLC signal monitoring points ‘Port1_Link (3100061001)’ and ‘Port2_Link
(3100061001)’ of the HOTST function. For example, when the user wishes to monitor
the status of the Prot1_Link, use the ‘Port1_Link’. Consequently, the user can get the
physical information about the Port A: the value ‘1’ is issued when the communication
is made (Linkup), whereas value ‘0’ is issued when the communication is not made
(Linkdown).
When Hot_Standby is set for the [RedundantMode], the user can find a running port
using the PLC signal monitoring point ‘Using_CH (3100081001)’ of the HOTST
function. Value ‘1’ is provided when the Port A is running, whereas value ‘2’ is
provided when the Port B is running.
Monitor setting: The Hot-standby (HOTST) function can send PING packets to
remote devices thus enabling the Hot-standby function to monitor the state of the
network. The Hot-standby function checks for a response signal from the remote
device. If the Hot-standby function does not receive a response signal, the Hot-
standby function will switch to the other port. The operation is performed when
the user sets the [RedundantMode]= Hot_Standby and [NetMonitor_EN] = On.
Settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are provided in the Hot-standby function for the
monitoring of remote devices on the network. When the user sets plural remote IP
addresses for the settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function does not receive
a response from any one of these remote devices, the Hot-standby function determines
that a communication failure has occurred. Table 11.2-3 shows the network
monitoring settings for Hot-standby operation.

- 608 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 11.2-3 Settings network monitoring on Hot-standby

Setting items Range Meaning Default
NetMonitor_EN Off/On Enabling switch for monitoring Off
The user can set twelve IP addresses at 12 remote
Ping_IP1 0.0.0.0
terminals.
to to 0.0.0.0
Value “0.0.0.0”should be set respectively when
Ping_IP12 255.255.255.255
the remote IP addresses are not provided.
Waiting time to PING response; if any one of the
responses is not received, after the setting time
Ping_Wait 1–10 (sec) 1
has elapsed, the function will determine that there
has been no-response.
Interval of PING send; a PING packet is sent
Ping_Interval 1–120 (sec) 5
sequentially in accordance with this setting.
Number of PING packets for checking; the “no-
response “condition is determined when the IED is
unable to obtain a number of responses from the
Chk_Count 1–10 3
same IP address. The user can set the number of
responses required to determine the “no-response”
condition using the setting [Chk_Count].
The user should note that the use of network monitoring could increase the burden
on the network. This is because a number of PING packets are repeatedly transmitted
over the network. Thus, the user should choose the setting values carefully in
accordance with the network capacity, the burden, and the required time. Examples
1 and 2 below show the respective results using the network monitoring function with
for different settings.
Example1: There is a remote device on the network with the address Ping_IP1.
The Hot-standby function sends ping packets to the remote device every five
seconds; then the Hot-standby function waits for one second until the Hot-
standby function receives a response signal from the remote device. The Hot-
standby function will determine that a communication failure has occurred if two
sequential response signals are not received from the remote device. Subsequently,
the Hot-Standby function will switch from one port to the other port (See Figure
11.2-3). The following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for setting [Ping_IP1]. (the setting of
IP addresses in the other remote devices is not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].

- 609 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Local IED Remote device with

Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 1sec Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
OK: Response received
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.

1sec
5sec NG: due to delayed response

1sec
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports is
performed if a response signal is
not received for setting
[Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Figure 11.2-3 Time chart for Example 1
Example2: It is assumed that there are three remote devices on the network:
Ping_IP1, Ping_IP2, and Ping_IP3. The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet to
every remote device every 10 second (i.e., the IED sends a ping packet to a remote
device every 30 second). Suppose that “1” is set for [Check_Count]. The Hot-standby
function can determine a communication failure after 30 seconds if one of the remote
devices is unable to send a response. Figure 11.2-4 shows the operation. Switching is
not executed, because the IED cannot confirm all no-responses from the remote
addresses in the milled of the figure. Switching is performed after no-response is
confirmed from all remote devices.
・ The IP addresses of the remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP3].
(Setting IP addresses for other remote devices is not required.)
・ 10seconds is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “1” is set for [Check_Count].

- 610 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Device with Ping_IP3

IED
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 10sec
OK: Response received
5sec
10sec OK: Response received
5sec
10sec
LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed a response from the IP3.
5sec NG: due to no response

10sec

5sec
10sec NG: due to no response

5sec
10sec
LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response.
Figure 11.2-4 Time chart for Example 2

- 611 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vii) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=Hot_standby

When Hot_standby is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply single IP
address in the IED. The table shows that Port A and B have the same IP address.
Table 11.2-4 Default IP address for Hot standby operation
GR-TIEMS® /
Protocol IEC61850(GOOSE) SNTP
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
Port A†
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
IP address at
Port B†
IP address
Not applicable Not applicable 192.168.1.13‡
for Local PC
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default. Setting [IPADDRESS2] will be neglected.
‡Note: ‘192.168.1.13’ etc. can be set for the local engineering PC, if LAN for Local PC is
ready at C13.
(viii) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=Fixed

If Fixed is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply IP addresses in the IED.
The table below shows that Port A, B, and C can have different IP addresses.
Table 11.2-5 Default IP address for Fix operation
GR-TIEMS® /
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
Port A†
IP address at
Not applicable 192.168.1.12‡ 192.168.1.12§
Port B
IP address at
Not applicable Not applicable 192.168.1.13§
for Local PC
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default.
‡Note: An address can be set for SNTP, but it should not operate Time synchronization
with Port A and Port B, which have different IP addresses.
§Note: ‘192.168.1.13’ can be set for the local PC, if LAN for Local PC is ready at C13.

- 612 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.2.3 Redundant LAN (PRP/HSR operation)

The user can allow the IED operate in the redundant LAN communication (IEC 62439-3). To
operate, the user should set either PRP or HSR for scheme switch [RedundantMode].
(i) Overview
‘Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP)’ is designed for double LAN networks in order to construct
high availability automation networks. Figure 11.2-5 shows an IED (i.e., Source, IED1 with
Port A and Port B†) and a server (i.e., Destination, Substation computer with Port A and Port
B). They are connected through LAN_A and LAN_B. For duplicating data, the IED have Link
redundancy entity (LRE) so that the IED can transfer data with A-Frame packet and B-Frame
packet at the same time. At the destination, either frames being arrived later is removed.
Substation computer
CPU
Operator
workstation
Data
Port A Port B
Rx Tx Rx Tx
Destination RedBox‡
A-Frame
LAN_A
B-Frame
LAN_B
TOSHIBA
IN SER VICE
ER R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
RedBox‡
Port A Port B TOSHIBA
IN SER VICE
LAN module LAN module Rx Rx
ER R OR
(C11) (C12) Tx Tx
Port A Port B
TOSHIBA
LAN module LAN module IN SER VICE
Data (C11) (C12) Rx
ER R OR
Tx
I Port A
R Data LAN module
L (C11)
CPU I
O Help Cancel ENTER
R
IED1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 L Data
CPU
Source O Help Cancel ENTER
I
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
F3
IED3 F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 11.2-5 PRP example for redundant LAN_A and LAN_B with DANP
†Note:For the locations about the LAN module, see Chapter Technical description:
Signal processing and communication modules.
‡Note: IED3 and Operator workstation (connected with singly attached node) can join
the network with Redundancy boxes (RedBox).
‘High-availability Seamless redundancy (HSR)’, for the ring topology, is designed to achieve
high reliability communication. Figure 11.2-6 illustrates IEDs connected over the ring LAN.
As doubly ports (Port A and Port B) are embedded in an IED, the IED can transfer the data
packet (A-Frame and B-Frame) for the destination over the ring LAN.

- 613 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Source Destination
TOSHIBA
IED1 IN SE R VICE
E R R OR Substation Computer Operator Workstation
CPU CPU
CPU
Data Data
Data
I Port B Port A Port B Port A
R
L Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Port B Port A
O Help Cancel ENTER
Rx Tx Rx Tx
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
B-Frame B-Frame
A-Frame A-Frame A-Frame
Ring LAN1
A-Frame A-Frame
B-Frame B-Frame B-Frame
TOSHIBA TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
IN SE R VICE
E R R OR
E R R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Port A Port B QuadBox QuadBox Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12) (C11) (C12)
Data Data
I I
R R
L Ring LAN2 L
CPU CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 IED4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
A-Frame
B-Frame
TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
E R R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12)
Data
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 11.2-6 HSR example for ring-LAN with DANH

Note: Prohibition symbol () shows the frame is removed by the next terminals.
(ii) LRE switches

The user should set On for both settings [LRE_PortA_EN] and [LRE_PortB_EN] so that the
LRE can duplicate the data for A-Frame and B-Frame.
(iii) Entry Forget Time

Packets are transferred in A-Frame and B-Frame over the LAN. The user should set the
[EntryForgetTime] to delete a duplicated frame listed in the duplicating table. The duplicated
frame will be erased when it stays longer than the setting time.
For Figure 11.2-5 example, the IED1 (Source) duplicates data by the LRE. The duplicated
data (in A and B-Frames) are transferred simultaneously over the LAN_A and LAN_B. In the
meantime, both frames cannot arrive at Substation computer (Destination). If the duplicated
frame is older than the setting [EntryForgetTime], the duplicated frame will be removed.
The [EntryForgetTime] has default 400ms setting, but the user can change it for an
appropriate value among 100 to 10,000ms. The setting value should be taken account of the

- 614 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
time after the entry removed from the duplicate table. The setting value also should be taken
account of the differences of the communication speeds between LANs.
(iv) Supervision
The communication supervisor function is available in PRP and HSR. The user can have
following settings:
Setting [LineCheckInterval]: is the setting of the interval time to send supervision frames
cyclically. The user is able to choice the time among 100ms to 100,000ms, but the
setting has default 2000ms values.
Setting [SV_Dst_MACAddr]: is for a reserved multicast address ’01-15-4E-00-01-xx’. By
default, ‘00’ is set for the ‘xx’. However, if conflict arises, the use can configure to
set any value between 0x00 and 0xFF for the ‘xx’.
Setting [SV_VLAN_EN]: can have On setting when the supervision frame is used in VLAN.
Additionally, the user can set identification specifying the VLAN to which the
supervision frame belongs and the priority of the supervision frame. Use the
settings [SV_VLAN_ID] and [SV_VLAN_Priority]. By default, Off is set for the
[SV_LAN_EN].
(v) Monitor
It is possible for the user to watch the communion statuses about Port A and Port B. Figure
11.2-7 shows the numbers of transferred packets via ports.
RedundantPacketNum
10:48 1/6
PortA_Send 12345
PortA_Recv 12345
PortA_ErrLANID 12345
PortB_Send 12345
PortB_Recv 12345
PortB_ErrLANID 12345
Figure 11.2-7 PRP/HSR status

Note: For the operations, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Note: PortA_ErrLANID and PortB_ErrLANID do not increase in HSR, because the both
can receive A-frame and B-frame.
PortA_Send: is the number of sending packets for ‘LAN_A’.
PortA_Recv: is the actual number of receiving packets from ‘LAN_A’.
PortA_ErrLANID: is the number of errors that receives packets coming from ‘LAN_B’
PortB_Send: is the number of sending packets for ‘LAN_B’.
PortB_Recv: is the actual number of receiving packets from ‘LAN_B’.
PortB_ErrLANID: is the number of errors that packets coming from ‘LAN_A’.

- 615 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vi) IP setting example [RedundantMode] =PRP or HSR

When PRP or HSR is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply single IP address
in the IED. The table shows that Port A and B have the same IP address.
Table 11.2-6 Default IP address for PRP or HSR
GR-TIEMS® /
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
Port A†
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
IP address at
Port B†
IP address
Not applicable Not applicable 192.168.1.13‡
for Local PC
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default. Either port A or B is allowed to operate.
‡Note: ‘192.168.1.13’ can be set for the local engineering PC, if LAN for Local PC is
mounted at C13.

- 616 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.2.4 Redundant LAN (RSTP operation)

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), defined in the IEEE 802.1D, is ready to operate in the
IED, when the user set RSTP for scheme switch [RedundantMode].
(i) Overview
‘Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)’ is designed to achieve LAN bridge connections in stable.
The RSTP choose one of bridges as the root and BPDU data (called ‘Bridge Protocol Data Unit)
is exchanged periodically over RPST network. Each bridge can listen and learn the BPDU data
so that all bridges in the network can find the shortest path for the root location (we call it
“Path-cost”). Consequently, the RTSP operation clear and recover the network failure if
occurred; no temporary loop will not occur in the network (that is, all terminals can have loop-
free LAN).
(ii) Parameters
When RSTP is set for the [RedundantMode], the user should enter several PSTP parameters
so that the IED is able to enjoy the Spanning Tree topology by the RSTP:
Setting [BridgeHelloTime]: is used to set a BPDU transferring cycle for other terminals
(i.e., BPDU sending interval; they are sent for IEDs, Network bridges, etc.)
Setting [BridgeMaxAge]: instructs the terminal (IED) to listen to a BPDU cyclically. When
a terminal (IED) cannot listen to BPDUs within the setting, the terminal (IED) starts the
computation to make new spanning tree.
Setting [BridgePrioriy]: is allowed for the user to make priority tables in the IEDs. When
a terminal has the smallest number, the terminal can become the root bridge with high
possibility Note that a number can be set in 4096 steps.
Setting [BridgeFedDelay]: is the time to wait for Listening and Learning.
Note: the user shall take the above settings based on the IEEE 802.1D equations below:
2× [BridgeFwdDelay] − 1.0𝑠𝑒𝑐. ≥ [BridgeMaxAge] (11.2-1)
[BridgeMaxAge] ≥ 2 × ([BridgeHellowTime] + 1.0𝑠𝑒𝑐. (11.2-2)

- 617 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Settings [PortA_AdminEdge] and [PortA_AutoEdge] †: are provided for a port, which is

able to operate as ‘Edge’. Edge will not be joined for the spanning tree computation, so
Edge port is able to have the communication immediately when the LAN connection is
started (link-up; Notice that the user has to know that no loop will occur in the network,
in advance). When On is set for the [PortA_AdminEdge], the Port A unconditionally
operates as Edge. PortA can detect Edge port itself, when On is set for the
[PortA_AutoEdge].
Setting [PortA_PathCost]: is used to set the distance for the root bridge (path cost), when
the port is used in the LAN network, actually. As a rule, the setting value depends on the
communication bandwidth.
Setting [PortA_Priority]: is set a priority value for the port. Similar to the setting
[BridgePrioriy], a port having the smallest number can have the highest priority. Note
that a number can be set in 16 steps
†Note: Port A (connection for LAN_A) is located at C11 of IED. The second Port B
(connection for Port B) is located at C12 and has similar settings. See Table 11.2-6
for the IP addresses examples. The user can find the contents about LAN
communication module in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and
communication module.

- 618 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.2.5 Settings
Setting of TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
Un Default setting
its value
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First IP address 192.168. 1. 11
LAN1
SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – Subnet mask 255.255.255. 0
(Port A)
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168. 1. 1
IPADDRESS2 0 – 255 – Second IP address 192.168. 1. 12
LAN2
(Port B)
GATEWAY2 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168. 1. 1
IPADDRESS3 0 – 255 – IP address provided for the engineering PC 192.168. 1. 13
LAN3 for
Local PC
GATEWAY3 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168. 1. 1
Setting of PRP_HSR(Function ID: 342001)

Setting item Range Units Contents Default setting value Notes
RedundantMode PRP/HSR/RSTP – Selection of either PRP/HSR/RSTP PRP
LRE_PortA_EN Off / On – Administrative action at PortA On
LRE_PortB_EN Off / On – Administrative action at PortB On
P LifeCheckInterval 100-100000 ms How often the node sends PRP_Supervision 2000ms
R 01-15-4E-00-01-00
P SV_Dst_MACAddr to – Destination Mac address of supervision frame 01-15-4E-00-01-00
& 01-15-4E-00-01-FF
H SV_VLAN_EN Off / On – Enable or Disable VLAN of supervision frame Off
S SV_VLAN_ID A 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the
0-4094 – 0
R frame belongs
SV_VLAN_Priority 0-7 – VLAN Priority of supervision frame 0
EntryForgetTime 100-10000 ms Entry is removed from the duplicate table 400
BridgeHelloTime 1 - 10 s Sending interval of BPUD from Root Bridge 2
BridgeMaxAge 6 - 40 s Receiving interval of BPUD 20
BridgeFwdDelay 4 - 30 S Waiting times for Listening and Learning 15
BridgePriority 0-61440 (4096steps) - Priority number in Bridge 32768
R PortA_AdminEdge Off / On - Operation of ‘Edge port’ at PortA Off
S PortA_AutoEdge Off / On - Auto detection for ‘Edge port’ at PortA On
T PortA_PathCost 1–200000000 - Root Path Cost at PortA 20000
P PortA_Priority 0 – 240 (16steps) - Priority number at PortA 128
PortB_AdminEdge Off / On - Operation of ‘Edge port’ at PortB Off
PortB_AutoEdge Off / On - Auto detection for ‘Edge port’ at PortB On
PortB_PathCost 1–200000000 - Root Path Cost at PortB 20000
PortB_Priority 0 – 240 (16steps) - Priority number at PortB 128
Setting of REDLAN(Function ID: 340001)

Fixed / Enabling Hot-standby operation
RedundantMode – Fixed
Hot_Standby
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

None / Port1 (Port
PrimaryPort – Selection of the primary port None
A) / Port2 (Port B)
DownTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-down 5

- 619 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

UpTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-up 5
Setting of Net_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)

NetMonitor_EN Off / On – Enable switch for net monitoring Off

Ping_IP1 0 – 255 – Ping address of first target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP2 0 – 255 – Ping address of second target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP3 0 – 255 – Ping address of third target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP4 0 – 255 – Ping address of forth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP5 0 – 255 – Ping address of fifth target 0.0.0.0
Net Ping_IP6 0 – 255 – Ping address of sixth target 0.0.0.0
Monitor Ping_IP7 0 – 255 – Ping address of seventh target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP8 0 – 255 – Ping address of eighth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP9 0 – 255 – Ping address of ninth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP10 0 – 255 – Ping address of tenth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP11 0 – 255 – Ping address of eleventh target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP12 0 – 255 – Ping address of twelfth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_Wait 1 – 10 sec Ping packet waiting time 1
Ping Ping_Interval 1 – 120 sec Ping packet interval time 5
Chk_Count 1 – 10 sec Number of ping check count 3

- 620 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.2.6 Signals (DataID)

TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
3130001001 CH1_USING Port A is operating
3130011001 CH2_USING Port B is operating
3010001150 MAC1_OCT1 MAC1 address octet 1
3110101001 RX1_CNT receive packet counter
3110111001 RX1ER_CNT receive error counter
3111101001 RX2_CNT
3111111001 RX2ER_CNT
3110201001 TX1_CNT send packet counter
3110211001 TX1ER_CNT send error counter
3111201001 TX2_CNT
3111211001 TX2ER_CNT

PRP_HSR (Function ID: 342001)
3211011001 PortA_Send frames sent over A(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211021001 PortB_Send frames sent over B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211041001 PortA_ErrLANID frames with wrong LAN id received on Port A
3211051001 PortB_ErrLANID frames with wrong LAN id received on Port B

- 621 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

PRP_HSR (Function ID: 342001)
3211061001 PortA_Recv frames received over Port A(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211071001 PortB_Recv frames received over Port B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
3100061001 Port1_Link LAN_A (Port A) Link Status
3100071001 Port2_Link LAN_B (Port B) Link Status
3100081001 Using_CH LAN (port) information in used

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
310000E001 CH1_CH_CHG Change to LAN_A (Port A) from LAN_B (Port B)
310001E001 CH2_CH_CHG Change to LAN_B (Port B) from LAN_A (Port A)

NET_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)
3121001001 NETMONITOR Change to Network monitoring function
3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w.r.t IP1 address
31200A1460 Ping_IP11 Decision output of PING11 response w.r.t IP11 address
31200B1460 Ping_IP12 Decision output of PING12 response w.r.t IP12 address

- 622 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
IEC 61850 communication

Figure 11.3-1 shows a substation automation system (SAS) and a number of IEDs connected
via a Ring LAN (100BASE-FX). The IEDs can have communication with other devices using
the international standard protocol (IEC 61850 standard‡); additionally, the ring network
topology is used to achieve network redundancy in the system. The user should use the GR-
TIEMS to configure the protocol in the IEC 61850 standard. That is, the functions for the
protection, the measurement, monitoring at local and remote, controlling and logging the data
are required to program in the IEC 61850 standard.
Remote
Monitoring
GPS
Communication Substation
Operator Network
Workstation Computer
Engineering
Workstation Printer Router/
Modem
SNTP Ethernet LAN (TCP/IP)
Fiber Optic Ring: 100BASE-FX

CONTROL
MEASUREMENT
GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL
GOOSE
Figure 11.3-1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol
†Note:When applying IEC 61850 communications, the user should map application
signals with the required logical-nodes (LNs) within the IED. In this manual, we
show the application signals as Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the
Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided
by Toshiba. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
‡Note:Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the
user should verify its IEC 61850 capability by reviewing both the protocol-
implementation-conformance-statement (PICS) and the model-implementation-

- 623 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
conformance-statement (MICS). The MICS provides the user with information for
the LNs provided within the IED; the PICS provides the user with information to
enable the IED to communicate with both SAS and other devices. See
Appendix:IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS. It explains how the user can
obtain this information.
When TCP/IP operates, the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer, operator
workstation (OWS), engineering workstation (EWS), remote monitoring system, SNTP server.
In the SAS, the communication is served with the method of data transfer:
 Report method of sending event messages like measurement, status, alarm and so on
 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) method of communication
between IEDs like interlock
 Control method like controlling the circuit breaker (CB), the disconnector (DS), the
selector device (43), the transformer tap (TAP) and so on

- 624 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.3.1 About protocol

The IED dynamically generates Logical Nodes, Data sets and control blocks defined in CID file
upon boot-up. We shall discuss the configuration procedure to set the data in CID files later.
For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and logical
nodes. The user should configure the 61850 Data Model to perform a required function for the
protection and control.
Modular approach achieves data transfer between devices in the IEC 61850 standard. All
function in the IEC 61850 network are grouped into smaller objects called Logical Nodes (LNs),
which contains process objects related data and attributes of a logical device protection and
control function. Logical Node Zero (LLN0) represents specific information of the logical device.
Logical Node Physical Device (LPHD) represents specific information of a physical device. A
generic device is called Physical device (PD). The LPHD contains the properties of the PD. A
specific function in the IED is represented as domain specific LN. The domain specific LN
contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network.
LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged
between PDs. The relation between data object classes, data types, data attributes and
abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model. The LN data model is mapped to
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) functions. Table 11.3-1shows the description of LNs.
Table 11.3-1 LN descripion

Actual device
LN Description
corresponding to LN
Logical node zero represents logical device specific Operation state of BCU
LLNO
information State of 43 switch
Logical node physical device represents physical
LPHD BCU,BCPU
device specific information
Domain Domain specific LN represents protection relay
XCBR,CSWI
specific LN specific function
Generic input output logical node is used if essential Based on client
GGIO
signals are not defined in the extended logical nodes. requirements
All LN classes (LLN0 and domain specific LN) receive the mandatory data of the common LN
except LPHD. Table 11.3-2 exemplifies Function, Logical node and Communication service
used in the IEC 61850 communication.

- 625 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 11.3-2 Function groups in 61850

Examples of IED applications Logical
Functions grouped in to provide protection/control node Communication methods
61850 functions for the power defined in serviced in 61850
system 61850
Overvoltage relay (OV) PTOV Buffered Report
Overcurrent relay (OC) PTOC Buffered Report
Monitor
Trip circuit (TRC) XCBR GOOSE
Generic functions SIMG GOOSE
Control SPOS etc. CSWI Enhanced-security Control
Measurement MMXU Unbuffered Report
Measurement
Harmonics MHAI Unbuffered Report
Time Simple Network Time
NA SNTP
Synchronization Protocol
Figure 11.3-2 shows Physical Model, which is equivalent to the IEC 61850 Model. The Physical
Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with the SAS using
the Ethernet. The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at LNs in both the
PD using different Communication services, which we shall discuss in section 11.3.2.
Monitoring
x Control IED SAS
×
Over current Server / Work
CB Open/Close relay station
CB Status
Measuring
Monitoring Under voltage

relay Ethernet
Substation
Harmonics
measurement
Measuring
Control / Monitoring Protection function
Physical Model
“Logical Node” “Communication Service”
IEC 61850 Model Physical Device
LN Physical Device
LN LPHD LN
GOOSE
CB XCBR CALH
LN Enhanced-security Control
LN
CSWI
IHMI
LN Buffered Report
LN
CT PTOC
LN IARC
GOOSE
PTRC
LN
Buffered Report
VT PTUV
LN Unbuffered Report
MHAI
LN GOOSE
Binary
SIMG
Input
Figure 11.3-2 Example of Physical model and its equivalent IEC 61850 model

- 626 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Legacy IEC61850 (i.e., 61850 Editon1)

It is early edition for the IEC61850 standard. This edition is bundled in all 61850 software.
(ii) 61850 Edition1 with option

When the IED has the IEC61850 Edition1 with Option, the IED can have private object, which
can handle DataUpdate Trigger. For more information, see section 11.3.9.
(iii) 61850 Edition2

When the 61850 edition2 is available in the IED, the IED has LN LGOS, which shall be used
monitoring of GOOSE message. Note that there shall be one instance of LGOS per GOOSE
subscription for a given GOOSE source.
The user can handle LGOS with signals shown in Table 11.3-3. The signals are provided for
mapping in the 61850 Editon2. Figure 11.3-3 shows an example that they are mapped for the
LGOS.
Table 11.3-3 GOOSE message for the monitor or the diagnostic

Signals (Data ID) Signal names Descriptions
305101 7400006470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR #0 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
… … …
Figure 11.3-3 Example of Editon2 LGOS mapping

- 627 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.3.2 Communication service

All essential data transmission methods are summarized in Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI); the IED application from communication stack is separated by the ACSI. The
user can map an interface to a communication stack using Specific communication service
mapping (SCSM).
The LN contains data list with their attributes based on their functionality in SAS. A
data has a well-defined structure and information of SAS. The data and attributes of the LN
in a logical device are exchanged by the communication services according to IEC 61850
protocol. The communication services are implemented by SCSM using Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol.
(i) Report for SAS

In the IED, ‘report’ is a method of sending status data, alarm data, measurement data and so
on. Using server-client communication, ‘Report’ is a ‘data set’ transferred from the IED to the
SAS. The ‘reports’ generated by the predefined ‘triggers’ are issued regularly in interval; the
‘reports’ are also generated upon a change in the event. The ‘reports’ are grouped into two
types: (1) Buffered-report-control-block and (2) Unbuffered-report-control-block. Note that the
system achieved by the unbuffered-report-service cannot start an event recover function
during the communication failure.
(ii) GOOSE for peer-to-peer communication

‘Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) ’ is a faster method to transfer the data
in ‘Generic substation event (GSE)’ between IEDs. In all IEDs, multicast GOOSE message is
published from the ‘GOOSE_control_block (GCB)’. The GOOSE communication methods are
grouped into two: (1) GOOSE publish and (2) GOOSE subscribe.
The data structures of the GOOSE are illustrated in Table 11.3-4; they are grouped for
the system (say, SAS) and other logical devices (say, a relay); they are used in the applications
in the SAS and the IED.

- 628 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 11.3-4 Data structures in the GOOSE

Logical Device
Category “System” Other Logical device (e.g., “Relay”)
Data Model System Relay
DataSet “GOOSEDS” LLN0
GGIO1 Ind1..16 GoCB
LLN0 LPHD1
GoCB PTRC
The DataSet “GOOSEDS” is fixed ….
LPHD1
GGIO
Data set Fixed (Not configurable) Configurable
Performance GOOSE data sent communication time GOOSE data sent, communication
is < 3msec time is around 10msec
(iii) System
The data model in the LN named “System” is not allowed to modify (that is, a data model is
fixed; other LN data models are configurable to meet the system requirement). Mapping
signals to the GGIO1 is required when the GOOSE should send data faster.
(iv) Control mode using GOOSE

In the IED, signals generated on the binary output circuit (BO) can be controlled by the SAS,
if the user makes the link between a reviving control message and a control function block that
changes the state of the output element. Four control modes are provided:
DOes: Direct control with normal security (direct-operate)
SBOns: SBO control with normal security (operate-once or operate-many)
DOes: Direct control with enhanced security (direct-operate)
SBOes: SBO control with enhanced security (operate-once or operate-many)
(v) Time synchronization using IEC 61850 protocol / SNTP

SNTP (Simple network time protocol) is used to synchronize clocks of all IEDs in SAS. Time
synchronization is required to maintain common time across all IEDs in the network. This
makes it easier to analyze the Time stamped event data generated by the IEDs in chronological
order. In the system, IEDs are synchronized with the device having precision time source (for
example, GPS).
(vi) File transfer (COMTRADE)

To send data of the disturbance records, file transfer service is used, which is the operated in
COMTRADE format.

- 629 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vii) Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS)

MMS is an application layer protocol that provides data transmission between IEDs, which
performs monitoring and controlling; it can provide reliability for the data transmission. The
MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP/IP
and Ethernet.
(viii) Generic Substation Events (GSE)

GSE is a control model defined in the IEC 61850 standard; it provides a fast and reliable
method for transferring the event data over the SAS. The GSE provides facility to transfer the
same event message to multiple physical devices using multicast or broadcast service.

- 630 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.3.3 How to manage engineering work

An IED can have multiple logical devices, which represents protection and control functions.
Each logical device has Logical Nodes (LN), Datasets, Report Control Block (RCB), GOOSE
Control Block (GCB), GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe function. Figure 11.3-4
illustrates the data structure in the IED.
IED
*IEC 61850-7-4
Logical device1 CONTROL
Logical Node
*Set of LN variables REPORT

Logical Node (Event,
VCT Report Measurement)

DataSet
Voltage Control Block
Logical Node
Input / Output Signals
Current
Application
Data Logical device2
BIO ・・・ GOOSE GOOSE
DataSet
Binary
Control Block (outgoing)
Logical Node
Input
Binary
Input
2. Mapping 1. icd(cid)
data
GOOSE
GOOSE subscribe function
(incoming)
3. GOOSE subscribe
Figure 11.3-4 IED Data Structure

To configure an IED data structure, the user should edit the following items using GR-TIEMS.
Figure 11.3-5 shows the flow diagram for IEC 61850 configuration.
 Edit Signal mapping
 Edit Logical Node
 Edit DataSet
 Edit Report Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Publish
 Edit GOOSE Subscribe
 Edit Control function

- 631 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Connect PC to IED via LAN or USB
Start GR-TIEMS engineering tool
Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree
(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(i))
Select an IED to manage IEC61850 configuration file

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(i))
Choose a required 61850 edition from the pull-down list

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(ii))
Import ICD/CID file from the selected IED

(→cf. sec.11.3.3(iii))
Map the signals to Logical Nodes

(→cf. sec.11.3.3(iv))
Edit Data set, RCB and GCB

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(iv))
Edit signals for GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(iv))
Write configured data to IED

(→cf. sec.11.3.3(v))
Figure 11.3-5 Flow diagram

- 632 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Creating and opening project

Creation of project file
If the user has an existing project, it can be found in user’s project folder. If the
user does not have the project, create a new project. Figure 11.3-6 shows how to
open an existing project or create a new project.
Figure 11.3-6 File menu
Selection of IED
When user’s project has been created or is opened, the user can add new IEDs.
Figure 11.3-7 illustrates new IED has been added on the project tree.
Figure 11.3-7 Adding IED

- 633 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Choice of 61850 edition number

Select IEC 61850 tool from the menu of Configuration tool, as shown in Figure 11.3-8. When
the user can see the edition list†, select a required one from the list‡. Then, the user can see
the edition number at the header on IEC61850 tool screen, or the bottom of the GR-TIEMS
main screen.
Selection of IEC61850 tool
Edition list
Edition 1
Edition1 display
Edition 1-Opetion
Edition1_Option display
Edition 2
Edition2 display
Figure 11.3-8 Choice of IEC61850 edition number

†Note:When the user has purchased the products supporting for Editon1-Option or later
edition, the GR-TIEMS can display the Edition list menu, as shown in Figure
11.3-8; thus, the user should select one from the edition list. However, if neither is
supported in your products, then the menu is not displayed, and default Edition1
will be selected directly. The user can check it through the IED screen if the IED
has Edition1_Option or later edition. See sec 11.3.3(vi) for the confirmation.
Regarding ‘Edition1_Option’, see section 11.3.1(ii) and 11.3.9.
‡Note:Be aware that your edition selection cannot be undone. If you fail to select a
correct one, make the project again. You are not able to change the edition after
the choice.

- 634 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Check to see that four engineering screens are appeared:

 Logical Node Screen
 Signal List Screen
 GOOSE Publish Screen
 GOOSE Subscribe Screen
Figure 11.3-9 IEC 61850 screens

- 635 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) IEC 61850 configuration files

Substation configuration language (SCL) files are generated by the configuration in the IEC
61850 protocol. The SCL files are used to exchange the configuration data in different
manufacture tools. Two types of files are used for exchanging data in Table 11.3-5.
Table 11.3-5 Types of SCL files

SCL file Description
.ICD This file describes the capabilities of an IED. It contains the
IED Capability Description communication data and function of LN in an IED.
.CID Every device configured for IEC 61850 in the GR-TIEMS tool
Configured IED Description generates a CID file. This file is then written to the IED. This
file contains configuration information of the IED to which it is
connected.
Exporting and Importing CID/ICD file

The user can export or / import a CID/ICD file as a CSV file. The user can edit
the exported CSV file using the MS-EXCEL®; the user can import the edited CSV
file back to the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.3-10 shows the options available to
import/export CID/ICD file. The user can either click the icons on the menu bar
or select the required option form the File menu drop down list.
Import CID/ICD
Export CID
Export ICD
Figure 11.3-10 Export / Import of CID / ICD file
Manage third party CID file

The GR-TIEMS can have third party CID file. In the project tree of the GR-TIEMS,
the user can use the device information for creating a third Party IED. To
configure dataset, RCB, GCB, GOOSE publish and GOOSE subscribe settings
and so on, the data attributes are used after the creation of the data.
Mapping application data in IEC 61850

For any IED, the IEC61850 configuration* is available by default. The user

- 636 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
should check whether the required signals are mapped in the default
configuration.
*Note: There is no default configuration for GOOSE subscription. If GOOSE subscribe

function is required, then a new configuration has to be done.
To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check
the mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list. If they have existed, the signals
in the signal list should be matched with the attributes of LNs.
Figure 11.3-11 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default
configuration. For example, to check for mapping of the primary element signal
in earth fault protection (EF1), follow the steps below:
1. To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN, key ‘EF1’ under Signal
Name in the Signal List screen.
Mapped data
“EF1” in signal list
Figure 11.3-11 Signal mapping

As shown in the above figure, the “EF1” signal is already mapped to LN
attribute Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general.
2. To check if “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already added in Dataset. Right

click on “LLN0” and select Edit DataSet, then DataSet List screen appears as
shown in Figure 11.3-12.

- 637 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Figure 11.3-12 DataSet list
As shown in the above figure, “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already

mapped in the Dataset “STAT1”.
3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and
select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in
Figure 11.3-13.
Figure 11.3-13 Report Control List

As shown in the above figure, the DataSet “STAT1” is already assigned to
RCB “brcbST-A”.

- 638 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Mapping signals in signal list to Logical Nodes

The user can add or modify signal mapping to the LN variable. The following section describes
how to modify the mapped data if the user wants to add signals, which are sent using Report
or GOOSE.
Edit Mapping Data

1. Search the signal to be sent from the Signal List window as shown in Figure
11.3-14.
2. Drag and Drop the selected signal to the logical node variable.
Mapped data
Drop
Drag
Signals
Figure 11.3-14 Signal mapping

Note: To optimize the performance of the IED, “Period” should be 100 if the signal is not
required to be sent immediately.
“301001 3110041005 (Qual_Validity)” should be mapped to “q” with Period=100.
“200301 9010001006 (SYS_TIME)” should be mapped to “t”.
Export / Import Mapping Data

The user can export mapped data in the CSV file; the user can edit the exported
CSV file by the MS-Excel® and import back into the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.3-15
shows the export / import options.
Export Mapping Data

Import Mapping Data
Figure 11.3-15 Export / Import mapping data

- 639 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Edit Logical Node

If the required LN or variable is not available in the IED, the user should follow the
steps below to add or modify the Logical Node:
1. To add new LN or to edit the variable of an existing LN, Right click Prot and
select Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node.
2. In the Edit Logical Node screen, select LN Class, Prefix and LN Instance and
check the required variable check boxes as shown in Figure 11.3-16 below.
To Add Logical Node
To add optional variable

To choose a proper Logical Node*
Figure 11.3-16 Add or Edit Logical Node
*Note: Refer to IEC 61850-7-4 to choose a proper Logical Node.

- 640 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Edit DataSet
Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in
Figure 11.3-17. For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below:
1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as
shown in Figure 11.3-17.
2. Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK.
Users can choose the existing

Dataset*, or enter a new
DataSet name.
Figure 11.3-17 Edit DataSet screen
*Note: 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have
maximum of 32 elements.

- 641 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Edit Report Control Block (RCB)

Report Control Block (RCB) is used to send report from IEDs to client. If the user
wishes to assign the DataSet to Report Control Block, follow the steps below:
1. Under the LN tree structure, select Prot, Right click LLN0 and select Edit
Report Control. Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 11.3-18.
2. Click Add or Edit to add a new dataset or to edit the existing dataset in the
Report Control List window as shown in Figure 11.3-18.
Figure 11.3-18 Edit Report Control screen

- 642 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Edit GOOSE Control Block

GOOSE control block is used to exchange information between IEDs. GOOSE
messages are used for interlock operation between IEDs in order to protect the
electrical system. GGIO1 is used for sending high-speed GOOSE messages. The
DataID assigned to GGIO1 is sent within 3ms.
If the user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation, follow the steps
below:
1. Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 11.3-19.
2. Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE.
Note: The user can assign any signal to GGIO1->Ind1~16 for high-speed GOOSE, as
required.
Drop
Drag
Figure 11.3-19 Signal mapping for high speed GOOSE
As shown in the above figure, signals are assigned to “System/GGIO1$Ind1”. The

user can assign signals to other GGIOs (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3 and so on)
which are not meant for high-speed GOOSE operation.

- 643 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Edit GOOSE Publish

The signals assigned to GGIO1 variables are published automatically by default.
The GGIO1 data set is fixed and is pre-configured in GOOSE Publish screen. If
the user assign signals to other GGIO variables (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3) for
GOOSE publish operation, then the user needs to add those variables in the
GOOSE Publish screen.
Figure 11.3-20 shows the GOOSE Publish screen, where “System” is fixed and is
not configurable for GGIO1, whereas “Ctrl” (Control) and “Prot” (Protection) are
configurable. The user can add new variables from the “Logical Node” screen to
the GOOSE Publish screen using drag & drop* method. Figure 11.3-20 shows an
example for GOOSE Publish, where “System/GGIO2$Ind1$stVal” is added to the
GOOSE Publish screen.
*Note: Only “stVal” and “q” variables can be added to GOOSE Publish screen.
Drag
Fixed
Drop
Figure 11.3-20 GOOSE Publish

- 644 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Edit GOOSE subscribe

GOOSE subscribe function is configured to receive GOOSE messages published
by other IEDs. Figure 11.3-21 exemplifies the GOOSE Subscribe screen; the user
can select the necessary signals to be added. For example, “Bay1 GBU200” is the
current IED; “Bay2 GRZ200” is the other IED. “List 1” is GOOSE publisher of
GRZ200; “List 2” is GOOSE subscriber for GBU200. The user can select the
GOOSE publisher from GRZ200 and add to the GOOSE subscriber of GBU200.
In the example shown below, select the required variable and click Add. Similarly,
the user can delete the variables.
When the user adds a signal to the GOOSE subscribe list from the other IED,
then the same signal is automatically added in the Signal List of the current
IED.
List 2
List 1 List 2
Figure 11.3-21 GOOSE Subscribe

Note: The user can monitor about the GOOSE message on the LCD screen. See sec.
11.3.8.
Edit Control function

The Data IDs (i.e., Signal Number) starting with “5” is used for control function
when the IED has the control function by default. The user should check whether
the required signals are mapped in the default configuration. The user can edit
and add the control signals to the LN as described in section 11.3.3(iv).
In an IED, usually an output Data ID of a protection function is assigned to LN

variable. However, for the control application, the IED is capable of receiving
command from the SAS server. To control a device (such as a circuit breaker), the
input point* (Data ID) in the control application should be configured to receive
commands from the SAS sever (that is, selecting, operating or cancel command).

- 645 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands
from the sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user
should map an input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure
11.3-22). Mapping period for Control shall be 100.
*Note: For more information of the input points, see chapter General control function or
Control and monitoring application, if available.
SBOW
Mapping Input DataID
Oper
DE V01_ CONTROL_ RE Q
Cancel
Figure 11.3-22 Control function mapping

To complete the setting for control function, after mapping data, the user needs
to set BI, BO† in the GR-TIEMS ->Setting.
†Note:For more information for the BI, BO, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module.

- 646 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Writing the configuration file to IED

When the user has completed editing the configuration files, the user can write the
IEC61850 configuration files, as shown in
Figure 11.3-23 Write to IED

Follow the below steps to write the file in the IED.
1. Save the current project in the PC.
2. Right click on the target IED and select “Write to IED”.
3. Click items to write: Signal list†, GOOSE Subscribe†, CID, and
Mapping Data.
4. Click Write to transfer the files to the IED.
Figure 11.3-24 Selection of CFD writing items

†Note:If GOOSE subscribe operation is required, the user shall select Signal List and
GOOSE Subscribe.

- 647 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
5. Set communication parameters, if needed.
Figure 11.3-25 Communication parameter settings
6. Confirm the edition number written in the IED.
Note: The user can check the edition number through on the LCD screen. Therefore, the
user should confirm the edition number written in the IED too. See sec. 11.3.3(vi)
to show the LCD screen.

- 648 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vi) Confirmation of the edition number of IEC61850

Figure 11.3-26 shows how to confirm the edition number, if the IED is supporting several
editions of IEC61850. The user can also confirm the version, when the IED is running in
IEC61850 configuration file. For example, in accordance with on the below information of LCD
screen, the IED can handle three editions and the IED is running on the Edition2 (Ed2).
Main Menu Information

10:48 8/10 10:48 1/xx
Record [IED TYPE]
Monitoring G**
Setting -**-***-**-**-**-***
I/O setting -****-***-**
Control [Serial No.]
Time 1234567890
Test [Plant name]
0Information ABCD station
Security Setting [Description]
Login/Logout ABCDEFG
[CP1M Software]
ABCD***
[IEC61850 eng]
G2M8500**
[IEC61850 Support] Information about the IED is
Ed1/Ed1op/Ed2
[IEC61850 Data Model] supporting 61850 editions.
W2GR_200.***
[IEC61850 SCL Ver.] The IED is running based on the
Edition 2(2007B)
[IEC61850 Mapping] edition of 61850 SCL version.
X2GR_00****
[GOOSE Subscribe]
No data
Scroll downward
Figure 11.3-26 Display sample of 61850 edition information

Note: The edition information will be displayed when the IED has several edition
numbers. If the IED does not have Edition 2 or later, the above texts will not be
screened.

- 649 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.3.4 Settings for 61850 communications

(i) Setting time for re-sending GOOSE packet
The user can configure the maximum duration time for re-sending GOOSE packet. Set the
time in seconds using setting [GOINT].
The setting values have been included in the CID file of the IEC 61850. The IED uses the
information of the CID file when the IED starts up. As the setting values have been included
in the CID file, the user can modify this setting value with the GR-TIEMS. The user is required
to write both of the setting values and the IEC61850-CID file into the IED.
(ii) Setting for 61850 authentication

When the IED is to be authenticated for starting the IEC 61850 communications, the user
should set scheme switch [850AUT] On.
(iii) Blocking 61850 communication

If the user does not want the IED to start the IEC 61850 communications, the user should set
scheme switch [850BLK] On.
(iv) Setting ‘keep-alive’ time for TCP

When applying IEC 61850 communications with TCP/IP, the user should set a time for the
‘keep-alive’ signal. The user should set the time in seconds using the setting [850KEEPALIVE].
(v) Setting ‘CommTerm’

If the user wishes to receive a ‘CommTerm’ signal carrying an actual operation time from a
device outside the IED, the user should set scheme switch [TCMD] On. Note that the
‘CommTerm’ signal† will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this
function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication provided by
TOSHIBA.
†Note:For example, Figure 11.3-27 shows the signal flow between a substation computer
(SC), an IED and a target device (e.g. CB). If the requirement is to close the CB on
request of the SC, the SC will send the operation command “Operate” to the IED;
the time information (T) is also sent along with the operation command. When
receiving the operation command and observing that the CB has closed, the IED
will send a response signal “CommTerm” to the SC along with the time
information. However, this time information is not the actual operation time of the
CB, but the same time information originally sent with the operation command.
The IEC 61850 standard defines this rule; hence, general operations in the IEC
61850 standard are subject to this rule. However, the server communication

- 650 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
provided by Toshiba is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting
‘CommTerm’ is required in the Toshiba communication. The user should also note
that Off is set for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.
Station computer (SC) IED Target device (e.g. CB)
Command “CB closed” Operate+(T)
Command Open
Response
Process Closed
CommTerm+(T) Response
Figure 11.3-27 Example of CB operation flow
(vi) Setting test mode

With regard to the reception test for GOOSE subscribe information, the user can simulate a
bad condition passively by using both GOSNDBLK and GOSUBBLK functions†.
GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

For the test using the GOOSE sending block function (GOSNDBLK), the user can disable the
IED so that it does not send the GOOSE message. The GOSNDBLK function is useful when
there is a conflict in the communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal.
To block the sending of the GOOSE message, the user should set On for scheme switch
[GOSNDBLK].
GOOSE receive block (GOSUBBLK)

Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE
signal, the user can apply a setting that will prevent an IED from receiving the GOOSE
message from another IED using this test. The user can perform this test using the test setting
On for scheme switch [GOSUBBLK]. Consequently, the IED rejects the GOOSE messages from
other IEDs. The GOOSE receive block function (GOSUBBLK) is also useful for the validation
of switchgear interlocking determination.
†Note:The user may wish to perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using
the GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because

- 651 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular
IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the
particular IED under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the
tests.
11.3.5 Selection of a slave protocol

Figure 11.3-28 shows the sub menu to select a slave IEC61850 protocol. The user should select
IEC61850 using the [Slave Protocol]. Note that the user has to restart the IED (i.e., the user
has to switch the IED off and on) if the user has switched to a slave protocol from the others†.

10:48 1/3 10:48 1/1 10:48 1/4
LAN > Slave Protocol + IEC61850
USBCOM > IEC61850 IEC103†
SLAVE PROTOCOL > DNP3.0†
Modbus†
Figure 11.3-28 Slave protection for the IEC61850 (setting menu)

†Note: This sample menu illustrates how to select the IEC 61850, so that we discuss
neither the inclusion of IEC103, DNP3.0, and Modbus nor the selection of those
protocols here. See Figure 11.1-1 to check the inclusion of the protocols in the IED.
11.3.6 How to supervise in 61850 communication

The IED can detect errors on the IEC 61850 communication. The feature is provided separately.
(See Chapter Automatic supervision: Supervision of setting data [Commslv error])

- 652 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.3.7 Quality signal of IEC 61850 communication

Quality information and its attributes are defined in the IEC 61850. Table 11.3-6 shows that
the relations between the definitions in the standard and signals prepared in the IED. The
quality attributes are influenced by the errors and alarms occurred in the IED, and the degree
of those errors are standardized by settings ‘Error level’ (see Chapter Automatic supervision).
The quality information is also affected by the test mode executed in the IED (see Chapter
Commissioning and maintenance).
Table 11.3-6 Quality signal defined in IEC 61850-7-3
IED signal3
Quality components definition in IEC 61850-7-3
Qual_Validity
M/ Default
Attribute Name Attribute value O/
C1 value
Validity good / invalid / reserved / questionable M Y

detailQual —
overflow2 Undecided N
outOfRange2 (shall be N
badReference determined N
Packed
oscillatory2 (packed value) M depending N

Failure on an error N
oldData2 condition) N
inconsistent2 N
Inaccurate N
source2 process / substituted M process N
Test True / False M False Y
operatorBlocked 2 True / False M False N
1Note: M/N/O means rules of attributions. If it is Mandatory (M), it shall be used in the
IED. Optionally (O), or conditional mandatory(C) are used depending on the
environment states.
2Note: The IEDs of GR200 series do not carry those attributes—overflow, out Of Range,
oscillatory, old Data, inconsistent, source, and operator Blocked.
3Note: Detail quality attributes (e.g., overflow, outOfRange, etc. marked with “N”) are not
included in the Qual_Validity.

- 653 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(i) Qual_validity
Qual_validity (61850: Signal No. 301001 3110041005) is a signal provided for a common quality
information. It can be useful if some ‘q’ attributes (it’s defined in Quality type) should belong
to a common quality. Both severe and non-severe errors are included; therefore, that signal
value will be changed whenever errors (including alarm and warning incidents) are detected.
In this quality signal, the Detail quality information—defined in the standard—is not set at
all.
Detail quality
Kinds of Value
operatorblocked
Validity
badReference
Good 00
outOfRange
inconsistent
Validity
inaccurate
Invalid 01
oscillatory
overflow
Kinds of
Questionable 11
oldData
source
failure
test
301001 3110041005
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Qual_Validity
220001 3110111001
SERI_ERR
≥1
220001 3110121001
MINR_ERR
201301 3100001190
Test Mode
Figure 11.3-29 Structure of Qual_validity signal

Note:
 If non-severe incidents—such as Minor, Alarm, or Warning error are detected in
the automatic supervisions, the IEC61850 interrupts the Qual_Validity as
‘questionable (i.e., the string of Qual_Validity is 1100000000000)’.
 If severe incidents—such as Serious or Serious (comm) error are detect, the
IEC61850 interrupts the Qual_Validity as ‘invalid (i.e., it is 0100000000000)’.
 If non-severe and sever incidents occur at the same time, the output of the
Qual_Validiy is ‘invalid (i.e., it is 0100000000000)’.
 The test mode will be expressed if the Qual_Validiy has a test-bit (that is,
‘0000000000010’).
 The outputs of MINR_ERR and SERI_ERR come from the MNT_LOGIC function
block (see Chapter Automatic supervision: Supervision of task operation).
 Test function block can output the Test Mode signal (see Chapter Commissioning
and maintenance: Test operations).

- 654 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.3.8 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication

IEDs are able to monitor the communication using GOOSE packets, which other IEDs have
sent their information via the network. If the IED can receive the GOOSE packets, the IED
can display them on the information list. Figure 11.3-30 illustrates an example of the GOOSE
monitoring list; it shows all IEDs have reported good status (OK) message, except one IED.
GOOSE Monitoring
11:12 1/320 Signal nam es
GRZ200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#0
GRT200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#1
GRD200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#2
GRL200_Bay1 NG SUB_ QUAL#3
Screen scroll down GRT200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#5
GRL200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#7

Figure 11.3-30 Screen example of GOOSE Monitoring

Note: The IED shall be managed with own subscription information to receive the
GOOSE packets regarding the other IEDs. Thus, the user should edit the
subscription contents (see Figure 11.3-21). The LCD displays the statuses based
on that the user has edited the list of the subscription contents.
Note: Jump to Monitoring sub-menu (see Chapter User interface) to display the GOOSE
mentoring screen. The user can also find the GOOSE information on the test
screen on GR-TIEMS.
On the LCD screen, the user can find either OK or NG message regarding other IEDs. The
OK/NG message is generated with the information of the GOOSE packet received. Table 11.3-7
illustrates the messages displayed on LCD screen and GR-TIEMS screen.

- 655 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 11.3-7 GOOSE statutes and signal outputs

Signal values LCD screen messages GR-TIEMS screen messages
0x0000 OK GOOD
0xC000 NG QUESTIONABLE
0xC010 NG QUESTIONABLE | TEST
0xC040 NG QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE
0xC080 NG QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
When the user wishes to see GOOSE outputs†, the user can see them by user’s PLC logic, but
the user should build its logic using the PLC function. Table 11.3-8 shows the GOOSE signals,
which the user can select. For example, in order to get the GRL200_Bay1_4 information, the
user should take the GOOSE content using SUB_QUAL#3 output.
Table 11.3-8 GOOSE output signals

Data ID Signal names Descriptions
301101 3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality status
~~~ ~~~ ~~~
301101 31013E1001 SUB_QUAL#318 GOOSE subscription quality status
301101 31013F1001 SUB_QUAL#319 GOOSE subscription quality status
†Note: The user cannot view GOOSEs signal lists on the GR-TIMES engineering.
11.3.9 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option

The IED can have Private logical nodes, which are provided in Editon1_option, which are
designed in Toshiba private specification exclusively. The user can select and add the following
Data object:
Table 11.3-9 LD class in Editon1 option
LD Class DO Content
GGIO AnInDatUpd DataUpdate Trigger is provided for general Data
Object. The structure is the same as AnIn.
Note: The option1 is designed to transfer the metering values during the fault on the
IEC61850 Edition1.

- 656 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.3.10 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
s value
GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2

850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable Off
850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC 61850 association Off
850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec. TCP ‘KeepAlive’ time for IEC 61850 20
TCMD Off/On Set ‘T’ in ‘CommTerm’ as actual Time Off

- 657 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

 Monitoring point (for Edition 1 and Edition 2)
61850 (Function ID: 301001)
0010001001 61850STAT Status of IEC 61850(T:Running, F:Stop)
3100001440 INCOMINGPKT#0 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0
3100001441 OUTGOINGPKT#0 Outgoing packet number to IEC 61850 client#0
3100001001 REMOTEPORTNUM#0 Port number of IEC 61850 client #0
3110041005 Qual_Validity IEC 61850 validity of quality
 Monitoring point (for Edition 1 and Editon2)

GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Note: The GR-TIEMS cannot display SUB_QUAL# signals
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE being subscribed are not subscribed.
3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000A1001 SUB_QUAL#10 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000B1001 SUB_QUAL#11 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000C1001 SUB_QUAL#12 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000D1001 SUB_QUAL#13 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000E1001 SUB_QUAL#14 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000F1001 SUB_QUAL#15 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 658 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 659 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 660 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 661 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

3100AA1001 SUB_QUAL#170 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AB1001 SUB_QUAL#171 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AC1001 SUB_QUAL#172 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AD1001 SUB_QUAL#173 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AE1001 SUB_QUAL#174 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AF1001 SUB_QUAL#175 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 662 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

3100BA1001 SUB_QUAL#186 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BB1001 SUB_QUAL#187 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BC1001 SUB_QUAL#188 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BD1001 SUB_QUAL#189 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BE1001 SUB_QUAL#190 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BF1001 SUB_QUAL#191 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CA1001 SUB_QUAL#202 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CB1001 SUB_QUAL#203 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CC1001 SUB_QUAL#204 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CD1001 SUB_QUAL#205 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CE1001 SUB_QUAL#206 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CF1001 SUB_QUAL#207 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DA1001 SUB_QUAL#218 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DB1001 SUB_QUAL#219 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DC1001 SUB_QUAL#220 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DD1001 SUB_QUAL#221 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DE1001 SUB_QUAL#222 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DF1001 SUB_QUAL#223 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 663 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

3100EA1001 SUB_QUAL#234 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EB1001 SUB_QUAL#235 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EC1001 SUB_QUAL#236 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100ED1001 SUB_QUAL#237 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EE1001 SUB_QUAL#238 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EF1001 SUB_QUAL#239 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FA1001 SUB_QUAL#250 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FB1001 SUB_QUAL#251 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FC1001 SUB_QUAL#252 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FD1001 SUB_QUAL#253 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FE1001 SUB_QUAL#254 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FF1001 SUB_QUAL#255 GOOSE subscription quality status

- 664 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 665 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

 Monitoring point (for Edition 2)

GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101)
7400006470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#0 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#10 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#11 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#12 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000D6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#13 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000E6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#14 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000F6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#15 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 666 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 667 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 668 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 669 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

7400AA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#170 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#171 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#172 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#173 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#174 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#175 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#186 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#187 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#188 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#189 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#190 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#191 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 670 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

7400CA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#202 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#203 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#204 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#205 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#206 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#207 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#218 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#219 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#220 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#221 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#222 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#223 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#234 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#235 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#236 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400ED6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#237 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 671 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

7400EE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#238 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#239 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#250 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#251 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#252 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#253 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#254 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#255 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

- 672 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 673 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
IEC 60870-5-103 communication

The IEC 60870-5-103 standard† is one of the communication protocols when measuring data
is required to communicate between the control system and the IED; the communication is
carried out with the RS485 or the Fiber optic interface‡. The following data are transferred by
the IEC 60870-5-103 communication; the user is required create the configuration using the
GR-TIEMS, as cited in the previous section:
• Measured data: current, voltage, active power, reactive power, frequency
• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
†Note: The selection of the IEC 60870-5-103 communication is dependent on the

ordering code in the communication protocols. For the selection, see Appendix:
Ordering.
‡Note: The selection concerning to the communication module (interface) is
dependent on the ordering in the hardware selection. We shall see the description
with regard to the communication specification in Chapter Technical description:
Signal processing and communication module.

- 674 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.1 Overview
For the communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the user should create the data with
regard the protocol, which is grouped into a slave and a master. The user can edit the slave
Data or the master Data using the GR-TIEMS.
(i) Management
As cited earlier, the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is grouped into the slave and the master. In an
IED the user should select either the master mode or the slave mode; the user should edit
either the master data or the slave Data. The both modes can provide the same functions
equally. The GR-TIEMS can provide the user the management means for the following data.
Data management
Import data are provided in the CSV file. The data are categorized as “adding items”,
“editing items”, “deleting items”, and “arranging items”.
Process management
Creation of the new data
Registration, clear, and change name of a slave IED
Registration and clear of signals
Edition of the dialog prototype
External Interfaces
Logging and Access Security
Manage IEC 60870-5-103 display

Tree view style
List view style
(ii) Configuration†
Table 11.4-1 and Table 11.4-2 show that the items should be programmed using the GR-TIEMS.
We shall see how to set and edit data of the IEC 60870-5-103 configuration in section 11.4.5
†Note:Configuration for the master Data is not available in the GR200-serises.

- 675 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 11.4-1 Configuration items in IEC 60870-5-103

Items Contents
Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN,
Time-tagged message
Transmission condition(Data ID), COT
INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Data ID),
Time-tagged measurands
COT, Type of measurands quantities
General command INF, FUN, Control condition(Data ID)
Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurands,
Measurands
Type of measurands quantities
Table 11.4-2 Common settings in IEC 60870-5-103

Items Notice
Transmission cycle of
To perform to write the settings in the IED effectively, the
Measurands frame
user should turn off the DC supplying to the IED; then turn
FUN of System function
on the DC again.
Test mode

- 676 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.2 Requirements in the Master station

In the master station of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the following specifications should be
followed in the respective IEDs:
1) Polling cycle: 150ms or longer
2) Timeout time (time to re-sending the request frame to the IED): 100ms
IEC103 master IED
Data request
Polling cycle: Response frame

150ms or more
Data request
Response frame
Figure 11.4-1 Ping cycles between the master station and the IED

- 677 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.3 Interoperability
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol provides a physical layer and an application layer for the
communication to secure the interoperability.
(i) Physical layer

Either an electrical or an optical interface† is defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Electrical interface in the RS-485

A maximum number of 32 relays is possible in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Optic interface
Several optic communication modules are available
†Note:Either interface is provided with a communication module in the IED; the

specification is discussed separately. See chapter Technical description: Signal
processing and communication module.
(ii) Application Layer

The following layers are provided on the application layer:
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

- 678 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.4 Communication interface in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard

(i) Spontaneous events
When events are generated in the IED, they are transferred to the master station. The event
transferred is grouped into the Function-type (FUN) and the Information numbers (INF).
(ii) General interrogation1

“GI request” is used when it is required to read the IED status, the Function-types (FUNs),
and the Information numbers (INFs). The status and others are reported during the GI cycle.
(iii) Cyclic measurements

Measured values are cyclically generated using Type ID=3 or 9; they are read in the IED using
a Class 2 poll. The generating rate of new measured values is possible to program.
(iv) Commands2
The user can customize the supported commands. The IED can replay for unsupported
commands using the cause of transmission (COT) negative acknowledgement of a command.
(v) Test mode3

For the process in the control system, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values
are designated by the means in the ‘test mode’ of “CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION”. The means
denoted the ‘test mode’ of “CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7” is normally used for the messages
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
(vi) Blocking of monitor direction4

If blocking the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and
measurands are never transmitted.
1Note: With regard to the GI list, see Appendix IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability. When
the user wishes to understand the details, refer to the section 7.4.3 of the IEC
60870-5-103 standard.
2Note: For details, refer to the section 7.4.4 of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.

- 679 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.5 Editing data of the configuration

(i) Common setting
When the “Common setting” item is selected on the start screen of the IEC 60870-5-103
configuration, the “Common setting” setting screen is displayed. Settings common to each
frame can be performed in this screen.
Setting file remark

The remark of the setting file is used for managing the version of the configuration data file.
A comment with the maximum of 12 characters can be entered in the box. The comment can
be viewed on the IED screen.
Remote operation valid time

When “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged measured” occurs during the period from the
receiving any command (which is provided by “General command” setting) to the setting
time of “Remote Operation valid time”, its COT is set to COT=12 (Remote operation). This
setting for the event is enabled when the COT=12 and COT=1 or 11 are checked in “Time-
tagged message” or “Time-tagged measurand” setting. The setting range of “Remote
Operation valid time” is 0 to 60000ms. The default setting is 4000ms. In the following case,
the “Time-tagged measurand” with COT=12 occurs.
Remote operation valid time = TR[ms]
Command Time tagged measurand with

receive COT=11, 12 checked occurs.
Figure 11.4-2 Time setting for the remote operation
Local operation valid time

When “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged measurand” occurs during the period from
the start of local operation (described in 11.4.5(ii)-7) to the setting time of “Local Operation
valid time”, its COT is set to COT=11 (Local operation). This setting for the event is enabled
when the COT=11 and COT=1 or 12 are checked in “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged
measurand” setting. The setting range of “Remote Operation valid time” is 0 to 60000ms.
The default setting is 4000ms. In the following case, the “Time-tagged message” with
COT=11 occurs.
Local operation valid time = TL[ms]
(Off-delay time after finish of local operation)
Start of Finish of Time tagged measurand with

local operation local operation COT=1, 11, 12 checked occurs.
Figure 11.4-3 Time setting for the local operation
Measurand period
This setting is used to set the transmission cycle (s) of Measurand frame. The setting range
is 0 to 60s. If no Measurand frame is provided by measurand setting, this setting is disabled.

- 680 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Function type of system functions

This setting is used to set Function type (FUN) of System functions† (INF=0 to 5). The FUN
can be set individually per the frame provided. When clicking the “Change all FUNs”,
confirmation dialog box appears. When clicking “OK”, FUNs of all frames are changed to
these setting values.
†Note:We mean the following frames: end of general interrogation, time
synchronization, reset FCB, reset CU, start/restart, power on.
Signal No. of test mode

This setting is used to set a Data ID in the test mode. The relevant Data ID should be
selected from the signal list, which can be found in Chapters “Relay” or “Control and
monitoring” applications. Usually, the default setting is not changed.
The test mode in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is enabled by the operation on the IED
screen or the GR-TIEMS. When the set signal changes “ON” and Time-tagged message or
Time-tagged measured of spontaneous cause (COT=1) or measurand frame or cyclic
transmission (Type ID=3 or 9) occurs, its COT shifts COT=7 (Test mode).
Signal No. for relative time and fault number

This setting is used to set the trigger signal which is attached the frame of Type ID=2 or 4.
The trigger signal is selected from the signal list. (This setting is not related to the frame of
Type ID=1.)
The time (ms), which is from the establishment of a set signal to the detection of a
status change, is added the set frame as RET value. FAN (Fault number), attached the
frame of Type ID=2 or 4, has the same number during the set signal ON. (Whenever the set
signal is ON, the FAN increases.) When setting to “0”, RET value is always “0” (RET=0).
The default setting is set to the OR signal of elements operation. When Type ID=2 frame is
provided with OC trip as send condition, for example, the time from OC element operation
to OC tripping is attached to the frame as RET. Though, the RET of GI frame is always “0”
in spite of this setting.
In the following case, T1[ms] is attached to i as RET, T2[ms] is attached to ii ,

and T3[ms] is attached to iii , as shown in Figure 11.4-4.
T1
T2
T3 t
Signal “ON” Type ID=2 Type ID=4 Signal “OFF” Type ID=2
i occurs ii occurs iii occurs
Figure 11.4-4 Occurrences after the signal “ON”

- 681 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Setting of time-tagged messages

In Time-tagged message frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information and
status information are responded for Class 1 request from the upper system (station). The
GR-series relay can provide event information and status information by Time-tagged
message frame about the signal assigned to a Data ID of the signal list.
When the “Time-tagged message” tab is selected, the “Time-tagged message” setting
screen is displayed on the start screen.
Figure 11.4-5 Time-tagged message in the GR-TIEMS
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative
time) can be set in this screen. In one frame of Time-tagged message, the Type ID, INF,
FUN, DPI and COT must be set and the maximum 256 frames of Time-tagged message can
be set. The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most
left item “No.” is only serial number and can be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
†Note:For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.
In the transmission format of Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) and Type ID=2 (Time-
tagged message with relative time), customized items are shown in Table 11.4-3 and Table
11.4-4.
Table 11.4-3 Time-tagged message (Type ID=1)
Oct. Item Value Remarks
1 Start 68H
2 Length 14
3 Length 14
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 08H+ACD+D
FC
6 Address 1-254 Setting from the relay
7 Type identification (Type ID) 1 Customized by GR-TIEMS
8 Variable structure qualifier 81H
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 1/9/11/12 Customized by GR-TIEMS

- 682 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

10 Common address of ASDU Linked with Address
1-254
setting
11 Function type (FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
13 Double point information (DPI) -/(0)/1/2/(3)/DP Customized by GR-TIEMS
14 Millisecond (low)
0-59999
15 Millisecond (high)
16 Minutes + Invalid flag (MSB) 0-59+80H
17 Hours + Summer time flag (MSB) 0-23+80H
18 Supplementary information (SIN) 0-255
19 Checksum
20 End 16H
Table 11.4-4 Time-tagged message with relative time (Type ID=2)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 18
3 Length 18
4 Start 68H
08H+ACD+D
5 Control field
FC
10 Common address of ASDU 1-254 Linked with Address setting
13 Double point information (DPI) -/(0)/1/2/(3)/DP Customized by GR-TIEMS
Trigger condition to
14 Relative time (RET) 0-65535 calculate RET is customized
by GR-TIEMS.
Trigger condition of FAN
16 Fault number (FAN) 0-65535 increment is customized by
GR-TIEMS.
18 Millisecond 0-59999
22 Supplementary information (SIN) 0-255
23 Checksum
24 End 16H
Description
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
function of IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Signal name / signal description

The Data ID† (Sig. No.) showing the status of the frame is set from the signal list of the

- 683 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
relay. If the setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related events are disable and
the frame is not provided.
†Note:A relevant Data ID is required to select; the description is obtained
automatically.
Type ID
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)
is selected to set the frame type. It is recommended that the frame related to status is set
to Type ID=1 and the frame related to faults is set to Type ID=2. In Type ID=2, the trigger
signal for the relative time should be set. For the setting, see Section 11.4.5(i).
INF
Information number (INF) of the frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255. When the
standard frame is provided, the INF according to the Appendix† is recommended. If the
frame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-5 and the
Appendix†.
Table 11.4-5 INF category of Monitor direction
INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 Status
32 to 47 Supervision
48 to 63 earth fault
64 to 127 short circuit
128 to 143 auto-reclosure
144 to 159 Measurands
160 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions
†Note:See Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability: Semantics of Information
number.
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to Table 11.4-6. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When
clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the
setting values at Common setting.
Table 11.4-6 Semantics of Function type
0 - 127 private range
128 distance protection
129 not used
144 not used
145 not used
160 overcurrent protection
161 not used
176 transformer differential protection
177 not used
192 Line differential protection

- 684 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
193 not used

208 not used
209 not used
224 not used
225 not used
240 not used
241 not used
254 Generic function type
255 Global function type
DPI/Off, DPI/On
Double-point information (DPI) is set using the menu as follows:
DPI/Off: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is OFF.
DPI/On: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is ON.
Note: If selecting “-”(=don’t care), the frame is not transmitted even though the
DPI/Sig.No. signal set change to the set status. In general, the frames related
to tripping such as “Time-tagged message” and Time-tagged measurand”, etc.,
which are not an object of GI (General Interrogation), are not transmitted
when the DPI changes “On” to “Off”. In this case, set the “DPI/Off” to “-”(=don’t
care).
Note: When selecting “DP” for both “DPI/Off” and “DPI/On”, the DPI number is
transmitted as the number (=0/1/2/3) using the same information number
(INF). Regarding the frame related to a device control, the “undefined/failed”
status may be required in addition to the “close/open” status for the extension.
When selecting “DP”, “undefined(00)/close(01)/open(10)/failed(11)” status is
applied in the same information number (INF).
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but also two or more
COT can be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the
frame are as follows:
(1) If two or all of COT=1, 11 and 12 are checked per No., each frame of the No. become
the following conditions.
Table 11.4-7 COT
COT Conditions
COT=12
TR[ms] after receiving any command of the IEC 60870-5-1031
(remote operation)
COT=11
TL[ms] after Key operation on the relay front panel1
(local operation)
COT=1 Conditions except above COT=11 and 12
(spontaneous) The relay is in test mode2, the COT=1(Spontaneous) is shifted to 7(Test mode)
1Note: TR and TL are set in Common setting.
2Note: Settings of the test mode is described later.
(2) If one of COT is specified per No., the frame is always supplemented with the

- 685 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
specified COT regardless of cause of transmission.

(3) If COT=9 is specified, the frame become the object of GI and is sent back when the
GI request frame is received. Time-tagged message is sent back in order of No.
instead of order of INF.
Table 11.4-8 shows the summary of (1), (2) and (3) above.
Table 11.4-8 COT setting pattern and COT supplemented frame
COT setting
pattern COT supplemented frame when status changes GI
1 9 11 12
 Always “1” No
 Events don’t occur. Yes
  Always “1” Yes
  “11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) No
  “12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) No
“11” (cause at local) or “12” (cause at remote) or “1”
  (other causes) No
   “11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) Yes
   “12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) Yes
   (other causes) No
   (other causes) Yes
    (other causes) Yes
Always “1” in spite of cause of event occurrence No
Note: When being in the test mode, the COT=1(Spontaneous) is shifted to 7(Test
mode)

- 686 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Setting for time-tagged measurands

For Time-tagged measurand frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information
supplemented with numerical information are responded for Class 1 request from upper
system (station). The GR200-series relay can provide event information, which is converted
the numerical information in metering table according to user setting weight, by using
Time-tagged measurand frame about the signal assigned (i.e., the Data ID).
When the “Time-tagged measurand” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting
screen is displayed.
Figure 11.4-6 Time-tagged measurands
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time) can be set in this screen. In
one frame of Time-tagged measurand, the INF, FUN, Sig No., Rev, COT and SCL must be
set and the maximum eight frames of Time-tagged measurand can be set. The information
number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item “No.” is only serial
number and can be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† of the relay.

†For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.
In the transmission format of Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time),
customized items are shown in Table 11.4-9.
Table 11.4-9 Time-tagged measurand with relative time (Type ID=4)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 20
3 Length 20
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 08H+ACD+DFC
7 Type identification (Type ID) 4

- 687 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

13 Short-circuit location (SCL) Customized by GR-TIEMS
Trigger condition to calculate RET is
17 Relative time (RET) 0-65535
customized by GR-TIEMS.
Trigger condition of FAN increment is
19 Fault number (FAN) 0-65535
customized by GR-TIEMS.
21 Millisecond 0-59999
25 Checksum
26 End 16H
Description
function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Signal name / signal description

The Data ID† (Sig. No.) showing the trigger of the frame is set from the signal list. If the
setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related the “Time-tagged measurand” are
disable and the frame is not provided.
The frame cannot be set to the object of GI and cannot be transmitted even though the
status of set signal changes from ON to OFF. If the metering values at the newest fault
record are transmitted as the status change frame, select the Data ID of “F.Record_DONE”
or “FAULT RECORD DONE” in the signal list of the relay.
†Note:A relevant Data ID is required to select in the signal list. The description of the
Data ID is obtained automatically on the setting.
Inverse
This setting is used to invert the logic of the signal assigned to the Data ID above. If the
frame is transmitted when the signal assigned to the Data ID is ON, leave the Inverse check
box blank. If the frame is transmitted when the signal is OFF, click the inverse check box
to be marked with “”.
Type ID
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with Relative time) is fixed. In Type ID=4, the trigger
signal for the relative time should be set. For the setting, see Section 11.4.5(i).
INF
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the fame
out of the standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-3 and the
Appendix†.

- 688 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to the Table 11.4-4. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255.
When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed
to the setting values at Common setting.
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but two or more COT
can be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the frame
are according to Table 11.4-6. Though, the COT=9 (General Interrogation) cannot be
selected.
SCL Measurement Name/Measurement Description

The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using floating-
point number. The SCL is a value which the power system quantity specified as above is
multiplied by this setting value.

- 689 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Setting for General commands

Using General command frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, relay applications can be
performed by the remote control. For the GR200-series relay, a Data ID in the signal list is
controlled when receiving general command frame.
When the “General command” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting screen
is displayed.
Figure 11.4-7 “General command” setting screen
The frame of Type ID=20 (General command) and Command ACK/NACK can be set
in this screen. In one command of General command, the INF, FUN and DCO must be set.
The Command ACK/NACK is for detail setting and must not be set usually. (If do not check
the Ext check box, the setting of Command ACK/NACK is disabled and the Command ACK
and Command NACK respond according to the default response.)
The maximum 32 frames of General command and Command ACK/NACK can be set.
The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item
“No.” is only serial number and can be skipped.

In this setting screen, if a Data ID except “0” is set to “Sig Off” and “Sig On”, the
command at INF setting value is provided and Command ACK or Command NACK is sent
back when receiving the command from upper station. If both “Sig Off” and “Sig On” have
“0”, the fixed length NACK is always sent back then and the command is not provided.
Though the command is provided, however, Command NACK is always sent back and
no control is performed in the following cases:
(1): When receiving any General command from the upper station before Command
ACK/NACK is sending back from the relay.
(2): Under Monitor direction block condition (“IECBLK” setting is “blocked”.) when
receiving General command.
(3): When receiving an incorrect value of DCO of General command, that is DCO is neither
“1” nor “2”.
General command receiving sequence is as follows:

- 690 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Primary Secondary
station station
General
Command
ACK
Class 1
Command
ACK/NACK
Figure 11.4-8 Command receiving sequence
In the transmission format of General command (Type ID=20), customized items are
shown in Table 11.4-10.
Table 11.4-10 General command (Type ID=20)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 10
3 Length 10
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 73H/53H
7 Type identification (Type ID) 20
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 20
11 Function type (FUN) 0-255
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized by the GR-TIEMS
13 Double command (DCO) 1/2
14 Return Information identifier (RII) 0-65535
15 Checksum
16 End 16H
In the transmission format of Command ACK/NACK (Type ID=1), customized items

are shown in Table 11.4-11. The frame type of Command ACK/NACK is Time-tagged
message.
Table 11.4-11 Time-tagged message (Type ID=1)
1 Start 68H
2 Length 14
3 Length 14

- 691 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

4 Start 68H
Control field 08H+ACD+
5
DFC
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 20/21 Customized by GR-TIEMS
Customized by GR-TIEMS.
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Answer back of receiving
command INF
Double point information (DPI) Answer back of receiving
13 1/2
command DCO
14 Millisecond (low)
0-59999
15 Millisecond (high)
Supplementary information (SIN) Answer back of receiving
18 0-255
command RII
19 Checksum
20 End 16H
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect
the function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Description
function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Type ID
Type ID=20 (General command) is fixed.
INF
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the
frame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-12 and the
appendix†.
Table 11.4-12 INF category of Monitor direction
INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 status
32 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions

- 692 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
FUN
Function type (FUN) applied to a command response frame is set referring to Table 11.4-13.
The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common
setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting.
DCO/Sig Off Name, Signal Off Desc., DCO Signal On Name, Signal On Desc.,
Inverse
“Sig off” and “Sig On” are used to set the Data ID of control object in General command.
(Hereafter, these are described as “command output signal”.) “Inverse” is used to reverse
the logic when controlling the command output signal.
When the command output signal is treated as two signals (Sig Off  Sig On), the
control scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving command
DCO and Inverse setting.
For example, when the DCO=Off command is received under “Inverse” no-checked,
the command output signal of “Sig Off” is controlled to “1”. “Sig On” is not controlled.
Table 11.4-13 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off  Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified to
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off Sig.on
command DCO
Off Controlled to “1” Not controlled Controlled to “0” Not controlled
On Not controlled Controlled to “1” Not controlled Controlled to “0”
When the command output signal is treated as one signal (Sig Off  Sig On), the
control scheme is shown in Table 11.4-14. For example, when the DCO=On command is
received under “Inverse” checked, the command output signals of “Sig On” and “Sig Off” are
controlled to “0”. “Sig On” is not controlled.
Table 11.4-14 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off = Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off to Sig.on
command DCO
Off Controlled to “0” Controlled to ”1”
On Controlled to ”1” Controlled to “0”
When setting the “Sig Off”, “Sig On” and “Inverse”, check the specifications of the
command output signals of communication and others, and then set them.
Valid time

- 693 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Valid time is used to set the time (ms) to control the command output signal. The command
output signal is controlled based on the control scheme described in section 11.4.5(iv)-5 for
the setting time after receiving General command, and is reset by communication side after
the set time. However, if the time is set to “0”, the control is not reset and is continued. Set
the time with a margin for interface of other applications.
ACK/NACK / Ext
This setting is used to enable the extension setting of Command ACK/NACK response
scheme or not. If “Ext” is not specified (Ext check box is not checked.), Command NACK (in
cases of (1)–(3) of the section 11.4.5(iii) and Command ACK (in case of others) respond
according to the default response. If “Ext” is specified, the setting of Command ACK/NACK
described later is enabled and the response scheme can be customized. When required the
stricter handshake by using Command ACK/NACK, it is better to specify the “Ext”. This
setting is not influenced by the control scheme of the command output signal.
Signal ACK Name/Signal ACK Desc./Signal NACK Name/Signal NACK

Desc./Inverse
“ACK Sig” and “NACK Sig” are used to set the Data ID for judgment of command response.
(Hereafter, these are described as “command response signal”.) “Inverse” is used to reverse
the logic of the command response signal, and “Timeout” is used to set the timeout time for
judgment of command response. Under specified “Ext” (Ext check box is checked.),
Command ACK or Command NACK responds based on the logic of command response
signal against General command.
When the command response signal is treated as two signals (ACK Sig  NACK Sig),
the judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving
command DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is when (1), (2), (3) or (4) in Table
11.4-15 is established. If the neither (1), (2), (3) nor (4) is established (that is ACK sig =
NACK Sig = 1 or ACK sig = NACK Sig = 0) for the period from the command receiving to
the timeout setting time, Command NACK responds at that time.
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” no-checked,
Command ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = 0” and NACK Sig = 1”.
Table 11.4-15 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig  NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
Command response signal

(1)NACK Sig=1 (2)NACK Sig=0 (3)NACK Sig=1 (4) NACK Sig=0
Receiving
ACK Sig=0 ACK Sig=1 ACK Sig=0 ACK Sig=1
command DCO
Command NACK Command ACK Command ACK Command NACK

Off
responds. responds. responds. responds.

On
When the command response signal is treated as one signal (ACK Sig = NACK Sig),
the judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving
command DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is after the timeout setting time

- 694 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
from the command receiving.
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” checked,
Command ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = NACK Sig = 1” after the timeout setting
time.
Table 11.4-16 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig = NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
Command response signal

(1)NACK Sig= (2)NACK Sig = (3) NACK Sig = (4) NACK Sig =
Receiving
ACK Sig = 0 ACK Sig = 1 ACK Sig = 0 ACK Sig = 1
command DCO
Command ACK Command NACK Command NACK Command ACK

Off

On

- 695 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Setting of Measurands

In Measurand frame of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, numerical information such as power
system quantities are responded for Class 2 cyclic request from upper system (station). The
GR200-series relay can provide numerical information, which is converted the numerical
information in metering table according to user setting weight.
When the “Measurands” item is selected on the start screen of the GR-TIEMS, the
setting screen is displayed.
Figure 11.4-9 “Measurands” setting screen
Figure 11.4-10 “Measurand1” setting screen
In one frame of Measurand, the Type ID, INF, FUN settings, and its position setting
(Measurement Name/Measurement Description/Lower Limit/Upper Limit/Coefficient)
must be set. “No.” shows the position of power system quantity. (For details, describe later.)
The maximum 16 items of Measurands and the maximum 32 power system quantities per
one frame can be set.


- 696 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
In the transmission format of Measurand I (Type ID=3) and Measurand II (Type ID=9),
customized items are shown in Table 11.4-17.
Table 11.4-17 Measurand I／Measurand II (Type ID=3／9)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 8+2N
3 Length 8+2N
4 Start 68H
08H+ACD+
5 Control field
DFC
7 Type identification(Type ID) 3/9 Customized by GR-TIEMS
9 Cause of transmission(COT) 2/7
11 Function type(FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
12 Information number(INF) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
Measurand with quality
13+2(N-1) Customized by GR-TIEMS
descriptor(MEA) + IV + OV
15+2(N-1) Checksum
16+2(N-1) End 16H
Description
function of the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Type ID
Type ID=3 (Measurands I) or Type ID=9 (Measurands II) can be selected to set the frame
type of Measurand frame. In general, the maximum MEA number of Type ID=3 uses 1 or 2
or 4 and that of Type ID=9 uses 9. (However, the maximum MEA number of both types can
extend up to 32 in the GR-TIEMS. In this case, there are no difference between the
transmission format of Type ID=3 and that of Type ID=9.)
INF
Information number (INF) of the Measurand frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255.
When the standard frame† is provided, the INF according to the standard is recommended.
If the fame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-3
and the appendix†.
FUN
Function type (FUN) of the Measurand frame is set referring to the Table 11.4-4. The FUN
can be set to 0 to 255. If click the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all
FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting.

- 697 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Name
Any comment with maximum eight characters can be entered. This setting does not affect
the function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Measurement Name/Measurement Description

The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select.
Lower Limit/Upper Limit

The established condition of IV flag is set per MEA. IV flag is established when MEA value
exceeds a Lower limit or an Upper limit. If Lower limit = Upper limit =0 is set, The IV flag
is always established and it becomes MEA=0.
Table 11.4-18 MEA Bit Arrangement
High Octet Low Octet
Sign B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 RES IV OV
If MEA value exceeds the full scale (if the value expressed as B1 to B12 is less than
4096 or more than 4095), the MEA is clamped at 4096 or 4095 and OV flag is established.
However, if IV flag is established, OV flag is not established.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using floating-
point number. The MEA is a value which the power system quantity specified as above is
multiplied by this setting value.

- 698 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.6 Protocol selection

As shown in the setting menu for the Communication (Figure 11.4-11), the user should set
IEC103 for the [Slave Protocol] so that the communication in the IEC60870-5-103 standard is
carried out in the IED. Note that the restarting the IED (i.e., resetting the IED power) is
required after the user turns to the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.

10:48 1/3 10:48 1/1 10:48 1/4
LAN > Slave Protocol + IEC61850†
USBCOM > IEC103 IEC103
SLAVE PROTOCOL > DNP3.0†
Modbus†
Figure 11.4-11 Slave protection for the IEC103 protocol (on IED setting menu)
Note: This sample menu illustrates how to select the IEC103, so that we do not discuss
the inclusion of IEC61850, DNP3.0, and Modbus and the selection of those
protocols here. See Figure 11.1-1 to check the inclusion of the protocols in the IED.

- 699 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.7 Tips for settings

During the GR-TIEMS operation, we recommend the user to choose an appropriate file-name
for the setting-file. That is, for example, when the user creates the setting file for an IED at
the first time, the user is required to make it with the name “IED#1-model_01.map”. Likewise,
the user can create the other setting file with the name “IED#2-model_01.map” for the other
IED. If the user is required to modify the “IED#1-model_01.map”, the user should replace the
name by new name “IED#1-model_02.map”. Consequently, the user can easily discriminate the
setting files in the IED model2 (i.e., IED#1-model or IED#2-model) and the revision number
(i.e., 01 or 02).
Figure 11.4-12 shows the editing screen of the GR-TIEMS; the screen has a remark field
concerning to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication. Note the available length of the remark
field is up to 12 in the one-byte character. The remark field is utilized for the control of the
setting data.
Figure 11.4-12 Common setting screen in the GR-TIEMS

Note: We recommend to make the backup file of the setting data.

- 700 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
11.4.8 Setting
Setting of 103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001)
s value
103ADDR 0 to 254 Slave address 2

103TST Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 test mode Off
103BLK Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 slave block Off

- 701 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

 Monitoring point
103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001)
3100011001 103SLV STAT 103SLV STATUS
8020011001 AG1STAT Active Group 1 status
3120001001 AGNUM Active Group Number
8030001001 GPCMD00STAT General Purpose Command 0 status
8A300A1001 GPCMD10STAT General Purpose Command 10 status
8B300B1001 GPCMD11STAT General Purpose Command 11 status
8C300C1001 GPCMD12STAT General Purpose Command 12 status
8D300D1001 GPCMD13STAT General Purpose Command 13 status
8E300E1001 GPCMD14STAT General Purpose Command 14 status
8F300F1001 GPCMD15STAT General Purpose Command 15 status
8A301A1001 GPCMD26STAT General Purpose Command 26 status
8B301B1001 GPCMD27STAT General Purpose Command 27 status
8C301C1001 GPCMD28STAT General Purpose Command 28 status
8D301D1001 GPCMD29STAT General Purpose Command 29 status
8E301E1001 GPCMD30STAT General Purpose Command 30 status
8F301F1001 GPCMD31STAT General Purpose Command 31 status
3110001001 LEDRST_STAT LED Reset status

- 702 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
USB communication
The IED front panel has an USB receptacle in a B-type to connect with a local PC for
engineering. The user can select a transmission speed, which is shown below, by the operation
of the setting menu, as shown in Figure 11.5-1.
USBCOM
10:48 1/1
USBCOM_BRATE_SW +
921.6kbps
Figure 11.5-1 USB setting menu (on IED screen)
Setting of USB (Function ID: 231701)

s value
USBCOM_BRATE_SW 115.2 / 921.6 kbps Baud rate Switch for USB Com port 921.6

- 703 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
RS485 communication
When the IED has an RS485 module for the communication, the user can select and set its
transmission and error check parity codes. Figure 11.6-1 shows the setting screen when the
RS485 module (#1) operates.
RS485
10:48 1/2
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
19.2kbps
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
NONE
Figure 11.6-1 RS485 setting menu (on IED screen)
Setting of RS485 (Function ID: 232201)

s value
Module RS485_1_BRATE_SW 9.6 / 19.2 / 38.4 /57.6 / 115.2 kbps Transmission speed 19.2
#1 RS485_1_PAR_SW NONE / ODD /EVEN – Parity check code NONE

- 704 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
12 User interface
Outline 706 Time sub-menu 745
-Front panel 706 -Clock 745
-LCD screen 706 -Time zone 746
-LEDs 706 -Time synchronization 747
-Function Keys 707 -Display format 749
-Operation Keys 708 -Summer time(DST) 751
HMI operation 709 Test sub-menu 753
-General operation 709 -Test screen 753
-Main-menu and sub-menu 709 -Test mode screen 753
Record sub-menu 712 -Test flag enabling screen 757
-Fault record 712 -Mode change screen 758
-Event record 715 -Signal monitoring screen 758
-Disturbance record 717 Information sub-menu 759
Monitoring sub-menu 719 Security setting sub-menu 760
-Metering 719 Control sub-menu 761
-Binary I/O 719 -DPOS operation 761
-Communication 720
-Relay elements 722
-Statistics 723
-Goose monitoring 724
-Diagnostics 725
Setting sub-menu 726
-Setting method 726
-Confirmation dialog 730
-On/Off 733
- Group setting 733
-Function key 735
I/O setting 739
-Binary input 739
-Binary output 740
-LED 743

- 705 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through the USB cable. This section discusses the
configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu hierarchy of
the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
(i) Front Panel

The front panel is provided with a screen (LCD Screen), 26 light emitting diodes (LEDs), 11
operation keys, seven function keys (in the later section the function keys are referred to as F1
to F7.), monitoring jacks and a USB receptacle.
LEDs
LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with USB

LEDs (A, B, and C)
Figure 12.1-1 Front Panel

(ii) LCD screen
The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED such
as records, monitoring and settings. Normally, the LCD screen appears blank unless an
operation key is pressed, by pressing any of the operation keys, the LCD screen will display
the top menu. If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen, the user can turn off the screen
backlight by pressing the operation key ◄. When operation is idle for some time, the screen
backlight turns off. By pressing any key except the CLEAR key, the backlight turns on, and
the previous menu will be displayed on the LCD screen.
(iii) LEDs
As shown in Table 12.1-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:

- 706 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 12.1-1 LED labels and their color

LED1 User configurable
Label Color Remarks
No. setting2
Lit up when the IED
1 IN SERVICE Green N/A
is in service.
Lit up when an error
2 ERROR Red N/A
is occurred.
3 N/A N/A ✔
4 TRIP Red ✔ Default

5 N/A N/A ✔
6 TEST Yellow ✔ Default

7 N/A N/A ✔
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
26 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LED3 to LED26 are user-configurable. Users can use them with or without latch
function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section 12.6(iii).
(iv) Function keys

Seven function keys (F1 to F7) have the following two features.
 Skip to a specific screen directly, set by the user.
Used for skipping to a set page by pressing the function keys. Press again to return to the
previous page. Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page. (See
section 12.5(v)-1)
 Test signal generator.
A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals. Set by assigning the
signal in the settings menu. (See section 12.5(v)-2)
Table 12.1-2 Features of Function keys (F1 to F7)
Labels on Keys Feature and Remark
LED† Skip to a specific screen directly.

Control for the operation of pre-assigned
F1 to F7 binary signals.
†Note: The user can program to light the LEDs by itself. Setting are similar to the ones
of the Table 12.1-1 (For setting, see section 12.6(iii)). Note the manufacture
programs to light the respective LEDs in default prior to shipping.

- 707 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Operation keys

By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 12.1-3.
Table 12.1-3 Features of operation keys
Label Functions and Remarks
Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up1
Move the cursor down / Scroll down / Count down1
Previous page / Move to the left digit.
Next page / Move to the right digit
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CANCEL Exit edit mode / Cancel operation.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
I Control key. (Close)
O Control key. (Open)
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: The MIMIC key is only available when Large LCD screen is mounted on the front
panel. The pixel resolution (dot) is 240(W) × 320(H). Note that this mode is only
provided when the user programmed the feature using GR-TIEMS engineering
tool. See chapter Engineering tool: MIMIC configuration tool.

- 708 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
HMI operation
By using the LCD screen, the operation keys and the function keys, the user can access
functions such as recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The operation of the LCD screen is more or less common in all IED models.
However, the contents of the LCD screen depend upon the IED model.
(i) Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation

When the IED is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit. Press any key except
the key CLEAR; and then the backlight of the LCD screen is turned on1. If the IED detects a
fault, the fault message will appear in a pop-up screen. At the same time, the “TRIP”2 LED is
lit.
1Note: If another fault occurs during the period of time for which the previous fault pop-
up screen, is displayed, the previous fault information will be overwritten by the
new fault on the pop-up screen. Press the key CANCEL to remove the pop-up
screen for “Latest Fault” to return to the previous screen.
2Note: Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED.
(ii) Main-menu and Sub-menu

 Main-menu
If LCD screen is turned off, press any key, except the key CLEAR. “Main-Menu" will
appear on the LCD screen (see the left of Figure 12.2-1). To go to the next level of
hierarchy, press the key ►.
 Sub-menu
An example of setting the sub-menu screen is shown in the right of Figure 12.2-1. By
using the key ▼ and the key ▲, the user can move the cursor downward or upward
to view all of the items. By using the keys ◄ ►, the user can return to a previous
level of hierarchy or go to the next level of hierarchy.
 Screen structure
The screen is composed of a title area and a data area. The title area is fixed on the
top two lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line on the left-hand
side displays local time, whereas the right-hand side displays either the current line
number, cursor position number and the maximum page number, or the item number.
For example, the display “2/4” means the current cursor position, which is at the
second item of a maximum of four items.

- 709 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Main Menu DIF

10:48 1/8 10:48 2/4
_Record > DIF1-EN +
Monitoring > Off
Setting > _DIF2-EN +
I/O Setting > Off
Time > DIF-S2-EN +
Test > Off
a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu
Figure 12.2-1 LCD screen for Main-Menu and Sub-menu
Figure 12.2-2 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several
Sub-menus. Table 12.2-1 shows the configuration of Main-Menu.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record Record List
Main Menu
Fault Record
Clear Records
Event Record1 Record List
Clear Records Setting
Clear Records Statistics Counter(GCNT01~)
Clear Records Function Key F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Disturbance Record Record List
Clear Records Diagnostics Detail
Clear All Records
Monitoring Metering IO Setting Binary Input Slot (#1~)
Binary Output Slot (#1~)

Binary I/O Slot#n
Communication LAN LED LED (3~26)

61850STAT F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Relay Element DIFHZ
Control
Statistics
Interlock Time Clock ActiveSyncSrc
GOOSE Monitoring Time Zone

Time Sync SNTP
Diagnostics Power Value
BI SYNC
Counter
Accumulated Time Display Format IRIG SYNC
Total Time
Summer Time
Test Test Mode Test Option A.M.F.

Function Test CL-TEST
Binary Input (Slot#n)
Binary Output (Slot#n)
Mode Change F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Signal monitoring
Setting Record Fault Record
Event Record
Metering Disturbance Record
Communication LAN
Information
USBCOM
RS485
SLAVE PROTOCOL IEC61850 Security Setting Change Password
IEC61850 IEC103
IEC103 SLV
Security
Protection Common PLC Timer

Active Group Login / Logout
Copy Group(A->B)
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5
Group6
Group7
Group8
Control Common Control
Change Over Switch
Software Switch
Reset Control
Auto Sequence
Total Time Mar
General BI
Figure 12.2-2 Menu hierarchy

- 710 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Table 12.2-1 Outline of Main-menu and their purposes

Sub-menu Purpose and functions
The "Record" sub-menu provides fault record, event record and disturbance
record. The user can erase each record individually or can clear all records at
Record
the same time. The user can assign event records to three distributed “Event
Record” sub-menus as required.
The "Monitoring" sub-menu displays all of the status values for the IED, such
Monitoring as Metering, Binary I/O, Communication, Relay Element, Statistics,
Interlock, GOOSE Monitoring, and Diagnostics.
The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings: Record,
Setting
Metering, Communication and Protection.
The "I/O Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings for inputs,
I/O Setting configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs, and configurable
LEDs.
The “Control” sub-menu is used to manipulate an external gear such as circuit
Control
breaker (CB), isolator, etc.
The "Time" sub-menu provides settings for calendar clock, time zone, the
Time
source of time synchronization and the display format of the calendar clock.
The "Test" sub-menu is used to set and to test the following: a trip circuit,
Test forcible operation of binary outputs from the IED, time measurement of
variable timers, and observation of the binary signals in logic circuits.
The "Information" sub-menu displays information about the IED such as
Information
hardware, software, communication, etc.
The "Security Setting" sub-menu is used to change the password and access
Security
level, providing high levels of security by assigning users different levels of
Setting
access.
When the "Security Setting” sub-menu is ON, the “Login/Logout” sub-menu
Login/Logout
is displayed.

- 711 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Record sub-menu
The Record sub-menu is composed of several sub-menus: fault record, event record,
disturbance record, and clearance of all records. In each sub-menu, the user can clear records
separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Figure 12.3-1 Display of Record

Table 12.3-1 Operation and display in Record sub-menu
Display Operation key Remark
[>] ► Press the key ► to go to the sub-menu
[+] ENTER Press the key ENTER for executing “Clear all records”.
Confirmation dialog screen will be displayed.
(i) Fault Record
The “Fault Record” sub-menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence, fault phase,
tripping mode, and the power system quantities, as shown in Figure 12.3-2.
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/222
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1,2,3,4,5,6
#3 2012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
Fault Record List Details of Fault Record
Figure 12.3-2 Display of Fault Record

- 712 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Display fault record

Figure 12.3-3 shows how to see the screen of fault record list and the details.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6 cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
#1 2012-07-25 >
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2
4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48 1/222
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
DIFZA
Figure 12.3-3 Fault Record

- 713 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Clear fault record

Figure 12.3-4 shows the steps to clear the fault record list.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.
10:48 1/2
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault Record”
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-4 Clear Record
Clear all information in Fault Record

Figure 12.3-5 shows the steps to clear all the records.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Clear all Records +
Clear Records
2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Record”
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear All records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-5 All clear

- 714 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Event Record

The “Event Record” sub-menu provides three parts namely, “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”
and “Event Record3”. In each Event Record sub-menu, the data and time, device name, and
the operation of the device are displayed as shown in the example below.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Figure 12.3-6 Display of Event Record
Display of Event Record

Figure 12.3-7 shows the steps to display and erase event records. To clear all records, refer to
section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Event Record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
Figure 12.3-7 Display events

- 715 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Clear of Event Records

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the Clear
10:48 1/2 Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Event Record1
3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-8 Clear Event

- 716 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Disturbance Record

Disturbance Records can be displayed graphically on the PC screen by using GR-TIEMS. The
IED screen displays only the recorded date and times, which are stored in the IED as the entire
disturbance data, as shown in the following example:
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 12.3-9 Display of Disturbance Record

The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records.
Display of disturbance Record

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
10:48 1/2 sub menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 12.3-10 Disturbance

- 717 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Clear of Disturbance Records

Figure 12.3-11 shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To clear all records,
refer to section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the
10:48 1/2 Clear Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-11 Clear records

- 718 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Monitoring sub-menu
“Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display the current status of the IED. The data is updated
every second on the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the Monitoring
sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iii. Communication sub-menu
iv. Relay Elements sub-menu
v. Statistics sub-menu
vi. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu
vii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
The value and direction of current, voltage etc. can be displayed. The user can change the units
as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 12.4-1 shows an example of the Metering
sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/4
Ida
12.234A
Idb
12.234A
Idc
12.235A
Figure 12.4-1 Display for Metering
(ii) Binary I/O

“Binary I/O” sub-menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO module
circuits. The LCD displays the binary input or output signal number, the signal name1
assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status in a line. The status for the
binary output circuit is shown by a logic level (“1” or “0”). Figure 12.4-2 provides an example
for binary IO module at IO#1 (Slot#1).
Slot#1
10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 12.4-2 Display of Binary I/O status

1Note: The user can set the names of binary signals with GR-TIEMS.
- 719 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Figure 12.4-3 shows the steps required to display the status of the binary inputs and outputs.
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting > _Binary I/O >
IO setting >
◄ ◄ Slot#3 >
Operation Time > Slot#4 >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
▼
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 12.4-3 Steps to display Binary I/O status
(iii) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 12.4-4.
Sub-menu sub-menu sub-menu

Monitoring Communication LAN
61580STAT
Figure 12.4-4 Menu hierarchy for Communication sub-menu

The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
LAN sub-menu: the communication port name and status are shown in a line.
When the IED has single communication module, or when the IED has
communication modules but a communication module is allowed to operate in
the IED, an operation status of the communication ports is shown, as shown
in Figure 12.4-5.
“LAN” sub-menu can display “PortStatus” and “NetMonitor status”. If

“NetMonitor” is running (active), the LCD screen will display a “>”mark.

- 720 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
LAN
10:48 1/2
PortStatus >
NetMonitor Inactive
Figure 12.4-5 Display for LAN

If the status of a port is “UP”, it means that the communication link is working;
if the status of a port is “DOWN, it means that the LAN cable is not connected to
the port.
The following two sub-menus are displayed to show the communication status
when the IED has dual LAN communication modules.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
Port 1(Port A) is connected. Port 1&2 (Port A&B) are connected.

Port 2(Port B) is not connected.
Figure 12.4-6 Communication status
IEC61850 sub-menu: IP addresses of the devices connecting in IEC61850 are

shown in a straight line. Configurations of those IP addresses are available
with GR-TIEMS.

- 721 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
Figure 12.4-7 Display of IEC61850

(iv) Relay Elements
The names of relay elements and statuses of the operation are shown in respective columns.
To view all of the relay elements, the user has to press keys ▲ and ▼.
DIFHZ
10:48 1/12
DIF1-A 0
DIF1-B 0
DIF1-C 0
DIF2-A 0
DIF2-B 0
DIF2-C 0
Figure 12.4-8 Displaying Relay Elements

Figure 12.4-9 shows the steps necessary to display the status of the measuring elements.
Main Menu Main Menu Relay Element

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/9 10:48 1/1
Record > ► Metering > ► _DIFHZ >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O >
Setting > Communication >
IO setting >
◄ _Relay Element > ◄
Time > Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
DIFHZ
10:48 1/12
DIF1-A 0
DIF1-B 0
DIF1-C 0
DIF2-A 0
DIF2-B 0
DIF2-C 0
Figure 12.4-9 Steps to display the status of measuring elements

- 722 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(v) Statistics
“Statistics” sub-menu has several sub-menus.
Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Monitoring Statistics Counter
Accumulated Time
Operation Time
Operation Counter
Total Time
Figure 12.4-10 Menu hierarchy for Statistics

For each statistical item, with the exception of displaying their status, the data can be
reset or revised.
Counter sub-menu: the name and number of statistical items are shown in
two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first
line.
Counter
10:48 1/32
0
0
0
Figure 12.4-11 Display for Counter sub-menu

To change the counter number, follow the steps as shown in Figure 12.4-12.

- 723 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Main Menu Monitoring Statistics

10:48 2/10 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3
Record > ► Metering > ► Power value >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > _Counter >
Setting > Communication > Accumulated Time >
◄ ◄
IO Setting > Relay Element >
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
Counter Counter Counter

10:48 1/32 10:48 1/32
Change? ENTER Count1(No Assign) + ENTER Count1(No Assign) +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 0 0
Count2 (No Assign) + Count2(No Assign) +
1 0
Count3 (No Assign) + Count3(No Assign) +
0 0
Revise the data
CANCEL Counter
ENTER 10:48 1/32
Count1(No Assign) +
0
The data has been revised. 1
0
Figure 12.4-12 Steps for changing the counter number
Accumulated Time sub-menu: Total time for which the IED has been running
is shown in “d (date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can clear the total
time value by clear operation (reset), which is shown in Figure 12.4-13.
Accumulated Time Accumulated Time

10:48 1/1
_ACT_TIME + Reset?
CANCEL
234d 23h 39m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
ENTER
Figure 12.4-13 Display for Accumulated Time
(vi) GOOSE monitoring

The status of the GOOSE subscription information is shown for each record-unit, as shown in
Figure 11.3-30. Each IED name (for example, “GRx200-11-603”) has been defined in the
- 724 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
GOOSE subscription information.
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRx200-11-603 OK
GRx200-21-603 OK
GRx200-31-603 NG
Figure 12.4-14 Display for GOOSE Monitoring
(vii) Diagnostics
Error message will be published in Automatic supervision. If there are no errors, an error
message is not displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
PLC data error
>
Data(commslv) error >
Figure 12.4-15 Display of Supervision items

- 725 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting sub-menu
"Setting" sub-menu is used to view and change settings for the following functions: Recording,
Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. In this section, we
show the “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection setting”, and
others. Furthermore, this section describes the confirmation of setting, and the “On/Off”
function that is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures in this chapter are examples only. The user should confirm
setting values after their values are changed.
(i) Setting method

In “Setting” sub-menu, four setting modes are provided as follows:
1. Element Setting Mode
2. Switch Setting Mode
3. List Selection Mode (items selection)
4. Signal Selection Mode (signal selection)
Element Setting Mode: The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting
numerical values. For each setting, the setting name, setting value and the
unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 12.5-1 provides an example of the
element setting mode.
OC1 OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + *OC1-b +
123.00000 124.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
Before Changing Setting After Changing

Setting
Figure 12.5-1 Example of Element Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been
changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the
change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For
the setting of a value, follow the steps as shown in Figure 12.5-21:
- 726 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + [ENTER] OC1-b + [◄] x 5 OC1-b +
123.00000 123.00000 123.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c + OC1-c +
[CANCEL] [►] x 5
1.00000 1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg 45 deg
[▲] [▼]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
OC1 OC1
OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*OC1-b + [▼] *OC1-b + [ENTER] *OC1-b +
124.00000 124.00000
124.00000
_OC1-c + [▲] OC1-c +
OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000 [ENTER] 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
45 deg
Figure 12.5-2 Steps for setting the value

1Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figure above is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
the setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer
to “Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
2Note: The operation keys have several features enabling the user to key values for
setting items. Table 12.5-1 shows values that have been changed before and after
the user presses the operation keys.
Table 12.5-1 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9
1 2 6 8 0
[▲]
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 [▼] 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
[◄]
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
2 1 : 2 3 [►] 2 1 : 2 3
Switch Setting Mode: The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the
selection of two modes. Figure 12.5-3 provides an example of the switch
setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the selected item are
- 727 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
displayed on two lines.
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Before Changing Setting After Changing
Figure 12.5-3 Display Example of Switch Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is
canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 12.5-4
shows the operation of the switch setting mode.
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + [ENTER] OC1-VTFBlk + [▲] / [◄] *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
[CANCEL]
Trip Trip [►] / [▼] / Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD + [▲] / [◄] OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR 3POR
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
*OC1-2fBlk + *OC1-2fBlk +
[▼] Block
Block
_OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip [▲] Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Figure 12.5-4 Operation of Switch Setting Mode

Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The above figure is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer to
“Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
List Selection Mode: The “List Selection Mode” is composed of main-setting-

screens and selection-list-screens as shown in Figure 12.5-5. In the main-
- 728 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
setting-screen, the setting name and the selected item are displayed. Press
the key ENTER to begin the setting process; the screen for selection list will
appear. Once a setting has been changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside
the name of the setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed, the [*]
mark will disappear automatically.
OC1 OC1-2fBlk OC1-2fBlk

10:48 23/56 10:48 1/3 10:48 2/3
_OC1-2fBlk + [ENTER] _Non [▼] Non
Non Block-3P _Block-3P
OC1-VTFBlk + Block-PerP Block-PerP
[CANCEL]
Non [▲]
OC1-UseFor +
Trip
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56
*OC1-2fBlk + [▼] *OC1-2fBlk +
Block-3P Block-3P
_OC1-VTFBlk + OC1-VTFBlk +
Non [▲] Non
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
Figure 12.5-5 Operation of List Selection Mode
Signal Selection Mode: Figure 12.5-6 shows the steps to select a signal.
F1 Key Select Function Select Element

10:48 1/2 10:48 2/128 10:48 2/128
_Signal + [ENTER] No assign [►] No assign
Assign Signal _423100 > _AF00001001
Logic + 423101 > AF00002001
[CANCEL]
Toggle 423102 > [◄] AF00003001
423103 > AF00004001
423104 > AF00005001
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
F1 Key
10:48 1/2
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Logic +
Toggle
Figure 12.5-6 Operation of signal selection
- 729 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(ii) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu

In “Setting” menu, a confirmation dialog #1 and #2 appears in the sub-menu and lower-level
menu, as shown in Figure 12.5-7
Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu

Case2
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection Active Group
： Copy gr.(A->B).
Confirmation
Group 1 Dialog #1
Group 2
Confirmation ：
Case1
Group 8
Dialog #2
Trip
Figure 12.5-7 Confirmation dialog setting
 Case1: Confirmation dialog #1

Suppose the setting of each group is changed; the confirmation dialog will
appear when returning to the screen of the “Protection” sub-menu, as shown
in Figure 12.5-8.
 Case2: Confirmation dialog #2
Suppose a setting is changed; the confirmation dialog will appear when
returning to the “Upper Menu”, as shown in Figure 12.5-9.
- 730 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting Protection Group 1

10:48 4/7 10:48 3/10 10:48 2/3
Record > [►] Active group > Telecommunication >
[►]
Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) > *Trip >
Communication > _Group 1 > Autoreclose >
_Protection > [◄] Group 2 > [◄]
Counter > Group 3 >
Function key > Group 4 >
[►] [◄]
OC OC Trip
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 1/12
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN + [►] *OC >
On On UV >
OC2EN + OC2EN + ZS >
Off [CANCEL] Off [◄] ZG >
OC3EN + OC3EN + EF >
Off Off DIFF >
[►] / [▼] / [►] / [▼] /

[▲] / [◄] [▲] / [◄]
OC [CANCEL] OC Group1
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 2/3
*OC1EN +> *OC1EN +> [◄] x 2 Telecommunication >
Off Off *Trip >
OC2EN + [ENTER] OC2EN + Autoreclose >
Off Off
[►] x 2
OC3EN + OC3EN +
Off Off
[◄]
Protection Protection
[ENTER]
10:48 3/10 The changed Setting
Active group > Change setting?
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > The changed Setting
Group 3 > [CANCEL]
Group 4 >
is canceled.
Figure 12.5-8 Setting example in case #1
- 731 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Main Menu Setting Communication

10:48 3/9 10:48 3/7 10:48 2/5
Record > [►] Record > [►] LAN >
Monitoring > Metering > _IEC61850† >
_Setting > _Communication > IEC103† >
[◄] [◄]
IO Setting > Protection > Modbus† >
Time > Counter > DNP† >
Test > Function key >
[►] [◄]
IEC61850 IEC61850 IEC61850

10:48 1/6 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
*850BLK + [▲] / [◄] 850BLK +
[ENTER] _850BLK +
Block Normal Normal
GSECHK + GSECHK + GSECHK +
ON [CANCEL] ON [CANCEL] ON
SI1-1 + SI1-1 + SI1-1 +
254 254 254
[ENTER] [CANCEL]
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 2/5
*850BLK + [◄] [◄] Change setting?
LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
*IEC61850† >
GSECHK + IEC103† >
ON Modbus† >
[►]
SI1-1 + DNP† >
254
Setting [ENTER]
The changed setting is
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > The changed setting is
[CANCEL]
Counter > canceled.
Function key >
Figure 12.5-9 Setting example in case #2
†Note:This example illustrates how to set a communication protocol, so that we discuss

neither the inclusion of IEC61850, IEC103, DNP3.0, and Modbus nor the selection
of those protocols. See Figure 11.1-1 for the general about the protocol selections.
- 732 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) On/Off function

When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function”
is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
OC OC OC
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4
[►] / [◄] /
10:48 1/4
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN +>
[▲] / [▼]
*OC1EN +
On On Off
OC2EN + OC2EN + OC2EN +
Off [CANCEL] Off [►] / [◄] / Off
OC3EN + OC3EN + [▲] / [▼] OC3EN +
Off Off Off
[ENTER]
Protection OC
10:48 1/4
[ENTER] Change setting? *OC1EN +
The changed ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
setting is confirmed. [◄] x 3
OC2EN +
Off
OC3EN +
Off
Protection OC
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/4
Active group > *OC1EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “OC” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. OC2EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 > OC3EN +
Group 4 > Off
Figure 12.5-10 Operation of On/Off function
Table 12.5-2 Explanation of [+>] mark in On/Off function

Display Operation Remark
[+>] ► Go to the sub-menu
ENTER Change setting.
(iv) Protection group setting

The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system; the user can
choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the
- 733 - GRH200 software: 031
6F2S1958 (0.03)
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. Jump to the “Element Setting Menu” if a relay setting
is required.
Change active group: An example for changing the active group is shown in
the following figure.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common [▲] x 4 Common [►] Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 [◄] 3
Copy Group (A->B) > [▼] x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 > Group 2 > Group 2 >
Refer to “Note: 1)”
[▲] x 2 [▼] x 2
Protection
Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Change Setting? [ENTER]
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Protection
10:48 1/10
Common
The changed [►]
Active Group >
setting is confirmed. Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 3 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection” sub-

menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 12.5-11 Operation of changing active group
Copy group setting: The user can copy an active setting from one group to
another group. As an example, in the following figure “Group3” will be copied
to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 12.5-12.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
- 734 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Protection Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group (A->B)

10:48 1/11 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Common [►] _A (1 – 8): + [▼] A (1 – 8): +
3 3
Active Group +
B (1 - 8): +
1 [◄] [▲] _B (1 - 8): +
1 1
*Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B)

10:48 1/2
[ENTER]
10:48 1/2 [▲] 10:48 1/2
A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): +
3 3 3
*B (1 - 8): + *B (1 - 8): + [► B (1 - 8): +
2 2 ] 1
[◄]
Protection
Copy Group? [ENTER]

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No The changed
setting is confirmed.
Protection
10:48 1/11
Common
Active Group >
1
Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Figure 12.5-12 Copy group setting
Change group settings: Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings
are set. Therefore, in each group, the user can change the settings of the
protection functions and other features. To change the settings in each group,
refer to the setting method discussed in section 12.5(i).
(v) Configuration of Function keys

Function keys (F1 to F7) on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific
screen, which is configurable by the user. These keys have their own LED, which can be
- 735 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
programmed using settings. Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6),
respectively, as the default settings shown in Table 5.6-3.
Table 12.5-3 Function keys which are configured to navigate a menu

Function Key configured Menus
F1 Metering
F2 Fault Record
F3 Event Record1
F4 Event Record2
F5 Event Record3
F6 Diagnostics
Screen jump function: To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps
as shown in the figure below.
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function
10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + _No Assign
[◄] [CANCEL]
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[ ]x2 [▼] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 [ENTER] 10:48 1/3
[◄] x 2
Change Setting? *Function + *Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Screen Jump Assign Signal
Signal + No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
[An Example]
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push [F1]
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Key?
confirmed. Do the
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
next step to select On
OC3EN +
a screen.
Off
[ENTER]
The selected screen is assigned to [F1].
Figure 12.5-13 Operation of screen jump setting
- 736 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu OC
10:48 2/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [F1] _OC1EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > OC2EN +>
IO setting >
[F1] On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
Figure 12.5-14 Operation of screen jump function
To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure 12.5-15.
Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new
screen is configured for the same function key.
2) If a configured screen is disabled by “On/Off Function” setting (refer to section
12.5(iii)), the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
F1 Key > [►] Function + [ENTER] *Screen Jump
F2 Key > Screen Jump Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + No Assign
[◄] [CANCEL]
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign Assign Signal
Signal + _No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on F1 key.
Figure 12.5-15 Cancelling screen jump function
- 737 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signal control function: To assign a test signal to a function key, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 12.5-16.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
[◄] [CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▲] [▼]
F1 Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 2/3
[ENTER]
*Function + [▼] *Function +> Screen Jump
No Assign Assign Signal *Assign Signal
*Signal + [▲] LED > [ENTER] No Assign
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
[ENTER]
Select Function Select Element Select Element

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/128 10:48 3/128
_123100 >
[►] _AF00001001 [▼] x 2 AF00001001
123101 > AF00002001 AF00002001
123102 > AF00003001 _AF00003001
123103 > [◄] AF00004001 [▲] x 2 AF00004001
123106 > AF00005001 AF00005001
123107 > AF00006001 AF00006001
[ENTER]
Setting F1 Key
[ENTER] [◄] x 2 10:48 1/3
The changed Change Setting? *Signal +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
setting is confirmed. 123101AF00003001
Logic +
Instant
Figure 12.5-16 Assigning a signal to the function key
- 738 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
I/O setting sub-menu

The “I/O Setting” sub-menu is used to set or change settings for the following items:
(ii) Binary Input
(iii) Binary Output
(iv) LED
This section explains the details of the setting method.
(i) Binary input

All binary input circuits provided in the IED are user-configurable; the user can set common
programmable logic (CPL) for each binary input circuit. (For more information of CPL, see
Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module: Binary input circuit)
The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting function.
To configure the binary input circuits, the user should follow the procedure in steps ((i)-1 and
(i)-2)
Selection of binary input circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-1 illustrates the
selection of a binary input circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next hierarchy.
Binary Input Slot#3

10:48 2/3 10:48 1/8
Slot#1 > [►] _Common >
_Slot#3 > BI1 >
Slot#4 > BI2 >
BI3 >
BI4 >
BI5 >
Figure 12.6-1 Selection of slot and binary input circuit

Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed depend upon the
configuration of the binary IO module in each IED.
CPL setting: Figure 12.6-2 is an example of a “Common” setting. From this

screen, the user can set a threshold level and the number of comparisons
feature for contact chatter for all binary input circuits.

- 739 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Common
10:48 1/2
Thres_Level +
Low
Cmp_Num +
4
Figure 12.6-2 Common screen
For example, Figure 12.6-3 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit (BI1).
The timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On is set for setting
[BI1_CPL]. Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or parameter.
BI1
10:48 1/2
BI1_CPL +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
SW
Inverse-SW +
Normal
Figure 12.6-3 CPL setting

Note: Setting items “On Delay timer and others” are displayed when the user sets
[BI*_CPL] On.
(ii) Binary output

All binary output circuits provided in the IED are also user-configurable; the user can configure
timers and switches using CPL settings. (For more information of CPL, see Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module: Binary output circuit)
Selection of binary output circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-4 illustrates the
selection of a binary output circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the hierarchy.

- 740 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Binary Output Slot#2

10:48 2/3 10:48 1/10
Slot#1 > [►] _BO1 >
_Slot#2 > BO2 >
Slot#3 > BO3 >
BO4 >
BO5 >
BO6 >
Figure 12.6-4 Selection of slot and binary output circuit

Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of the binary IO module in each IED case.
CPL Setting: For example, Figure 12.6-5 illustrates the setting of a binary
output circuit (BO1). Using setting [BI1_CPL] On, the CPL logic in BO1 is
available. Similarly, assigned signals, timers and switches can be set in this
menu. Note that detailed setting items are shown when On is keyed into
setting [BI*_CPL].

- 741 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
BO1
10:48 1/17
BO1_CPL +
Off
Input signal1 +
No Assign
Input Signal2 +
No Assign
Input Signal3 +
No Assign
Signal8 +
No Assign
LOGIC-SW
AND
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
Logic Timer +
0.000 s
FF-SW +
Off
Reset Signal +
No Assign
Figure 12.6-5 Binary output setting
Figure 12.6-6 shows how to assign a signal:

- 742 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
BO1 Select Function Select Function

10:48 2/17 10:48 1/127 10:48 2/127
BO1_CPL + [ENTER] _No Assign [▼] No Assign
On ARC 4A6001> _ARC 4A6001>
_Signal1 + BCD 452001> BCD 452001>
[CANCEL]
No Assign BIO_Slot1 200B01> BIO_Slot1 200B01>
Signal2 + BIO_Slot2 200B02> BIO_Slot2 200B02>
No Assign BIO_Slot3 200B03> BIO_Slot3 200B03>
[►] [CANCEL]
Select Element
10:48 2/155
No Assign
_CO-OC-A 8000001B60
CO-OC-B 8100001B61
CO-OC-C 8200001B62
CO-EF 8300001B63
EXT.ARC_S 8300001B64
Figure 12.6-6 Assigning a signal

Note: “No Assign” is always displayed on the first line, even when the page is changed.
(iii) Selection and setting of LED

As shown in Figure 12.1-1, the IED provides 26 LEDs and 7 function-keys. The user can
configure LEDs (“LED#3” to “LED#26”) and the function key LEDs (F1 to F7; each has a LED).
Each LED is driven via a logic gate which can be programed to be an AND gate, OR gate or
XOR gate operation. Furthermore, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable
for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. One or up to eight signals can be assigned
to a single LED with selectable LED color.
Selection of LED: Figure 12.6-7 shows the LED selection screen; the user can
select a setting item by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next
level in the hierarchy.

- 743 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
LED
10:48 1/31
_LED3 >
LED4 >
LED5 >
LED6 >
LED7 >
LED8 >
LED26 >
F1 Key >
F2 Key >
:
Figure 12.6-7 LED selecting screen
LED Setting: As shown in Figure 12.6-8, the user can set the logical gate, timer,
color of LED and assign signals in this screen.
LED3
10:48 1/16
Color >
RED
Input signal1 +
No assign
Input signal 2 +
No assign
Input signal 8 +
No assign
Reset signal +
No assign
LOGIC-SW +
AND
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Logic Timer +
0.00 s
Color +
Figure 12.6-8 LED setting screen

- 744 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Time sub-menu
In Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of Clock function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time displaying and so on. Figure below shows the Time sub-
menu. (For more information, see Chapter Technical description: Clock function)
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Figure 12.7-1 Time function screen

(i) Clock
The clock can run locally or synchronize with the external time source shown in
[ActiveSyncSrc] menu. Figure 12.7-2 shows the Clock screen:
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 12.7-2 Clock screen

The Clock sub-menu is composed of the [Time] menu, [Format] menu and [ActiveSyncSrc]
menu. Time for the IED can be set in the screen. When the active synchronizing source is SNTP,
the user can go to another sub-menu to check the current active SNTP server.
Figure 12.7-3 shows how to handle this screen.
Time menu
(1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
Clock
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.

Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 12.7-3 Clock format

- 745 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
ActiveSyncSrc menu
ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►.
Clock
10:00 1/2 *Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the > is
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05 not shown in the screen.
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
_[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of active

ActiveSyncSrc
10:48 SNTP server.
192. 168. 0. 100
192. 168. 0. 101
*192. 168. 0. 102
192. 168. 0. 103
Figure 12.7-4 ActiveSync
(ii) Time zone

The user can input time zone designated by UTC in Time zone screen. Time zone according as
local area for the IED should be set. Figure 12.7-5 shows the Time Zone screen:
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Figure 12.7-5 Time zone setting screen
(1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1 Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time zone
_Time zone +
0.00hour in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
Figure 12.7-6 TimeZone

- 746 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iii) Time synchronization

Time synchronization source can be selected in Time synchronization screen. The
synchronization function can be activated by configuration of the On/Off switch in this menu.
Figure 12.7-7 shows the configuration screen for the time synchronization function:
Time Sync
10:48 1/3
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
Off
IRIG SYNC +>
Off
Figure 12.7-7 Time synchronization setting

The following shows how to operate in this screen.
TimeSyncSrc menu
Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure.
Time Sync
10:48 1/3 (1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
Off
(2) The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of SNTP, BI, and IRIG-B.

TimeSyncSrc
10:48 1/4 Note: When “---” is selected, it means that time synchronization
---
_SNTP is not operated.
BI
IRIG-B
Figure 12.7-8 TimeSyncSrc
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the servers
can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of higher-accuracy)
and select the server with the smallest value.

- 747 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
SNTP menu
IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
(1) Confirm that the SNTP synchronization function has been set for
Time Sync
10:48 1/3 On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
Off
SNTP (2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
SNTP (3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.
10:48 1/4 When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
Server1 +
0. 0. 0.176 ENTER.
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Figure 12.7-9 SNTP
BI SYNC menu
When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in Time Sync menu, the user can choose a binary input circuit
(BI) as a synchronization standard. Adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC (1) Enter the Data ID of the BI output

10:48 1/2 (2) Set adjustment time for [SYNC ADJ]
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s
Figure 12.7-10 BISYNC

- 748 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
IRIG SYNC menu

When the “IRIG SYNC” is set to On in Time Sync menu, the user can choose IRIG signal for
the synchronization.
IRIG SYNC (1) Set On if IRIG-B data is generated in IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000

10:48 1/2 format. On the other hand, set Off if the IRIG-B is generated with
USE_BCDYEAR +
Off absence the C37.118.
USE_LOCALTIME +
Off
Figure 12.7-11 IRIGSYNC
(iv) Display format

Display format of time in the IED can be selected in Display format screen. All time formats
will be displayed according to Date_fmt setting. The IED provides different formats to display
the date. Figure 12.7-12 shows display format menu:
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 12.7-12 Display format menu

Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter setting
Time_delimiter setting and Sec_delimiter setting.
Date format menu

(1) Move cursor to “Date_fmt”; and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
_Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
(2) Select desired format by moving cursor.

Date_fmt
10:48 1/3
_YYYYMMDD
MMDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
Figure 12.7-13 Date Format

- 749 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Date delimiter menu

r
Display Format
10:48 1/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Date_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
_Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter
10:48 1/3 (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the desired
_-
/ format type.
.
Figure 12.7-14 Date delimite

Time delimiter menu
r
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Time_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
:
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (2) The time delimiter mark is switched.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
Figure 12.7-15 Time delimite

- 750 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Second delimiter menu

Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
(2) The second delimiter mark is switched.

Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
,
Figure 12.7-16 Second
(v) DST (Summer time)

When DST is On, the user is needed to set details:
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
Summer time +
Off
Figure 12.7-17 DST (Summer time) menu

Notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure If summertime is started or
ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week must be filled “5”. The IED
controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of the month on Start_Week or
End_Week automatically.

- 751 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/13 Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
_Summer time +
Off After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer time
in detail.
Summer Time (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
10:48 1/9
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
Figure 12.7-18 DST setting
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time. The following procedure is a
case of starting weekday setting.
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Start_SM(Wday)
(2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
10:48
1/8
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time (3) Starting weekday is set.

10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Figure 12.7-19 DST setting

- 752 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Test sub-menu
Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen
The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Figure 12.8-1 Test screen

(ii) Test mode screen
The Test Mode screen is shown in Figure 12.8-2. The Test Mode screen has four functions, Test
Option, Function Test, Binary Input and Binary Output.
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Figure 12.8-2 Test Mode screen

Test option screen: The Test Option screen, shown in Figure 12.8-3, is used
to select the following functions and perform a Test flag forced reset.
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Figure 12.8-3 Test Option screen

 Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)
This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication
packet. The Test flag is set to OFF by default. The Test flag is used in
combination with another device in the Test mode. When this option is
selected, the Test flag in the communication packet is reset temporarily to

- 753 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
reproduce a pseudo-operation condition.
 GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

This function is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending
information in Test mode. This function is used when there is a conflict in
communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
 GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription
information from another IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing
in case of bad reception (For example, Validation of Interlock determination).
The user can simulate a bad reception condition passively by using two
GOOSE Sending Blocks.
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid that the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED
under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
Function test screen: Function test screen is provided for testing; the use can
program test operations, which can be implemented in protection and control
functions. Figure 12.8-4 exemplifies the Test screen. Automatic supervision
will stop when the user sets Off for A.M.F (for more information about the
automatic supervision, see Chapter Automatic supervision). The function of
the cold load protection will operate for the test if either CL or Non-CL is set
for CL-TEST (for more information, see Chapter Relay application).
Function Test
10:48 1/2
A.M.F. +
On
CL-TEST +
Off
Figure 12.8-4 Function test menu (an example)
Binary input test screen: The user can have a virtual signal to a binary input
circuit using the binary input test screen. Figure 12.8-5 shows an example;

- 754 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content displayed will differ
depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO Module)
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 12.8-5 Binary input menu

Figure 12.8-6 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected.
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Figure 12.8-6 Setting menu for Slot #3 module

For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI1) on the
BIO1A module at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown
in Figure 12.8-6).
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 12.8-7 Setting menu after selecting “Slot #3-BIO1-SET”
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the
items required for simulation.
 ON: BI1 output is set forcibly to ON(Logic level=high(1)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 OFF: BI1 output is set forcibly to OFF(Logic level=low(0)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.

- 755 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Use the screen shown in Figure 12.8-7 only to configure the BI signals for the
simulation test. This does not start the simulation.
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 12.8-7,
if the user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the
screen shown in Figure 12.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner
similar to that described for BI01.
After selecting OP in Figure 12.8-6, use the following screen to start the simulation
test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Figure 12.8-8 Execution menu of BI test

If key ENTER is pressed in Figure 12.8-8, the status will change to test status. The
following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER. Figure 12.8-9
shows that the IED is in simulation test mode.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Press <- to return

To previous page
Figure 12.8-9 Running test menu

Note: The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during
the simulation test period. The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is
not pressed.
Binary output test screen: The user is able to test a binary output circuit.
Figure 12.8-10 is an example of how to select a binary output from the Test
Mode screen.

- 756 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 12.8-10 Binary output menu

Figure 12.8-11 shows selection of IO#2 (Slot #2).
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 12.8-11 Setting menu for Slot #2 module
Figure 12.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2).
The procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit.
(Refer to Figure 12.8-7 to Figure 12.8-9)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 12.8-12 Setting menu after selecting “SLOT2-BO01-SET”
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary
output circuit.
 ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
 OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
(iii) TestFlag-EN screen

This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode. The user should select
TestFlag-EN in Figure 12.8-1 and select On or Off.

- 757 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Mode change screen

When the user selects “Mode Change” from the Test sub-menu shown in Figure 12.8-1, the
following Mode change screen is displayed (Figure 12.8-13). This allows control from a remote
device (For example, SAS server) by configuring the MDCTRL-EN setting.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Figure 12.8-13 Mode Change sub-menu
(v) Signal monitoring screen

Figure 12.8-14 shows that the user can assign signal-monitoring points to the monitoring jacks
(A, B, and C) on the IED front panel. Incidentally, points have not been assigned for the
monitoring jacks in the menu below.
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
Figure 12.8-14 Signal monitoring sub-menu
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 12.8-15). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Figure 12.8-15 Selection menu

- 758 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Information sub-menu
In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory. Figure 12.9-1 shows the Information sub-menu. Table 12.9-1
shows detail of information that is displayed in this screen.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE]
GRH200 __-11-111-22-33-
44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
Figure 12.9-1 Information screen
Table 12.9-1 Information details

Display item Remark
[IED TYPE]
GRH200 Product information
-**-***-**-**-**-*** Ordering number in Hardware selection†
-****-***-** Ordering number in Software selection†
[Serial No.]
********** Product serial number
[Plant Name]
Preferred name The user can key preferred IED name using the GR-TIEMS
[Description]
Preferred contents The user can key preferred information using the GR-TIEMS
[CP1M Software]
GS2RSIM1**** Name and version number about the CPU Software
[IEC61850 eng]
G2M8500** Name and version number of IEC61850 engine
[IEC61850 Support]
Ed1/Ed1op/Ed2 Numbers of supporting 61850 edition in IED
[IEC61850 Date Model]
W2GRH200**** Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model
[IEC61850 SCL Ver.]
Edition ***(****) Version information at IED
[IEC61850 Mapping]
X2GRH200**** Name and version number of IEC61850 Mapping
[GOOSE Subscribe]
***** GOOSE Subscript information
[IEC103 Slave Data]
IGR*200**** IEC 103 Mapping†
[PLC Data]
P2GRH200**** PLC Data name and version number
†The item is only displayed when the IED has the Protocol ‘IEC 60870-5-103’. See Appendix
Ordering for more detailed information.
- 759 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords, active
or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID.
Table 12.10-1 Access control function settings
Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Control N.A N.A N.A ✔ ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔

Functions Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(function Monitoring
N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
keys) (Reset/Revise)
F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
allowed
to operate F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in
the Security setting.
Table 12.10-2 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
An operator can control a device. An operator can also change the mode
Control
between “Remote” and “Local”.
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.

- 760 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Control sub-menu
The user can control external devices using the IED front panel. Control sub-menus are
provided to operate; the user can operate the devices by pressing Operation keys. Note that
Control sub-menus are only available when the IED is in “LOCAL” mode†. When the IED is in
“REMOTE” mode, an error message will be shown on the screen. Remember that the IED will
change to “REMOTE” mode if there is no operation for a while; then the IED can be monitored
remotely. Figure 12.11-1 shows “Control” sub-menu.
Control
10:48 1/5
_SPOS >
DPOS >
TPOS >
Software Switch >
Auto Sequence >
Figure 12.11-1 Control sub-menu on LCD screen

†Note: The IED will have “Local” mode automatically when the following menus are
displayed on the LCD screen: “Main Menu”, “Control sub-menu”, “Selection
Executing”, “Operating completed”, “Operating canceled” or “Operating failed”.
Table 12.11-1 shows how to operate by the IED front panel. The IED can have several
control functions, which are dependent on the ordering code. For more information, see
Chapter Control and monitoring application or Appendix: Ordering for more information).
Table 12.11-1 Control step in DIR mode or SBO mode

Control Scheme Operation step
Direct Control 1) Set DIR mode in each control function.
Operation Mode‡ 2) Select a device and choose DIR, and press ENTER.
3) Press I (Close) or O (Open)
4) A signal of control command is issued; control operation is
performed.
Select Before 1) Set SBO mode in each control function.
Control 2) Select a device and choose SBO, and press ENTER.
Operation 3) Verify that the selection is performed correctly and normally.
Mode‡ 4) Press I (Close) or O (Open); controlling command is issued.
5) Control operation is carried out.
‡Note: We shall discuss about DIR and SBO modes in Chapter General control function:
Control mode.
(i) DPOS operation

Figure 12.11-2 shows how to switch to Off position.
- 761 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Control
10:48 1/5
_SPOS >
Double DIR mode
DPOS >
TPOS >
responses?
Software Switch >
Auto Sequence > SBO mode
Executing screen
Output the command DPOS_Dev1

[ENTER]
10:48
Control Control execution
10:48 1/72 Push O button [CANCEL]
Waiting for the Select control POS:
_DPOS_Dev1 >
On
second response On
DPOS_Dev2 >
On DPOS_Dev1 CANCEL:Operation stop
DPOS_Dev3 > 10:48
On Selecting...
O Open
Selecting succeeded.
[ENTER]
DPOS_Dev1
DPOS_Dev1 10:48
10:48 Controlling... [CANCEL]
Current status:
On
Select control POS:
_Off
Change start? CANCEL: Operation stop Cancel succeeded.
Controlling failed Cancel failed
ENTER:Yes CANCEL:No
[ENTER] Selecting failed. Time out1
DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1 DPOS_Dev1

10:48 10:48 10:48 10:48 10:48
Operation failed. Operation completed. Operation failed. Operation failed. Operation canceled.
CAUSE: CAUSE: CAUSE:

Select failed. Time limit over. Select failed.
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Control Control Control

10:48 1/5 10:48 1/5 10:48 1/5
_SPOS > _SPOS > _SPOS >
DPOS > DPOS > DPOS >
TPOS > TPOS > TPOS >
Software Switch > Software Switch > Software Switch >
Auto Sequence > Auto Sequence > Auto Sequence >
Figure 12.11-2 Operation for opening Dev1

1Note: Time out will occur if no responses come from Dev1.
2Note: For control ‘Dev1 (i.e., Circuit breaker)’, the user should connect ‘DPOS01’
function with circuit breakers using binary IO modules. See chapter Control and
monitoring application: Double position device function (DPOS).
- 762 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
13 Installation and setting

Alarm threshold setting in PSW 769
Caution for storage 764 Unpacking 765
Handling precautions 764
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
 For rack mounting, cable and electrical wiring, see a separate service manual entitled
Installation handbook for rack mounting, cable work, etc. (Document No. 6F2S1954).
 See a service manual entitled Guide for replacement of inner modules depending on the
situation. (Document No. 6F2S1955 or 6F2S1956).

- 763 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Caution for storage

You have to pack an IED in the original box after the IED is inspected, if the IED is not required
to be installed now; and you have to store it in dry and clean condition.
Recommended storage condition:
- Temperature: 0 degree Celsius to +40 degree Celsius
- No condensation
Handling precautions
Modules of the IED should be handled in the electro static charge free environment. That is,
the user shall use an anti-electrostatic-wrist-band; and it is grounded.
CAUTION
 Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
 Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
 Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface connected to
the earth.
You have to check carefully the electronic circuitry for your handling area, which is defined in
the IEC 60747 standard.

- 764 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software

The user should unpack and check the IED before use. Be in touch with Toshiba at email
(www.toshiba-relays.com) for any issues.
(i) Opening and inspecting relay (IED) package

Open a relay package and inspect physical damage if any. Ensure that the following items are
included in the package. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the above items
are missing, contact your agent.
- Relay (IED) unit
- Test record: One report sheet
- Installation guide: One guide sheet
- Instruction manuals: Provided within a CD-ROM
- Flange covers: Left and right covers
- Function keys label: One label sheet
- LEDs Label: One label sheet
- White-plastic-sheets: Two sheets†
†Note: The white ones are provided to lock the flange screws. They are not bundled for
flush-mounting type case.
(ii) Manufacture settings (In, fn, Vdc)

Find the hardware nameplate. The user can know the IED has been produced correctly in
terms of rated current (In), voltage (Vn), frequency (fn), and DC rating (Vdc). The user can
read the same on Factory settings (Figure 13.3-2).
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 9 1 - 2 1 3 - 0 0 - 9 T - 3 0 - 11 0
High impedance differential IED

GRH200 -91-213-00-9T-30-110
1A 50 / 60 Month, Year
— 110-250 ****** ** ***
TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION
DC rating (Vdc)
Rated frequency (fn)
Rated voltage (Vn)
Rated current (In)
Figure 13.3-1 Hardware nameplate example on the rear

- 765 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Ordering positions
- 9 1 - 2 1 3 - 0 0 - 9 T - 3 0 - 1 1 0
VCT39B
System
frequency (fn) = 50Hz
AC rating (In) = 1A
Figure 13.3-2 Factory setting example

Note: The rated current (In) is fixed at 1 ampere.
The user is not able to change the system frequency (fn).
(iii) Combination of VCT and BIOs

The transformer module (VCT) is located at the far right slot (e.g., at ‘VC1’). Identify the code
at Position ‘7’ to know the VCT type (e.g., VCT39B is mounted when Figure 13.3-2 is true).
The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules (BI, BO, or BIO)
using the ordering codes. For example, the user can find a BIO3A module in the IED when the
ordering cord “13” is printed at Positions A&B. The user can the IO configuration label
depending on the “13”. The user can check terminal block types by seeing a code at Positon ‘H’.
(iv) Communication modules (LAN and others)

Figure 13.3-3 shows communication modules are implemented at C11 to C15. The layouts of
the communication modules are matched with Ordering codes at Positions ‘E and F’.
Ordering positions
- 9 1 - 2 1 3 - 0 0 - 9 T - 3 0 - 1 1 0
Selected LAN and IRIG
Figure 13.3-3 Example for module selected

(v) Relay and control software
Verifying relay software is possible to check the codes at Positons ‘S, G, and T’ on Software
nameplate. Figure 13.3-4 shows ‘031’ software and the IEC61850 protocol‡ are included.

- 766 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Positions
7 S G T E F U 9 V
- 9 0 3 1 - 9 T 2 - 1 E
GRH200- --
TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION
Selected language
Selected protocol
Selected software
Figure 13.3-4 Software nameplate example on the rear

†Note:For more information about relay functions, see Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:For more information about the communication, see Chapter Communication
protocol.
(vi) Flange covers and labels

Two flange covers (blue ones in Figure 13.3-5) are included in the package. The user can attach
them on the IED when mounting into the rack (see succeeding section Rack mounting).
LEDs label
Pockets for labels
Function keys label
Flange covers
Figure 13.3-5 Flange covers and labels attached on IED

- 767 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(vii) White-plastic-sheets for IED case sides

When the user wishes to mount an IED case in the 19-inch rack, the user should have
arrangements and preparations of the IED in advance. There are two types with regard to the
structures of IED cases.
Rack mounting type: flanges have to be screwed and fixed on the case, and countersunk screws
are provided for them. When wishing to place the IED case in a 19-inch rack, put white-
plastics-sheets on the countersunk screws to cover up (see Figure 13.3-6); they are bundled in
its package. Detach the flange from the case if combining cases is required with a mounting
kit. Remind that the user needs to put the white-plastic-sheet over the countersunk screws on
each side.
Left silver-flange Right silver-flange
White White
plastic Countersunk plastic
sheet Relay case sheet
screws
Figure 13.3-6 Covering the screw holes with white plastic sheets
Note: For more information about how to mount a case in a rack, see Installation
handbook for rack mounting, cable work, etc. (6F2S1954). The user can get a
mounting kit by ordering (see Appendix: Ordering).
Flush-mounting type: flanges are integrated at the both sides of the case. Thus, the white-
plastics-sheets are not bundled.

- 768 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
PWS alarm threshold setting

The IED has power supply module (PWS) at the far left slot. The user can confirm DC rated
voltage on the hardware nameplate by checking the cord at Positions ‘8’, but the user should
select either alarm thresholds for dropping DC voltage by inserting a jumper on the PWS
(Figure 13.4-1). See Section Power supply module in Chapter Technical description.
Ordering positions
- x 1 - x x x - x x - x x - x x - x x x
DC rated voltage, e.g., 1=’110 to 250Vdc’, selected by the ordering
Figure 13.4-1 Alarm threshold set on PWS module
CAUTION
Note: A short-wire is connected between terminal screws No. 35–37 ( No.35–36 for type
using the ring terminal). It is done by the manufacturer. The user shall remove
that when the user undertakes the dielectric voltage test for the IED; and the user
shall connect again the terminals with that after the test (See Appendix: Notes for
the dielectric voltage test).
29 28
27
30
29 30
31
32 31 32
33
33 34
Short wire 34
35 35 36
36 38
FG
37
38
39
40 Short wire
FG FG
Figure 13.4-2 PWS terminal labels

- 769 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
14 Commissioning and maintenance

Required test 771 Test operations –
Cautions 772 -Binary output circuit test (BO) 775
Preparations 772 -Binary input circuit test (BI) 775
-Cold load judgement test (CL) 775
-Canceling supervision function (AMF) 775
-GOOSE test (61850) 774
-Canceling test flag 774
-LED light test 775
-Mode test (MDCTRL) 775
-Logic single monitor 775
-Test sub-menu structure 774

- 770 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Scope of required test

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion. In these tests, user interfaces
on the front panel of the IED or local PC can be fully applied. Test personnel must be familiar
with general function of IED testing practices and safety precautions to avoid personal injuries
or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring
which circuits functions when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the
protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Protection schemes
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment,
telecommunication equipment and other external equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Signaling circuit test

- 771 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
 Class 1 laser.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
(ii) Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the
printed circuit board (PCB).
 While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
 Before the power is on, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
 Transformer module is damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 Clear test settings after the test; then, set original settings again.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
3 Phase angle meters
2 AC ammeters
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)

- 772 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
To examine the IED with a PC locally, connect the PC with the IED using a USB cable. The
GR-TIEMS software is required to install in the PC.
During commissioning and maintenance, check wire connection and observe relay output
signals. The user can see the signals whether the relay operations are appropriate or not.

- 773 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Test operations
The user can change IED to for Test mode by the operations on the IED front panel with
Main/Sub menus, as shown in Figure 14.4-1.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Main Menu Record
Monitoring
Setting
IO Setting
Control
Time
Test Test Mode Test Option S-TestFlagCancel

GOSNDBLK
GOSBUBLK
Function Test A.M.F.

CL-Test
Binary Input (Slot#n) BI*F OP

TestFlag-EN SLOT*-BI01-SET
SLOT*-BI02-SET
SLOT*-BI03-SET
…..
Binary Output (Slot#n) BO*F OP

SLOT*-BO01-SET
SLOT*-BO02-SET
Simultaneous Fault SLOT*-BO03-SET
…..
Mode Change MDCTRL-EN

MDCTRL-SELRST
MDCTRL-EXERST
Signal Monitoring Term A

Term B
Term C
Information
Security Setting
Login/Logout
Figure 14.4-1 Structure of test menu

Note: The structure and the contents about sub-menus depend on the hardware.
14.4.1 Test for communication

(i) GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)
This is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending information where there is a conflict
in communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
(ii) GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription information from another IED for
testing bad reception. See Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication.
(iii) Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)

Test flag in the communication packet will be removed unconditionally, when On is set for
setting [Test flag].

- 774 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(iv) Test for all communication (TestFlag-EN)

Setting [TestFlag-EN]=On allows to set test flags at all communication protocol (see Chapter
User interface: Test-submenu).
14.4.2 Test for relay application

(i) Auto monitoring function (A.M.F)
Issuing alarms will be blocked when Off is set for [A.M.F]. For the content about the monitoring
function, see Chapter Automatic supervision function.
(ii) Test of cold load environment (CL-Test)

Either cold load environment or not can be selected temporally, if CL or Non-CL is set for
setting [CL-TEST]. See Chapter Relay application: Cold load judgement for more detail.
14.4.3 Test for BI and BO circuits

(i) Binary input circuit test (SLOT*BIxx-SET)
Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual input at a binary input circuit.
(ii) Binary output circuit test (SLOT*BOxx-SET)

Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual output at a binary input circuit.
Note: For the BI and BO test operation, see Chapter User interface: Test sub-menu,
separately.
14.4.4 Test for mode change (MDCTRL)

The function is provided to detect a test mode. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Mode control function, separately.
14.4.5 Signal monitor

The function is provided in order that the user can observe IED internal signals. For more
information, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine interface: Monitoring jacks,
separately.
14.4.6 LED light test

The user can perform LED lighting test by pressing the keys ◄ and ►. Press the both keys on
the front panel for a few seconds. If there is no problem, all LEDs will be lit.

- 775 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Setting
Setting of TEST (Function ID: 201301)
TestFlag-EN Off / On – Change test flag on Protocol On

A.M.F. Off / On Supervisor function use or not On
Setting of CMMSLV (Function ID: 300001)

S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Cancelling test flag of slave communication Off

GOSNDBLK Off / On GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off / On GOOSE subscription block Off
Test setting for cold load judgement

CL-TEST Off / CL / Non-CL Forcibly establishing the cold load condition Off

- 776 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Signal
TEST (Function ID: 201301)
3100051197 SIM FAULT OUTPUT for Sim.Fault Display
3100001190 TEST MODE Mode of test

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
3110001198 BI1F OP BI1 forced operate start
311A001198 BI11F OP BI11 forced operate start
311B001198 BI12F OP BI12 forced operate start
311C001198 BI13F OP BI13 forced operate start
311D001198 BI14F OP BI14 forced operate start
311E001198 BI15F OP BI15 forced operate start
311F001198 BI16F OP BI16 forced operate start
3110201198 BO1F OP BO1 forced operate start
311A201198 BO11F OP BO11 forced operate start
311B201198 BO12F OP BO12 forced operate start
311C201198 BO13F OP BO13 forced operate start
311D201198 BO14F OP BO14 forced operate start
311E201198 BO15F OP BO15 forced operate start
311F201198 BO16F OP BO16 forced operate start

- 777 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function

- 778 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)
C0_BIT 8000001220 Constant value 0 expressed with binary in BIT type
C1_BIT 8000011220 Constant value 1 expressed with binary in BIT type
C0_N8 2000001128 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C0_N32 220000112A Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C1_N32 220001112A Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C0_N64 230000112B Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C1_N64 230001112B Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C0_S8 2000001120 Constant value 0 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C10_S8 20000A1120 Constant value 10 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C11_S8 20000B1120 Constant value 11 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C12_S8 20000C1120 Constant value 12 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C13_S8 20000D1120 Constant value 13 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C14_S8 20000E1120 Constant value 14 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C15_S8 20000F1120 Constant value 15 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit

- 779 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 780 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)



- 781 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

C0_U8 3000001124 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C10_U8 30000A1124 Constant value 10 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C11_U8 30000B1124 Constant value 11 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C12_U8 30000C1124 Constant value 12 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C13_U8 30000D1124 Constant value 13 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C14_U8 30000E1124 Constant value 14 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C15_U8 30000F1124 Constant value 15 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit

- 782 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 783 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)


- 784 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 2 Case outline

Types Case figures Figures (pages)
Type using ring terminals 1 / 2 size case Figure 2-1.1 (786)
Type using compression

1 / 2 size case Figure 2-2.1 (787)
terminals
Panel cutout† 1 / 2 size case Figure 2-3.1 (788)
†Note:Panel cutout figures are common for both types.

- 785 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

218
214
256.3
229.3
265.9
260.7
190.5
260.7
242 229.3 (64.4)
255 256.3
† The (64.4) means the height of
the tallest ring type terminal.
Unit: mm
1/2 size case & ring terminals

Figure 2-1.1 Trihedral figure (1/2 size case) & Type using ring terminals

- 786 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
† The (38) means the

height of the VCT terminal.
Unit: mm
1/2 size case & Type using compression terminals

Figure 2-2.1 Trihedral figure (1/2 size case) & Type using compression terminals

- 787 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Panel cutout
Unit: mm
Panel cut out for 1/2 case size
Figure 2-3.1 Panel cutout figure (1/2 size case)

- 788 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 3 Typical external connection

1.1. 1/2 case size for type using compression terminal (BIO3A × 2 plus RS485 and IRIG-B)
1.2. 1/2 case size for type using ring terminal (BIO3A+BO1A plus RS485 and IRIG-B)
1.3 Example for busbar protection
1.4 Example for transformer protection

- 789 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
1.1. 1/2 case size for type using compression terminal (BIO3A × 2 plus RS485 and IRIG-B)
[IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A BIO3 A
C11 VCT39B
100BASE-FX
(+) 1 (+) 1
2 BI1 BI1
(-) 2 (-) 2
4
TX
(+) 3 (+) 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BI2
(-) 4 (-) 4
1
RX
(+) 5 (+) 5
BI3 BI3
(-) 6 (-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 (+) 7 C12
BI4 BI4 100BASE-FX
9 (-) 8 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 (+) 9
9
BI5 BI5 TX
(-) 10 (-) 10
Ida
10
(+) 11 (+) 11
11
BI6 BI6 RX
(-) 12 (-) 12
12
Idb
(+) 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BI7 Idc
(-) 14 (-) 14
C13 14
(+) 15 (+) 15 15
RS485
(-) 16
BI8
(-) 16
BI8 A1
16
Ide
B1
COM-A
A2
B2
COM-B
A3
21 21
B3
BO1(F) BO1(F) COMM
22 22
23 23
BO2(F)
24
BO2(F)
24
C14
25 25
BO3(F) BO3(F)
26 26
27 27
BO4(F) BO4(F)
28 28
(+) 29
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO5(F)
30 30
(-) 31 31 31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO6(F) IRIG-B000
32 32 30
A1
35
33 33 B1
SIG
36
BO7 BO7 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37 B2
DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 37
B3
GND
36 36
BO8 BO8
38 38
GRH-A (0.1)
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E

Note: Another FG cable (a dashed line) is added for DC rated voltage: 24-60Vdc.

- 790 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
1.2. 1/2 case size for type using ring terminal (BIO3A+BO1A plus RS485 and IRIG-B)
[IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A C11 VCT39B
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1 1000BASE-T
2 BI1 BO1(SF)
(-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF)
(-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(SF)
(-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 C12
9
BI4 BO4(SF) 100BASE-TX
(-) 8 8
FAIL2 1000BASE-T
7 (+) 9 9
9
BI5 BO5(SF)
(-) 10 10
Ida
10
(+) 11 11
11
BI6 BO6(SF)
(-) 12 12
12
Idb
(+) 13 13 13
BI7 BO7 Idc
(-) 14 14
C13 14
(+) 15 15 15
(-) 16
BI8 BO8
16 16
Ide
17
BO9
18
21 21
BO1(F) BO10
22 22
23 23
BO2(F)
24
BO11
24
C14
Remote
25 25 communication
BO3(F) BO12
26 26
27 27
BO4(F) BO13
28 28
(+) 29 TX
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14
30 30
(-) 31 31 31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 IRIG-B000
32 32 30
A1
35
33 33 B1
36 SIG
BO7 BO16 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37
B2
DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 BO17
36 B3
GND
36
BO8 37
38 BO18
38
GRH-A (0.1)
●FG ●FGB ● FGA ●FG1 ●E

Note: Another FG cable (a dashed line) is added for DC rated voltage: 24-60Vdc.

- 791 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
1.3 Example for three phases protection regarding the busbar protection
(GRH200-91-213-00-9T-30-110)
Busbar
A
B
C
BIO3A
21
BO1(F) Trip comand1
22
23
Trip1~3 Varistor units VCT39B
BO2(F) Trip comand2
VCT1-9 24
CT
10 I 25
da Trip comand3
BO3(F)
26
(F)
27
11 BO4(F) 28
12 I
db 29
BO5(F) 30
(F)
13 31
14 I BO6(F)
dc 32
33
Line1 Line2 Line3 BO7 34
I
de
35
BIO3A
36
1 37
BO8
Programmable BI 2 BI1
3 38
4 BI2
5
Ethernet LAN I/F
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
Remote Comm
10 BI5 (IEC103)
11
COM
12 BI6
13
14 BI7 SIG A1
B1
15 DISUSE A2
B2 IRIG-B
16 BI8 A3
GND B3
PWS1
A
RELAY 2
1
FAIL.
DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
SUPPLY FAIL
31 Fail1
(-) 32 DC-DC 1
0V
8
35
36 10
37
Note: A dashed line is added when 9
38 FAIL Fail2
DC rated voltage is 24-60Vdc.
FG 7
E
Figure 3-1 External connection using VCT39B (Ch5,6,7), BIO3A for Type using compression
terminals

- 792 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
1.4 Example of single phase protection regarding the restricted earth fault protection
(GRH200-91-213-00-9T-30-110)
BIO3A
Trip1 ~ 3
VCT39B 21
Transformer BO1(F) Trip comand1
22
A VCT
23
9 Trip comand2
BO2(F)
B 10 I 24
da
11 25
I BO3(F) Trip comand3
C 12 db 26
13 (F)
I 27
14 dc BO4(F) 28
Varistor units
15 29
16 I BO5(F) 30
de
(F)
31
BO6(F) 32
33
BO7 34
BIO3A 35
36
1 37
BO8
Programmable BI 2 BI1
3 38
4 BI2
5
Ethernet LAN I/F
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
Remote Comm
10 BI5 (IEC103)
11
COM
12 BI6
13
14 BI7 SIG A1
B1
15 DISUSE A2
B2 IRIG-B
16 BI8 A3
GND B3
PWS1
A
RELAY 2
1
FAIL.
DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
SUPPLY FAIL
31 Fail1
(-) 32 DC-DC 1
0V
8
35
36 10
37
Note: A dash line is added when 9
38 FAIL Fail2
the rated voltage is 24-60Vdc.
FG 7
E
Figure 3-2 External connection using VCT39B (Ch8), BIO3A for Type using compression
terminals

- 793 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS

# Document names Pages Provisions
MICS Model implementation conformance statement 795 Edition 1
PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement 809 Edition 1 & 2
PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing 816 Edition 1 & 2
TICS Tissues conformance statement 833 Edition 1 & 2

- 794 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Edition 1)
IEC61850 Edition 1 Model Implementation

Conformance Statement (MICS)
GRH200 (High impedance differential protection)
- 795 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
The GRH200 with communication firmware G2M850-01 series version upper than E(G2M850-01-E) supports IEC
61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
Logical Nodes GRH200 Nodes GRH200
L: System Logical Nodes GGIO_GOOSE Yes
LPHD Yes GSAL ---
Common Logical Node Yes I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
LLN0 Yes IARC ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions IHMI ---
PDIF Yes ITCI ---
PDIR --- ITMI ---
PDIS --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
PDOP --- ANCR ---
PDUP --- ARCO ---
PFRC --- ATCC ---
PHAR --- AVCO ---
PHIZ --- M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PIOC --- MDIF ---
PMRI --- MHAI ---
PMSS --- MHAN ---
POPE --- MMTR ---
PPAM --- MMXN ---
PSCH --- MMXU ---
PSDE --- MSQI ---
PTEF --- MSTA ---
PTOC --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
PTOF --- SARC ---
PTOV --- SIMG ---
PTRC Yes SIML ---
PTTR --- SPDC ---
PTUC --- X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTUV --- XCBR ---
PUPF --- XSWI ---
PTUF --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PVOC --- TCTR ---
PVPH --- TVTR ---
PZSU --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions YEFN ---
RDRE --- YLTC ---
RADR --- YPSH ---
RBDR --- YPTR ---
RDRS --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment
RBRF --- ZAXN ---
RDIR --- ZBAT ---
RFLO --- ZCAB ---
RPSB --- ZCAP ---
RREC --- ZCON ---
RSYN --- ZGEN ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZGIL ---
CALH --- ZLIN ---
CCGR --- ZMOT ---
CILO --- ZREA ---
CPOW --- ZRRC ---
CSWI --- ZSAR ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references ZTCF ---
GAPC --- ZTCR ---
GGIO Yes
- 796 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3
Common data classes GRH200
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT ---
ACT_ABC Yes
ACD ---
ACD_ABC Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV ---
CMV ---
SAV ---
WYE ---
WYE_ABCN Yes
DEL ---
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC ---
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING Yes
Analogue settings
ASG Yes
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL Yes
LPL Yes
CSD ---
- 797 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRH200
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and specialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
- 798 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
GGIO class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
- 799 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
GGIO_GOOSE class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
- 800 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRH200
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.
- 801 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
ACT_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
ACD_ABC class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
- 802 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
WYE_ABCN class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B|C|… O N
Services
- 803 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
Q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
T TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
- 804 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
- 805 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
ING class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y(*3)
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.
ASG class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
- 806 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(MICS Ed.1)
DPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
Services
LPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only; AC_LN0_EX N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
Services
- 807 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
(This page is intentionally blank)

- 808 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PICS Editon1 and 2)
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement

for GR200 series IED
(Original document#: 6F2S1874 Ver. 0.6)

- 809 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
Introduction
The template of this document is “Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the
IEC 61850 interface in <device>” version 1.6 published by UCA International Users Group in
Nov 19, 2015.
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the
IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series version
equal to or upper than F (G2M850-01-F). Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-
7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance statement”.
— ASCI basic conformance statement,
— ACSI models conformance statement,
— ACSI service conformance statement
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
Note: Term “Ed” is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850. Editon2 (Ed2) provides
backward compatibility for legacy Edition 1 (Ed1).

- 810 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ASCI basic conformance statement
The basic conformance statement is defined in Table A.1.
Table A.1 – Basic conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
Client-Server roles
Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B11  Y
ASSOCIATION)
Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B12 N 
ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
Client/Subscrib
er side is only
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y
GOOSE and
SNTP.
Deprecated
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used
Ed2
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other
Generic substation event model (GSE)

B31 Publisher side  Y
B32 Subscriber side Y 
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

B41 Publisher side  N
B42 Subscriber side N 
- = not applicable
Y = supported
N or empty = not supported

- 811 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ACSI models conformance statement
The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table A.2.
Table A.2 – ACSI models conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
If Server or Client side (B11/12) supported
M1 Logical device N Y
M2 Logical node N Y
M3 Data N Y
M4 Data set N Y
M5 Substitution N N
M6 Setting group control N Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control N Y
M7-1 sequence-number N Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M7-4 data-set-name N Y
M7-5 data-reference N Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow N Y
M7-7 entryID N Y
M7-8 BufTm N Y
M7-9 IntgPd N Y
M7-10 GI N Y
M7-11 conf-revision N Y
M8 Unbuffered report control N Y
M8-1 sequence-number N Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M8-4 data-set-name N Y
M8-5 data-reference N Y
M8-6 BufTm N Y
M8-7 IntgPd N Y
M8-8 GI N Y
M8-8 conf-revision N Y
Logging N N
M9 Log control N N
M9-1 IntgPd N N
M10 Log N N
M11 Control N Y
M17 File Transfer N Y
M18 Application Association N Y
M19 GOOSE Control Block N Y
M20 Sampled Value Control Block N N
If GSE (B31/32) is supported
M12 GOOSE Y Y
M13 GSSE N N Deprecated Ed2
If SVC (41/42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC N N
M15 Unicast SVC N N
For all IEDs
SNTP client functions
M16 Time Y N
are supported.
Y = service is supported
N or empty = service is not supported

- 812 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ACSI service conformance statement
The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in Table A.3 (depending on the statements
in Table A.1).
Table A.3 – ACSI service Conformance statement(1/3)
Ed Services AA: Client Server Comments
TP/MC (C) (S)
Server
S1 1 GetServerDirectory (LOGICAL-DEVICE) TP N Y
Application association
S2 1 Associate TP N Y
S3 1 Abort TP N Y
S4 1 Release TP N Y
Logical device
S5 1 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP N Y
Logical node
S6 1 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP N Y
S7 1 GetAllDataValues TP N Y
Data
S8 1 GetDataValues TP N Y
S9 1 SetDataValues TP N Y
S10 1 GetDataDirectory TP N Y
S11 1 GetDataDefinition TP N Y
Data set
S12 1 GetDataSetValues TP N Y
S13 1 SetDataSetValues TP N N
S14 1 CreateDataSet TP N N
S15 1 DeleteDataSet TP N N
S16 1 GetDataSetDirectory TP N Y
Substitution
S17 1 SetDataValues TP N N
Setting group control

S18 1 SelectActiveSG TP N Y
S19 1 SelectEditSG TP N N
S20 1 SetSGValues TP N N
S21 1 ConfirmEditSGValues TP N N
S22 1 GetSGValues TP N N
S23 1 GetSGCBValues TP N Y

- 813 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)

Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 1 Report TP N Y
S24-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S24-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S24- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S25 1 GetBRCBValues TP N Y
S26 1 SetBRCBValues TP N Y
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27 1 Report TP N Y
S27-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S27-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S27- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S28 1 GetURCBValues TP N Y
S29 1 SetURCBValues TP N Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 1 GetLCBValues TP N N
S31 1 SetLCBValues TP N N
Log
S32 1 QueryLogByTime TP N N
S33 1 QueryLogAfter TP N N
S34 1 GetLogStatusValues TP N N
Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE
S35 1 SendGOOSEMessage MC Y Y
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S36 1 GetGoReference TP N N
S37 1 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP N N
S38 1 GetGoCBValues TP N Y
S39 1 SetGoCBValues TP N Y
GSSE
S40 1 SendGSSEMessage MC N N Deprecated in Ed2
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S41 1 GetReference TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S42 1 GetGSSEElementNumber TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S43 1 GetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S44 1 SetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2

- 814 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)

Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SV
S45 1 SendMSVMessage MC N N
Multicast Sampled Value Control Block
S46 1 GetMSVCBValues TP N N
S47 1 SetMSVCBValues TP N N
Unicast SV
S48 1 SendUSVMessage TP N N
Unicast Sampled Value Control Block
S49 1 GetUSVCBValues TP N N
S50 1 SetUSVCBValues TP N N
Control
S51 1 Select N Y
S52 1 SelectWithValue TP N Y
S53 1 Cancel TP N Y
S54 1 Operate TP N Y
S55 1 CommandTermination TP N Y
S56 1 TimeActivatedOperate TP N N
File transfer
S57 1 GetFile TP N Y
S58 1 SetFile TP N N
S59 1 DeleteFile TP N N
S60 1 GetFileAttributeValues TP N Y
S61 1 GetServerDirectory (FILE-SYSTEM) TP N Y
Time
T1 1 Time resolution of internal clock 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds
T2 1 Time accuracy of internal clock T1 T0 (10ms)
T1 (1ms)
T2 (100µs)
T3 (25µs)
T4 (4µs)
T5 (1µs)
T3 1 Supported TimeStamp resolution 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds

- 815 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Edition1&2)
Protocol implementation extra information

for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850
communication interface in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “PIXIT template extracted from server test
procedures version 1.0 and updated according to TPCL version 1.2.6” published by
UCA International Using Group.

- 816 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
1. Introduction
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of
the IEC 61850 interface in G2 Series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series
version equal & upper than A(G2M850-02-A).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10. The PIXIT entries contain information which is not available in the
PICS, MICS, TICS documents or SCL file.
Each table specifies the PIXIT for applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850-
10.
Note: Term “Ed” mentions the edition number of the IEC 61850. The editon2 (Ed2)
provides backward compatibility for legacy the Edition 1 (Ed1).
2. CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
3. PIXIT FOR DOCUMENTATION

ID Ed Description Value / Clarification
How to expose required firmware versions not
Do1 2 NA
present in the data model

- 817 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
4. PIXIT FOR ASSOCIATION MODEL
Maximum number of clients that can set-up an
As1 1 6
association simultaneously
TCP_KEEPALIVE value. Configurable from 1 to 20 seconds

As2 1,2
The recommended range is 1..20s (default is 20 seconds)
From 10 to 30 seconds
As3 1,2 Lost connection detection time
(TCP_KEEPALIVE + 10sec.)
As4 - Authentication is not supported yet N
Transport selector N
Session selector N
What association parameters are necessary for
As5 1,2 Presentation selector N
successful association
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
If association parameters are necessary for

As6 1,2 N.A.
association, describe the correct values e.g.
Max MMS PDU size 16384

What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU Min MMS PDU size Not
As7 1,2
size limited. It depends
on a request.
Typically about 130 seconds
Please check LCD

Monitoring -> Communication
What is the maximum start up time after a
As8 1,2 -> 61850STAT as “Active”
power supply interrupt
(Note) The startup time depends
on the type of IED and
Its configuration/setting.
Does this device function only as test equipment?

(test equipment need not have a non-volatile
As9 1,2 N
configuration; but it cannot be part of the
substation automation system)

- 818 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
5. PIXIT FOR SERVER MODEL
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
Y* Overflow
Y* OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are
Sr1 1,2 Y* Failure
supported (can be set by server)
N OldData
Y* Inconsistent
N Inaccurate (OnlyHz)
Source:
Y Process
* Supports only for GBU DCAI

Model
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
Y Oscillatory
Which status value (ST) quality bits are
Y Failure
Sr2 1,2 supported
Y OldData
(can be set by server)
Y Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
What is the maximum number of data object

Sr3 - Deprecated
references in one GetDataValues request
What is the maximum number of data object

Sr4 - Deprecated
references in one SetDataValues request
On Y
Blocked N
Sr5 1 Which Mode values are supported Test Y
Test/Blocked N
Off N
<additional items>
Front-to-back order. This might
The order of interpretation of write requests influence on write request
involving a list of variables. involving RptEna and other
variables in the same RCB.

- 819 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
6. PIXIT for Data set model
Not limited by an internal
configuration parameter.
This IED does not have

What is the maximum number of data elements
Ds1 1 CreateDataSet service. But any
in one data set (compare ICD setting)
DataSet can be defined by using
engineering tool. The maximum
number depends on the memory
size of IED.
How many persistent data sets can be created by
Ds2 1 one or more clients N.A.
(this number includes predefined datasets)
How many non-persistent data sets can be
Ds3 1 N.A.
created by one or more clients
7. PIXIT FOR SUBSTITUTION MODEL

Not applicable
8. PIXIT FOR SETTING GROUP CONTROL MODEL

What is the number of supported setting groups 8
Sg1 1
for each logical device
Just SelectActiveSG service will be
supported according to PICS.
When an IED receives correct

SelectActiveSG request, the IED
returns Response+ within 10
seconds. And the ActSG and
LActTm variable are updated
What is the effect of when and how the non- within 10 seconds after the
Sg2 1,2 volatile storage is updated Response+. (These times are
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4) typical values, and they depend on
IED types and its
configurations/settings.)
After changing setting group

number with LED panel, you can
see new setting group with
GetSGCBValue service.
Sg3 1 Can multiple clients edit the same setting group N.A.
What happens if the association is lost while
Sg4 1 N.A.
editing a setting group
Sg5 1 Is EditSG value 0 allowed N.A.
When ResvTms is not present how long is an edit
Sg6 2 N.A.
setting group locked
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)

- 820 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model

The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
Rp1 1
quality change Y
data update Y
The supported optional fields are sequence-numberY
general interrogation Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y data-
set-name Y data-
Rp2 1 reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y conf-
rev Y
segmentation Y
Can the server send segmented reports
(when not supported it is allowed to refuse an
Rp3 1,2 association with a smaller than minimum PDU Y
size)
Mechanism on second internal data change

notification of the same analogue data value Send report immediately
Rp4 1,2 within buffer period (Compare IEC 61850-7-2
$14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach

Rp5 1 (compare IEC 61850-7-2:2003 $14.2.1) Each URCB is visible to all clients
Rp6 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated

- 821 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model (continued)
What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how For example, LLN0$ST$Health
many reports can be buffered can be stored 408 events.
Rp7 1,2
Pre-configured RCB attributes that are

Rp8 - dynamic, compare SCL report settings Deprecated
May the reported data set contain:

- structured data objects Y
Rp9 1 - data attributes Y
What is the scan cycle for binary events More than 1.6 milliseconds
Rp10 1,2
Is this fixed, configurable Configurable
Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a
Rp11 1 specific client in the SCL N
After restart of the server is the value of ConfRev Restored from original
restored from the original configuration or configuration
Rp12 2 retained prior to restart
Does the server accepts any client to

configure/enable a BRCB with ResvTms=‐1? N
Rp13 1,2 What fields are used to do the identification? AP‐Title N
AE‐Qualifier N
<other field> N
When BRCB.ResvTms is exposed, what is
default value for BRCB.ResvTms if client does N/A
not write (must be > 0)
Rp14 2 Or
When BRCB.ResvTms is not exposed, what is

the internal reservation time (must be >= 0) 60 seconds
<additional items>
Is it supported to change LLN0.Mod online? N
10. PIXIT FOR LOGGING MODEL
Not applicable

- 822 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
11. PIXIT FOR GOOSE PUBLISH MODEL
Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the
Gp1 1,2 N
published GOOSE be set
What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish If the configuration is incorrect,
Gp2 1
configuration is incorrect the GOOSE isn’t published.
Published FCD supported common data classes All CDC/data types can be
Gp3 1,2
are published.
What is the slow retransmission time 60 seconds with TAL = 120sec.

Gp4 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
What is the fastest retransmission time 10 milli-sec. with TAL=30 milli-sec.

Gp5 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
Can the GOOSE publish be turned on / off by Deprecated

Gp6 -
using SetGoCBValues(GoEna) See PICS - SetGoCBValues
The device starts sending

Gp7 1,2 What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart GOOSE from stNum=1 and
sqNum=1.
May the GOOSE data set contain:

Gp8 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes Y
Y
Does Server or ICT refuse GOOSE payload
Gp9 1,2 Server Refuses the
dataset length greater than SCSM supports?
Configuration.
<additional items>
1,2 Is the DUT a test equipment N

- 823 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL
What elements of a subscribed GOOSE Y destination MAC address
message are checked to decide the message is = as configured
valid and the allData values are accepted? If Y APPID
yes, describe the conditions. Y gocbRef
N timeAllowedtoLive
Notes: N datSet
the VLAN tag may be removed by a Y goID
ethernet switch and shall not be =as configured
Gs1 1,2 checked N t
the simulation flag shall always be N stNum
checked (Ed2) Y sqNum
Y simulation / test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
N numDatSetEntries
N out-of-order dataset
members
When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost [message does not arrive prior to
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last TAL]
received GOOSE message) GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE (=1100 0000
0000 0).
GOOSE status change is

accepted . The behavior can be
Gs2 1,2 changed by modifying PLC
logic.
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
* Supports only for GBU DCAI

Model
What is the behaviour when one or more [stNum is out-of-order, or missed]
subscribed GOOSE messages isn’t received or No fail will be detected.
syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE)
[sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
1000 0). After receiving message
with correct sqNum order, the
Gs3 1,2 quality information is set to
GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
You can assign the information to

any data attribute using our
configuration tool.
GOOSE status change is ignored

The behavior can be changed by
modifying PLC logic.

- 824 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
What is the behavior when a subscribed Refer to Gs3
Gs4 1,2 GOOSE message is out-of-order
What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE subscribe quality

GOOSE message is duplicated information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
Gs5 1,2 1000 0).
GOOSE status change is accepted.

Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages Y, with the VLAN tag
Gs6 1 with/without the VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag
May the GOOSE data set contain:
Gs7 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes N
Subscribed FCD supported common data [Supported CDC]
classes are All, excepts measurand CDC (MV,
CMV, SAV, WYE, DEL, SEQ, HMV,
HWYE and HDEL)
[Supported data type]

Boolean
BitString
Integer
Unsigned Integer
Gs8 1,2
Other types
(TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will
be ignored by IED.
(NOTE)
But each data size shall be less
than 32 bits.
Dataset including measurand
CDC listed above cannot be
subscribed.
Are subscribed GOOSE with test=T (Ed1) / GOOSE subscribe quality

simulation=T (Ed2) accepted in test/simulation information will become
mode QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100
0000 0001 0).
Gs9 1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.

- 825 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
Gs10 1,2 Max number of dataset members 64
<additional items>
Are subscribed GOOSE with ndsCom=T GOOSE subscribe quality
Accepted. information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INACCURATE (=1100 0000 0100 0).
1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.
13. PIXIT for GOOSE performance

Performance class P1(Ed.2) for
Gf1 1,2 System/LLN0$GO$goST
P3(Ed.2) for all other GOOSE
GOOSE ping-pong processing method Scan cycle based
Gf2 1,2
Application logic scan cycle (ms) Max. …. 200ms

Gf3 1,2
Min. 1.38ms in 60Hz
Maximum number of data attributes in The dataset for
GOOSE dataset (value and quality has to be System/LLN0$GO$goST is fixed,
counted as separate attributes) and it contains 32 data attributes.
All other dataset for GOOSE can be

configurable, and there is no
Gf4 1 particular limitation about the
maximum number of data
attributes. However, the dataset
definition shares the same dynamic
memory area as other data model
definitions such as LN, RCB, etc., so
it is affected by them.

- 826 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL
What control models are supported DOns: Y
(compare ICD file enums for Ed2) SBOns: Y
Ct1 - DOes: Y
SBOes: Y
Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or Fixed
Ct2 1,2 dynamic
Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (compare Deprecated
Ct3 - PICS or SCL)
Is “operate-many” supported (compare Deprecated
Ct4 - sboClass)
Will the DUT activate the control output when Y
the test attribute is set in the SelectWithValue
Ct5 1 and/or Operate request (when N test procedure
Ctl2 is applicable)
What are the conditions for the time (T) Deprecated

attribute in the SelectWithValue and/or
Ct6 - Operate request
Is pulse configuration supported (compare Deprecated

Ct7 - pulseConfig)
What is the behaviour of the DUT when the Y synchrocheck

check conditions are set Y interlock-check
Both bits are checked.
(NOTE) The result of Opening

operation (ctval = F) is
Ct8 1 not Influenced by
SynchroCheck bit.
Is this behavior fixed, configurable, online This behavior is fixed.

changeable

- 827 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL(Continued)
Which additional cause diagnosis are Y Unknown
supported Y Not-supported
Y Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
Y Blocked-by-synchrocheck
Y Command-already-in-execution
Y Blocked-by-health
Y 1-of-n-control
Y Abortion-by-cancel
Y Time-limit-over
Y Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-not-selected
Ct9 1,2
Edition 1 specific values:
Y Parameter-change-in-execution
Edition 2 specific values:

Y Object-already-selected
N No-access-authority
N Ended-with-overshoot
N Abortion-due-to-deviation
N Abortion-by-communication-loss
N Blocked-by-command
N None
Y Inconsistent-parameters
Y Locked-by-other-client
N Parameter-change-in-execution*
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Set orCat with unsupported value.
SelectWithValue request See below “Which origin categories
Ct10 1,2
are supported?”
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Send SELECT request to the control
Ct11 1,2 Select request object which is not mapped to
control application.

- 828 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with DOns, SBOns, DOes:
Operate request [Example1]
Set orCat as unsupported value
-> Cause AddCause as “Not-
supported(1)”
[Example2]
Set ctlCat same as stVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Position-
reached(5)”
Ct12 1,2
SBOes: (Only Ed1)
Same as above. Or,
[Example3]
Set Oper parameters as different
parameter from the parameter of
SelectWithVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Parameter-
change-in-execution (6)”
Which origin categories are supported / N bay-control

accepted Y station-control
Y remote-control
N automatic-bay
Y automatic-station
Ct13 1,2 Y automatic-remote
N maintenance
N process
maintenance (7): N
process (8): N
What happens if the orCat value is not DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes:
Ct14 1,2 supported or invalid “test-not-ok” IED respond
Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue / DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes: N

Operate with the same control value as the
current status value
Ct15 1,2
Is this behavior configurable Fixed

Does the IED accept a select/operate on the DOns: N
same control object from 2 different clients at SBOns: N
the same time DOes: N
SBOes: N
Ct16 1,2
Note:
Commands are refused until
the new position is not reached
or a timeout does not occur.

- 829 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue SBOns: N
from the same client when the control object is SBOes: N
Ct17 1 already selected (Tissue #334)
Is for SBOes the internal validation performed Yes for both SelectWithValue and
Ct18 1,2 during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate Operate
step
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off Deprecated

Ct19 - or [On-]Blocked (Compare PIXIT-Sr5)
Does the IED support local / remote operation

Ct20 1,2 Y
Does the IED send an InformationReport with SBOns: N
Ct21 1,2 LastApplError as part of the Operate response- DOns: N
for control with normal security
How to force a “parameter-change-in-
Ct22 2 execution” N.A.
How many SBOns/SBOes control objects can be SBOns: n=1

Ct23 1,2 selected at the same time? SBOes: n=1
Can a controllable object be forced to keep its Y

old state e.g. Internal Controllable Objects may Need PLC Logic customization.
Ct24 1,2 not be accessible to force this, whereas a switch
like Circuit Breaker outside the DUT can?
When CDC=DPC is supported, is it possible to

have DPC (Controllable Double Point) go to the
Ct25 1,2 Y
intermediate state? (00)
Name a DOes point (if any) with a finite The timeout time is setting.
operate timeout and specify the timeout One example,
Ct26 1,2 (in milliseconds) DPSY01-RST
Default value is 300[ms]
(10[ms]-1000[ms])
Does the IED support control objects with DOns: N
external signals? SBOns: N
Ct27 2 DOes: N
SBOes: N

- 830 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
15. PIXIT FOR TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION MODEL
What time quality bits are supported (may be Y LeapSecondsKnown
set by the IED) N ClockFailure
Tm1 1 Y ClockNotSynchronized
Describe the behavior when the time server(s) On one time server: IED tries to
ceases to respond synchronize with another time
server.
On all time servers:

Tm2 1,2 The quality attribute
“ClockNotSynchronized” will be set
to TRUE.
What is the time server lost detection time The lost detection time depends on
the network condition.
How long does it take to take over the new time 10 seconds
Tm3 1,2 from time server
Tm4 1,2 When is the time quality bit “ClockFailure” set RTC is out-of-order
When is the time quality bit “Clock not It depends on the condition of
Tm5 1,2 Synchronized” set synchronization. Typically from 1 to
10 minutes.
Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to Deprecated
Tm6 - the configured scan cycle
Does the device support time zone and daylight Yes for both.
Tm7 1
saving
Which attributes of the SNTP response packet Y Leap indicator not equal
are validated to 3?
N Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is
equal to value sent by the
SNTP client as Transmit
Tm8 1,2 Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields
are checked for
reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
Do the COMTRADE files have local time or UTC
Tm9 1,2 UTC time and is this configurable Not Configurable

- 831 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
16. PIXIT FOR FILE TRANSFER MODEL

What is structure of files and directories Support tree structure
Where are the COMTRADE files stored “/COMTRADE/” directory
(NOTE)
Ft1 1 At root directory in IED, the
directory “/COMTRADE/” is
Hidden. Therefore a client
shall directly access this
directory.
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are Not zipped
included in each zip file
Directory names are separated from the file
Ft2 1,2 name by “/”
The maximum file name size including path
Ft3 1 (recommended 64 chars) 64 chars
Ft4 1,2 Are directory/file name case sensitive N

Maximum file size for SetFile
Ft5 1,2 N.A
Is the requested file path included in the MMS N

Ft6 1 fileDirectory respond file name (Ed2: always complete path)
Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory

Ft7 1 request No
Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same

Ft8 1,2 time Y
Ft9 1,2 Which files can be deleted N.A.
17. PIXIT FOR SERVICE TRACKING MODEL

Which ACSI services are tracked by
Tr1 2 LTRK.GenTrk N.A

- 832 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(TICS Edition2)
Tissues conformance statement (TICS)

of the IEC 61850 Ed.2 communication interface
in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “Test Procedures Change List (TPCL) version
1.2.6 for IEC 61850 Edition 2 server test procedures revision 1.0” published by
UCA International Users Group Testing Sub Committee in April 3, 2018.

- 833 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(TICS Ed.2)
1. Introduction
This document provides a template for the Tissues conformance statement. According to the
UCA IUG QAP the Tissue conformance statement is required to perform a conformance test
and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series
version equal & upper than A (G2M850-02-A).
Note: Term “Ed” is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850. Editon2 (Ed2) provides
backward compatibility for legacy Edition 1 (Ed1).

- 834 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(TICS Ed.2)
2. Mandatory Edition2 Tissues
Below tables give an overview of the applicable mandatory Tissues.
Part 6 Implemented
Description
Tissue Y/na
658 Tracking related features na
FCDA element cannot be a "functionally constrained
663 Y
logical node"
668 Autotransformer modeling na
687 SGCB ResvTms na
719 ConfDataSet - maxAttributes definition is confusing na
721 Log element name na
768 bType VisString65 is missing Y
779 object references na
788 SICS S56 from optional to mandatory na
789 ConfLdName as services applies to both server and client na
804 valKind and IED versus System configuration na
806 Max length of log name inconsistent between -6 and -7-2 na
807 Need a way to indicate if "Owner" present in RCB na
823 ValKind for structured data attributes na

824 Short addresses on structured data attributes na
825 Floating point value Y
845 SGCB ResvTms na
853 SBO and ProtNs na
855 Recursive SubFunction na
856 VoltageLevel frequency and phases na
857 Function/SubFunction for ConductingEquipment na
886 Missing 8-1 P-types na
901 tServices as AP or as IED element Y
936 SupSubscription parameter usage is difficult na

- 835 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(TICS Ed.2)
2. Mandatory Edition2 Tissues (continued)
Part 7-1 Implemented
Description
Tissue Y/na
828 Data model namespace revision IEC 61850-7-4:2007[A] na
simulated GOOSE disappears after 1st appearance when
1151 na
LPHD.Sim = TRUE
1468 Re-use DO from other LN na

Description
Tissue Y/na
778 AddCause values – add value not-supported Y
780 What are unsupported trigger option at a control block? Y
783 TimOper Resp- ; add Authorization check na
786 AddCause values 26 and 27 are switched Y
820 Mandatory ACSI services (use for PICS template) Y
858 typo in enumeration ServiceType na
861 dchg of ConfRev attribute Y
876 GenLogiclNodeClass and SGCB, GoCB, MsvCB, UsvCB na
1038 Loss of Info Detection After Resynch Y
1050 GTS Phycomaddr definition in SCL Y
1062 Entrytime not used in CDC na
1071 Length of DO name Y

The sentence "The initial value of EditSG shall be 0", has to
1091 na
be stated in part 7.2 not in 8.1
1127 Missing owner attribute in BTS and UTS Y
1202 GI not optional na

Description
Tissue Y/na
697 persistent command / PulseConfig Y
698 Wrong case is BAC.dB attribute na

722 Units for 'h' and 'min' not in UnitKind enumeration. na
919 Presence Condition for sVC na
925 Presence of i or f attribute - Problem with writing na
926 Presence Conditions within RangeConfig na

- 836 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(TICS Ed.2)
Description
Tissue Y/na
671 mistake in definition of Mod & Beh Y
674 CDC of ZRRC.LocSta is wrong na
676 Same data object name used with different CDC na
677 MotStr is used with different CDC in PMMS and SOPM LN classes na
679 Remove CycTrMod Enum na
680 SI unit for MHYD.Cndct na
681 Enum PIDAlg na
682 ANCR.ParColMod na
683 Enum QVVR.IntrDetMth na
685 Enum ParTraMod na
686 New annex H - enums types in XML na
694 Data object CmdBlk na
696 LSVS.St (Status of subscription) na
712 interpretation of quality operatorBlocked na
713 DO Naming of time constants in FFIL na
724 ANCR.Auto na
725 Loc in LN A-group na
734 LLN0.OpTmh vs. LPHD.OpTmh na
736 PFSign na
742 GAPC.Str, GAPC.Op and GAPC.StrVal na
743 CCGR.PmpCtl and CCGR.FanCtl na
744 LN STMP, EEHealth and EEName na
773 Loc, LocKey and LocSta YPSH and YLTC na
774 ITCI.LocKey na
800 Misspelling in CSYN na
802 CCGR and Harmonized control authority na
808 Presence condition of ZMoT.DExt and new DOs na
831 Setting of ConfRevNum in LGOS na
838 Testing in Beh=Blocked na
844 MFLK.PhPiMax, MFLK.PhPiLoFil, MFLK.PhPiRoot DEL->WYE na
Presence conditions re-assessing in case of derived
849 statistical calculation na
877 QVUB -settings should be optional na
909 Remove ANCR.ColOpR and ColOpL na
920 Resetable Counter is NOT resetable na
932 Rename AVCO.SptVol to AVCO.VolSpt na
939 Change CDC for ANCR.FixCol na
991 LGOS: GoCBRef (as well as LSVS.SvCBRef) should be mandatory Y
1007 PTRC as fault indicator - Update of description required na
1044 TapChg in AVCO na
1077 Rename DOnames within LTIM na
Note: Tissues 675, 735, 772, 775, 776, 878 are not relevant for conformance testing

- 837 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
(TICS Ed.2)
Description
Tissue Y/na
784 Tracking of control (CTS) na
817 Fixed-length GOOSE float encoding Y
834 File dir name length 64 Y
951 Encoding of Owner attribute Y
1040 More associate error codes Y
1178 Select Response+ is non-null value Y

- 838 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 5 Ordering

- 839 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Positions
[Hardware selection](1/2) 7 8 - 9 A B - C D - E F - G H - J K L
Configuration G R H 2 0 0 - 9 - - 0 0 - - 3 - 1 0
Application of power system

VCT39B: 4×CTs 9
DC rated voltage
110-250 Vdc (or 100-220 Vac †1) 1
24-60 Vdc 3
System Frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
AC rated current
1A 1
Serial, Ethernet communication, and/or Time Sync ports

Communication port tables (see pp. 841—843)
Outlines
Standard LCD, 1/2 size case; flush mounting type 2
Large LCD, 1/2 size case; flush mounting type 6
Standard LCD, 1/2 size case; rack mounting type†2 F
Large LCD, 1/2 size case; rack mounting type†2 J
Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWS

Compression plug type 0
BI/BO modules
Choice from BI/BO tables 1×BIO module 1
(see pp. 846-848) 2×BIO modules 2
3×BIO modules 3
Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWS

Ring type terminal 1
BI/BO modules
Choice from BI/BO tables 1×BIO module 1
(see pp. 846-847) 2×BIO modules 2
(to be continued on the next page)
1† The operation of BI modules is intended to use while DC power source is being supplied to the
IED, and the operation of power supply module (PWS) of the IED is only guaranteed for DC
power source. Thus, the user should disable the PWS supervision function when AC power is
supplied to the IED so that the IED does not issue spurious alarms (see p. 456).
2† Mounting kits (for 19” rack) are provided if EP-204/205 accessories are ordered (see p. 849).
Tips: The user can find out the ordering number from the information menu on the LCD (see
Chapter User interface: Information sub-menu).

- 840 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Positions
[Hardware selection](2/2) 7 8 - 9 A B - C D - E F - G H - J K L
Configurations G R H 2 0 0 - 9 - - 0 0 - - 3 - 1 0
(…continued from the previous page)
Pos. Number (and Location) of communication modules

Fiber
100Base- 100Base-TX 1000base- LAN for
EF RS485 optic for /1000Base-T Local PC
IRIG-B Remark
IEC103 FX LX
11 1(C13)
31 1(C13) 1(C15)
12 1(C13)
32 1(C13) 1(C15)
14 1(C11)
34 1(C11) 1(C15)
4C 1(C13) 1(C11)
6C 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
4G 1(C13) 1(C11)
6G 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
E4 1(C11) 1(C13)
EC 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C13)
EG 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C13)
G4 1(C11) 1(C13) 1(C15)
GC 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C13) 1(C14)
GG 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C13) 1(C14)
46 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
66 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
7D 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
9D 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
7H 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
9H 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
E6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
ED 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
EH 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
G6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
GD 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) Hot-standby†
GH 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) Hot-standby†
L6 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N6 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LD 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
ND 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LH 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NH 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
S6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
U6 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
SD 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UD 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
SH 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UH 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
1J 1(C11)
3J 1(C11) 1(C15)
4N 1(C13) 1(C11)
6N 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
4S 1(C13) 1(C11)
6S 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)

- 841 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Fiber
IRIG-B Remark
IEC103 FX LX
4L 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
6L 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
7P 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
9P 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
7T 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
9T 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
EL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
EP 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
ET 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
GL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
GP 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) Hot-standby†
GT 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) Hot-standby†
LL 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NL 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LP 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NP 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LT 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NT 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
SL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UL 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
SP 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UP 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
ST 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UT 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
1K 1(C11)
3K 1(C11) 1(C15)
4Q 1(C13) 1(C11)
6Q 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
4U 1(C13) 1(C11)
6U 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
EK 1(C11) 1(C12)
EQ 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C12)
EU 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C12)
GK 1(C11) 1(C12) 1(C15)
GQ 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C12) 1(C14)
GU 1(C15) 1(C11) 1(C12) 1(C14)
4M 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
6M 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
7R 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
9R 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
7V 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
9V 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
EM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
ER 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
EV 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) Hot-standby†
GM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
GR 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) Hot-standby†
GV 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) Hot-standby†
LM 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NM 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LR 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NR 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LV 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NV 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†

- 842 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)

Fiber
IRIG-B Remark
IEC103 FX LX
SM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UM 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
SR 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UR 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
SV 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
UV 1(C15) 2(C11,C12) 1(C13) 1(C14) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
†Communication redundancy, PRP/HSP/RSTP or Hot-standby, is applicable when a dedicated

LAN module is ordered. Module locations can be found out using a positon code of brackets. For
example, single 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module is mounted at C11 when “14” code is chosen at
Positon E&F. To find out the locations C11—C15, see p. 419.

- 843 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Positions
[Software selection](1/1) 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R H 2 0 0 - 9 0 3 1 - -
Function block
See Function table (see p. 845) 1
Network / Time Sync. modules
Assignment at ‘E’ position (see pp. 841—843)
Assignment at ‘F’ position (see pp. 841—843)
Protocol†1
IEC60870-5-103 or IEC 61850 1
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Assignment at ‘9’ position (see p. 840)
Language
English E
1† One of the codes (i.e., 1 or 2 at positons U) has to be selected to be relevant for the user’s purpose:
Table Protocol relevant table

Software model at Position Ordering code at Position “U”
“G&T” 1 2
IEC 61850†2 30 ✓
IEC 60870-5-
30 ✓ NA
103†3
✓: Valid NA: Not applicable
2† Duplicated LAN modules are required for the hot-standby. For the PRP/HSR/RSTP, choose LAN modules
including “L” or “N” code at position E (see pp. 841—843).

3† For IEC60870-103, a serial module (RS485 or fiber) is required (see pp. 841—843).

- 844 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
[Function table for Software]

Ordering No.
Function Block Description (Position “G & T”)
31
[Relay application]
87 Current differential protection (2 stages) ●
DIFHZ — Differential current monitoring ●
50N Restrict earth fault protection (2 stages) ●
TRC 94 Trip circuit ●
[General controls]
CMNCTRL Common controls ●
LEDR LED reset ●
General ctrl. GCNT Counter function for the general ●
MDCTRL Mode control function ●
L/R Local and remote control ●
[Control and monitoring application]
SPOS Single position device control ●
SOFTSW Software switch control ●
OPTR Operate timer reset ●
TOTALTIM Total time measurement ●
Basic ctrl. ILK Software interlock ●
DPOS Double position device control ●
TPOS Three position device control ●
GENBI Event detection function for general BIs ●
ASEQ Automatic sequence control ●
[Monitoring]
-- MES Measurement ●
-- Statistics Statistics displaying ●
[Recording]
-- DRT Disturbance recorder ●
●: Applied, Blank: Not applied.

- 845 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
[Number of BI/BO]
Selction of 1xBIO module, a slot is assigned in the IED case.
Number of circuits on a module
Binary input circuits (BI) Independent type & variable thresholds Binary output circuits (BO)
Auxiliary (normal) or Form C type

Semi-fast operating type
Independent circuit type
Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
No.†1 Selections of a BIO module
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
8 - - 6 - 2 - 13 1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
Note
†1 The code selected is set for A & B positions of ‘Hardware selection’.

- 846 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Selction of 2xBIO modules, two slots are assigned in the IED case.
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
No.†1 Selections of BIO module combination
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
16 - - 12 - 4 - 2A 2xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
8 12 - 6 - 2 - 2G 1xBI2A+1xBIO3A
Note
†1 The code selected is set for A & B positions of ‘Hardware selection’.

- 847 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Selction of 3xBIO modules; three slots are assigned in the IED case.
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
No.†1 Selections of BIO module combination
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
24 - - 18 - 6 - 36 3xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
16 12 - 12 - 4 - 3S 1xBI2A+2xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
Note
†1 Selection of a BIO code depends on a size of the IED case.

- 848 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
[Optional accessories]
[Label sheet]
Accessory names Quantity per order Codes
Pocket sheet label for LEDs(White) 10 EP-211-00
Pocket sheet label for function keys(White) 10 EP-212-00
[Rating jumpers]
Jumpers to change rated current 20 EP-221
[Monitoring plugs]
Plugs for monitoring jacks on the front 4 EP-222
[Rear terminal remover]

Hook tool for detaching rear terminal 1 EP-235
[Engineering tools]
GR-TIEMS 1 license EP-251
PLC-EDITOR 1 license EP-261
[Mounting kits for 19” size rack]

Joint kits for single 1/2 case 1 set EP-204
Joint kits for two 1/2 case 1 set EP-205

- 849 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 7 Technical data

- 850 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Technical data
Analog Inputs
Rated current In 1A
Rated Frequency Either 50Hz or 60Hz (specified when the ordering)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 minutes
6 times rated current for 2 minutes
30 times rated current for 10 seconds
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Burden
Phase current inputs  0.1VA at In = 1A,  0.2VA at In = 5A
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 72.0Vdc)
48/125Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 150.0Vdc)
110/250Vdc (Operative range: 88.0 – 300.0Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply  15%
Power Supply Interruption Withstand Period 110/250Vdc rating : 50ms
(IEC60255-11)
Power consumption  15W (quiescent)
 25W (maximum)
- 851 - GRH200 software: 031

6F2S1958 (0.03)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged
into the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an
external resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption  0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 3 ms
Auxiliary contacts
Make and carry 8A continuously
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 8 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
Measuring input capability

Full scale
Standard current input ≥ 60A (1A rating) or 300A (5A rating)
Sensitive current input ≥ 3A (1A rating) or 15 A (5A rating)
Voltage input ≥ 200V
Sampling rate 48 samples / cycle
Frequency response < 5% deviation over range 16.7Hz to 600Hz

- 852 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 12kg (1/2 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
Function keys
Number 7
Local PC Interface (front port)
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2 meters (less than)
Terminal block structure
VCT Ring type terminal
Wire thickness: 2.5mm2 through 5.5 mm2
Termination: M3.5 ring tongue insulated
BI / BO / PWS Compression plug type terminal

Wire thickness: 1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2 or AWG14
Termination: Stripping length = 10 mm (typical)
Ring type terminal
Wire thickness: 1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2 or AWG14
Termination: M3.5 ring tongue insulated
VCT BI / BO / PWS
VC* T* T*
1
2
3
4 1 2
5
6 3 4
7 5 6
8
9 7 8
10
11 9 10
12
11 12
13
14 13 14
15
16 15 16
17
18 17 18
19
20 21 22
23 24
25 26
21
22 27 28
23
24 29 30
25 31 32
26
27 33 34
28
29 35 36
30
37 38
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Ring type Compression plug type Ring type

terminal terminal terminal

- 853 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Communication for Network (rear port)

100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T For IEC 61850-8-1 and GR-TIEMS over TCP/IP
Connector type RJ-45
Cable type CAT5e STP cable
-enhanced category 5 with Shielded Twisted Pair cable
100BASE-FX For IEC 61850-8-1 over TCP/IP
Cable type Multimode fiber, 50/125 or 62.5/125μm
Connector type SC duplex connector
Wave length 1300nm
1000BASE-LX For IEC 61850-8-1 over TCP/IP
Cable type Single-mode fiber
Connector type LC duplex connector
Wave length 1310nm
Serial communication (rear port)

RS485 For IEC 60870-5-103
Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable
Connector type Push-in spring terminal (PCB connector)
Fiber optic For IEC 60870-5-103

Cable type Multimode fiber, 50/120μm or 62.5/125μm
Connector type ST connector
Wave length 820nm

- 854 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range:–25C to +55C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit:–25C to +70C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC 60068-2-
14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per
IEC 60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals
and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent
circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-27 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50s, 0.5J between all
terminals and between all terminals and
earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:
60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:
1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage
and discharged into the input terminals with
an external resistance

- 855 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Environmental performance
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4
Electromagnetic GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850 and
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
25MHz to 1GHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential
IEC 61000-4-5 modes:
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes†
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
†For differential mode, ‘CMP_NUM’ setting utilized.

- 856 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
European Commission Directives
European Commission Directives

2014/30/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 60255-26:2013
2014/35/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Low Voltage Directive for electrical safety is
demonstrated according EN 60255-27:2014.

- 857 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Functional data (PROTECTION)

High-impedance current differential protection
DIF (current differential) threshold: 0.020 - 2.000A in 0.001A steps (1A rating)
REF (restrict earth fault overcurrent): 0.020 - 2.000A in 0.001A steps (1A rating)
Accuracy
Overcurrent Pick-ups: Setting value  5%
Metering Function
AC current Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
DC current Accuracy  0.5% (within the range)

- 858 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Cabling
The table below shows the recommended cables in the cross-section and rated-voltage for the
connection with the transformer module (VCT), the binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and
the power supply module (PWS). Rated-voltage required for the cable is 600Vac.
Table Cables for the connection with module
Connecting for Wire termination Wire thickness
Compression plug type terminal

Stripping length = 10 mm (typical) 1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2
BI / BO / PWS
Ring type terminal or AWG14
M3.5 ring tongue insulated
2.5 mm2 through 5.5
VCT M3.5 ring tongue insulated
mm2
Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue insulated 5.5 mm2 or larger
Fuses
The table below shows the required fuse in the PWS. DO NOT change the fuse by the user.
The fuse is complies with IEC60127-2 Sheet 5.
Table Fuse specification in PWS
Specification Description
Rated current 3.15A
Rated voltage 500Vac & 400Vdc
Cutoff velocity Type “T”
Manufacture Littelfuse, Inc.
Type 04773.15XP
Safety and environment

The table below shows the safety category of the insulation resistance and the environment.
Table Safety and environment requirement
Safety requirement Definition in IEC Specification
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 More than 100 M-ohm at 500V d.c.
Protection bonding continuity test IEC 60255-27 Test current: 10 A a.c.
Resistance: less than 0.1 ohm
Protective bonding resistance test IEC 60255-27 Resistance: less than 0.2 ohm
Creepage distance and clearance IEC 60255-27 Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III
Protective class IEC 60255-27 Class I

- 859 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 7 Manufacture setting

- 860 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Front LED (Protection and control models)

No Name Color Content
1 IN SERVICE Green Green LED turns on when the IED is running.
2 ERROR Red Red LED turns on when failures are detected in IED.
4 TRIP Red LED turns on when trip command is issued.
6 TEST Yellow LED turns on when the mode is changed to TEST.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

- 861 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 8 Varistor unit

- 862 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
High voltage on the differential circuit will be developed by the excitation of the current
transformer under internal fault conditions. Varistors (non-linear resistors) have to be
connected in parallel to the relay in order that the overvoltage will be limited, accordingly.
1. EB-101 and EB-102

Toshiba has varistor units: EB-101 and EB-102. The user can use those varistor units.
The EB-101 unit is used for single-phase protection. The EB-102 unit is used for three-phase
protection, conversely.
Figure-8.A shows the varistor V-I characteristic used in EB-101 and EB-201. Figure-8.B shows
the internal circuits of them.
2000
1800
1600
1400
Voltage
(V) 1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000

Current (A)
Figure-8.A Varistor V-I characteristic used in EB-101 and EB-201

- 863 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
EB-101 EB-102
2kΩ 2kΩ
TB1- TB2- TB1- TB2-
1 2kΩ 1 1 2kΩ 1
2kΩ 2kΩ
11Ω 11Ω for A phase
Varisor Varisor
2 2 2 2
Earth 8
2kΩ
3 2kΩ 3
2kΩ
11Ω for B phase
Varisor
4 4
2kΩ
5 2kΩ 5
2kΩ
11Ω for C phase
Varisor
6 6
Earth 8
Figure-8.B Internal circuits of EB-101 and EB-201

- 864 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Appendix 9 Notes for the dielectric voltage test

Case structures and DC rated voltages 1-1 1-2 2-1 2-2
Type using compression terminals ✓ ✓
IED case structure
Type using ring terminals ✓ ✓
110-250 Vdc ✓ ✓
DC rated voltage
24-60 Vdc ✓ ✓
Page 866 867 868 869

- 865 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
Dielectric voltage testing shall be carried out after reading the below notices carefully.
Cable connections
1-1. Type using compression terminals and 110-250 Vdc
✓ Type using compression terminals
IED case structure
✓ 110-250 Vdc
DC rated voltage
24-60 Vdc
Figure-9.A illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, two short-wires attached on the PSW shall be carefully handled; follow the below
instructions (1) and (2).
(1) The short-wire between terminal screw No.35 and No.37

 Remove the short-wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test. If the short-wire is not
removed, the IED will be damaged.
 After the test, reconnect the short-wire to the original positons.
(2) The short-wire between terminal screw No.38 and FG

 Never remove the short-wire. If the short-wire is removed, the IED will be damaged.
[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1) (+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG
Figure-9.A Short-wires, around the PWS, for Type using compression terminals and 110-250Vdc

- 866 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
1-2. Type using compression terminals and 24-60 Vdc

✓ Type using compression terminals
IED case structure
110-250 Vdc
DC rated voltage
✓ 24-60 Vdc
Figure-9.B illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, three short-wires attached on the PSW shall be carefully handled; follow the below
instructions (1), (2) and (3).



[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1) (+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
(3)
FG
Figure-9.B A Short-wires, around the PWS, for Type using compression terminals and 24-60Vdc

- 867 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2-1. Type using ring terminals and 110-250 Vdc

IED case structure
✓ Type using ring terminals
✓ 110-250 Vdc
DC rated voltage
24-60 Vdc
Figure-9.C illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, a short-wire and a short-bar attached on the PSW shall be carefully handled; follow
the below instructions (1) and (2).

(2) The Short-bar between terminal screw No.37 and FG

 Never remove the short-bar. If the short-bar is removed, the IED will be damaged.
[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1)
(+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG
Figure-9.C A short-wire and a short-bar, around the PWS, for Type using ring terminals and 110-250Vdc

- 868 -
6F2S1958 (0.03)
2-2. Type using ring terminals and 24-60 Vdc

IED case structure
✓ Type using ring terminals
110-250 Vdc
DC rated voltage
✓ 24-60 Vdc
Figure-9.D illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, short-wires and a short-bar attached on the PSW shall be carefully handled; follow
the below instructions (1), (2) and (3).

(2) The Short-bar between terminal screw No.37 and FG

 Never remove the short-bar. If the short-bar is removed, the IED will be damaged.

[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1)
(+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
(3) FG
Figure-9.D Short-wires and a short-bar, around the PWS, for Type using ring terminals and 24-60Vdc

- 869 -
Revision-up Records
Rev. and Section Approved Prepared
Change place and contents Checked by
Date (page) by by
0.00 -- First issue Y. Sonobe G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
May 11 2020 May 8 Apr. 27 Mar. 23
Chap. 11.3 Revised the information about Quality_Validity in H. Amoh K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Figure 11.3-29 July. 8 June. 25 June. 25
0.01 Appendix 6 Corrected and revised about the 100Base-FX and other H. Amoh X. Tang T. Kaneko
Aug. 19,2020 comm. data in Appendix Technical data June 18 June 18 June 16
Appendix 6 Added the CE marking about 2014/30/EU and K. Kobayashi G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
2014/35/EU directives Aug. 17 Aug. 17 Aug. 14
Chap. 9.8 Refined the signal list used for TIEMS, fault recording H. Amoh K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
and IEC61850 in Monitoring function Sep. 17 Sep. 9 Sep. 9
0.02 Chap. 10.2 Corrected a typo about the error level of HMI H. Amoh X. Tang T. Kaneko
Oct. 30,2020 automatic supervision function (Table 10.2-1) Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct. 30
Chap. 11.3 Added the information about the IEC61850 CID file for H. Amoh M. Okai T. Kaneko
the Goose and LAN settings Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct. 30
Chap. 5.4.2 Added the information about threshold settings when H. Amoh Y. Sonobe T. Kaneko
24-60Vdc PWS is used in BI1A module Feb. 10 Feb. 8 Feb. 5
Chap. 5.5 Added the information about 24-60Vdc setting and H. Amoh Y. Sonobe T. Kaneko
0.03 jumpers in Table 5.5-2 in PWS Feb. 10 Feb. 8 Feb. 5
Feb 28,2021 Chap. 5.5 Revised the PWS information about Fail contacts and H. Amoh Y. Sonobe T. Kaneko
AC power supply Feb. 10 Feb. 8 Feb. 5
Appendix 9 Added the information about dielectric voltage test H. Amoh Y. Sonobe T. Kaneko
when 24-60Vdc PWS is used in the IED. Feb. 10 Feb. 8 Feb. 5
Archive: G2 manuals' word files (all) 20210301rev3

Instruction Manual High-Impedance Differential Protection IED GR200 Series (GRH200)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual High-Impedance Differential Protection IED GR200 Series (GRH200)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6F2S1958 (Rev. 0.

High-impedance differential protection IED

GR200 series (GRH200)

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

Equipment installation and operation

Protective conductor terminal

Caution, risk of electric shock

Liability, copyright and others

Local, remote and PLC control................................................................................................... 59

4.2.3 Cancel logic for SBO mode ................................................................................................ 170

4.7.2 Preparation of the operation ............................................................................................. 368

5.4.9 Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits ...................................................................... 454

8.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder ............................................................................................... 508

10.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error) ................................................................... 556

11.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 619

Caution for storage ................................................................................................................... 764

GRH200 software: 031

Configuration of high impedance relay

For more information about the varistor unit, refer Appendix 8.

(a) Three phase protection for busbar protection

Varistor unit Idc

High impedance relay

(b) Single phase protection for restricted earth fault protection

GRH200 software: 031

Control and monitoring application

[L/R] Remote/Local control function

[SPOS] Single position device function

[LRST] LED reset function

[SOFTSW] Software switch function

[MDCTRL] Mode control function

[GCNT] General pulse counter function

[ILK] Software interlock function

GRH200 software: 031

Monitoring and recording functions

Fault record function:

Event record function:

Disturbance record function:

GRH200 software: 031

Module circuits and others:

GRH200 software: 031

Symbols used in logical diagrams

(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number

Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

An alternative point (discussed in Chapter PLC function) is provided in place of the

GRH200 software: 031

(ii) Timer symbol

XXX - YYY Output

GRH200 software: 031

(iii) Logic symbol

GRH200 software: 031

(iv) Flip-flop symbol

(v) Scheme switch

GRH200 software: 031

BCU Bay Control Unit

BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit

BI Binary Input module or circuit

BO Binary Output module or circuit

BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit

CPU Signal processing and communication module

EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation

GPS Global Positioning System

GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software